Audio

089: How To Make $47,000 In 90 Days Selling On Amazon FBA With Scott Voelker

How To Make $47,000 In 90 Days Selling On Amazon FBA With Scott Voelker

Today I’m happy to have Scott Voelker on the show. Scott has been an entrepreneur for a quite a while now. He runs a successful portrait studio. And he also teaches course on online photography.

But the reason I brought him on the show is to talk about his Amazon success. Scott runs the popular podcast The Amazing Seller and the website of the same name.

And his claim to fame is that he went from 0 to 47K in 90 days selling on Amazon. Today we’re going to to break down his process of finding products to sell on Amazon, and his process for making money on the platform. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How many products Scott has listed and how many it took to hit 47K
  • Scott’s criteria for selecting a product to sell
  • Where Scott sources his products from.
  • How Scott finds vendors
  • His scripts for initial contact
  • The price points that Scott likes to see for selling products
  • The time frame from inception to getting your product on Amazon
  • How much money you need to start
  • What profit margins Scott likes to see
  • How to you get your first reviews on Amazon
  • How to run Amazon PPC campaigns
  • What tools Scott uses to sell online

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support, via chat, phone and email, one click WordPress install, so you can literally install word press blog in a matter of minutes. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services. And the best part is I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to give a quick shout out to my other sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. Now as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. And everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you just have to populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m happy to have Scott Voelker on the show. Now Scott has been an entrepreneur for quite a while now, and he actually runs a successful portrait studio with his wife, and he also teaches many courses on online photography. But the reason that I actually wanted him on the show today is to talk about his Amazon success. Scott runs the popular podcast, The Amazing Seller and the website with the same name, and his claim to fame is that he went from zero to 47k in 90 days selling on Amazon.

So today what we are going to do is we are going to break down his process of finding products to sell on Amazon, and his process for just making money on the platform. With that, welcome to the show Scott. How are you doing today man?

Scott: I’m doing great man. Thanks a lot for having me. I’m a big fun of your show too. So yeah, I’m really, really excited to be here and hopefully add some value to your audience.

Steve: Awesome yeah, I’m sure you will be able to do that. Let’s start off with some of the background stuff for a start. How did you go from selling photography courses in this portrait studio to actually doing physical products on Amazon?

Scott: Yeah, sure. I will give you the quick version on that. Just a little bit of a correction there, we are not currently running a photography studio. We started with that, about eight years we did that full time, my wife and I. And the same idea, I was working full time as a contractor, I was building homes and doing remodels and stuff. I was just never home with my kids, I had two little kids at the time. We just wanted to do something else.

We started thinking about how we could do this online thing, found people selling things online. This is going back like, oh gosh, seven years ago, and then found people are selling information online. So I said you know what, let me give it a shot. I’ll just teach people how we got started. We built a six figure local brick and motor business, and hey I’m sure there’s other people out there that could use the help. Sure enough built a little list, and launched my first product and within that first product– I think my first launch which blew me away was like 12 grand in like a day and a half. So it was like– now is going back six and a half years ago.

Steve: This your info product.

Scott: Yeah that was the info product from just teaching what I– I didn’t figure myself as an expert, just kind of retracing the steps of what we did as a husband and wife team building a photography studio. So it kind of just got me involved into this type of online space, but I’ve always been an entrepreneur and again that’s what I mean. We built our business and then I kind of turned around and taught people how I did the business. And I still run– we have a new portrait base is what our website is called, and it’s really just helpful lessons for newbies that are looking to do more or less like children’s portrait photography. And now we really teach a lot about—I teach a lot more about the editing with Photoshop and stuff like that. I’m still involved in that. That still runs today.

And then from there just looking to kind of expand ourselves. Obviously you are always looking for new revenue streams as being an entrepreneur; you don’t want to rely on one source. So I’ve always been dabbling in all different things as an entrepreneur, see the opportunities and stuff. And Amazon was the closest thing to a digital product because the FBA model, I really loved because I didn’t have to fill it. So with my background in marketing and internet space and everything I figured you know what, I can figure out all the moving pieces. Let’s just kind of give it a shot and see what happens. And we did and here we are going on– just over eight months now, and yeah it’s just been just a crazy, crazy ride.

Steve: Just curious, in those eight months, you mentioned that you hit 47K in the first 90 days which is three months. Where are you at now?

Scott: I don’t have the exact number for you, but I can tell you that I’m averaging a month about $35,000 in revenue.

Steve: Nice. And what are your margins on that revenue?

Scott: Right around the 40% mark.

Steve: Okay cool. That’s sounds really good.

Scott: I’m looking to get that to about 50, we can talk about the strategy too, but usually in the beginning, you are a little bit lower just because you want to get the ball rolling and the momentum started, and slowly start increasing. And in the summer a lot of times your sales are going to be lower in the online space which you may or may not experience as well. But yeah, I’m looking to– those are low margins I think. I think and I’m hoping to get them around 50 to 52%.

Steve: So in generating that 30K or so a month, how many products is that on Amazon that you are selling?

Scott: I started with one product and with that one product; I was still able to get that tool right around 25,000 to 27,000 with just one product. And then since I’ve added right now, if you count just because there’s variations on products as well, which I know you are familiar with that. But I mean, so if you counted the variations of the one product, you are talking that’s seven products.

Steve: Seven products, okay.

Scott: Seven skews.

Steve: Okay, and they are all related meaning like different colors and stuff or?

Scott: Yeah, like sizes, type of thing.

Steve: Okay, and are these products anything to do with photography at all?

Scott: Absolutely not.

Steve: Okay, so completely different niche than you’ve kind of dealt with in the past.

Scott: And I got to be honest, that was part of my thing. I wanted to not rely on that. It was two reasons I did that. I wanted to prove to myself that I could enter into another niche, and I could also not have to rely and depend on that one business model. I also felt like the photographers, no offence to photographers that are listening, but they are just—they don’t spend a lot of money on certain things other than cameras. They are really kind of protective of their money which I was too, don’t get me wrong, but it’s just a different mindset.

So I wanted to go after where there was already buyers, and I felt like Amazon was just like a river of money, because there’s people going there for one reason. They are not going there to search for how to take better pictures; they were looking on how to buy a lens. So I very easily could have went down that road, and I thought about it. I got to be honest because it wouldn’t have been very easy because I have an email list, and I could just start promoting products to my email list and kind of ramp that up, but I didn’t do that. I went down a different road, and it’s proven to be pretty good and it’s also proved to me that I can kind of pivot and go to another direction and do that.

Also I didn’t want to be the fore front of it really. I wanted to kind of do a business that could work without me being involved in it. I could kind of hire it out if I want to, like there are certain things that I will eventually be hiring out, tasks that I do and really I’ll just kind of be like I guess the lender in a sense, and then the business will kind of run itself. That’s really my goal with this business. That’s something that I’m looking to do. It’s not that way right now, but that’s what I’m definitely looking for.

Steve: So in terms of like finding the product then, did you actually choose something that you were kind of interested or you knew a lot about, or did you just kind of go off and pick something pretty random?

Scott: Well, at first I just started looking at products. I just started to kind of go through the whole thing like what could I sell, what could I think that would sell well? And I will tell what I was looking into which I didn’t go down this road is, I was looking at baby products. I was looking at baby products for a couple of different reasons, because I knew that there was a lot of people have babies, and I knew that there was huge market for it. But then in the end I started asking myself, do I really want to be– if I eventually want to do a blog about this, do I want to be just researching that information and doing– I mean I have kids, I have three kids. I have a seven year old daughter, I’ve got a let’s say a 17-year old son, just turned 17 and a 20-year old daughter. So I’ve got them all over the place. But they are not in that stage.

I know people that have babies and I could have did that, but it just wasn’t going to be as easy for me to even just even take pictures. If I wanted to take pictures of my product with a baby, it was going to be harder to find that. So that was another thing. I just felt like, it’s just not aligned with me personally, so I wanted to get into something that’s more or less I was going to use, but also I was going to I guess eventually also always be kind of involved in this market. So that’s kind of why I went down the path I did.

Steve: Okay, so given that, I know like the Amazon– the people who sell on Amazon like to be secretive about their products, because of the intense completion. So I guess we won’t go into detail about your exact products, but what we can talk about is some of the criteria that you used actually to select the product that you are going to sell, right?

Scott: Yeah absolutely.

Steve: Okay, so what did you– so let’s go back to that just very first product first off, what was your research process like?

Scott: The research process and again, it’s a stuff that I tell anyone starting right now. The very first thing was just like, I do like a daily touch list. So everything that I touched, I would just write down like little things. It could be the cake cup, or you are having coffee, a little stainless cake cup thing. It could have been, I’m looking at my stuff right now in front me, like a USB code, a mouse, a mouse pad, any of that. Anything that I touched on a daily basis I would write that stuff down just to get the ideas flowing, and kind of flushing out all the ideas that could be a potential product.

Now that I’ve been through it, I kind of look at things all differently, like anything. I’m listening to conversations, all of that stuff. But really just I guess looking at my own interest and stuff, and then from there knowing that I didn’t want to go into an oversized product. I didn’t want to sell something that was going to be over the certain guidelines that Amazon requires as over size for a few different reasons. Number one it was going to cost me more for inventory. It was going to cost more to get it shipped, and it was going to limit me how many I can have in stock in Amazon at one time. So I believe that their starting point for over size is like only 500 units that you can have it stock.

Steve: That’s correct.

Scott: You can get that usually lifted as long as you start to show you have more volume, but it’s just another whoop to jump through. And then I was going to have to go and have stuff shipped by boat, by sea. It was going to take longer, more customs, all of that stuff. So I have certain criteria which I can share with your audience that I look at right now and I also recommend which is really simple. It’s something that is light weight, something that can usually fit in the shoe box, under two pounds. And usually the length, I believe that the length, the longest point is like 18 inches, but it also goes by circumference and all that stuff. Anyone can kind of Google like you know Amazon, or you can even put something that even showing on it. It’s right on the Amazon website for criteria. It’s real basic. But just something that’s not oversize.

So that’s the thing. My price point, I like to be between $19 and like $45. Now I tell people that and they are like, “Well, Scott I found a product that’s $16.99, is that still good?” It’s still good if the margins are good, you know what I mean. So it’s just a guideline. I look for something between $19 and $45. I definitely make sure that I can get my margins at around 45 to 55 percent even if I can’t start there; I want to know that I can at least get there. So it’s like kind of a premium product.

Steve: Are you talking about post fees or pre fees.

Scott: Post. Like all said and done, I want to be able to walk away with– and I always, I use this– I’ve got like this ten by ten by 1 strategy that I call, it’s like 10 units a day sold by ten dollars profit each and then one product. That’s 100 bucks a day. That’s kind of my simple little formula for people. It’s like if you can just do that, it’s going to be easier than try to find those products that are selling 50 to 100 units a day. It’s a little bit like the low hanging fruit. But that’s kind of how I look at it. After FBA fees and all that stuff, and your shipping and all of that everything, you are left with ten dollars in your pocket. That’s what I like to chew for.

Steve: That means that when you are sourcing the product, you want margins somewhere in the order of 70% it sounds like?

Scott: Yeah roughly, roughly. Yeah, I mean because I’ve been doing this a little while now. So it’s like for example, if you sell something for $20 on Amazon, usually the FBA fees are going to be right around $5.25 cents. $5.50 somewhere there and that’s for everything ship, that’s from picking, packing, shipping, everything. And then if I can get a product for me, if I can get it for like $4.50 well I’m right in that realm of where I want to be. So that’s kind of like my rough numbers.

But then a lot of people will kind of start low, like they’ll find a product that is $14.99 and try to get the margins to work. It’s okay as long as you think that you can still get your margin, but it’s going to be harder to do that. So anyway that’s the pricing that I go with, that I definitely look for. I definitely look for something that I know that I can ship via air. I don’t want to have to ship things by boat or sea, and a lot of times that has to do with your size limitations and it just cuts down on any other hoops and things you have to jump through. So I don’t want to have to go through freight forward right now. I want to be able to go right straight from their loading dock to my doorstep.

Steve: Interesting, so that’s implies that your order sizes are generally under a couple of hundred pounds? Is that accurate?

Scott: No that’s not accurate at all. I literally– I just had an order shipped to me, about 2,000 units. And those 2,000 units each box, let’s say there were 20 boxes and each box you are talking roughly probably like 35 pounds.

Steve: Okay, wow so you did all that by air?

Scott: All that by air and here’s the cool thing. Literally three days, DHL air.

Steve: Sure.

Scott: Now people are going to be like, “Well, Scott I’m paying, $3 for the product and they are charging me two bucks to ship it.” I don’t care because at this point, I just want my margins to be where my margins are going to be. That’s a cost I could reduce down the line. But right now it’s a matter of speed of implementation. Get it. Get it done, get it in there. Let’s see if it’s going to work. If it’s going to work, then we can start reducing those costs.

A lot of people will try to get all the cost down at the beginning, and then it takes so much longer. It’s going to take you instead of it taking you– well it takes using 25 or 30 days for them to manufacturer, and if you go by boat, it’s going to take you at least three weeks in general. And then to get it into FBA, you are talking at a time almost 60 days when I can get it here in like 35 days in Amazon. It’s like I’m 20 days ahead of you.

Steve: Yeah, it just takes a little bit more planning I guess and more upfront money if you want to go by boat.

Scott: Absolutely.

Steve: Hey, just curious on your price points, I’m just curious, did you choose somewhat lower price points so you that could actually give stuff away for reviews without taking a huge loss, or what was the reasoning and rationale for–?

Scott: Yeah, I think cost has a lot to do with it because again like you just said, I mean, we can talk about that too once we go further in to this. But yeah I mean, if you have something that cost let’s say five bucks, you know, and you want to order a 1,000 units, that’s five grand. You know what I mean, that’s a good chunk of money for people just starting. It’s a lot harder to do that than just start blogging and creating a niche site and trying to create information products, right? So it’s definitely harder.

So in the beginning, you do want to have enough inventory to what you can give away. Let’s just say 100 units. And I say give away. You want to start giving the review process in place, so you are going to basically give those away for almost free. Let’s say you give them away for a $1.95, but you still have to pay the FBA fees on top of that, right? So really, if you are giving away 100 units, that’s $500 and then you’ve got FBA fees with another 500 bucks, there’s a $1000 that you are giving away without even making a penny. But now if you had a product that was, your cost $20, well, you do the math, I mean we just– it’s a little out of hand there at the beginning. So it’s going to make it harder to really ramp things up.

So I do that, because it makes it easier, and also it’s just easier on shipping and all of the numbers just seem to work better. Now I do have someone that actually followed my podcast and everything and went through everything, and he was actually in the process before he even started listening and he started with an oversize product. If anyone is listening and they want less competition, go with an oversize product. It’s that simple because you will have less competition.

What he did is he went on AliExpress and he bought one unit. He had it shipped because on AliExpress you can do one unit, and it’s going to be more expensive, but he wanted to just test the market. He had it shipped, he sold it. He doubled his money. He bought four more, had them shipped, did the same thing, very slow process, but now he’s ordering pallets of about 140 by boat. So he just scaled himself up, but he couldn’t give away units to get his reviews, but he was still able to do it because he had a unique product that he didn’t really have to do really a lot of heavily promoting on anyway. I think he had like one or two reviews on it from family and friends, and he was able to still sell out every time that he got a new batch in.

Steve: Okay, that’s a great story. So let’s continue down the lines of finding the products. So you covered your price points, you covered your interests, what are some of the other things that you do?

Scott: So as far as looking at the numbers, we want a prove. I think the beautiful thing with going on Amazon is we know that there’s buyers there. We absolutely know that. And we also know that they are giving us numbers by looking at the best seller rank or the BSR as everyone kind of knows it does, and that’s kind of like a ranking that they give them. Every category is different, so if you’re looking in the home and kitchen, or if you’re looking in let’s just say you know lawn and garden, they’re totally different.

Like in a home and kitchen you might have a 10,000 BSR and you’re still selling 15 or 20 a day, but if you’re selling in lawn and garden and you’ve got 10 or 1000 that might only be, gosh one a day. Maybe four a day I don’t know the exact number, but I am just saying each category has their different velocity of sales in the amount of sales. Because of that you kind of have to have a guide to go by, so I just kind of knew that if I could find something that was between like 1000 and 5000 somewhere in that in the BSR no matter what category I went into, then I pretty much knew that they were selling at the time. I was looking at 20 sales a day; I’ve since made that to now where I am good with 10 units a day.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Because I just know that the more products you have in there that are related that 10 per day that you shoot for initially will probably go to either 15 or 20 a day, just by cross promoting each other inside of that product. I look for that you know as far as the BSR, so I will look at that, I’ll create a spread sheet and go ahead and start just looking at the numbers of the BSRs and I’ll be tracking them, and there’s a free tool you may already know this you probably do it’s called kemokemokemo.com. If you go to that it will give you the history of the BSR, it will give you the history of the pricings.

You just take the acing of that particular listing, punch in kemokemokemo and it gives you all of this data right at your finger tips, which is beautiful because now you can see the growth of it, you can see the if they’ve run promotions, because you see spikes in there’s and you can see their sales and kind of their sales you can see their pricing which kind of lets you know what their sales were and kind of what they’ve done, and kind of how steady it’s been.

I kind of looked at all of those things I looked at the reviews and I guess I should point out like if I am looking at and I always use garlic press as one source. Let’s just say we’re looking at a stainless steel garlic press, I would go to Amazon, I would type that in and I would look at the top 10 listings okay, and there 16 that usually come up on your home page depending on what browser, or what if you’re looking at a phone or whatever, but usually 16 results come up. I’ll look at the top 10 and I’ll start to look at those numbers, I’ll start to look at their reviews I like to see reviews between 500 and zero, somewhere in that range.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: If I did see the number one spot had 1000 reviews, but then the second one had 500 and the third one had 300 and so on, and it kind of kept going down, then I would still be okay because I wouldn’t necessarily think that I had to beat the number one, I just want to find myself somewhere in you know the top you know whatever 10 somewhere. Then to also– another really key point, here’s a mistake I made on my second product which I say is a failure, and it’s still selling five a day, and it’s not even really in the season yet for this particular product, but the depth of the market. And when you looking at products you want to make sure that the BSR is going to be steady throughout those 10 or at least those seven because then it shows you that you don’t have to be number one or number to at least get your 10 or 20 sales a day. Does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah absolutely, so if you see like the top spot like has 1000 and the rest of the guys don’t have any reviews then, that’s a bad idea right?

Scott: Yeah exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: If you’re looking at the reviews that’s the one element, then if you’re looking at the BSR which is the best seller rank, and that’s the other kind of criteria. So you wanted those two, and then again you know when you’re looking at those two you’re going to also you know now be able to look at their listings. Then I’ll look at the listing, and I’ll see if there’s any holes in their listings, I’ll see if it’s optimized well or not well. Then I can say they’ve only got one picture and it’s really bad, but they’re still selling 10 units a day-ish, right? Okay cool I can go ahead and fix this list on my listing, and I’ll be able to out sell this person. I’ll look at the…

Steve: Can we go into more depth on that, so what an example of a bad listing outside of like bad photography for example?

Scott: Outside of that I will say like their title doesn’t have really any key words in it, it’s really just very-very vague and basic or maybe it’s a brand name that they’re putting in there. Like they’re a private labeler, but they’re putting in like their brand name which I think is a big mistake because no one really cares about your brand, they care about what it is. Stainless steel garlic press would be the one that I would want in there as my title, and then you could probably put you know other ones in there. Depending on what category you are in, you get allowed up to 100 characters in some categories up to 200 characters.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I know recently I think you had a guest on Karen.

Steve: Yes.

Scott: Passing, I just actually interviewed her for my show, she won’t be on for another couple of weeks, but she did a really-really good job on your show, and she and so if anyone is listening definitely go back and listen to that show, because she did a really good job of breaking down a listing, and what makes a really good listing. It’s, to me it’s really simple, its images, its title, its bullets, its description. All of those elements inside of a listing makes it optimized. If you’re looking at a listing and you see number one the images aren’t good, that’s the first thing. Second thing the title is not optimized that’s the other thing I would look at. The bullets, if they’ve got like one bullet flow in there, right? I know that I could fix that.

Then I’ll also look at the description and see if it’s just like a sentence or two, and I know that I can totally do better than that. A couple of other things that I look at is like for example if they have other products, but they’re not using that promotional tab inside of their listing. Sometimes if you scroll down you’ll see in the promotions thing it says that you know maybe like buy one you know get $5 off your next or something, or maybe this other product that you have. You’re able to run these external promotions that feed inside of your own listing. That’s why I like to tell people when you’re starting out definitely pick a product that you think you can build a small product line around, because you want to have one customer that can buy four of your other products.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Scott: Yeah and so by feeding in that promotion it basically allows you to cross promote your own products without even relying on Amazon to do the thing at the bottom there that it says you know frequently bought together. That’s Amazon’s thing that they do which they do it brilliantly, but you’re also able to also feed in. If you want to say if you buy this one product and then you can say the other product over here you can get for you know $5 off, or something or here you know buy two of this one product. Maybe you have a product that you can buy and people want to buy more than one. Buy three and get you know $5 off or 10% off or whatever. That will populate inside of your listing and then you can say the same thing for your second listing. Let’s say you have another listing with another product, you can do the same thing feeding back into that other one, so now you’re really piggy backing on both of those products.

Steve: Interesting so do you, are you doing that with all of your products right now?

Scott: Well I am doing…

Steve: Since they’re related?

Scott: Yeah I am doing it with let’s see I am doing it with two products, but one of them has three variations, so you know I guess you would look at it like technically like almost like five listings kind of like going back and forth, which we can talk about variations too in a minute because I really-really, I am really loving them, and I am loving bundles, because it just allows you to increase the cart of that person with your own products, but it also gives you the ability to reach people on different price points.

Steve: Absolutely.

Scott: We can dive into that, I don’t know if you want to that now, or you want to wait till we get down that road?

Steve: Let’s see actually I want to talk a little bit about sourcing a little bit, because it sounds like your sourcing strategy is completely different from mine. We do everything by boat. When you’re approaching vendors do you use Alibaba, or which services do you use to actually find the vendors?

Scott: Okay so I went down the same road that a lot of people have when they first get into this and they go to Alibaba or AliExpress which I think is a great place to start, but you’ve got to remember that a lot of those people on there are agents. There’re basically your sourcing agents, for maybe that particular…

Steve: I thought you said Asians for example…

Scott: No, it’s…

Steve: It’s okay.

Scott: Agents. No and basically a lot of people will come to me and go Scott how do I find you know a sourcing agent? And I am like well number one you got to understand that on Alibaba that’s pretty much what they are, and if you ask them they’ll pretty much come out and tell you that, but they won’t tell you that because they want you to know that they are working for that company. Now some of them are working directly for that company, but as like a sales man, really it’s kind of what they are.

What I’ve found is that by going through the process of kind of like screening these people, okay, and by telling them exactly what you want and what you need for your business, then you’re almost like putting them through an interview process. That’s kind of what I did, and since I’ve done that I really don’t have to go to Alibaba anymore to find products in this line, I just go to my agent and say, hey I am looking to roll out this new product, do you offer this or can you find it for me?

Whether they can do it or not they are going to go ahead and go through their channels to find it. They may charge me a little bit more for that you know 10 cents a unit or something, and then they’re going to do the work for me, so that’s really how I’ve done it so right now I don’t necessarily go to Alibaba to find my next product. I really go through my agent now and I ask her you know if she can find it for me and she has.

The other– here’s a little tip for people, once you do find that one person that you can trust, and I would suggest also having a backup, I would always suggest that so that way therefore if one didn’t work out, the other one you can kind of piggy back off of, or you could also kind of use as leverage. You can also say to them, hey could you send me over a catalogue and let me see some of your other things that you produce, and now you might be able to add stuff right through that catalogue that you didn’t even know was there, because it might not be listed on Alibaba.

Steve: That’s interesting. Usually the people I deal with are very hesitant to send out a catalogue.

Scott: No, I’ve got numerous ones from any of my– and well any of my, I’ve only had like three.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I mean so out of all those I have asked all three of them from separate companies and they sent me one right over. Not in the mail, they’ll sent me a digital catalogue, and I go through it and I kind of see, and I’ll get ideas and go well, maybe I could add that to it or maybe I could take two of these products and put them together and make like kit or something. So yeah, it’s a good way to get ideas, and if anyone has the opportunity to go to the Canton fair, I would definitely do that. I had not done that, I’ve got a really good friend of mine who just came back from spending a month there.

And because I have met this gentleman and he has become a friend of mine he brought me back like, oh gosh 200 catalogues sent them to me. So I have agents that are literally not on Alibaba that I can really reach out to and say, hey can we do business. So that would be another way if you want to go down that path. But in the beginning Alibaba is a great way just to kind of to get your feet wet, and also I think to screen agents that you could possibly have as your own.

Steve: Hey, everyone I just want to take a quick moment to thank Famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now Famebit is the number market place for YouTube influencer marketing with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming pets and more. Now videos start as low as $50, and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guest Emmanuel Eleyae used Famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywifequit@famebit.com, you will automatically get $10 off.

So go to Famebit.com right now, and get famous You Tubers to promote your products, now back to the show.
So these items that are in these catalogues are they like stock items, or do they produce them? So just to get an idea what are some of the minimal requirements for those catalogue items?

Scott: Oh gosh, I have done I mean even just in small runs 100, 250 — yeah, I mean not that much. And a lot of people will go on Alibaba, they’ll get scared they’ll see 3000 minimum order. But if you ask a lot of times they’ll do with 250, they’ll do 500 or whatever. You just got to — and I have kind of written an email that I kind of give it out as to my email list, but it’s basically just the question that I have asked that I went back and forth, and kind of like condensed them. But a lot of times its just like we are looking to add this product to our business, we want to be able to make sure that your company is going to be able to fulfill everything, I know your minimum is 3000, would you be willing to do a test run of 500. And I haven’t heard really anybody say no, so you just ask.

Steve: Yeah, well, once you ask for their bank accounts so you can wire the money or what not, they usually don’t complain, because at least in my experience.

Scott: And you know what you bring up a good point there, because you just mentioned wiring money and I haven’t done that, I got to be honest. What I have done is I have used their escrow service within Alibaba. But a lot of people are nervous about wire transfers, and I don’t blame them there’s been a lot of stuff out there that has happened. Maybe you could help me and share with your audience too, like what do you do that’s going to help you protect you from doing a wire transfer other than trusting that agent?

Steve: I have never been ripped off, and we’ve worked with a bunch of vendors over the years. I mean you won’t get like I’ll write we are ripped off, they might send you stuff that isn’t as high quality, but if you’ve done your due diligence and done samples and stuff, it’s generally okay. But I have no comments about wiring money at all.

Scott: Okay, well, that’s great to hear, because like I said I mean just recently in my Facebook group, I just had someone that they had a bait to do and they think they lost like — they took them for like 2500 bucks.

Steve: Really?

Scott: Yes, so I mean I don’t hear of it often, but I do hear of it happening, so I guess that’s why it happens. So I mean, but let me just understand this, so if you did wire them 2500, and they didn’t deliver the product you are pretty much out that money, right?

Steve: You are pretty much out that money, but usually we don’t do that unless we’ve had a conversation with them like voice, or we actually even met them in person. And we find a lot of our vendors from the Canton fair, and so if they are there they are pretty legit, they are not going to — yes, so I guess — if I just found some random person in Alibaba, didn’t do any due diligence, I probably would be a little hesitant to wire the money.

Scott: Yeah, okay.

Steve: Or I would just start with a very small order and wire the money and…

Scott: Test it.

Steve: In which case — yeah, if they took my money fine.

Scott: Okay, got you yeah, I guess that’s definitely something that I’ll definitely be playing with in the future, because I’m sure that I will always get someone that will do escrow. But right now I have got an escrow set up within Alibaba that I have been using.

Steve: Yeah, that’s perfectly fine too.

Scott: I love that because I mean literally they send the product, and or I pay 30% down to get the product started, and then that money doesn’t get released even until the product is here and I hit confirm. So literally that money is held in escrow until I’m satisfied. It costs a little bit more, and they actually approached me and ask me if would start wiring and I said no, just because I want to see if I could still get them to escrow and they just said that there was a fee that they were paying, so I said what if I pay the fee for you?

And it was only like 250 bucks, and I’m like that’s insurance for me. So I have done it, but I’m actually kind of leaning out towards that — I may just go ahead and start wiring because it will save me 250. But also I trust them, I have done business with them now for well going on just about eight months and I haven’t been burnt. So I think it might be time.

Steve: And after a while actually these days we don’t even need to wire them any money to start the production run, they’ll just do it. And sometimes they’ll even send us products without us paying, and we’ll just pay later, and it goes both ways actually so…

Scott: That’s good to know, great.

Steve: Yeah, so — see where did we stop off? Okay, so the first approach, so you are always looking at the order like a couple of hundred units?

Scott: Yeah, well, actually if I’m starting out yeah, I would say I try — if I’m starting out I’m happy with the sample, I usually would start with 500.

Steve: 500 units, okay.

Scott: That gives me 100 to do as a giveaway as a giveaway really like a dollar ninety five. And then from there I have got 400 units to kind of start pushing pay per click and stuff like that. And then once I see that it’s starting to take, then I can go ahead and do a reorder or I might be doing a reorder when I get it, it just depends. But yeah, I mean like on this fourth product that I launched I basically did that and little bit different when you got variations involved, because now you’ve got like — even though it’s a one product if you’ve got variations you are talking maybe 100 of each variation, and you could be 500 and just have a 100 each.

Steve: Right.

Scott: So it makes it a little bit harder, that’s why anyone starting I always tell people, I would start with one product, and if you wanted to go down that route where you had like different skews for that same product maybe do some bundles, maybe do like a one pack, a three pack and a five pack.

Steve: Okay you know that makes total sense, so how much would you recommend that someone needs to start doing this?

Scott: Well, my — one gentleman that I interviewed [inaudible 00:37:04] he actually started with like 150 bucks. So me personally I would like to say like probably between $2,000 and $3,000. That would be like to me like a good amount, but yet not enough that’s going to really allow you to really ramp up first, but it’s going to get you ramped up faster than just starting with a couple of 100 bucks.

Steve: Absolutely yeah.

Scott: So I would say between 2,000, 3,000 if you could do 5,000 that’s even better. I started; I think my first order was like for like 5500 bucks. And it was funny, because when I was first ordering it my wife and I were talking about it, and she is like — I’m like I’m just going to order 500, and well I’m just not sure, and she is like if you are going to do it just jump in, and I’m like, okay let’s do it. So…

Steve: That’s a good wife.

Scott: Yeah, she actually pushed me to do it, so wended up spending it, and now I can thank her for that because we are definitely doing pretty well with it.

Steve: So that person that you interviewed he was able to order in such small quantities because there was an oversize — oh no he is AliExpress…

Scott: It’s AliExpress and anyone who doesn’t know AliExpress is like kind of like just express check out, I mean it’s like you can literally…

Steve: It’s like liquidation yeah.

Scott: Yeah, you can literally go there and you can buy one unit, ten units and literally everything is done, you don’t have to worry about wiring money, it’s like escrow in a sense. And you basically get your product in either a few days or a few weeks depending on what kind of shipping you are taking. But usually you can do DHL three day express on that. So literally you can have a product idea, grab that, have it up in a couple of weeks.

Steve: Yeah, so okay, so we got our 500 units, what’s the process to get them on Amazon and what’s your kind of process for introducing a new item?

Scott: Yeah, sure the process is when I get my sample I’m happy, I order the 500 units I’m not done, now I’m going to be building the listing. I’m going to create the listing; I’m going to take my samples, if they are good samples that I can actually take photos of I’ll try to get my base photos done, at least to get the listing created. And then I’ll just build up a listing to be kind of like a shell so it’s ready and fulfilled by Amazon. And when it’s fulfilled by Amazon it won’t go live until you actually have inventory in there.

So you can do this all behind the scenes, I’m obviously going to have UPC code to create a listing; you don’t technically need the UPC code on your packaging, because all you need is their code which is the FNS queue number, but the UPC you just need that to create the listing. So basically that’s what I would be doing in the process there, and also be — if it was my first product and I wasn’t doing this yet, I would be building a list of people that I could potentially give this too as for an honest review. And what I did is…

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about that.

Scott: Yeah, I built– I mean my first thing was I just built a list of — I just wrote down a list of all of my friends and family that I could think of. That I could either hand a product to, or I could have them go and I give them a coupon code, and they can get it for a dollar or a dollar and 95. And I just wanted– and I want people to — because I’m sure you’ll get this and I have gotten this before, people are like yeah, but doesn’t Amazon frown upon family and friends. They don’t frown upon it, they just — they want it to be an honest review, but they might not give you a verified review if they didn’t go through the process. Or they won’t give you one if they didn’t go through, and buy it through a coupon code.

But here is the thing, if you have a family member or a friend that you’ve done business with in the past, say business, if you’ve sent them a gift, then you are connected. And when that’s the case now that person can’t leave you a review, they can try, but it’s not going to take, it’s not going to stick, you are not going to get banned because someone tried to leave a review which was your family member, they are just not going to allow you to do it.

So I just want to be clear on that, so really my first my very first thing that I want to do is get like five to ten reviews. That’s my first thing, and I don’t care if they are verified, I don’t care if they are unverified, I just want the base review, so when you look at my listing, you see stars, right? I don’t want to just say be the first to rate this product. So it’s really just social proof, that’s all I want it for.

And then the minute that that is there, that’s ready I can turn on Amazon pay per click, which I think is the most underutilized traffic that anyone is — that anyone has access to that should be using. So that’s — I would turn that on like immediately, and I would turn on an auto campaign and kind of like my strategy here is I turn on the auto campaign in Amazon pay per click, and I’ll let that run for seven days. And what that does is that that will then allow me to pull that data and let me know the key words that Amazon was saying that I should be putting my product in front of.

And then I’ll take those out of that campaign and I’ll create another campaign and that will be like a manual campaign. And then now I can start to build on those keywords, and there’s a whole bunch of other strategies we really don’t have time to go into, but really just finding the low hanging fruit for the keywords, not just the obvious, not just the stainless steel garlic press. Like we want little key words or little keywords that you might only get one sale a month on, those are the ones that I like to go after.

Steve: What do you say your CPC is in the very beginning?

Scott: Very beginning I do my cost per click is 75 cents to start, and this is now I’ll tell you what I did in the beginning, but — and that’s what I do now. And my daily budget is 25 bucks. And usually I don’t even come close to that in the beginning, that’s really what I do. I’ll just tell you a quick little story when I did start this, I turned the auto campaign and not knowing anything what I was doing by the way, turned on the auto campaign, because it was so done easy, and I said I’m just going to pull the data after a few weeks and see what happens, and then I’ll just pause that campaign. Well, that campaign right now is one of my best performing campaigns; I have not turned it off. Like I just want…

Steve: Yeah, the auto campaign yeah totally.

Scott: I just looked at it the other day and it was like my ACOS which is average cost of sale, and usually you want that below 50. And I think I looked the other day it was like 32%. And that’s ongoing since like gosh like last like November, all right?

Steve: Let’s talk about that so if you wanted ad below 50 that implies that you are not really going to be making a profit right, or just breaking even?

Scott: That’s not 100% true. I look at it like 50% or under. 50% will mean that you spent that you spent the money — basically you got 50% back of what you spend in. So depending on how much margin you have in there. So in my case and here is I guess really important part of this is, I don’t care if I’m not making my full profit that I had spent, that’s not where the magic happens, okay? That’s great in all that you are making sales from that, but what I really want is I want to get the acknowledgement, and I guess the credit from Amazon that I sold through these keywords. Because now that I sold through these keywords, I’m going to start ranking organically for these keywords, does that make sense?

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Scott: Because, I’ll just give you an example, and I kind of use this on one my workshops where I basically show that I spent one month $1300 on pay per click, and I generated 110 sales from that pay per click. But I generated 1500 sales organically. And part of the reason is because I’m ranking for these keywords that I was advertising for. So even if– if I want to rank for stainless steel garlic press, I don’t even care if I lose a little bit of money on that campaign. If I can get 20 sales for that, then I can possibly or start ranking for stainless steel garlic press when someone searches in the organic search. And that’s going surpass any money that I would spend over here.

Steve: So how did you come to that conclusion, meaning like how did you know that there’s a strong correlation between that and your organic rankings?

Scott: Because I could see that I was ranking. I could see one day I wasn’t ranking, I wasn’t getting any sales like other than the pay per click, and then all of a sudden I started ranking for all of these keywords that I was paying for.

Steve: So do you do anything else to rank your keywords like outside like drive outside traffic to any Amazon listing based on their keyword?

Scott: No, I don’t do that at this point, I don’t really recommend it at this point until you’ve exhausted pay per click, which I think you are going to have to find it really hard to exhaust it. Because you can just — you can scrape keywords from your competitors. You can go in there and just Google planner and just get 800 keywords that are related to your product by punching in your URL for your Amazon listing, and then it will give you 800 suggested keywords. Even though they are not Amazon keywords, they are still keywords that people have searched for outside of Amazon. And then I will take those, I will plug them into an Amazon pay per click campaign, and I will do the same thing, I will do 70 cents per click, $25 ad budget, I’ll let the data tell me what it does.

Steve: Okay, and just to be clear do you actually have an outside website right now, or are you just doing everything on Amazon?

Scott: Everything is mostly on Amazon; I do have an external site just to deliver like free videos, some guides, a place that actually is a company kind of in a sense, so it’s not just by itself. And I do plan on eventually hiring out some content creators to create and build up that content to start getting some SEO traffic through that, through Google. But I mean Amazon gives you the matrix, they give that you just got to click on this keyword and you sold through this keyword. So it gives you that data which is beautiful, so I can see my conversion rate, I can see what I’m doing, and I can tell you right now and I think you would agree that there’s no traffic that’s going to convert higher than inside of Amazon.

Steve: Oh, yeah, absolutely.

Scott: So if you are going to take outside traffic, even Google AdWords, if you are going to take that traffic and drive it over to an Amazon listing, you are not going to convert the same as if you would inside. Now you may convert better from Google to your website, yeah, I do believe that. But I wouldn’t — I personally wouldn’t spend the time doing the outside traffic to your listing, when you can be doing so much more inside of your Amazon pay per click.

Steve: So right now, so what it sounds like is, are you primarily just doing the Amazon pay per click stuff? Are you doing anything else to drive sales?

Scott: The only other thing that I do in the beginning is I’ll run like a small little mini blast. And I did that through, there’s a site — you can do a 30 day free trial tomason.com, I don’t if you’ve heard of that?

Steve: Yeah, absolutely.

Scott: Yeah, basically it’s a blog network of all these bloggers that want to review products, and you could put your product up there and the beautiful thing is it’s not everyone who gets to do it, so you get to pick and choose who you want to review your product. They review it on your blog; it will point a link going to your listing which is great for SEO. And then also you get someone to leave a review and purchase your products, you get all that stuff. Now recently I did one, and I think the numbers if I’m not mistaken, I think I gave away like maybe 50 codes or 50 units. And I think I got back about 30, maybe 35 reviews from that which is a great…

Steve: That is actually really good, yeah.

Scott: Yeah, so just stuff like that. What I did is I dripped them out I think I gave 10 codes a day for a few days to get up to that number, I didn’t just blast them all out. I have done that, I have done other blasting services too; the one I have just recently done which I’m kind of liking is called the viral launch, used…

Steve: Okay I don’t know about that service actually.

Scott: Yeah, I have used that one and it works pretty good. The thing is though with all these here is the deal, it’s like, it’s a list of people that signed up that want to receive a free product, and basically from that they are going to give you an honest review. So it’s really all the people who are dealing with services that are coming up like — they are coming up all over places, people are out there, they are building a list of VIP people that want to review Amazon products.

And they are not just sending it out there in email so that you can go ahead and start getting your codes taken, so people buy them. And that’s really natural, you can build your own list, if you want to build your own list and I have done that too. I’ll take Facebook ads drive it to a Facebook fan page of mine, and tell them that they can get a stainless steel garlic press for a dollar 95 while supplies last. And then I get their email address for the code, and then boom I got an email list of people that are interested in garlic presses, and other kitchen goods.

Steve: So when do you actually let the list ride?

Scott: What do you mean?

Steve: Meaning like you stop trying to solicit a lot more reviews through this like giveaways and that sort of thing.

Scott: Honestly, I really only do like one maybe two.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Because I’m not going after the high competitive supplement business let’s say right? I’m not going after the ones that you have to do that all the time. If you want to go after a product that’s doing 100 units a day for the most part, a lot of other people are going to be trying to go after that same product, so you are going to have to do these blasts probably one a month.

Steve: Really, okay, for the supplement guys?

Scott: Oh, gosh, yeah, and any other thing that’s that competitive, and you’ll tell right away with all the reviews right? And that’s why if you are going after a products that have a thousand reviews, these people are doing actively trying to do this. And then you are always going to have to start try to stay and keep up with those people, that’s why I go the other way. I’m going after the products that no one else wants to do, because it’s only sold 10 or 15 units a day, right? They are not as attractive right? But to me it’s easier because all I got to do is blast once if I even want to, and then just start running my pay per click, and then go to the next.

And really just refine the pay per click, because the pay per click, I mean you can spend months just continually adding new keywords and you are going to just be blown away at what you are finding. It’s kind of like you are out there sifting the dirt and the finding the golden nuggets.

Steve: Yeah, it sounds like Google AdWords in a way.

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: Similar principle.

Scott: So much easier though.

Steve: Yeah, it is actually.

Scott: There’s really– you don’t have to worry about ad copy; you don’t have to worry about any of this. You just say I want to advertise these key words to my listing yes, go how much? $25 a day spend, 75 cents per click, go.

Steve: I mean you don’t even need to do anything, you can just let Amazon do everything to it, and it still works pretty well.

Scott: It does, it absolutely does, and I would strongly recommend anyone that’s listening to definitely if you are at that stage to definitely use the Amazon pay per click. It totally will be the money well spent, because again every sale you get through a keyword, you are sending a signal to Amazon that they could possibly be ranking you for that key word, every single time. So the more you can go through that keyword, that’s why I said if you want to rank for a keyword go ahead and spend 100 bucks to get sales through that keyword. That’s going to be 100 bucks that’s going to then help you rank yourself organically in getting on the first page, and then the sales are going to come naturally.

Steve: So I want to take kind of segue back to where you left off with the product bundling and all your strategies, I just want to take a couple of minutes to talk about some of those things.

Scott: Sure absolutely. Yeah, what do you want me to go into?

Steve: I don’t remember where we left, I should have — yeah.

Scott: Yeah, there’s no problem, well I’ll just tell you what I like about them, the bundling like some people will be like, yeah I found this really cool product, but it’s only 9.95. I’m like it’s fine if you can bundle that. So if you can find one that’s 9.95, but then you know that it could come in a three pack, and then it could come in a five pack, well then you are going to have to create three different packages, and then it would just be three separate skews. But the cool thing about that is it’s kind of like the leader to get people in the store where if people are scanning and they see yours is 9.95 to 29.95, you are going to get more clicks because they see the 9.95.

Once they get into their listing you are going to see that I can buy one for 9.95, I can buy a three pack 19.95, and I can a five pack for 29.95. So automatically the three pack is a great deal. So now you are going to start selling a lot of the three packs, but the one pack you still make a couple of bucks, but three packs or the five pack is really where you are going to make the money.

So I love that strategy, it works really well, I have got a body of mine that’s doing it now, and definitely he out sells the one pack all the time, because of the three pack and the value. It’s kind of like a no brainer, it’s like I’m going to get one for free kind of thing. So that’s the one thing I like about bundling, and then the variations it’s a similar approach, but it also allows you to reach people with different things that they want within the one product. It’s kind of like a size thing in a sense, or a color right?

So you might get someone that likes red, green, and blue, but then they also might want all three. So you could do each one separate price, and then you could do a bundle for all three. So this one here you are able to reach four different people potentially, or four different customers in a sense. And that’s why I like variations, because it does also give you like that umbrella, so all of your reviews will come under the one listing. So either if you just sold one of the red and then you sold ten of the blue, and you got reviews on the blue, you are still going to get — your red one is still going to get credit, because the entire listing is going to get all those reviews.

Steve: Nice.

Scott: Yeah, so that’s my thing on like variations and the bundling, I think that that’s a great way, and the thing is a lot of people will say well
Scott how do I make my product different? Add an accessory, not an eBook, I mean eBook you can add that too if you want, but everybody is doing that. Add a physical book if you want, but add something that has value that you know that they are searching for as well that can go and compliment that product. And preferably try to find something that not everyone else is finding on Alibaba, because then it’s going to make it harder for someone to just go to Alibaba and find the two products, do the same thing.

Steve: Absolutely.

Scott: So bundling and finding accessories to me is an edge that a lot of people don’t want to do the work to do, but I think it could benefit you so much more.

Steve: So you have your agent person that you use now to source your products, but if you were to start over today would you just go straight on Alibaba again or?

Scott: I would, I would follow that same path, I would, because I think you can dig through all of the stuff in Alibaba, and you can just then find that agent, and then from that agent then you can start asking them about all of these other products, or if they can find you somewhere. And then they might direct you to another agent that’s not even on Alibaba, so that’s …

Steve: So for all the listeners who actually want to give this a try, what would you say is like a good timeframe from inception to getting like your first sale?

Scott: Well, I would say realistically after you get through the research stage, the research stage is going to probably be the most time, and probably the most frustrating in the beginning, I’ll be honest. But I would say if you gave yourself like 45 days would be my guess. Like 30 days is really pushing it, I mean I think you can do it if you went AliExpress model. But if you went the other model and you kind of got all of your eggs kind of lined up in a row, your docks in a row, then you would go ahead and say — I would say 45 days would be a good — 60 days at the most. I think for sure, but I want people to know too, this isn’t something that you just — you put something up and all of a sudden you immediately get sales, it’s not like that either, it’s not like get rich quick.

Steve: It’s funny, because that was my experience when I went on Amazon.

Scott: What was that?

Steve: We just threw up some products, and we just made six grand in a month without even really soliciting them any reviews.

Scott: But did you have the inventory?

Steve: Yeah, we had the inventory; I mean we had our store first right before we…

Scott: Yeah, you are coming at it from a different angle, because you already had inventory, you already went to the research stage, you already got this. So if you already got a product, and you want to put it up, I think you can have sales in like a week or less.

Steve: Yeah, or like the first day.

Scott: Oh, absolutely yeah, no I’m talking about the whole process.

Steve: Okay, got it, got you.

Scott: Yeah, now if you already got a store front, and you are selling on ecommerce, you are crazy now, you can just start putting product up on Amazon. I mean to me that’s — it’s like a whole another channel that you could be tapping into, and in a sense it’s like you don’t have to fulfill the orders really, you just got to send in the inventory. So if you are talking like that yes, Steve I mean you can do this like you said, as soon as the product lands in FBA, and it’s available, you can make a sale totally.

Steve: In fact it’s like almost too easy, I feel — so I’m just curious how this is going to play maybe in a couple years once — because people are just going on Alibaba and just throwing stuff on Amazon and it’s selling. But at some point it might reach some saturation point, but in the meantime it’s great.

Scott: Yeah, it totally is and I think that you are right though, it’s going to come to a point where you are going to have to be a little bit more creative. I think Amazon is also going to — I think they are going to support the brands that have better round a little bit, that’s why seller feedback to me is very important, and a lot of people don’t look at seller feedback as being important. I look at that as kind of like your domain name, it’s your authority site in a sense. And the more feedbacks that you can get on that that are good and this is for your entire sellers account, I believe that that’s going to give you a lot more drive, a lot more push once you launch other products.

So if you are coming new on the scene and you are brand new, you got a brand new sellers account, and you are trying to sell a stainless steel garlic press, and I’m someone that’s been on here for a year and I have got 1000 feedbacks on my listing, and I have got three other products selling, and I put a new product, my product will rank quicker than yours.

Steve: So you think that has to do with seller’s rank, right?

Scott: I do.

Steve: Is it, do you know for sure or is that?

Scott: I don’t know for sure, I don’t think we’ll ever know for sure on any of this stuff. Anything with Google, anything with Amazon, it’s just everyone that I have talked to that has been around even bigger brands, I mean brands that are doing 100K a month and more, they’ve all said that their process is really simple when they launch a new product, it’s really just list the product and just run a little bit of pay per click starting, and then once it starts it goes. And that’s what we believe is because of that history. And it just makes sense to me, why would Amazon have seller feedback if they didn’t give you any credit for it.

Steve: Yes, so it’s like domain strength in Google land in ranking, yeah.

Scott: Totally, it’s like an edge domain or links pointing to a domain, right? It’s the same the same concept, and again it’s like I mean if you have a website that’s ten years older, you got one that you just bought. And you start putting content on the one that’s older, that one probably going to rank a little bit better because it’s got the age to it.

Steve: Right.

Scott: I mean again we can’t prove any of the stuff, but it’s good theory.

Steve: Yeah, it’s just like Google stuff too I mean yeah.

Scott: It’s kind of common sense in a sense, so that’s how I look at it.

Steve: Scott we’ve been chatting for a while, and I’m sure the listeners want to know more, and so where can they find you? I know you have an awesome podcast which I recommend; it’s called the amazing seller.

Scott: Yeah, just find me there I would say is the podcast, I have got a ton of episodes and I really do break everything down, I share my story step by step and all of that stuff. And I really — I don’t hold anything back, and again it’s a show that’s just like yours, it’s just me being me and kind of — I share some guest view on it, and actually it has an [inaudible] [00:59:05] as of now, but it will be soon, but yeah.

And then I have a free workshop that I do, I do that — right now I’m doing one every about every seven to ten days. And it’s really just walking through the five phases that I have used in the beginning, and kind of like I teach now. So it’s totally free, it’s at the amazingseller.com/workshop. And anybody is definitely welcome to join that, I do live Q&A at the end of those as well, so yeah, that’s pretty much it.

Steve: Awesome, hey thanks a lot for coming on the Scott, I learned a couple of things myself, and you are clearly very knowledgeable on this topic.

Scott: Well, I appreciate you having me Steve, I really do appreciate and you know what, I learned something too, I learned something about wire transfers today. So I will bring that over to my audience.

Steve: All right, right on Scott.

Scott: All right man, take care.

Steve: All right, take care.

Scott: Thanks a lot.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, selling on Amazon is the real deal, and guys like Scott Voelker are killing it online. So if you are interested in ecommerce, now is the time to give Amazon a try before the market place becomes saturated with sellers. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode88, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online ecommerce business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course immediately.

Once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in, and all you got to do is populate it with the products that you want to sell, and you can literally start your online store in matter of hours. Simply go to Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best web hosts out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. And in fact I hosted mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email. You can install WordPress in just a single click, and they’ve got an easy to use website builder and design services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount, once again that’s HostGator.com/my wife quit. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

088: How Omar Zenhom Created An Award Winning 6 Figure Podcast At 100MBA.net

How To Create An Award Winning 6 Figure Podcast With Omar Zenhom

Omar Zenhom is someone who I met at a private mastermind meeting led by John Corcoran. And I’m really glad that we met because the guy is super cool and he’s great at what he does.

Omar runs the popular site The 100 Dollar MBA at 100MBA.net where he teaches a class on how to start your own business.

He also runs a top 25 business podcast called the $100 MBA and most recently he launched a SaaS business called Webinar Ninja which leverages google hangouts to run webinars seamlessly

What You’ll Learn

  • Why Omar dropped out of business school
  • How Omar’s podcast generates revenue and his business plan for the podcast.
  • How Omar grew his podcast to such a large size in a short period of time
  • Omar’s tips for building up a podcast audience
  • How Omar draws traffic to your website
  • Which social media platforms yield the best results
  • The motivation behind creating Webinar Ninja

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the very beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I want to give a quick shout out to my sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you’ll immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. And everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support, via chat, phone and email, one click WordPress installs, an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m really happy to have Omar Zenhom on the show. Now Omar is someone who I met at a private mastermind meeting led by John Crochrane. And I’m really glad that I met Omar because the guy’s super cool and he’s great at what he does. The only thing I don’t like about him is that talking to him gives me a neck ache because he’s like 6’5” or something like that. Just talking to him—I’m not that tall. Anyway Omar runs a popular site, the $100MBA at 100mba.net where he teaches a class on how to start your own business. His class cost 100 bucks just like the title says. He also runs a top 25 business podcast called $100MBA, and most recently he launched a SaaS business called Webinar Ninja which leverages Google hangouts to run webinars seamlessly. Now there’s actually a lot to talk about today, so welcome to the show Omar. How are you doing today man?

Omar: I’m doing well. It’s great to be here Steve, and thanks for that awesome intro.

Steve: Yeah, no problem. So give us a quick background story, because I knew you kind of dropped out of a very prestigious business school. So I was just kind of curious what the back story behind that was.

Omar: Yeah I went to Wharton for a semester and it’s funny because a lot of people that go to Wharton go directly after their undergrad. But I have a long career in education so I went to school. I studied English as my major. I was an English teacher in the name, little manager for over twelve years. In that time I also got my masters in education. That was my career. That’s what I did. I taught high school and I taught at the university level. Then for the last six years of my career I was a head of department, like a chair of a department as well as a teacher trainer. This is—that was my life. That’s what I did and that was my job.

When I transitioned into becoming a full time entrepreneur, because while I was in education, I was in a lot of side hustling and starting businesses online, and seeing if I can make a buck on this thing. I did that for about ten years while I was in education. It was very new back then and there was not a lot going on, WordPress was still not out and a lot of stuff.

Steve: Just for context, what year was this?

Omar: I started around 2001, 2002.

Steve: Okay.

Omar: And then when I made that jump in 2012 to fulltime entrepreneurship, I had this kind of feeling like, okay I must start my own business in order for me to be taken seriously. I need to have an MBA. I told myself the story and I decided to apply to Wharton business school, I got accepted and I attended for a semester, but towards the end of my first semester my professor pulled me aside and asked me, “What are you doing here? You don’t fit the mold here, you are not trying to get a job at Goldman Sachs or Morgan Stanley, and you’ve had a career and– at the time I already had a business online, I had businesses before. So I told him I’m getting my MBA because I want to be a great entrepreneur. And he told me that you don’t get an MBA to be a great entrepreneur, you get it to get a middle management job or something.

Steve: Ha! Interesting, the prof told you that.

Omar: Yeah. And he had ten year at the time, so he doesn’t really care, so he was kind of giving me his honest opinion, like “You don’t need to be here. You don’t need to be dropping $150,000. You can—business schools don’t have a monopoly on business education. You can learn things through books and experiences and you are already learning things through your own experiences.” And he just told me what I needed to hear. To be honest with you, I just—it was a self esteem thing, like I just felt like, “I need to get my MBA if I’m going to have my own business. How am I going to teach business or talk about business if I am somebody that doesn’t have MBA myself?” So he kind of gave me that internal confidence to give myself permission to just go full fledge, and use my time and resources on growing my business rather than trying to get my MBA.

Now it’s kind of like the genesis of the idea of $100MBA, where we wanted to offer an alternative business education. An alternative to I want to learn business skills, I want to learn how to start a business, but I don’t necessarily want to go back to school. I just want to be an entrepreneur. I want to learn about finance, sales, marketing, all that stuff, but I don’t really need a piece of paper or the permission to say that I know business.”

Plus our background in education, my partner in life and partner in business Nicole, both of us come from an education background. This is what I know, I know—this is like it’s like breathing to me teaching and learning and putting a curriculum together and lessons together. So we wanted to take that experience along with my business experience and create this alternative education.

Steve: And this is just like a random question that has popped to my head, what is your feeling on just like skipping undergrad all together and start a business?

Omar: I don’t think it’s for everybody, but I do think it’s an option somebody– people should consider. I think that– traditionally people say, “You should go to college,” and I’m the kind of person that always likes to question things, especially like these made up rules in our head like “why?” Sometimes these rules are valid. But it’s good to know why you are doing something. The answer could be like, “Yes I need to go to college because one two three.” That’s a valid answer, go ahead, go to college. But if you do things just because you are going through the motions, or because you are trying to fill the expectations of other people, you are really going down a path of your life that’s going to be really miserable, because you are really doing things for the wrong reasons.

You really want to do things not only for the right reasons, but things that will support the values that you have, and what you want out of life. So I do think you should consider going and also consider not going and see what you want to do. If you are trying to be an entrepreneur, there are things you can learn through traditional education. In the US for example, I’m leaning towards no because it’s quite expensive, but if you are in the UK or Australia, Nicole’s from Australia, my partner and they pretty much get a free ride. So it makes sense to get some sort of education socially if you are not going to go into debt.

Steve: Yeah, as an Asian parent, my kids are going to go to college, but my school actually had a really good entrepreneurship program. Anyway, let’s switch gears a little bit. I know you got a ton of projects on your plate right now. I mean, you’ve got your course; you’ve got your podcast which is daily by the way for all of these listeners. I only do once a week. I can’t even imagine doing daily, and you have this SaaS business. So first question, how do you kind of juggle all your time between all those different things?

Omar: Calendar. Yeah, I guess, let me just be clear, I don’t do this alone. My partner, Nicole and I we do most of it, and we do most of the management. But we realized very quickly that if we want to go where we want to go, we can’t do this alone, we have to grow our team, we have to have the right people in place to take care of things that do take a lot of time. But there are core things that I do that are part of my regular schedule, my weekly schedule, and I put compartments. So I have days where I record the podcasts, where I batch, I have days where I work on content. There’s days when I work with our development team for Webinar Ninja, our SaaS product. I have this stuff on the calendar. I make sure I stick to it. We try to make sure we have time for relaxation as well, but…

Steve: Let me rephrase that question a little bit actually. I mean, I’ve got multiple businesses as well, and I can’t help but feel like if I just focused on one of them, I could just make one of them much larger than the combined total of the other businesses. Do you feel any of that?

Omar: So I kind of don’t see them as two different businesses, because I feel like I’m serving the same audience. With $100MBA, they are learning how to build the business, how to start a business, and once they get to that point, they are going to want how to take it to the next level, how to get more sales, how to get more leads. I feel with Webinar Ninja we are able to serve them at that point with not only the server, but the training of how to run webinars properly.

Steve: Okay and let’s talk about one of your assets for a little bit here, I’m assuming that your podcast is probably your main legend I guess for all of your businesses. Is that pretty accurate?

Omar: Yeah.

Steve: And your podcast has really caught fire in the entrepreneurship community at least, and I always consistently notice it in like the top 25 or even the top 10 or the top 5 in the business category. So how did you— what was your strategy for creating a popular podcast?

Omar: It’s probably the most recurrent question I get asked.

Steve: Okay, that means you’ve got some good answers.

Omar: I’m going to start with simple a answer and then go into some details. The simple answer is it’s the same thing that anybody does with any kind of production. If I was a recording artist, and I was going to want to have a bestselling album of all time, or if I wanted to create the next Breaking Bad, or if I wanted to create the best feature film ever, people that set up to do things like that, they see things bigger than it actually is. I think a lot of people don’t know that before we start the $100MBA show we had our failed podcast. It didn’t do well. And we learned a lot of hard lessons, and one of the biggest lessons was we were just putting a podcast together for the sake of putting out a podcast. We really weren’t looking at it as a show, as a production.

If you look at the top players in podcasting like Marc Maron or Serial or Here is The Thing, all these huge names, they don’t just say, “Hey let’s [inaudible] [0:12:35] a podcast together over the weekend and put it out there and its content.” They see it as a production. They say—they really think about what do they– how are they going to serve this audience, how are they going to edit this perfectly so it sounds great? It’s a huge, huge production. They see it as just like they are producing a show because it is a show. You are producing a piece of chronicle entertainment. It could be educational, but at the end of the day, you are performing for the actual audience. And I just didn’t see that at the start. I just saw the, “Oh it’s just like a blog or something and I can grow.”

But there are so many big players in the podcasting world and the game is so—the bar has been raised so high now that you have to go in thinking bigger. You can’t think like I’m just going to put out a podcast and it’s just going to go bonkers for no reason. I’m very self critical with all our work. I do this because, like I said, I question things a lot. One of the things I questioned when I started $100MBA shows, why everything? You hear a lot of podcast that have the same thing, they have the same kind of intro, same feel, same format, same thing, and a lot of reasons why it happens is because people don’t question things. They just say, “Well that’s what other shows do, and that’s what pros do so, I’ll do it.” But if you look at some of the top podcast, their show is very much different. If I look at Marc Maron’s podcast, it’s a very, very different type of show. There’s no bumper, there’s some music. The guy has a monologue at the start and then he goes to the interview. It’s a different format from for example like John Dumas’s format.

If you just take a look at like StartUp, it’s a documentary style type of show. You look at Serial, it’s more of a journalistic type of show. The way they blend in interviews and snippets and they interview people. They just don’t say, you don’t hear Sarah kind of dictating every question. It’s seen as a narrative and they insert the sound bite when it’s appropriate. These things take a lot of thought and a lot of planning, and it takes some time. When I realized that I said, “Okay, if I want to compete with these shows, I need to do everything I can to do what they do. I don’t have a huge team, I don’t have a production studio, or stuff, but I can plan for a show like they do.

When we started on $100MBA show we decided to take two months off everything else in our business. We didn’t launch any products, we didn’t take any more clients. All we did is on $100MBA show before we launched. We bashed our episodes, we rerecorded the first 10 episodes like a dozen times, because we would you have some of our colleagues and friends listen to them, give us a critical feedback. You know we changed things up, we changed the way I sound and feel natural, and we just rethought everything. We questioned everything and I think the biggest thing is that we used our strengths, and like I said I’m from an educational background, and that’s what I know, that’s my strength. It doesn’t make sense for me to have an interview show, and that’s our podcast as an interview show and it just didn’t make sense.

Steve: Right.

Omar: Nichole is a New York Film Academy graduate, and a lot of her training had to do with editing and she loved the production side, so she dedicated herself to be the producer of the show and editing the show, and a lot of the ratings and reviews that we get on iTunes has a lot to do with the production quality of the show, and that’s all Nicole.

Steve: Okay.

Omar: You know so and people, the podcast is just like music you get goose bumps, it feels good. I don’t know what it is, but that’s cool, I like it. You know you just can’t put your finger on it, and that’s production quality. You know we focused on that with teachers, I decided let’s do a lesson based podcast. Let’s do a short form 10 minutes, it’s just straight to the meat, and it’s just a lesson on a particular aspect of business. And it just kind of broke the mold of what you’re typically expecting in a business podcast.

Steve: A couple of questions here, first like what went into your decision to go everyday as opposed to a lesser frequency?

Omar: Because the short form we knew that it was going to be about 10 minutes, and we felt like if we could give somebody 10 minutes, everybody can spare 10 minutes, and 10 minutes a day we thought would be something that would be useful. Somebody can listen to this in their commute; they’re walking their dog or doing the dishes, whatever it is they can fit it in. It’s kind of like a little bit of motivation, it’s a little bit of insight, it’s something for them, and the lessons are concise, but they’re are meaty. It gives them something to do today like just get this thing done, and then let’s move on tomorrow. They just want to have like building blocks. Originally we worked five days a week, and then after 30 episodes we got a lot of demand, and we got a lot of questions in, so we decided to dedicate Saturday and Sunday episodes to questions.

Steve: Yeah and not only that it seems like you know all the content it’s just you talking for the most part right? And to consistently put stuff out like that, do you kind of derive your content based on your experiences, or is it some it out of a book, like how do you gather consistent content that you can go every day?

Omar: I think it’s one, just experiences I’ve had in my past. I you know when we laid out $100MBA I still do this because it’s a grown curriculum. I create a long form curriculum. So we have like a production schedule on a sheet where every episode’s title is listed in bullet points of what that episode is all about. And each episode builds upon each other, so the first 100 episodes is much lower level than you know episodes in the 300 zone, so…

Steve: Okay, so it’s meant to be consumed in order?

Omar: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Omar: I mean you can take them one off depending on where you are in your business. You know if you’ve just never even thought about starting a business in your life before you start in episode one.

Steve: Okay.

Omar: Through experiences and through growing as an entrepreneur, I am always jotting down notes and jotting down things in the sheet as I find my own challenges growing as an entrepreneur. I know that other people would experience the same thing, or if I went through something this week, maybe it’s a lesson I want to break down, or maybe an aspect of it. Yeah, so we’re building upon previous lessons, and there is a method to what we’re doing, and our whole goal is that if you can listen to these shows on a daily basis, you can see yourself grow as an entrepreneur as we’re growing.

Introduction: Hi everyone I just wanted to take a quick moment to thank famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now fame bit is a number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Now videos start as low as $50 and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywifequit at famebit.com, you will automatically get $10 off. So go to framebit.com right now and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: You mentioned a production quality and just content as one of your assets, but I consider a podcast just like blogging right? Even if you have the best content in the world, if no one can find it then that’s no not good either. I was just curious in the very beginning whether there were some special things that you did to just get the podcast out there in front of as many people as possible?

Omar: One of the best ways to get an advantage on people is to do things people are not willing to do. One of the things I did was, I– you know before the launch you know we planned it about two months ago, I would reach out to different blogs that I thought had audiences that would be interested in $100MBA show to guest blog for them. Traditionally people you know they email for example Darren Rowse, and they say, hey Darren I would love to guest blog on your site on ProBlogger or digital photography school. This is who I am, this is my website, let me know, right? Like to me that’s just, you’re asking for a no, that’s a no right there.

Because why would Darren give you a chance, not that Darren is not a nice guy, he’s a lovely guy, he’s great, right? But you know this is his baby, his life work, why would he trust you with it, right? So what I did is I would email Darren, and I actually emailed Darren for digital photography school and I said, hey Darren I love your site. I actually read a lot of your posts when it deals with the business of photography, and I noticed that there’s no articles dealing with this. I researched this topic, this is what I do. I looked at all your comments when it comes to this, and your subscribers are really looking for this. I wrote out a 2500 word blog post with pictures and images and everything, it’s attached to this email. I would love to guest post if this is something that interests you let me know.

All he’s got to do is open it up and read the email and read the post and say, this is killer, I want it on my thing, and then when he replies to me I say to him, you know and he says hey we would love to publish. I said great I only have one copy of it. I want you to publish it on August 11 which was our launch day for the $100MBA show. And I did this with about eight other blogs, and they all launched on the same day, and I did the same thing with guest appearances under the podcast for 10 podcasts. On the day of the launch we were technically on 18 different sites you know, and the reason why I mentioned you know you do things that people are not willing to do that takes a lot of work, a lot of time to write eight different blog posts that long, that detailed, to do all the research, to do it knowing that you may not be accepted, and I didn’t get accepted to a lot of you know a lot of publications, and I had to just keep that…

Steve: What did you do with those posts?

Omar: I reworded them, and I published them on our own site, so I didn’t you know throw them in the garbage or anything like that. The same thing with podcast, I looked at all the top podcast I wanted to be on. A lot of them said no, a lot of them ignored my email, but some said yes. You know [inaudible 0:22:59] they were okay with it to publish it on that day, and we were good to go. That took a lot of time besides the fact of producing an actual podcast you know.

Steve: Okay.

Omar: Yeah, that was kind of one of the things that when I did that helped us launch properly and get some exposure.

Steve: When you first launched then did you immediately like hit the number one spot because of all this stuff, like did you have an email list at the time?

Omar: Our first couple of weeks in new note worthy, we weren’t number one, we were like four, five, maybe words like two in careers or like subcategory. But the last five weeks of new note worthy, we were number one every single week, which I didn’t see personally before you know being number one in new note worthy for five consecutive weeks. We launched the same time that StartUp did, we launched the same time Tim Ferriss did, so we had some heavy hitters with us, so it wasn’t easy to gain that spot, but we were fortunate enough to have some success at the start.

Steve: Did you kind of have any of your own audience at the time, did you have like a big email list at the time when you launched, or did you kind of entirely rely on the people that you’d contacted?

Omar: No, I didn’t have a huge audience at the time, and I know this is going to sound lame, but I really believe the reason why we did so well is because it’s a good show. I really believe that it’s different, people have never had of a show like this before, it’s just– it’s kind of hard not to like. We purposely kind of constructed a show in that way, and obviously the efforts to launch and get exposure, and take advantage of the new note worthy helped us a lot, but if you don’t have an exceptional show, any kind of exposure really is not going to help.

I mean there’s shows I could tell you right now on iTunes they have celebrities on them, that have a huge audience, and they have less ratings than you know a show that has a very low audience. You know they have like 10 ratings or something and they’re not doing very well. You can– because the show is not great, you know the show is not exceptional, the audio quality is not great. Whatever it is, the point is that you have to have a good show at the end of the day.

Steve: So speaking of ratings, did you do anything to generate ratings to encourage them?

Omar: Well we have an ongoing thing going on $100MBA show. Nothing in particular at the launch, but every week we have a way of free ride to the $100MBA training and community, so we give away a life time membership to the $100MBA. It’s just our way to thank people who give us a rating and review on iTunes, so we just randomly go through a random picker and choose a rating and review, and we give it away.

That encourages people to like participate. A lot of people like they want to give a review, but they are kind of on the fence, oh I might win something so I might as well do that. It’s also a away to kind of give back, and also just show people that hey we appreciate the fact that you took the time to figure out how to give us an iTunes ratings and review and things like that, so that’s one thing that we did.

Steve: Okay. One thing I also noticed there’s one point where you had like this super large icon in iTunes, and I was just curious it’s just like a completely different graphic. How did you get to the top of the podcast in iTunes? Does that make sense; do you know what I am talking about?

Omar: You mean the home banner?

Steve: The home banner yes.

Omar: Well, in December of 2014 this last December we won best of iTunes, and when we did that you know we got an email from Apple telling us you know congratulations you won best of iTunes along with shows like Serial and Hardcore History and StartUp. We were like thank you very much and one of the packs of winning best of iTunes is that they kind of keep a look out on your show, and if they see something special, or something good you can reach out to them and say you know like I am doing something if you want to consider it. You kind of, they’ve kind of like certified you as like this is a legit show that we think is adding value to the podcasting world. You know they might surprise you and put up a banner, and they want to showcase the shows they believe are good.

Steve: Did you have to apply to this best of iTunes thing, or was it just completely out of the blue.

Omar: No you don’t apply; it’s an editorial team that selects the best shows of the year.

Steve: I see, and did you have a lot of…?

Omar: It’s like going on Oscars on podcasting or something.

Steve: Yeah did you have to, did you have a lot of listeners at the time, is it based on listeners, downloads or is it…?

Omar: It’s based on a few factors, it’s based on one, obviously your downloads, your subscriptions, the amount of ratings and review you have. They read every single review like to make sure that these are actual legit people that are you know not your mum. They look at your actual website, the way that you’ve show cased your business and your brand you know, and if they want to be associated with that type of business. If it’s you know it doesn’t look scamy, but they also look at you know if you look at the shows I do, and they also look at how has this podcast contributed to podcasting in general. Have they added something to the genre, have they added something to their market and have they done something for podcasting, like for example Serial has gotten people to listen to podcasts you know.

Steve: Yeah.

Omar: You know they recognize their success and obviously their download numbers are off the charts. You know but Marc Maron for example he’s got the president of the United States so like he gets recognized a lot for that, so they kind of reward people for doing something different. For us in our case it was bringing something new to the business genre, doing lessons and doing something that’s a little bit different that they’ve never seen before so…

Steve: Yeah sounds like one of the key takeaways here, it’s like, it’s just like blogging right? Blogging is getting a lot more saturated, and so is podcasting, and you just really got to stand up in some way or form, instead of just putting together some sort of me too podcast, right?

Omar: That is a good way to put it, yeah.

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about monetization, so you do take sponsors for your podcast, is that correct?

Omar: Yeah.

Steve: And it’s a 10 minute show right, and so how long are these sponsors, and how many do you take per episode?

Omar: So typically a podcast is about 30 or 40 minutes. There’s two pre roles and two mid roles and sometimes a post role. Given that our show is only 10 to 15 minutes long, we only have a 30 seconds pre role and 60 seconds mid role. It’s only like two ads, and they are pretty short.

Steve: And how do you solicit these sponsors, or do they come to you?

Omar: They, I never actually started the podcast thinking about sponsors, or thinking that happen, but we got contacted, our first sponsor was 99 designs. They just contacted us, they saw the success of the show on iTunes, and they just said hey we’d like to take a look at your numbers, and you know possibly sponsor your show. We only take on sponsors that are congruent with our audience, so I don’t do ads for dog food or things like that, because– even though I’ve been approached, but you know…

Steve: Have you really for dog?

Omar: Lots of different things you know that really have nothing to do with our market, or what we’re trying to do. We try to you know if I am going to put an ad in there or I am going to put a sponsor read, I want to do something that one I believe and I adore, so I have used. The sponsors are usually pretty helpful with that, and allowing you to use your product and things like that. So yeah, it’s kind of — it’s a little bit rigorous process, but we are very selective about it, because we do only have those limited spots. Yeah, so that’s kind of the story with sponsors.
Steve: Do you use any market places or anything like that to solicit sponsors?

Omar: Yes, so we Midroll for many of our sponsors, Midroll are kind of our agent that helps us secure sponsors, they have good relationship with sponsors, yeah.

Steve: And what is the going rate for sponsorships?

Omar: It depends, if you are running your own sponsorship they give you whatever you want. I mean I have a blog post that you can link to if you want, and it has a PDF that people can download. It’s actually our sponsorship guide that we give our sponsors if they are interested in our prices, and what you can do. You want to obviously showcase what you can offer your sponsor as well as give them a pay structure. If you go with somebody like Midroll that’s something that you negotiate with them, and you are actually not allowed to disclose because you are under contract.

But when it comes to regular sponsorship, I mean the going rate if you go for yourself for a pre-role which is about 30 seconds, it’s about 18 [inaudible] [00:31:16] which is $18 per a thousand downloads. And for a Midroll it’s around I believe $25 per [inaudible] [00:31:24] so yeah, depending on how many mid roles and pre-roles you have. And usually sponsors will only kind of take a look at you; it’s worth their time if you are making a minimum of 5,000 or 6,000 an episode. Because it’s just — for them they want to be able to use your marketing dollars in an effective way.

Steve: No that totally makes sense. Let’s talk about some of the other things in your podcast, and it sounds like you use your podcast to do a lot of legend [ph] to your actual website and your email list, right?

Omar: Yeah, I mean you can hold legend, I mean for me my whole purpose of the podcast is I want to build trust with my audience. I want to be able to win their hearts and make them understand that I have their best interest in mind. And when they do visit our website I try to get them on board to something free, I don’t even — even though my products are only $100 at the $100MBA. But rather consume things for free and get away and tell 10 other people about the $100MBA, then for me to try to milk a dollar out of everybody.

Steve: Let me just rephrase that question, and so in terms of your actual website like do you do anything special that generate traffic there, is it mainly podcast people finding it there, is it SEO?

Omar: We’ve published a new blog article once a week for the last two years. So I mean — I mean I guess when it comes to SEO that’s — the only SEO I do is write as much valuable content.

Steve: Yeah, you don’t do any paid advertising it all, is that correct?

Omar: No, I don’t do any advertising, most of our SEO just comes from our articles and hopefully people enjoy them, they share them. I just try to focus on getting as much valuable content as possible. We have a lot of free stuff on our site as well, like we have free courses, we have free guides, free info-graphics they can download. I want it to be a place where people could just feel like this person wants to support me; these people are good to me. And when they are ready to buy, they are not going to shop around, they are going to be like okay, I’m going to go to the $100MBA, because these people have nurtured me for so long, the lowest price that kicks in.

Steve: What I was kind of getting at was you have a 10 minute podcast, and by taking on a couple of sponsors it’s kind of diverting their attention to these other services, right? I was just wondering if you had considered not taking any sponsors and just being in full control over your own message and steering people over to your site or your brand. Does that make sense, do you see where I’m getting at?

Omar: Yeah, and by the way we rarely ever — I don’t think I have ever promoted the $100MBA program, or anything like that, they go buy $100MBA on our show ever. But we get a lot of conversion off the podcast. The first email they get; we ask them how did you hear about us? And I would probably say 75% to 80% of our new members come from the podcast. If you are good like you are going to be found out, like everybody who listens to the Serial went to the Serial website so they could see what Adnan Syed looks like. Everybody like if you are good enough you see good superb ad, they are going to check out the site. You are going to go check out Squarespace if you saw the dude and all of that stuff, in last Squarespace ad.

So I don’t really believe in like you have to directly market to people, if people want what you are selling, if they like what you do, they are going to find you out. The other thing is that we do have sponsors that show up because it cost money to run this show. Like it’s a production, we have a lot of — we have employees that we pay, we have other things that go about. And as well as in order for us to create this free content constantly on the site, we also have to pay for that as well.

So yeah, and I try to keep the sponsorship as congruent as possible. I cannot have that and decide to promote my own products, but I personally think that if I was a listener I would rather listen to a variety of different things that can help me out, rather than the same thing. Okay, Omar because I don’t sell many things like, so it’s like every — and it’s daily so like every day they are going to be hearing about the same products.

Steve: So that’s kind of like a segue, how does Webinar Ninja in your SaaS business kind of fit into all of these, because to me at least it seems a little bit — a lot different than what you have with $100MBA.

Omar: Well, my whole goal and everything that we do is to serve our audience which is new business builders, online business builders, people that are — have gotten started. And that’s really what the $100MBA really focuses on. But there’s a point where people get to the point where they are like okay, I have started a business, I’m making money now and I have made my first dollar, but I need to take it to the next level. And I want to be able to serve those people because those people are our people; they get to that level once they’ve kind of gone through our program, and they’ve listened to the show for a bit. And that’s where Webinar Ninja comes in, webinar ninja is a solution, it’s a platform, it’s a software, but it’s also training on how to run effective webinars.

And I’m — I really believe in webinars, because for me it’s the ultimate like teaching tool online, and that’s my background teaching, and I think that it’s a great way to educate people, it’s a great way to convey value and build trust with people. And I wanted to be a part of that, especially the fact that webinars in general and the internet marketing world kind of have a bad name. And they have like kind of scamy connotation, where you feel like you are being sold too constantly, and all that stuff.

And we wanted to clean up that webinar world with Webinar Ninja and that’s something that we’ve been trying to do, and have been doing with our members, with Webinar Ninja. So that’s kind of how it fit in, it’s kind of the next level of serving our audience in that way and I’m really…

Steve: Oh sorry, go on.

Omar: No it’s just I’m really enjoying the process of not challenging myself with a software business, because a software is just completely different than a course based business.

Steve: Yeah, totally. So when people are asking for Webinar Ninja, and the reason why I ask this is because there’s a lot of established players in this market. Like GoToMeeting, AnyMeeting, and actually a whole bunch of others. So I was just kind of wondering what your motivation was for developing it.

Omar: So it’s for that exact reason, we were not really happy with what was available. We were running webinars at the $100MBA community. We were doing webinars for our community, and I was using some of those solutions that are out there. And they were just not cutting it; they just were not serving my needs. And I created something that was very hatch patched in PHV; it was WordPress plug-in at the time. And it was just meant to run our webinars, and I got the help of a coder to clean it up for me because my PHV sales were not as good as I want them. It was just kind of like a one off freelance kind of thing, and we started using it for our webinars. And then a lot of our attendees started asking, hey what are you using for your webinar?

And I said, “Oh this is just something that we put together ourselves in house.” And they are like, “Well, I would like to buy it.” Like can you sell us this to me, and we just never thought about actually selling the software. So we started considering it, we did the beta test where we had about 150 users, and it was a WordPress plug-in at the time. And then it sold out in two days, and we just kind of closed the doors because we didn’t have the customer support team in place to serve more customers.

And then we had another circle and it was a WorPress plug-in where we got another 100 members. And we started learning from them, finding out what they want, fixing the problem. Then we realized that if we want to take it to where we want take it, we really can’t do it as a WordPress plug-in, because as WordPress plug-ins really don’t have as many facilities, that you are restricted by the host, you are restricted by other plug-ins. It’s still on WordPress, it’s not like a SaaS product, or a web based program.

At that time we decided to transition into a web based program and we went into development for about five months. And when we released Webinar Ninja on April 30th and we opened the doors, and again we sold out in like 24 hours. So we knew that there was a demand in the market, and we knew that we were filling a huge need. A lot of people coming from all the other users saying they weren’t happy with it, and they were very happy to come to us, so…

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about some of the features that you have that some of — maybe like GoToMeeting does not for example.

Omar: Well, first of all GoToMeeting is $500 a month. So if you don’t have $500 [inaudible 00:39:46].

Steve: I don’t think it’s that much if you just want to have 100 people, I think it’s like $100 a month, right?

Omar: That’s true, but I mean if you are selling products, if you are doing webinars that like in order for you to really — like and this is something that you learn in the training in the Webinar Ninja is that in order for you to really capitalize on sales and be able to capitalize on something like facebook ads, you are going to want more than 100 people on your webinar. You are going to want hundreds, 300, 400, 500, somebody like — somebody that we interviewed on the podcast, the Webinar Ninja podcast, John Dumas he gets like 600 to 700 on his podcast, on his — I’m sorry on his webinars. And he is able to make 30, 40 sales on a thousand dollar product. So that’s kind of what you want to look at to make it worth your while on Facebook ads. If you are not going to do Facebook ads you still want a number of people.

So other than that, there’s a whole bunch of things like for example GoToMeeting doesn’t record your webinars, it doesn’t do evergreen webinars where you want to have like recorded webinars. There’s a whole — the functionality of it, people have to install the software on the computer, it’s not web based, their channel is clunky, it doesn’t work on Mac as efficiently as it should. And to be at their defense it’s a good product, but it’s not meant for the small business owner, it’s meant for enterprise. And it’s for people that want to save $10,000 and not go to Japan for that business meeting. That’s really what it was meant for.

And Citrix is a great company and things like that, but we decided to offer things that are more catered to our audience, which is small business owners that one on one create a thriving audience through great content, because you can run a webinar just like you’ll do for a podcast or a blog, and just teach and do open Q&A, and build your email list because people have to register for it. Or you can give demos and you can give workshops and then sell your products or your services afterwards. You can also use it for masterminds; you can do it a paid program that you want to do live.
One of our users Michael Port, he runs his royal public speaking live program, which is an online program, it’s all webinar based, they use Webinar Ninja for that, and that’s one way you can do it as well. So there’s other uses other than just like a teleconference. So we took those needs and decided to create something that’s a little bit original. One other things that really differentiate us is we wanted to make sure that your registration pages, all your pages on your webinar like your thank you page, or actual webinar page, or replay pages, looked like your brand that have your brand or your college logos, and it’s on a template.

A lot of people that use template based opt-in pages or [inaudible 00:42:26] pages it just looks like a page that everybody sees on the internet. So we actually call the live editor, which completely allows you to change every single color, every single fun, every single text media, and allows you to customize all your branding, your logos, everything on your page, and very easily and intuitively so you don’t spend hours on creating your webinars.

Steve: And this is hosted on your site then right? This is hosted…

Omar: It’s hosted on our server.

Steve: Okay.

Omar: Yeah, and everybody gets kind of a unique URL, so you can have like Steve.webinarninja.com. So you have a branded kind of URL when you promote your webinars. As well as making it super easier that’s kind of our goal to make it easy to create an effective webinar. And we include everything when it comes to email notifications; in fact we include marketing as well. So not only can you send reminders, but if you want to send an email, a campaign to people that did attend or people that did not attend, or people that attended your webinar, you can send them a separate email completely and filter people out. And you don’t really actually need, an email marketing service if you didn’t want to, if you didn’t want to use MailChimp or Infusionsoft or something like that.

Steve: Interesting, so you handle those as well, all the — okay.

Omar: As well as we do some really innovative stuff with our chats, because we are educators and we want to make sure that things are very interactive. So our chat has a very clean interface, people can hop on their mic or their camera if they like, you can do that for 10 people by simply just requesting the stage, we call it share the stage. And as an admin you can grant them access.

We also do things like you can block somebody if they are causing problems, so a lot of people they don’t know what to do with a webinar where people are just hating, and you don’t know how to kick them off. So we have a way that it can allow do that if you have to do that unfortunately if that does happen, where you have somebody who is just being a nuisance.

Steve: So the background of all of these is Google hangouts, is that right?

Omar: The video portion of it is all Google hangouts, correct.

Steve: Okay, cool, Omar you know we’ve been chatting for a while and I wish we had some more time to go into a lot greater depth in some of these things, but unfortunately our time is up. So if anyone out there is interested in starting a podcast or using Webinar Ninja, where can they find you, what if they just want to learn how to become again MBA for only 100 bucks where can they find you?

Omar: Sure, anything $100MBA related you can go 100mba.net, there is the podcast information, there are free courses, free guides, things like that. If you want to learn more about Webinar Ninja, you can go to webinarninja.co. We also have a free course there called ‘plan and launch your first webinar,’ it’s a seven day course. So if you want to take a dive in that you can go check that out.

Steve: Awesome Omar, well, thanks a lot for taking the time to come on the show.

Omar: Well, thanks, Steve I appreciate it.

Steve: Yeah, happy to have you.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I like about Omar is that his success can be directly attributed to his execution, his planning, and his overall thought process. And by taking the time to carefully construct a podcast that was clearly differentiated from the rest he managed to create an award winning show. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode88, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the email course immediately.

Once again I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best web hosts out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. And in fact I hosted mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You can get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email. You can install WordPress in just a single click, there’s an easy to use website builder, design services and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount, and once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in, so all you got to do is populate it with the products that you want to sell, and you can literally start your store in matter of hours. So simply go to Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

087: Changes You Can Make To Increase Your Conversion Rate By 50 Percent With Andrew Youderian

How To Redesign Your Ecommerce Store And Increase Conversions By 50% With Andrew Youderian

Today I’m happy to have Andrew Youderian back on the show and it’s been quite a while. For all of you who don’t remember Andrew, he was a guest on episode #2 where we discussed his dropshipped online store Right Channel Radios and his awesome blog EcommerceFuel.com.

As with any small business owner, nothing is ever stagnant. And several months ago, Andrew underwent a gigantic website redesign that not only took a lot of guts but a significant amount of money as well.

Fortunately, his efforts were worth it and today we’re going to discuss his thought processes regarding the entire project.

What You’ll Learn

  • The reason Andrew invested 5 figures into his site redesign
  • Which platform Andrew switched from and why
  • What other strategies Andrew considered before pulling the trigger
  • The process of redesigning a site the right way
  • What pain points were customers having?
  • How Andrew tracked these pain points
  • How Andrew reached a 50% increase in conversions
  • Going open source vs a fully site

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin I want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support, via chat, phone, and email, one click WordPress install, so you can literally install WordPress blog in a matter of minutes. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services. And the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to give a quick shout out to my other sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. Now as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. And everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m happy to have Andrew Youderian back on the show. And it’s actually been quite a while, and for all of you who don’t remember him, I actually had him back, way back in episode number two, where discussed his drop ship online store rightchannelradios.com, and his awesome blog at ecommercefuel.com. And as with any small business owner nothing is ever stagnant. And several months ago Andrew underwent a gigantic website redesign that not only took a lot of guts, but a significant amount of money as well.
And fortunately his effort were worth it and today we are kind of discuss his thought processes regarding the entire project, and just kind of break everything down. And with that welcome back on the show Andrew, how are you doing today man?

Andrew: Hey, I’m good Steve thanks for having on, it’s fun.

Steve: Yeah, just real quick review if people don’t remember your story, can you just give a quick 60 seconds overview about Right Channel Radio, the business model on what you sell?

Andrew: Yes, over there we sell radio equipment for off road and heavy duty vehicles. That’s a business I started maybe seven years ago 100% drop ship, well almost 100% drop ship right now. And yeah it’s kind of the where I kind of teach on ecommerce and what we still run so.

Steve: Yeah, so I’m just curious because I know the extent you published a really cool blog post about it, which I’ll post in the show notes, but it was a really huge undertaking right? Your redesigns, so what was kind of the impetus to do it, it takes a lot of guts?

Andrew: Yeah, it was a big one; it was a second one for that business, so our first one we went from design cart, do you remember design carts Steve?

Steve: Yes, of course.

Andrew: Yeah, I don’t know if anyone is still using them, but that’s where so we launched on — our first one from Zenca to Magento, and it was a really great redesigning in terms of just the conversion and usability, that was about 2011. And since then we started having some growing pains with Magento. I’m not — Steve I know you are pretty good on the technical side, and I’m good enough to just barely get in and break things more or less. I can look at PHP and kind of figure how to tweak things; I can log into Unix server and barely fumble my way around.

And some of the issues with magento need to be self hosted, some of — everyone who’s worked with them knows it’s fairly complex cart in terms of maintenance, upgrades, tweaking things, it’s never intuitive. I mean to really be able to use it while you need to get to know it well or be able, or finding and paying someone to maintain it and customize it. So I got kind of tired of trying to be an expert in that, and to having to outsource some of that stuff. That was a big thing.

Steve: Did you have a developer on staff, I’m just curious?

Andrew: No we had a contractor that worked with us that could do things. Yeah, so he could get in and make tweaks too and changes, but no one was on staff.

Steve: So it sounds like the reason why you switched was for shopping cart reasons, or was it for conversion reasons?

Andrew: It was both, I would say the two biggest reasons were — well, I would say three biggest — two biggest reasons were with the shopping cart platform. We wanted something that didn’t require as much technical work and knowledge and maintenance. And secondly we wanted something on the mobile front of things, we had over the last two years we consistently watched our conversion rate decline as mobile exploded, and we didn’t have a mobile site. So where you could also of course put just lots of responsive themes and responsive sites on magento. We wanted to implement that as well with the redesign so…

Steve: Can we just talk about mobile real quick since you brought it up, so what were the conversion rates, and what percentage of your traffic was mobile, and what has been the trend and what were the conversion rates before the switch?

Andrew: Yeah, so in terms of relative conversion rates, I think our mobile before the switch converted to maybe…

Steve: I just want to clarify too mobile I mean like smart phones as opposed to tablets.

Andrew: Right, got you, and I’m just thinking about kind of just back in the head, don’t quote me for exact numbers, but I think our mobile conversion rates was maybe like a third to a quarter if I guessed that right, before the redesign. And after the redesign we are probably at maybe closer to like 50%…

Steve: Okay, yeah, that sounds normal actually.

Andrew: Yeah, what about you, is that what you see too?

Steve: Yeah, pretty much, I haven’t actually looked at the stats for a while actually ever since that post I posted a while back. But yeah we were hardened too, and after having a mobile site we pretty much doubled our conversion rate.

Andrew: Yeah, and Steve one thing that I kind of worry about is even with — I’m kind of getting off script a little bit, I hope that’s okay?

Steve: There’s no script Andrew.

Andrew: Right, even with — even when you’ve got — yeah, both of us have done redesigns to implement a mobile theme. And even then your conversion rate on a mobile is half, right? Let’s say you’ve got a great site, it’s half of what your desktop is. And with mobile traffic continued to increase, it’s the majority of my site now I’m guessing in two or three years it makes up three quarters of our traffic. Even if you do everything right, you are still losing out like your conversion rate is trending downward in the best case scenario. Does that worry you, that worries me?

Steve: It doesn’t worry me, because what we do is we target on the desktop, so anyone who comes on the mobile site we use like dynamic re-targeting and we get them back. So a lot of people don’t purchase until they reach their desktop. They might do that at a later day, and so — and I would say like the majority of people are either logged in the facebook or some sort of google product. By just keeping them cookied, you can always show them those products later on, so I’m not terribly worried about that.

Andrew: Okay, obviously I need to start looking into this.

Steve: And not only that, there’s all these payment processing companies like sprouting up where on mobile you could just click a button and instantly check out. That’s going to happen really soon, and once that happens I’m sure all of our conversion rates will go back, so I’m not terribly worried.

Andrew: On the mobile side I think apple pay could be — I would love to see apple pay come to the need of browser versus Apps, because I think that would be huge.

Steve: Okay.

Andrew: I mean just in terms of check out right from safari on your iphone, or chrome from Google without—again well it could be on chrome, what’s apple pay, but you get my point.

Steve: Yeah, I mean if you can imagine it on your cell phone, and then you buy something and it instantly just gets built to your carrier right? Like the ideal situation.

Andrew: It would, it would be fantastic.

Steve: I don’t remember what we were talking about now Andrew, let’s see…

Andrew: It’s my fault; I got us off track, I apologize.

Steve: So mobile — okay, so we were talking about mobile, so that was one of the factors and then was your desktop conversion rate dropping as well, was there anything going on there?

Andrew: A little bit, but not a time, the lion share was in the mobile, I mean maybe it was down kind of 20% over a two or three year period, but most it was the mobile.

Steve: So you could have just bought a magento template that was responsive, right?

Andrew: I could have yes, but I feel like when you do that and maybe I made things way more difficult than they needed to be. But I feel when, you do that sometimes you miss out on some of the finer aspects of having a mobile site when it’s kind of cookie kind of approach, or maybe it works for most of them, but it’s not going to be designed exactly for your site. I wanted something given how prevalent mobile has become, that was really fine tuned for our specific theme, and our specific user experience for our customers.

Steve: So Shopify that implies that you designed a mobile site from pretty much scratch, and not a responsive theme?

Andrew: I’m sorry, it was a responsive theme.

Steve: Oh, was okay.

Andrew: Yeah, so but we did design it from scratch. So the company we worked with Shopify custom, yeah, they built it from the ground up, for what we were trying to achieve and for our site, and it was all responsive yeah.

Steve: And how much actually did you invest in this redesign?

Andrew: So we invested it was — all in it was about 50K, that’s what I put in the headline for the easy grab, and there was 30K development cost, and about 20K in staff time and things like that.

Steve: See that is no joke, like that would make me shake if I — so…

Andrew: Yeah, it was a fairly large button so…

Steve: Say when you invest 50K clearly you are going to expect a return, right? And I was just curious what — like why did you think that that was the answer, what was kind of like the straw that broke the camel’s back that you needed to do this redesign.

Andrew: Well, it’s because I just — in terms of the straw that broke the camel’s back, I think in my experience every threeish to fourish years you have to end up reiterating things, if you don’t want to become stale and really have your business starting to decay at some point. I mean that’s what I have seen at least in the recent cycle and in the past. So I knew it was either you sell the business and sell it now, but it also harder to sell a business that you’ve had — declining revenues and conversion rates for the last couple of years, because you…

Steve: I wasn’t aware of that, so revenues had been declining?

Andrew: Oh, that was an enormous project yeah; revenues were down 30% year over year in 2014.

Steve: Oh, okay, I didn’t — I missed that piece, okay.

Andrew: Yeah, I should have mentioned it at the top, but yeah, so revenues were way down and so that was all the impetus for saying that whoa, what’s the problem, well the problem was mobile on a big aspect, and we also having pin points with magento, so all of these things combined led to the redesign.

Steve: I see so basically incremental solution, you did not feel was going to solve the problem, now you need to something more drastic?

Andrew: Yeah, absolutely, especially given that we had already been like two or three years behind the curve [inaudible 00:12:32] behind the curve, but we just hadn’t done anything in that amount of time. So yeah, I just — and then it’s kind of my personality too, Steve I tend to be someone who goes and mix a ton of changes and overhaul something just to how I think it should be, in the best possible way. And then I leave it instead of just tweaking it every now and then, I leave it for three years, and then I come back and do the same thing over, I don’t know if that’s…

Steve: I’m similar, not three years though, but yeah. I kind of check in every six months or that sort of thing, but…

Andrew: If I had six months I probably made a shape, but I — I just don’t know if it’s my personality or what it is, but that’s kind of my MO for doing things.

Steve: So let me ask you this, and I have been curious about what your answer is going to be for this. Like you essentially went from one of the better open source shopping cart platforms to fully hosted. So what are your feelings on like open source shopping carts today?

Andrew: I think they are — I have nothing against open source carts, I think in a lot of regards they can be fantastic, because you have full control, you can really tweak things to give them exactly how you want them to be. They are cheaper, well it depends, upfront they’re cheaper. But magento was such a pig of a cart, I mean just trying to upgrade it once was a nightmare, we did — one of the migrations we ended up doing was actually from Magento 1.4 to 1.6, and normally you would just upgrade. But the upgrade process was so flout with problems and things that I didn’t trust, actually being stable on the back end that I just installed the fresh version of magento 1.6.1, and re-built the entire site over [inaudible 00:14:10] directed everything as opposed to upgrade it.

Steve: Oh my goodness, okay.

Andrew: Yeah, so I think open source there’s a lot to be said for it, and looking at carts like Opencart, the [total cleaner], a little more minimalistic has broaded. I think they are great, but for us I just want to really focus on the core of business, on marketing, on the team, and not so much on the tech side which is why going to a hosted such like Shoppify was something I wanted to do.

Steve: So real quick, you’ve been on magento for quite a while; did you feel like anything happened when they got acquired?

Andrew: That’s a good question, it’s — yeah it’s hard to say, I don’t think if I can point to anything, but the feel of the company definitely got more cooperate, I remember back in a while they — yeah, I don’t know…

Steve: It feels like they were focusing more on their premium enterprise product, that was my opinion, but I never had used the cart so…

Andrew: They definitely started pushing it more I think in terms of going to magento, their site it was definitely more of a focus. And for the enterprise edition it was — I think it started at 10K per year, and that was really low, most of them were targeted for 25k to 50k per year licensing fee. So yeah, definitely not something I was interested in paying for a cart.

Steve: Yeah, for sure, so let’s delve a little bit deeper into the actual process, because what you did is something that I’ve been thinking about doing for a while, but I’m just terrified of it. So let’s ignore kind of like the fully hosted open source, like the technical aspects. What were some of the main points of the redesign that you wanted to address? Was it mainly just mobile, or was it kind of aesthetics and usability as well on the desktop platform?

Andrew: Yeah, a good question. It was all of those things, so mobile was a big part of course. We wanted to rebrand to try to create a little bit more of brand sense that looked a little more professional, I think we were using a logo I created in Photoshop which was pretty ghetto. We wanted to rebrand with copy branding that would kind of go on the branding host here, and preach [ph] for a while, but of course it’s becoming so much more important in today’s world. So we wanted to create a stronger brand presence with our brand, with the copy that we had and the experience we offer customers. So that was part of it, part of it was usability.

This wasn’t necessarily the driving factor, but we wanted it to be as easy as possible for people to figure out what products worked for their vehicle, and be able to check out and also fix any usability bugs in our existing platforms. So those were some of the kind of the secondary things we were also thinking about as well.

Steve: So let’s go through some of those things in depth. So on the branding side, I’ll just tell you my observations. I noticed that you started putting your face, like did you have a lot more videos, was that the main thing that you changed, or what were some of the other branding focus, things that you did for the site?

Andrew: Yes, so we definitely — over the kind of the previous nine months leading up to the redesign we started investing more heavily in product videos, that was one. We put together a very personable about us page, about us video rather on the home page where myself and the sales manager, our front and center are taking about who we are, what we do and giving a personal guarantee that people will be happy when they purchase from us. The copy we really re-wrote all the copy for the site to make it a lot cheekier, this has a real — it’s kind of just an example on the home page. The first line you read it says are you looking for CB radio for your press, I’m sorry but you are in the wrong place.

It’s tricky, it’s funny, we — then that kind of carries through all the way from the product descriptions to the email confirmations that people get, we kind of have some really — I have had that kind of funny and cheeky. And people come along, they maybe not, maybe yeah, but they are supposed to hear it. But making those order confirmation, shipping confirmation, emails fine and interesting, so that’s kind of what we did on that front.

Steve: I actually watched that about video, and it’s actually very well done, very professional, it looks like you got someone professional to shoot it for you.

Andrew: Yeah, thanks yeah, we had a guy here on bossman actually, we looked at a little bit, he is a friend, he is — he films off-road TV series. So a lot of the — some of the stock footage, the bureau was like the vehicles going through the creek in the mud, the overhead flying shot of the land rovers. We were able to just get that footage from him which was really nice.

Steve: Yeah, I also noticed that you were wearing a Youderian branded pullover. I don’t know about you, but I don’t have any Steve Chou branded clothing, so…

Andrew: It’s funny you said that, that’s actually not my branded stuff. I have a cousin and an uncle who own a construction business, and it’s Youderian construction. I didn’t even think about it when I put it on that day, but it’s very shirt I was wearing so…

Steve: Okay, I was like, oh my god this Andrew guy is cocky, he is wearing his own branded clothing.

Andrew: He going maniac in his own video, who is this guy?

Steve: Okay, so on the usability — oh, by the way how do you measure kind of like the effects of that?

Andrew: That’s really hard; I haven’t had very much success doing that. For a while we were trying to split test product videos on pages with just using that, there’s always that optimizer. And for whatever reason we were having a lot of problems back and forth with support for a while, that the video embed code was playing also the trickery with the AB split testing java script. And we weren’t able to get good experiment running on that. So short story is that I think it’s really hard to do, it’s difficult to do.

So I don’t necessarily know if we can, we hear a lot of kind of just second hand feedback from people, but in terms of data we probably can set an experiment, but we haven’t — it’s a little tricky, and we haven’t probably done as much as we could have to really vet out those numbers.

Steve: Yes, just for a little background for the listeners, so Andrew it seems to me at least you have a video for everyone of your product almost, right?

Andrew: Not quite we have — let’s say I think we have 300ish products; we probably have videos for our top 50 or 60.

Steve: Okay, so maybe those just happen to be the ones that I was looking at. So you haven’t done any experiment to see whether the video on those products did anything to the conversion rate?

Andrew: We– no, I mean we haven’t, not in terms of hard data no.

Steve: Okay, yeah, I know I was just really curious, because I was thinking is that something that I should be doing with my online store, but …

Andrew: We get comments from people saying they like videos, that they help them, that they build rapport, anytime you can — somebody hops on and they talk, and it’s actually the shop owner and they get in front of the camera, it makes a big difference. With that I saw a guy in the [inaudible 00:20:46] he just read a bunch of his product videos. I think he had a very successful, it worked out very well for him, I’m glad that it’s a case by case basis, but yeah, I think it’s — I tend to — maybe I’m going too much on assumption here like all the people who — the daily driven people who just exclaim at [heat] spots, unless you are doing a terrible job, I think videos, it’s going to be — [inaudible 00:21:12] to find a word doesn’t really help a little bit.

Steve: Yeah, I was thinking that way too, and so in terms of usability you mentioned a couple of things earlier. You want to help more people find the right product for their vehicle, was that a problem on your previous site?

Andrew: Yeah, I didn’t even realize it was a problem until I started doing some [Ux] testing. So we were going to be doing this whole redesign, and so I thought well, if we are going to be doing for all these other major reasons I want to make sure we capture any existing usability problems, or address them at least. So prior to designing the new sites we ran a ton of usability tests. We used user testing.com which is a really cool site for $40, you can set up a task and get somebody that you send very specific guidelines for. In our case I said hey, I want someone that makes between 1600k, I want them nearly between 35 and 60 years old.

I want them to be in mail because that’s our customer demographic. And here is what I want them to do, I want them to try to find a vehicle — equipment for their, let’s say their [inaudible 00:22:13]. So you could either watch people interact with your site and try to do it. One thing we realized was that almost everybody came to our home page, now like how we just love a place to be able to put my making model, I can do that on auto part stores, why I can’t I do that here.

Steve: Okay, so that was a direct result of usertesting.com?

Andrew: You got it, yeah.

Steve: Okay, and was it just — like did you have a pretty decent sampled size, or was that just one that stood out to you?

Andrew: No, so we did, I think — I think I ran about 12 usability tests. I think maybe three or four on mobile and about eight on the desktop. Looking for different things, so it was something that came up multiple times, it wasn’t just a one day approach.

Steve: So what were some of these, you mentioned 12 tests, what were some of the different things that you were testing?

Andrew: I would have people — a lot of times I think maybe they were just two different tests that we had, but they were with different people to get a broad sample size. But I would say something like; they are coming to the site and say what do you think the site is about? Do you trust the site, why or why not? And then I would say go out and actually find a vehicle, or find the right equipment for your specific vehicle. I wouldn’t say what — I wouldn’t ask for what they were, or maybe I did, I think we did like four schedules, some of the major mix of models, and we split that up among these tests.

Go out and find the right equipment for your vehicle and then I want to see how they actually went through the site to find out what questions they had, where they hang up, and from that we made some changes to the new design.

Steve: Interesting okay, and so you didn’t send anyone to go look for parts for [inaudible 00:23:55] probably, yeah?

Andrew: No, we had somebody come in and did read our guidelines, and they had some little two wheel drive hatchback. And I got a refund on that one because it was totally what was for us.

Steve: So what were some of the other pinpoints that you noticed from this usability testing, did you use any other companies by the way?

Andrew: For usability?

Steve: Yeah.

Andrew: No just usertesting.com.

Steve: Okay, so what were some of the other pinpoints?

Andrew: Some of the other pinpoints were people who were a little bit confused about what worked with what. So we thought people said well, what — this is radio work with this, and that’s kind of our big value add even before the redesign. But trying to clarify what worked with what and make the copy a little bit easier to other products easier to understand from that standpoint. Another one was that people a lot of times they didn’t want to read all the texts, we had tons and tons of texts. But a lot of times people were scanning and just trying to get a real quick sense of what worked with what, or what the product was about.

And maybe it was because they were in the middle of the user test, and didn’t want to start to read it. But I know myself I usually don’t read huge walls of text either, so we added on all the products, we added at least two anywhere from one to three quick bullets that just summarized the product, and the high points, and the really unique aspects of that product in a very scanable fashion with then the detail coming in the text. On the shopping cart page we noticed a lot of the times people are like I don’t know when I’m going to get this, when is this going to come, I’ve no idea. So we built in a shipping engine that will actually auto detect based on their zip code where they were, and then give them a shipping options, and the delivery day, kind of like– well we stole it exactly from Amazon.

Steve: That’s cool, yeah.

Andrew: Yeah, so those are few other things that we also built in based on some of the user testing.

Steve: Hey everyone I just wanted to take a quick moment to thank FameBit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now FameBit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Now videos start as low as $50 and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before one of my guest Emmanuel Eleyae used FameBit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing, and the best apart is f you use coupon code Mywifequit at FameBit.com, you’ll automatically get $10 off. So go to FameBit.com right now and get famous You Tubers to promote your products now back to the show.

Yeah, so and I’m just curious like it sounds like you were doing a bunch of things that were kind of shopping cart [inaudible 00:26:33] right? So what was your target increase in sales, like I remember we had talked before and you had kind of this number in your head, how did you actually come up with this number?

Andrew: The number– so the number I had in my head before I was shooting for a 50% increase.

Steve: Which is huge.

Andrew: It is huge, and that’s when I saw on the last time we redesigned the website, we went from Zen Cart to Magento, maybe it just the fact that– actually I was encouraged, so we started on that. It was our old, and was just so hideous, it was awful, run before a time before like descent templates even existed, so but we had a 50% bump in that case, and so I thought we’re going to invest quite a bit more in this one, I think it’– and with the mobile aspect I think it’s part of the reason whether we can get at least 50%. So more of anything it was just a rough estimate that I kind of threw out there, and we didn’t quite get that, maybe I’m jumping ahead here Steve, but we hit right around 40% increase.

Steve: That’s crazy good.

Andrew: In conversion, based on the redesign, but it was closer to what we were hoping for.

Steve: So what do you think contributed the most to that number?

Andrew: I think it was the mobile, and we had the majority of our traffic like a doubling of our conversion rate of most of our traffic, or not most but at least roughly half of our traffic, so the biggest jump overall came from mobile for sure.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of like the usability– so I noticed from your new site there’s this nice selector where you just enter in and you make and model your vehicle, and then you’re instantly taken to certain parts that are compatible with that, right?

Andrew: Yap, you go it.

Steve: So did that make a huge difference as well, I don’t know if it’s hard for you to quantify these things?

Andrew: Yeah, that’s a good question, and that’s something that I haven’t– I need to dig into and probably spend sometime in the analytics looking at. I haven’t done as much post analysis on the reasons as I probably should have, that’s a really good question, and I don’t have a good answer for you.

Steve: Okay, so do you actually miss any features of Magento that you don’t have with Shopify and vise versa now that you’ve made the switch?

Andrew: That’s a good question, let me think about that. Any features we miss, I don’t think so, I can’t think of any– I’m sure that there’s a– I mean you obviously don’t have quite the tweakability of things if you want change something. Shopify is pretty customizable, but at the end of the day you don’t have access to the root code, you know the underlying source code for everything. But I can’t think of anything that we haven’t been able to tweak on our side, and were– be able to extend with an app that I miss from Magento.

Steve: So that kind of implies that you weren’t really doing anything super custom with Magento, right?

Andrew: We were doing some things custom, not crazy custom though. We had custom plug in, so we had a few custom things that we had developed, but for the most part no, it was a 90% stock and the extension stuff that we were running.

Steve: And just in terms of cost, I’m just a little curious how much did it cost you to run your Magento site versus what you’re paying now on Shopify?

Andrew: Yeah, so full disclosure I mean, I’m sponsored by Shopify, they’re one of the sponsors for the podcast, and so they– we probably should stay there at the top of the episode, but…

Steve: Yeah, I mean this isn’t a Shopify ad obviously, but I was just curious without whatever special dealers you might have with them like how much would have been paying as a regular user versus what you used to pay on Magento?

Andrew: Yeah, so Magento is was the hosting cost was the most expensive, and so those were about 350ish, 400 per month, we…

Steve: Oh my goodness!

Andrew: Yeah we were [inaudible 00:30:20] server, and…

Steve: Do you want me to tell you how much I pay?

Andrew: No, I don’t want…

Steve: Fifty bucks.

Andrew: Well, one of the things we were paying for Steve was Magento it’s just– I’m not a huge system admin, and there had been a couple of times in the pat where stuff went down the tubes, and I was trying to reconfigure a Unix server and pull my hair out. So we sprung for the racks based server managed hosting service level. So I would call the rack space at 4am in the morning and get someone who’s really knowledgeable about Unix could log in my box and do anything, so that’s mostly what we were paying for.

But granted it was something we needed because I think Magento had a lot of those things that we needed from time from time, so that was 400. For Shopify so we are technically on the plus plan for Shopify, it’s something that we kind of are trying out what Shopify just to check it out, get some feedback, may or may not have gone– definitely we’ve 100% gone with Shopify their kind of $200 per month plan. So that is what I would probably compare it to, plus it’s something we’re, again we’re testing it out for them, giving them some feedback on it, really geared towards probably organizations a little bit larger than us, so comparing that on the lower plan which is most what we’re having will be about $200 per month. So plus it’s like 1000…

Steve: Are you using any special plugins or?

Andrew: For Shopify?

Steve: Yeah.

Andrew: We’re using– what are we using yeah, we’re using one that helps us with– that’s a good point, so yeah we probably spent maybe $100 in plugins per month, so it will be $300 total.

Steve: So it sounds like the monthly cost is comparable mainly because you were running Magento which requires such a huge server cost?

Andrew: Right, yeah I mean yeah exactly, kind of Shopify their opportune on plus plan versus Magento it comes a little bit below.

Steve: Okay, so let’s switch gears a little bit and just talk about drop shipping in general, because you mentioned earlier that most of your products are still drop shipped on Right Channel, right?

Andrew: They are, yeah.

Steve: Are you selling anything on Amazon?

Andrew: We’re not, just because most of the stuff that we sell is stuff that other people make, and I think that’s a really hard game to play on Amazon.

Steve: Okay, and also with would your margins be kind of conducive to selling on there?

Andrew: No, they wouldn’t be, I mean I think if you’re going to be on Amazon let’s say you’re looking at 15% right off the bat for a listing fee, and our margins are– they’re north of that, but not by a crazy amount so.

Steve: So one thing I’ve noticed with a lot of people is they kind of start out drop shipping, and then they end up carrying inventory for some of their best sellers, right, have you considered moving more towards an inventory model as opposed to peer drop shipping?

Andrew: Yeah I have, I’ve looked into it, and it’s tough, because our niche for whatever case on the radio side you don’t just get big price breaks going straight to the manufacturer. I contacted them and let’s say a radio that cost us $80 to buy wholesale and drop ship, we would get it for like $75 in stock, with like a $20,000 minimum purchase.

Steve: Twenty thousand dollar minimum purchase, okay.

Andrew: Yeah crazy, so if they’re giving us a 50% price break yeah it makes a lot of sense, unfortunately it didn’t for that line. And some of the other ones too like our major antennas and some of our mounts and things going directly to the manufacturer we can buy them at the same price our wholesaler gets them, but when you look at it that the price to– the cost to open a warehouse, staff it, run it, they would, you know, they’d be just as much if not more than the savings you get on the margin side. So normally that’s one of my regrets about this business, it’s not a business that is one you can scale up really well with additional capital, because you don’t just get the price breaks unfortunately.

Steve: Interesting, so they’re kind of encouraging people to drop ship their products then with that pricing?

Steve: Yeah a little bit at least my firm yeah, maybe not increase them and drop ship, but it sure isn’t a whole lot of incentive to buy direct from the factories.

Steve: Is that just something that’s kind of unique to your industry probably you think, or have you found that other people that you’ve encountered whether be on your forums or what not have gotten significant price breaks from carrying inventory?

Andrew: I think that’s fairly unique to this niche, I think in most cases there is a decent case to be made for being able to bring inventory in-house, get those price breaks and be able to increase your margins, but yeah so I think that’s something that not across all niches, but I think it’s more from the not that’s the case you can do it.

Steve: Okay and you actually run one of the more successful drop shipping stores that I know of, so how do you– like what’s your strategy for just continuing to grow your shop, and how do you made it so successful this far?

Andrew: Yeah, in terms of the really– the success aspect I think it comes down to the niche, you have to be really careful about finding a niche where you can add a lot of informational value, where there’s a lot of friction post or pre purchase, where there’s a lot of accessories and things that people are confused about what to buy, and so we’re really acting as a guide on what different components to buy. If you try to drop ship one or two high tech priced items that’s really-really hard to do unless there’s really strong pricing guidelines in place like a map pricing from the manufacturer.

So in terms of continuing to grow it that’s when something that has been a little bit difficult in the later years thinking through how to push past kind of the low seven figure mark has been– I mean we kind of stalled out at different points around that right around the million dollar mark. And so it’s tricky, it’s a niche, I think that’s something that people in different businesses– niche businesses, so is the question like well are we stalling out because we’re really getting to a point where the additional value we get in terms of what we put back into the business you hitting a point of diminishing returns, or are we just doing marketing wrong and then I think that’s a tough question to answer sometimes.

Steve: Let me ask you this, are your products– can they be found on Amazon?

Andrew: Some of them can, yeah I’d say a lot of them can yeah.

Steve: And so in terms of pricing what are you doing– are you matching Amazons prices, or are you lower, are you higher?

Andrew: We’re definitely higher, we definitely do a premium or kind of a premium site for the niche, so we’re definitely if at or above Amazon pricing.

Steve: Okay and so do you– it’s probably really hard to tell, but has Amazon affected your business in any way since they sell some of the same products?

Andrew: Yeah, a great question. I think they have, I think Amazon has affected pretty much anyone’s business selling stuff that’s just a commodity which is more or less what we sell. It’s hard to say for sure but yeah, I think we’ve definitely been a force in terms of making growth a little more challenging in the coming years, and the last couple of years and also making customers more price sensitive too.

Thankfully we tend to be pretty good about getting stuff out the door and getting it delivered, pretty much anything over $75 ships for within– it gets two to three days free delivery for our customers, which is nice because that’s a way we can kind of competing against Amazon even from non prime members which is great. But yeah, people– hard to say for sure, but I think it’s definitely been a force that we’ve had to deal with.

Steve: Let me actually rephrase that question a little bit. So what are some of the things that you are doing to kind of address Amazon?

Andrew: I think the two things we do, I think the one thing we do the most is just try to really specialize and make sure that people know that if they buy from us, they are going to get components that are much more likely hopefully guaranteed to work together, because amazing is great at carrying internal products. It’s really bad at being able to at least for most products, really spend a lot of time and dive deep into the specifics of one product line. That’s the only reason we are able to stay in business Steve and be able to make money, is because we know these better than anyone else.

And secondly, there’s friction in purchasing on Amazon versus our site. So our equipment and our packages to outfit your vehicle with a radio, you need like five or six different components, and you are [inaudible 00:38:31] radio, media all the stuff. You shop at our site where it’s all geared towards that, you know everything works together and you’ve got the shopping cart, five items or maybe you’ve got a package we’ve put together that has five items for this funky skews on it, which may or may not match up with the skews that the manufacturer uses. You go to Amazon and try to price compare this, it’s a royal pain. Maybe you can’t do it, but maybe you can’t find a couple of them, you can’t find similar ones, the names are different, you are not sure if they are exactly the same product.

So yeah you can go over and compare a different shop, and maybe get three quarters of the basket in there, but it’s a pain, it takes time. You’re less certain it’s going to work, and you may not be able to find the exact comparables. And that friction makes it I think more likely for people to stick with us and buy from us. Personally I would rather pay 10% more, or 50% more to buy from somebody who knows exactly what they are talking about, and not have to spend half an hour hoping I get the right thing, because whatever value add is, people getting a box, being able to install it, and know they are not going to have to spend two weeks or a bunch of time returning equipment that doesn’t work.

Steve: Yeah I know. I totally agree with your assessment. I find that Amazon is actually a really lousy place to shop for anything that’s even remotely complicated, right? I remember I was shopping for some computer parts the other day, and I wasn’t sure the compatibility, I actually had to go offsite, because Amazon is just a listing of products. So I almost feel like in order to be successful in drop-shipping, you almost have to go into something that’s a little more complicated, would you agree or?

Andrew: Oh absolutely. You have to go into something, you got to have a niche where you have some kind of value added information related if you are drop-shipping. Or the only other two things I think makes sense is if you can get an exclusivity which is hard to get for drop-shipping, or if you have a company that– or a product or a manufacturer that maintains really stringent like MAT pricing. So they put a– they have a floor on their pricing. If that’s the case, then you can get something that– but even then still you still want something that has a little bit of complexity or confusion around it, because the only way you are going to beat out Amazon is to be able to be someone who people trust more, you provide more information in and you’re as the expert.

Steve: Let me ask you this question, do you find that the manufactures themselves that you source products from, are they selling directly on Amazon?

Andrew: No, they are not. Thankfully they are not. If they start selling directly on Amazon, that’s going to be– yeah that’s definitely going to be a huge problem. So at the moment, they are not. They are selling to people who sell directly on Amazon, but they themselves aren’t selling on Amazon. I think they do that because they don’t want to alienate their distributor network and their retailers. But at the moment they are not.

Steve: And I’ve also noticed that if you try to source anything from the US, vendors tend not to like the fact that you are going to just list them on Amazon. I don’t know if you’ve noticed that?

Andrew: Yeah, I mean it’s because it kills– most of the people who list on Amazon are going to kill the price, they are going to just drive the price into the ground. We actually– one of our major radio manufactures recently just came out with the policy that they are not allowing any of their third party retailers to sell on Amazon anymore, because they were taking the product that previously had a pretty descent price margin, and you get all these people– it’s the same problem you have at drop-shipping.

You get all these people, they buy much of stuff, throw on Amazon FBA, and there’s not a lot of incremental cost in terms of fulfilling those orders apart from their refunds and things that come back, and so the price just gets driven into the ground. So that’s why I think why manufacturers don’t like it.

Steve: So in this day and age with all these different things going on, like how would you approach a drop-ship vendor to convince them to sell you their products in this day and age? Are you still there Andrew?

Andrew: Yeah.

Steve: Does that question make sense?

Andrew: A little bit, did you mean in terms of approaching like a new drop-ship supplier?

Steve: Yeah, approaching a new drop-ship supplier with nothing. Let’s say you didn’t have Right Channel Radios, and you started out with nothing, like what would be some of the things that you would say to convince a drop-ship vendor to actually even drop-ship for you?

Andrew: Is this someone that is already drop-shipping for other people?

Steve: Yes.

Andrew: So that’s going to be relatively easy I think. I think if they are drop-shipping for other people you just have to come across as not someone who’s going to waste their time more or less. Usually a lot of times, it’s is just as easy as saying, “Hey can I drop-ship for you?” They say, “Yeah great, fill this application, we are good to go.” If it’s not, if they have a little bit hesitancy, one thing you can do is say, “Hey, do you mind if– I’d love to drop-ship for you.

I know you maybe get people that come in here and tire kickers that waste your time and they never end up buying anything. Here’s a check for a $1000, cash it, put on credit for me. So I mean I’m guaranteeing that I’m going to give you some business, and then for my first thousand dollars in orders just debit it against that credit that you have.” And then you let people know that you are serious, that you’re actually are going to do business with them, and you need to be, but it’s a way that can work.

Steve: That’s a very good tip Andrew. Cool. So going forward actually, I was just curious, would you be recommending people go into drop-shipping, or other means?

Andrew: No I mean it’s– personally I’m starting to look into– we were talking right before we got on about some of the stuff we are developing right now that’s a proprietary, that’s our unique products. That’s where I’m headed personally where I’m looking to. I think you can definitely of course still make money with drop-shipping. Our radio site is still our bread and butter site, Right Channel Radios, but I think it’s getting the niches for– that drop-shipping make sense for, and what’s viable are getting smaller and smaller. They still exist, but they are getting harder and harder to find. The risk to reward ratio is also a little bit lower.

We talked about Steve, I can’t really damp capital into this businesses and scale up. You are kind of limited. It’s a great lifestyle business. I guess I have someone else. In terms of lifestyle, I run this thing from anywhere, I don’t have inventory, it’s great. It’s fantastic lifestyle business. In terms of growing and really scaling it from building a much larger business, it’s a little bit trickier. So my focus in the future is on a proprietary line, and I think drop-shipping can…

I think for a long time still it will be a great way to supplement our existing product line. So if we go out and start developing our own line of something of products, it’s hard and especially as a smaller ecommerce entrepreneur to go and develop your hundred proprietary skills. That’s tough especially if they are really unique. You develop a dozen or half a dozen and those are really valuable, and you supplement those with drop-shipped items that can really help complement your offering. That’s a nice little marriage in my opinion.

Steve: Cool, man, hey Andrew we’ve been chatting for quite a while now. I want to be respectful of your time. I also want to give a plug for you, eCommerceFuel live which is Andrew’s conference which is coming up. I will be there and a whole bunch of other people going to be there that are all vetted. I think your way of requirements is like 100k in revenues or something like that?

Andrew: Yeah, minimum 100k in ecommerce revenue, or be a professional on this space.

Steve: Yes. So it’s a very great conference. I highly recommend that you guys check it out. I don’t want to do the plug for you Andrew. But where can people find you?

Andrew: You are doing great.

Steve: It’s all solicited by the way, I’m not sponsored by Andrew in any way.

Andrew: Well thanks Steve. We would love to. We’ve got about 15 tickets left. It’s capped at a hundred people, we try to keep a more [inaudible 00:46:17] environment, and if you are interested you can learn more, see the video from last year. We should have the full agenda for speakers and the breakout sessions up in the next couple of days here at live.eCommerceFuel.com, and you can see all the details there.

Steve: Sounds good Andrew. Hey thanks a lot for coming back on the show man.

Andrew: Steve, it’s always fun, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I like about Andrew is that he’s constantly working on improving his store. He runs one of the most successful pure drop-ship stores that I know. I’m actually in the process of redesigning my own shop as we speak, and I hope it gets the same results. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode86, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-Day-Mini Course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information, and sign up right there on the front page.

Once again I also want to thank BigCommerce for sponsoring this episode. BigCommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in, so all you got to do is populate it with the products you want to sell and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to BigCommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is BigCommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhosts out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. And in fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email, you can install WordPress in just a single click. They’ve got an easy to use website builder, design services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So go to HostGator.com/Mywifequit to redeem the discount, once again that’s HostGator.com/Mywifequit to save 30%. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

086: How To Start Your Own Profitable Virtual Winery With Kale Anderson

086: How To Start Your Own Profitable Virtual Winery With Kale Anderson

Today I’m really happy to have Kale Anderson on the show. My wife has known Kale for quite a while now but I met him for the first time recently at a wedding where I learned that he owns and runs his own winery.

And what’s cool is that he runs his winery without having to grow his own grapes or own any of his own equipment.

Kale’s Winery was named one of 4 wineries to watch in 2014 by Wine Spectator magazine. He’s been featured in Wine Enthusiast, the Chicago Tribune, Cuvee corner and countless other publications.

What’s cools is that up until this point, I thought that it wasn’t possible to create your own winery without an enormous up front investment.

Listen in to learn the steps it takes to create your own winery.

What You’ll Learn

  • What it takes to start your own winery
  • How much initial investment does it take and how does one begin?
  • How do the economics of wine work
  • How much does it cost to produce a bottle and how much profit can you make per bottle
  • How to price a bottle of wine
  • The best way to market a winery

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email.

Now before I begin I want to give a quick shout out to my sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. And everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support, via chat, phone, and email, one click WordPress install, and easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services. And the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m really happy to have Kale Anderson on the show. Now my wife has actually known kale and his wife Ranko for quite a while now. But I met him recently at a weeding where I learned that he actually owns and runs his own winery. And what’s cool is that he runs his winery without having to grow his own grapes or own any of the equipments. So in effect he kind of has like a virtual winery. Now Kale Wines which is the name of his company was actually named one of the four wineries to watch in 2014 by Wine Spectator magazine.

He’s been featured in Wine Enthusiast, the Chicago Tribune, Cuvee Corner, and countless other publications. Now up until this point, I actually thought that it was not possible to create your own winery without an enormous upfront investment. And I’m really eager to hear, to learn the steps that it takes to create your own winery, and with that welcome to the show Kale, how are you doing today man?

Kale: I’m doing great, thanks to you, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, Kale, so give us a quick background, and how you decided to create your own winery.

Kale: Yeah, well it’s something that I have wanted to do for a while ever since I got into the wine industry. So I ended up going to UC Davis, this is back in 1997, thinking that I was going to be a pre-med, and I was discovering the [inaudible 0:04:16] program. And I wanted to — I got into the wine industry after I joined some tasting groups and went on finding out that I had a good talent, and I had some passion to go travelling and learn about the wines around the world. So I embarked on this in 2000 — well, pretty much in 2001 I met some people that were wine makers — or they were in the financing of wine for wineries.

And they had their own little brands and I thought, I always assumed that you would either have to own your own winery, or own your own land or your own vineyard to produce your own wine. But that was not the case, and after seeing this model done and succeed in a few different cases, I knew I wanted to have my own eventually. So it’s been a long term goal for a while, but in 2008, my wife and I embarked on the whole journey together here, and now it’s a full time job.

Steve: Okay and I just want the listeners to know is Kale is actually the director of wine making, is that right?

Kale: Correct.

Steve: For a winery, and he kind of does this on the side with his wife, which I find really cool, because it’s kind of similar to our story. So Kale I admitted to you early that I actually knew very little about wine, but and I may ask you a couple of stupid questions, so please bear with me.

Kale: No worries.

Steve: Let’s start from the beginning, because I know nothing or very little about the wine making process. So what does it take to start your own winery, can we kind of start from the basics, like let’s say someone else who is listening wants to start their own winery, what do they need to do?

Kale: Well, you need to get all your licenses, permits, and all that kind of stuff in order. Making an alcoholic product obviously there’s a lot of bureaucratic red tape and what not, to get started, but it takes a little bit of knowhow, where to find things, and where to go and stuff like that. There are actually classes that you can take about this, like in [inaudible] [00:06:35] they have this extension and what not, I know that [inaudible 00:06:38] state also has a program– an extension program as well. But we knew we didn’t — we weren’t able to purchase our own land or plant our own vineyard, and we don’t have the capital to build our winery.

So what we did was we started a — we found a winery partner and started an alternating proprietorship, which is the license that you get through the TTB and the ABC in California. And I went through the whole interview process and…

Steve: Can you describe what that is actually, alternating proprietorship?

Kale: Yeah, alternate proprietorship is basically a wine making license, but you can have that license without owning your own winery, you can lease space in other wineries that have free space. Those wineries that have free space are called custom crash wineries. And they house multiple alternating proprietors who utilize all the equipments, and basically share the equipment to make their wines.

Steve: It sounds like someone is mowing their lawn back there.

Kale: Yeah, oh, yeah, let me close the door.

Steve: Okay.

Kale: Is that better?

Steve: Yeah, it’s better.

Kale: Okay.

Steve: Okay, so these custom crash wineries, they are kind of like places where they all have the equipment all ready to go, and you just need to kind of lease some time for this equipment?

Kale: Yeah, exactly, I mean a lot of this equipment is — cost out tens of thousands of dollars, sometimes hundreds of thousands of dollars, or even millions. But most of the year, nine months out of the year a lot of this really expensive equipment is sitting idle. The way that a lot of wineries, people who buy larger wineries, they pay the bills is to lease free space in their facility to small people like myself, and other alternating proprietors to make the most use out of all their capital. So there’s definitely kind of a partnership going on, and finding that partnership I would say is probably one of the most important pieces there.

Steve: Okay, and then what about in terms of the grapes and all that?

Kale: Yeah, that’s the other really important relationship to have, I mean you need to know what you want to make, you need to know where you want to get it from, and you need to build a relationship with growers who sell their grapes. So I built a network of relationships over the years working for different wineries in Sonoma and Napa counties. And met a lot of the growers in that area, and knew what I wanted to make. So when I started Kale Wines focusing on Syrah Grenache and Morvendre [ph] mainly those three varieties, I knew I had a little book of growers to call who might want to sell me a few tones here and there, I just got started.

Steve: Okay, actually I’m just really curios how much initial investment did it take for you to start your winery?

Kale: I mean it was — gosh, it was probably a total of, over two years probably $20,000.

Steve: That’s not much at all actually.

Kale: Which is not much at all, and we started — we knew a lot of processes, that were going to take a long time and we read these processes, we started quickly. And in 2008 another thing that prompted me to start the business was, it’s a little bit of a story here, so little background. I was the assistant wine maker at Cliff Lede vineyards in Napa in Stags Leap District. And I was thinking of taking a position elsewhere as a wine maker, and then the owner of Cliff who is a fantastic guy, I worked for him for eight years.

But at the time he asked me like, okay what is it — what do you want to do long term, and what would make you want to stay here? I was like, okay, well one of my long term goals is to start my own wines. And he said, okay, well if you starting an alternating proprietorship you can use that little space in the back of the cave that isn’t being used right now, and make your wine, and I will be your custom crush partner, and that was part of my compensation. I had to pay him a penny per year to use that just the back of the winery that wasn’t being used.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Kale: And that’s how I got my start, and like any business it’s a lot about relationships and that’s really what got Kale Wines started. Again he knew that I wasn’t interested in making wines that would be in direct competition with the ones I was making for him. They are at different price points, made out of different varieties, at the time they’re being made from fruit in different counties. So there was no conflict of interest.

Steve: So let me ask you this, what’s the advantage then of having your own grapes, or you growing your own grapes, as opposed to just having the freedom to just buy grapes from local growers?

Kale: Basically whether you want to invest in real estate or not, I mean that’s really when it comes down commercial real estate, agricultural real estate. And obviously we are not building equity, or building value in real estate when we are doing our own grapes. But we also like that flexibility that it affords us where if things don’t work out, or turn out the way that we wanted them to, we can move quickly into using fruit from a different vineyard. So it’s a more of a short term commitment rather than a long term commitment.

Steve: Yeah, it just seems like it’s a lot more flexible doing what you are doing as opposed to growing your own grapes, where you are kind of limited by geography and what you can grow right?

Kale: Right and it’s a big risk no doubt, and a big capital investment, I mean it’s a different part of the wine making industry, and it’s just not a part that we are ready to dive into yet, just because we don’t have — mainly because we don’t have the capital.

Steve: Yeah, I know that make sense. So what equipment do you need to get started? So you mentioned your boss was actually your crushing partner?

Kale: Yeah, so he was — I was able to start my alternating proprietorship at the winery that I was working at. And in my spare time, make my own wine on the side in the spare space, in the winery, that we helped him build in fact. It was a brand new winery and the winery needed to be as large as the ten year plan, in the first five years that — not the entire winery wasn’t being fully utilized. And they weren’t totally comfortable with just bringing in people that they weren’t familiar with, so offering some space to me was really — it was a win-win situation.

Steve: And let me ask you this, and since I don’t know a whole lot about wine it’s probably going to sound like a stupid question, but when you are trying to produce a wine, like there’s like thousands and thousands of different wine and wine makers out there right? So when you’re deciding how to formulate your wine, like what are some of the strategies that are involved in creating a wine that’s going to be popular?

Kale: Just being inspired, the Syrah Grenache and morvendre ph] or — really inspired wines were the wines that originally got me into the wine industry in the first place. When I was at Davis, I wasn’t even 21 yet, I joined some tasting groups. I took an introductory class to wine making which was great, because it satisfied all the sort of the requirements, like scientific requirements, writing requirements, kind of on the whim and for fun. And then I realized it’s something I could really get interested in. I joined a bunch of tasting groups.

And the first tasting group that I went to that really got me inspired was a tasting called Syrah Around the World. So all the wines are brown bagged and numbered, lettered A through F and we had to rate all the wines blinded and take notes on them. And then kind of add up everyone scores in the room, and tabulate everything and figure out which ones everyone liked. I remember that taste was really hard for me, because I had a tough time picking out which ones that I liked because they are all so different.

One was Shiraz from Australia, another one was Syrah Grenache blend from the [inaudible 00:16:21] area in southern France where they’ve been growing Syrah for a long time, Syrah Grenache as well as some domestic ones. I think there is one from [inaudible 00:16:33]. And the most fascinating thing to me about it was that the wines were so different, but they were from the same variety namely Syrah, and it really proved to me there was something to [inaudible 00:16:49] where the wine really does reflect where it’s grown.

Steve: Let me ask that question in a different way. Was there some sort of business related like tasting that you did to know that a wine was going to sell? So for example, like my mum for example loves drinking wine but she knows nothing about it. She likes wines of a certain taste which may not conform to like what the award winning wines are. So when you are deciding to create a wine, do you kind of do tastings based on what the masses want to drink, or do you kind of go based on your own personal palate.

Kale: Well for my own project, it was purely passion. And it started so small where if I couldn’t sell the wine over time, we’d probably be able to drink it all.

Steve: Okay.

Kale: So it kind of started as you know, hey I’m making something that I really—that I want to drink, and we’ll just see where it goes from there. And then, we made 200 cases in 2008. And then when we started finding that– we started a little wine club, and selling out through mainly through our website. And then we just started making more and more. And then we got in front of some critics, and in front of some distributors that really liked it.

So it just kind of taken off from there. It started as a passion project, making something that I loved drinking, where my upfront investment wasn’t so much that I was going to be out of a lot of money if it didn’t work out, so it kind of started there but then it kind of blossomed into something else down the line and now I’m making 800, I think this year I’m going to making around 1000 cases, and now we have distributors in other states as well. So that is where it blossomed from. I mean it was not a really targeted kind of market driven research panel, or anything like that to drive what I wanted to make. It was more out of passion. That being said, that’s what I– we do that for the larger wineries that I worked for, for sure.

Steve: Okay, and let’s just talk a little bit more about selling the wines. So how has distribution work? So in your first year you made what, 200 cases. How did you sell that?

Kale: So we made 200 cases. In this case I was making red wine. It takes around 24 months from the day that you bring the fruit into the winery until you have the finished product, so it wasn’t until 2010 that we had a finished product with the label that was legal to sell.

Steve: Wow. Okay.

Kale: So we didn’t have anything to sell until 2010. And then at that time we simply, through friends and family, we ended up selling almost all of it. But in the meantime we had saved about the same amount in 2009 about the same amount in 2010. And then we realized that we could sell it very easily, and we weren’t taking as much library as we wanted to, and for ourselves. We started making more wine in 2011 we made about 200 cases, but in 2012 we started upping our production a little bit little by little. In 2015 we’ll be making a lot more because we got some really nice, like I said some really nice pricing. Some distributors are really interested in carrying it in their respective states.

Steve: So there’s friends and family for that initial batch. I should back up real quick. So you have to plan two years in advance based on what your inventory you think is going to be?

Kale: Yeah, it’s tough.

Steve: Yeah that is tough.

Kale: Yeah and talking about scalability. It is a slow moving industry, no doubt where you know if– we knew we had, in 2010, we had a significantly more demand for our product than we had when we decided to make more wine in 2012, years had gone by. It’s slowly– it’s been a slow moving process, but I think kind of growing organically slowly like this is– there’s a way that we want to do it, so we don’t have to get any investors involved really.

Steve: So if you decided to make 200 cases in 2008, what did you do in 2009 for example?

Kale: Well, like I said, it took us $10,000 over two years. We spent $10,000 in 2008, and we spent $10,000 in 2009. 2010 we sold the 2008 to basically float the 2010 investment in the grapes.

Steve: Okay. I think I understand.

Kale: Yeah so that– getting started was tough. There is capital investment, no doubt and there’s kind of– so the red wine, a two year layer of until you get sellable products.

Steve: So you mentioned that you sold to friends and family in the beginning. But where did the other demand come from, because you wouldn’t increase production based on just friends and family purchases, right?

Kale: No. It just kind of– it just went through mainly word of mouth, and then we started a website and then we increased our social media presence. Before we were only using Facebook. Now we are using LinkedIn as well as Twitter, and Instagram, and that kind of stuff.

Steve: Interesting. Let’s talk about that. What’s working the best for you?

Kale: Well, what seems to be working the best for us right now is really, it still comes through just friends and family. Our friends, our friends of friends—our friends will share a bottle of wine that they purchased from us with one of their friends, and tell them our story and then they’ll go online find us, however they do it whether that’s directly through the website, or through goggling us or on Facebook and see just ads. So most of them are—most of the people who have joined our mailing list have heard the wine somewhere and seeked us out, and joined our list and our repeat buyers year after year.

So I don’t know. It’s hard to say exactly where everyone’s come from. Most of everything has come through word of mouth. I mean we also got a really nice bump when we got some nice scores from the Wine Spectator and the Wine Enthusiast. We immediately kind of see a rush of, kind of collectors to all of our channels.

Steve: How does one get in those publications?

Kale: It’s by submitting samples. It’s a relationship again. I knew [inaudible 00:24:32] who was friends with one of the writers, and then there was a soft introduction, and then sent some samples out. They were able to taste it when they were doing their domestic grown issue, and they ended up liking my wine. You know, we got some nice scores. I think in the Spectator we got them to 92 and in Enthusiast I think we got up to 92 I believe, and some other publications up to 94.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Kale: You know so it’s just been kind of it’s been a slow growth, it’s hard to say what method ass worked for the best, but I think like a holistic approach through as many channels as possible has probably helped us the most. We’re still getting better at you know making sure that we’re taking care of our customers; we have customers who are hard core collectors. We have customers who are friends of friends and discovered us through social media.

We have customers who have met us at a wine maker dinner, or at a tasting, or they have read about us in publication, or like we have people who stumbled you know they were looking for a Kale recipe rather than go on Google, and it’s that way. So we have also– and trying to make all of our different customers uniquely satisfied is you know it’s been a challenge but it’s something that we’re getting better at it.

Steve: Have you purchased any ads, or is it all been kind of organic?

Kale: It’s all been organic.

Steve: Okay.

Kale: We’ve never purchased an ad.

Steve: Okay. And you mentioned an email list, how do you convince people to sign up for you email list?

Kale: Well, most people who sign in for our wine club list are people who have tasted our wines before.

Steve: I see.

Kale: You know either at a tasting, or you know some function or through restaurants, so now were distributing in restaurants you know mainly fine restaurants in northern California. People have it at the restaurant and be like wow they really like it, and then they’ll go online generally through our social media channels to find us, and then get on our list that way.

Steve: Hi everyone I just wanted to take a quick moment to thank famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now Fame bit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing with over 15000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Now video starts as low as $50, and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emanuel Eleyae used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code ‘my wife quit’ at fame bit.com, you will automatically get $10 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: How does one get a wine in a restaurant, do you just kind of go door to door to find restaurants, or what’s the strategy there?

Kale: I mean the short answer is yes, but what we decided to do is I get a broker in Northern California to help us with that. We were– we did start doing that ourselves, and we realized very quickly that that was going to take up simply too much time and were going to need some help from people who already had contacts at these nice restaurants.

That’s where our broker came in [inaudible 00:28:33] from marketing, you know they have twelve sales representatives around northern California who have contacts at the best restaurants in their respective regions, and generally speaking it’s either them taking the sample to them by themselves, or having myself or Ranko kind of meet them somewhere to introduce a [inaudible 00:29:01] or a general manager who I will explain the wine to our wines to see if it fits in with their wine program.

Steve: Okay. So are you in any retailers and when you were deciding whether to go to the restaurant or the retailer route, what was the decision making process like?

Kale: Well we like to keep; we like to think of our website as our retail.

Steve: Got it. Okay.

Kale: You know we really like to have our own culture, or our own community I guess. That’s online and that’s the retail that we generally like to work with. I think people are, when they are introduced to a wine that when they are out a nice dinner at a nice restaurant, that seems to be the best way for us to kind of introduce customers that are looking for the wines that we are producing.

Steve: Okay and then you mentioned a whole bunch of things about a wine club, and tastings, how does all that take place when you don’t have a physical space?

Kale: That’s a great question. Up until a month ago we did not have a tasting room, so there was no place for people to discover us and taste the sample of our wines. But that just changed last month. We’ve decided to partner up with a new tasting room, a collective tasting room at the Oxbow District in Napa called the Wine Thief. Basically five small producers like myself we got together, and decided to start a collective tasting room. You know basically it’s an equity partnership between two of the vendors [ph] as well as one of the land owners. But there are five vendor partners, and I guess nine brands that are at the tasting room where people can go discover our wines without us being there. This is another big step for our business. Another investment that we are making now that were making more wines so.

Steve: So that’s– so foot traffic random people will come up to the tasting room and then experience your wines?

Kale: Yeah they can so you know the tasting room is open from eleven till seven. You know there’s the Oxbow area; it’s a lot of open shops recently to the Ferry buildings in San Francisco, big tourist destination now in the sea in Napa. You know they can walk around discover you know some amazing food, you know amazing olive oil and now you know amazing wines, like my own. The partners that we have over at the Wine thief and taste some of our wines to see if they are interested in our wines, because our wines are unique they are not normal.
Maybe the most normal variety coming out of Napa is cabernet sauvignon, and then the most common variety being made red wise in Sonoma county is pinot noir. We make neither of those types of wines, so people wouldn’t know they were like [inaudible 00:32:32] so this is– I think this is going to be a big step — Syrah Grenache and Morvendre can be absolutely amazing from Sonoma and Napa, just that other varieties have dominated over the past 20 years.

Steve: So I’m just curious how the economics work here. So if you partner up with a tasting company, how does everyone get paid, and what are the economics like for a bottle of wine?

Kale: We don’t have the same margins that we have by selling direct. We basically pay a monthly lease fee and a percentage of sales. They have a done a built out and the stuff, the tasting room, and they get a portion of the sale. And that’s how we are — that’s how the economics work there with the collective tasting room.

Steve: Are they allowed to price the wine whatever they want?

Kale: No, so that’s where it gets — where we have a little bit more control of where a collective tasting room I think is better than a lot of other situations. There’s five different [inaudible 00:33:50] that are partnered in the space, and it’s kind of understood that they are going to price it how we want to price it. And they are going to take care of our brand the way that we want to take care of them, and it’s great.

They have a lot of — they have several amazing stuff where we can train them on our wines, the nuances of what we do, and what makes us different. And everyone is — the owners of the collective are also [vetnors]. So they know what the other vetnor partners are looking for. And that means a lot of collaboration.

Steve: So how do you decide how to price a bottle of wine, I’ve always been curious?

Kale: Yeah, I mean we want to make sure that the best way to get our product is to buy directly from us, directly through our wine clubs. So we make sure that a bottle of our wine is more expensive at a restaurant, maybe less expensive at the vetnor’s collective. And then the least expensive directly through our wine club, and how that would be a benefit — excuse me, a benefit to be in our wine club. And it will vary from product to product, and different people will do it in different manners, but generally speaking that’s the tiered way, because exactly the percentage is kind of an ongoing conversation I guess that you could say.

Steve: Let me ask you that question in a different way, do you base the cost based on what you think the demand is going to be, or is it based on how much it costs you to produce it, like what goes into the pricing?

Kale: It starts with the cost, our cost of goods and…

Steve: Can I get an idea of how much it costs to produce a bottle of wine for you?

Kale: Yeah, yes, so our wine will cost let’s say our red wine on average would cost us $22 per bottle given the years, it fluctuates year to year given the season. And then out at the Wine Thief our wines are priced at $45 a bottle, and $65 a bottle. Now you will also — you’ll find the same bottles at restaurants in the Napa area for $69 a bottle and — gosh maybe 80, sorry $95 a bottle. And then if you go into a restaurant outside of California you will find our wines on list for over $100 a bottle. And that has to do mainly with — that the only way they were able to get our wines into other states is by partnering with the distributor in other states, and they take a chunk of the sale again.

Steve: Okay, so this is a lot like traditional retail, right? It sounds like you double the price for the store, and then it gets doubled again for I guess the consumer which would be considered like a restaurant, is that like it?

Kale: That’s pretty rough, but for a small producer like myself that’s probably really common.

Steve: Okay.

Kale: And then like I said it’s very tricky because your cost of goods is constantly fluctuating with the season. So you are really kind of taking an average if you will of previous vintages, or even your current vintage to try to figure out where your price needs to be. Now obviously market forces will also dictate pricing when your product has been out there longer, or you are working with distributors in other states, you get a lot of pushback, from the partners that you are working with, about where they think that the pricing should be.
Steve: Let me ask you this question in a different way, it’s funny because when you are tasting wines and stuff sometimes the price can affect the taste in an indirect way. So I was just wondering if ever you decide to price something higher just to increase the perceived value of your wine, does that make sense?

Kale: Yeah, it makes sense, but it’s not something that Kale Wines does. Our wines are already priced fairly with respect to other larger wines, they are priced fairly high. Our cost of good is significantly higher than a lot of larger wineries that have had their wineries either for a long time, or they own the vineyards or what not.

So our cost of goods is fairly high relatively speaking in the world of wine to our price. So there is obviously when you get larger there’s efficiencies of scale that we’re competing, but we are making small wines handmade that are not competing with grocery store wines at all hopefully, yeah.

Steve: So just curios how do you get people to join your wine club?

Kale: Just through relationships, I mean we just got back, today is Monday the July 13th, we just got back from a weekend in [inaudible 00:39:58] we put our wines at the village at Square Valley for the– at food and wine festival this weekend. And we had a little booth, and we poured our wines for people who purchased to take it, who were vacationing at Square Valley in the summer time. We made some friends there, and they tried the wines, and they wanted to get on our mailing list. So that’s one way that we’ve built our wine club. But like I said some people saw us just online, or through social networking or tasting that at a restaurant.

Steve: Okay, so just some logistical questions here, when you take online orders are you allowed to ship alcoholic beverages?

Kale: Yeah, so with our alternating proprietorship and the licenses that we’ve gotten from the TTB which is the national organization that regulates alcohol beverages. And we also have to get okayed, in every individual state that we ship alcoholic beverages to. So yeah, I mean there’s a lot of — we have to get licenses in every single state that we ship to.
And we are able to ship to every single state now. But we weren’t when we started out, and again it’s — that was a capital investment that we decided to make, when we started realizing that some of our really important members were from outside of California.

Steve: So I’m just really curios also are you familiar with Gary Vaynerchuk?

Kale: Yes.

Steve: So I was just curious what your strategy is for marketing your wines going forward, because you know he has wine library TV, right?

Kale: Right.

Steve: Going forward I mean word of mouth will only take you so far, so I was just curious what some of your other avenues are going to be. It sounds like you are already doing shows, you have your email list, you got word of mouth going, what’s the next step?
Kale: Well, this tasting, this collective tasting room is a new big step for us, we’ve never had anyone else other than myself and my wife going out and representing us I guess. Now we just signed up a distributor in Hawaii to distribute our wines in Hawaii. The wines are going to be distributed hopefully in Southern California very soon. And distributed a little bit on the east coast, little by little going forward, and we are going to continue to send our wines to the critics that have shown us a lot of support in the past as well.

Steve: So are the business terms similar where you have to pay a monthly fee no matter what, and then a cut of the sale of the wine?

Kale: It depends on the distributor and it also it depends on the state and the state laws, because a lot of the laws actually govern these types of things. It’s this kind of our cake, but it’s kind of the reality that small producers — wine producers deal with, and alcohol producers in general deal with is every single state has their own rules, about what you can and cannot do. But for the most part the distributors are buying our wines at wholesale pricing, and maintaining the price that we are looking to see the wine in the market where they are, and there’s ways for us to monitor that.

Steve: Yeah, I was just curious like in terms of the tasting it seems like that would be — I bet the conversion rate for tastings are really high, and so I was just wondering why not do more of that going forward.

Kale: Doing more of the shows and what not?

Steve: Not the shows, but just these places that already have tasting set up someplace?

Kale: Yeah, I mean and we do that, I mean we are doing more of that. And a lot of that is through our partners and through our distributors or wholesalers, putting on shows or participating in events where we can get our product in front of people. And it’s one of the important reasons that we decided to partner with distributors and brokers.

Steve: And in terms of just having your own website where you are selling the wines, it doesn’t kind of interfere with your brick and mortar sales at all, does it?

Kale: No, I mean it’s all complimentary, I think people find out about us on social networks as well as our website, and then it drives people to our brick and mortar and vice versa. You know people who can visit brick and mortar and get inspired and seek us out online, so it’s very complimentary.

Steve: Because you mentioned that it’s cheaper online, right?

Kale: Yeah it’s, the cheapest way to find our wine is through our own wine club, and that’s the value to being in our wine club.

Steve: I see.

Kale: Yeah.

Steve: Okay. That’s interesting, because I was just thinking like in a traditional retain environment like the website typically does not undercut the people that are buying whole sale from you, but it sounds like in the case of wines it doesn’t matter as much.

Kale: Well I mean, you know it’s, you know our largest margin is selling through our website; our lowest margin is going through distributors, because they’re taking a cut. When were selling online that is us directly to the customer, there is no middle men in between us and the customer, which means that the customer is getting the best price, and passing that savings along to the customer for making a direct relationship with us, rather than making an indirect relationship to us through other– through distributors if you will.

Steve: Yeah, I’ve got one last question which is you don’t have that much inventory, or you haven’t had that much inventory in the past. How do you kind of allocate everything since these are all physical products, you’ve got to keep some on hand for shows, for your own website, for distributors, how do you allocate it?

Kale: It’s really complicated, it’s a really big spreadsheet, and then there’s basically you know and we are historical, and this goes back you know years now where we have, you know what we thought, what we did, and how we want to do it the next time, and it’s moved into a very large spreadsheet where we’re making sure that we’re supplying in all of our channels. Where you we’re not over supplying certain channels and under supplying other channels, and it’s just been, it’s just grown organically like that.

We didn’t, we thought we would be selling, for instance we thought we’d be selling a little bit more through our distributors by now, whereas we’ve actually started– we’ve been selling a lot through our website which is good. You know our distributors they want a little bit more wine, so we’ve slowly started to rump up our production a little bit to try to satisfy all the pipelines.

Steve: Okay, yeah so it sounds like you’re just based on historic data?

Kale: That’s it. I mean you never really know, I mean you can project all you want and plan on all you want, but you know it’s different. I mean also you’re going to sell in wine in different climates. Selling in 2000 and well you know selling in 2010 is very different than selling in 2015. I mean it’s a different economic climate, back then people weren’t buying this as many luxury wines. It seems like the economy has turned around a little bit for the luxury wines.

Thing is we’ve seen this kind of growth and I think it’s not just– we can’t take credit for all of the growth that we’ve had. I think it’s, a lot has had to do with simply people having more money to spend, as well as people getting a little bit more adventurous with their purchases rather than just take in to the California Chardonnay or the Napa cub, or the [inaudible] [00:49:20]. People are trying domestic wines that aren’t as traditional as they have been over the past 20 years.

Steve: Sure.

Kale: I think people’s tastes have shifted a little bit as well.

Steve: Cool Kale. We’ve been chatting for quite a while now. Where can people find your wines, and what they’re all about and where can they get tastings in their area for your wines?

Kale: Yeah, so like I said the best way to buy our wines is at kalewines.com. You know when you sign up to get a unique user name and password for security purposes. But that is definitely the cheapest place to find our wines. If you’re in the Napa area, the best way to come and taste our wines is to come by The Wine Thief at Oxbow which is 1st in McKinstry, and is now officially open, our license went through on Friday, so you can now taste our wines there.

Steve: Awesome Kale, well I learned a lot about the wine industry, and it sounds exciting, like the fact that prices change from year to year, and all these different things that you have to juggle, we didn’t even get into the actual wine formulation itself, which I’m sure would go over my head.

Kale: Well, you know hey it’s a lot of fun, there’s a saying in the wine history, ‘It takes a million dollars to make a million dollars in the wine industry,’ because it costs so much money to get in, but we’ve figured how to do it as cheaply as possible, and kind of growing it organically without adhering to that.

We’re not trying– this is not a get rich quick scheme for us, this is a passion project and you know growing it slowly is all we’re really interested in, now that’s it’s my wife’s fulltime job, that’s great. It won’t be my fulltime job for a long time, but maybe when our kids are in– maybe it will help us pay for kid’s college, and our retirement.

Steve: Yeah awesome, all right Kale thanks for coming on this show man, I learned a lot.

Kale: All right, thanks a lot Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have always wondered what it takes to start your own winery, and I was pleasantly surprised that you can actually do everything virtually without having to own any of you own equipment. And as a result starting a winery actually seems doable if you’re willing to wait two years until making any revenue.

For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode86, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6-Day-Mini Course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course right away via email.

Once again I want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhosts out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. And in fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email, and you can install WordPress in just a single click. They’ve got an easy to use website builder, design services, and the best part is I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/Mywifequit to redeem the discount, once again that’s HostGator.com/Mywifequit.

I also want to thank BigCommerce for sponsoring this episode. BigCommere is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in, so all you got to do is populate it with the products you want to sell and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. So simply go to BigCommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is BigCommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

085: How To Buy An Ecommerce Store And Triple The Profits With Dana Jaunzemis

How To Buy An Ecommerce Store And Triple The Profits With Dana Jaunzemis

Dana Jaunzemis is an ecommerce entrepreneur who I met through Andrew Youderian and we are both in the same private group that meets on a semi monthly basis.

Dana runs HomeHealthTesting.com and blogs about ecommerce and entrepreneurship at 44Ideas.net.

She’s a lifelong entrepreneur and has been starting, buying and selling businesses for over 25 years.

What’s cool about Dana is she specializes in acquiring small businesses whose sales have plateaued and reignites their growth.

I know a lot of you out there listening already have ecommerce businesses that may have plateaued or you might be interested in buying a business online.

So in this interview today, Dana is going to teach us how she does it and what she does to rejuvenate their growth. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • The motivation for buying an existing company as opposed to starting from scratch
  • Do you need to stick to your area of expertise when buying a company?
  • The criteria Dana looks for when shopping for companies
  • The process involved in buying a company
  • What the typical multiples are for an ecommerce store
  • The types of ecommerce stores that Dana likes to buy
  • The common plateaus that most companies can’t get past
  • What Dana does immediately after acquiring a company
  • Low hanging fruit that Dana goes after post acquisition

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email

Now before I begin I want to I thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support, via chat, phone and email, one click WordPress install, so you can literally install WordPress blog in a matter of minutes. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to give a quick shout out to my other sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. Now as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m really excited — you know what Dana, how do I pronounce your last name?
Dana: Jaunzemis just like it looks…
Steve: Jaunzemis, okay.
Dana: Jaunzemis.
Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m really excited to have Dana Jaunzemis on the show. Now Dana is actually someone who I met through Andrew Youderian, and she is actually in a private group that I meet with on a semi monthly basis. And if you’ve never heard of Dana she runs homehealthtesting.com, and she also blogs at 44ideas.net. Now she is a lifelong entrepreneur and has been studying and buying and selling businesses for the last 25 years. And what’s cool about Dana is that she specializes in acquiring small businesses whose sales had plateauted, and she reignites their growth.
Now I know a lot of listeners out there already have ecommerce businesses that may have already plateauted, or you might be interested in buying a business someday online. So in this interview today, Dana is going to teach us how she does it, and what she does to rejuvenate their growth. And with that welcome to the show Dana, how are you doing today?
Dana: Great, thanks for having me Steve.
Steve: Yeah, Dana actually we’ve chatted on several occasions, but I actually don’t really know your background story. So when did you start buying and selling businesses, and did you actually ever work a day job?
Dana: I did in my early 20s, that was the last time.
Steve: So five years ago or?
Dana: Yeah, like 25 years I have been without — maybe two day jobs, so but early on I started in accounting and I had worked in an accounting firm. I’m a college dropout, but I was majoring in accounting when I was in college. So when I stopped school I got a job in an accounting firm and that was my last job. And then I went on, when I was in the accounting firm I left there, and I went actually to a law firm that was my second. My last job was the law firm in the accounting department.
And the accountant in the law firm came to me one day and he says, “I want to leave and start my own accounting firm, and I think you know more about it than I do because you’ve worked in a public accounting firm, so I was wondering if you would be my partner.”
So we both quit, he was the CPA of the law firm, and we both quit and started a small accounting practice that specialized actually in accounting for the law firms. And then we went and bought the old accounting firm I used to work for. So…
Steve: Interesting.
Dana: And that was when I was like– I 24 or something at the time.
Steve: So without a college degree you could get a job as an accountant?
Dana: Well, I worked in an accounting firm, I mean technically my title would have been book keeper.
Steve: Got it, okay.
Dana: I just acted like I was the accountant.
Steve: Right, wow, okay so…
Dana: I have been impersonating in accountant and in entrepreneur all my life.
Steve: So age 24, you actually bought out your old firm, that’s crazy.
Dana: I did, I did.
Steve: Okay and then how did the ecommerce kind of roll around?
Dana: That was like six businesses later.
Steve: Oh my goodness.
Dana: Yeah, I went through a couple of different types of businesses. I have done start ups a couple of times, and really learned that I don’t like to do start ups. So the last start up I did, I sold it, it was in a recycling — construction recycling. It was a local service business, and when I sold it, I think that closing process when I watched the buyer walk out of the room with that fully functioning profitable business, I just thought why am I beating my head on the wall with these start ups, when I could just start when they are already profitable. So that was a good 15 probably 18 years ago, and since then all I have done is buy, and then eventually sell and then buy another one.
So the ecommerce started about six years ago when I bought Home Health Testing. So pretty much all of my businesses have been in a different niche, but when I held the model for ecommerce, it fits my personality more than any other niche, because I’m a data analytics kind of person. I love to dig in the data and have a business. So ecommerce gives me — I can do that, and it just fits my personality better than any I’ve had.
Steve: So when you buy these companies, do they have a staff that comes along with it or is it just usually a full transition of just the assets?
Dana: Just the assets, typically the size that I’m buying has worked really well for me, because I’m buying from the founder who started it. And they are typically very possibly the only employee, they might have one staff member, but they typically won’t transfer. But most times when I’m buying firm as an individual who started it, they’ve run it for three to five years, and is profitable, it’s making a living for them, but to them that’s pretty much just a job.
Steve: Okay, so we are talking about revenues less than seven figures then probably?
Dana: Yeah, usually something that is general — I look at it from a profit standpoint.
Steve: Okay.
Dana: So profitability is something that’s generating 40,000 to 50,000 net a year. So that might be 200,000, 300,000 gross revenues, just depends on the products.
Steve: So these are small ecommerce companies that are just typically run by the owner?
Dana: Yeah.
Steve: Or maybe one other helper?
Dana: Right.
Steve: Okay, and do you like companies that carry inventory, do you like drop shipping, what type of companies do you look for?
Dana: I tend toward inventory only because I like seeing my work I guess. I like seeing packages go out every day, and I think I’m old school in that just because I was in business before the internet, and before drop shipping was really a big thing. So I’m kind of used to seeing that work, and I have an office and a warehouse, so I like inventory type businesses.
Steve: Okay, so you kind of mentioned this already, but your motivations for buying existing companies as opposed to starting them for scratch is, mainly because you don’t like the start up phase so much?
Dana: Yeah, I don’t like it at all, not even so much. I think some of us – some of this is kind of my personal discipline, and if there’s no enough structure, like I have trouble working when there’s too many unknowns. And I will put it off; I’m a procrastinator unless I have a lot of structure around me. And if I have the structure and I can set a deadline based on here is what we need to do, and this is what we need to accomplish it, then I’m really good. But if it’s all open ended like a start up is, I can never make myself work on it to the point.
So I do better if there’s more structure and I also because — like I said I enjoy the data so much. I do really well if I have some history to work off of. So I prefer businesses that are at least three years old, I’d really prefer them to be five to seven years old, so that I have all that history that I can study and I can just really make some growth plans based on what the business has already been good at.
Yeah, and what I found even when I did a start up and the ones I have done, is businesses evolve in those first three to five years. They evolve into what the market wants. The founder always thinks they’re starting it, because of something they know or something they think the market needs. But eventually the market tells you, the market shapes the business and a lot of founders don’t realize that, and they keep running that business like it was what they wanted it to be.
Steve: Right.
Dana: But it became something different, and that’s what I like to do, is to take that — take it from that point, and then really focus on what the business became and grow that portion of it.
Steve: Okay, I know you’ve acquired at least two companies, ecommerce companies that I’m aware of. And it seems like the two that you’ve acquired that I know off, they seem completely random, so do you — it just seems like the niche doesn’t matter that much. Is it just based on the numbers when you do this?
Dana: Yeah, the niche doesn’t matter at all. And actually the one I had before Home Health Testing, I’m not sure you know about this, and we sold music to libraries.
Steve: Interesting.
Dana: So that one I had for quite some time. I had it for about ten years and it was interesting because it was when I bought it, the internet was just beginning to become useful in business, and small business, like the only way we used was email. And you would just have like almost like a business card, website, just the very beginning. So that business we were able to– and it was B-to-B a model, we only sold to pretty much the university music libraries throughout the world.
And so that one, we evolved all the way through from no internet presence till at the end it was probably 50% ecommerce based for a very specific niche market. So no, they don’t matter; I mean I have been in selling music CDs to urine drug test. It doesn’t matter to me what the item is, it’s more about who the market is. And I really liked B-to-B a lot.
Steve: Okay.
Dana: Because I like repeat buyers, I like to establish a relationship with customers.
Steve: So that’s interesting then, so it seems like you don’t really need to have that much knowledge about your niche so much. Or is it just a huge learning process in the beginning when you acquire anything?
Dana: Yeah, it’s yeah, it’s an intense learning process.
Steve: Okay, and let’s dig a little bit deeper into that, so when you are looking to make a purchase, and we can probably refer to Home Health Testing for the remainder of this interview. What were similar things that you kind of look for when you are making an acquisition?
Dana: Well, because I know based on what the business is, and let’s just say it’s making enough 40,000 range gross and 200 and some thousand. I know my initial goal when I buy a business; my first round of goals is I want to triple the net profits within the first three years.
Steve: Okay, wow.
Dana: So what I have to look at is if the business looks good as it is, it’s profitable and it has good gross profit margins on the products, I want to see at least 40% to 50% minimum on gross profit margins.
Steve: Okay, so this is just strict product minus — revenue minus cost of goods right? Okay.
Dana: So if it has those then the next thing I have to look at is, is the niche big enough, that I’m not going to have nay problem growing this three times. So sometimes some niches are so small that the business for sale is making 40,000 net a year, but that might not be 120,000 or 150,000 net available out there.
Steve: What tools do you use to do that analysis?
Dana: Just, I mean all the basics that we all use, key word tool to see what kind of searches are going on. And then just kind of some just old school market analysis of how big is a market. And some of them because I’m in really odd niches, sometimes you can’t — there’s no data you can put your hands on, you kind of — you have to use a mix of intuition and fact finding.
Steve: Okay and when you acquired Home Health Testing was it in that $40,000 to $50,000 revenue range — all right, sorry profit range? Okay.
Dana: Right there, exactly.
Steve: And since you also– let’s tell the listeners what it sells, you sell drug tests, right for the consumer?
Dana: Both consumer and B-to-B.
Steve: Okay, and if I were to think about how large the market would be, I guess I could use the Google key word planner, and see what people are looking for in that realm. But in terms of just the holistic market size, how would you go about calculating that? Or what did you do for Home Health Testing?
Dana: Well, one of the things I look at when I’m analyzing the business for sale, I usually at some point before I’m — when I’m in the due diligence stage, I will be able to see what type of customers they have. And because I’m looking for something with a B-to-B repeat buyers component, that’s going to give me an idea of who is buying. So if I see — and I don’t have to see very many of those customers in there, but then I can look at like one that happens in drug testing is staffing companies, so the staffing companies buy drug tests. So the previous owner, the reason he named the site Home Health Testing he was selling to the consumer, that was his market.
Steve: Okay.
Dana: And what he ignored was the business buyers because that really wasn’t like he set out to do it, but they were buying from him. So they were buying inspite of the fact that it really wasn’t set up for them to buy from him, and I don’t have to see a lot of those type of customers. But then I can go down that route at home and say, okay, well, are there a lot of staffing companies, well I don’t even need to do any research to know that, right?
Steve: Right.
Dana: So then I’m thinking how many per day staffing companies are testing their employees, how many employees are being tested a day by a staffing company. So I use other– just other thought processes. But what I’m looking for in the business itself is these little pockets of things that the previous business owner really wasn’t acknowledging, and saying can we grow those. Can I be a niche within a niche in a sense?
Steve: So does that imply that Home Health Testing did not have that many B-to-B customers when you acquired it?
Dana: It did not, it just– it had very few, it had a few enough that swung my decision.
Steve: And what about some of the other things that you look at, so you saw this B-to-B opportunity, were there any other things that attracted you to Home Health Testing?
Dana: Well, when I got into the key word planning, there was more than enough searches on a daily and a monthly basis, because at that time the — he was shipping about 12 orders a day. And that’s the other thing I look at is just number of orders per day, and thinking about three time growth. So just logically in my head and sometimes this– like I work a lot, I think all my gut instinct, I back it up with facts. But my gut instinct is just to ask myself questions like, if he is doing 12 orders a day, do I believe there is 36 orders a day potential.
Steve: Okay and this guy had been running his business for five years and he was only — okay. And he was only making $50,000 in profit, okay, interesting.
Dana: And there’s a lot of them like that out there Steve, there’s a lot.
Steve: Are there? Okay. And so in terms of his marketing then, he couldn’t have been doing that much of it or — let me rephrase that. So what things did you notice that he wasn’t doing outside of targeting B-to-B, like was his website okay?
Dana: No it was horrendous.
Steve: Oh it was horrendous, okay.
Dana: And that’s the other thing I look for is, I look for something that is succeeding inspite of itself. I look for something that needs a lot of work.
Steve: Okay.
Dana: So I love ugly websites, because again that’s going to tell me if he is making this profits and this site is this bad, I feel certain when it’s good I can do better. And I also want to, when I buy, I want to deliver, I want to add a lot of value myself and those are the areas– the technology is the area that I feel that I can add immediate value and get a strong return. Typically we always double profits in the first year. By the end of twelve months I’ll have doubled the profits of any acquisition I make.

Steve: Incredible.

Dana: So far, I might take long in the future, but so far that has always happened.

Steve: So how was this guy getting his customers then?

Dana: At the time, because this was six years ago, so he was ranking strong for organic and that was definitely part of it. And he had—he was a running an adwords campaign that was horribly wasteful, and that was another area that I could see improvement. He was spending about, I think, it was about $1800 to $2,000 a month. And he was– these are other like little, little I look for. He was spending more ad dollars on his lowest profit items than he was spending on his highest profit items.

So when I took over, I just shut down all the ad words on the low profit items, and threw all the money into the high profit items. I mean it just didn’t even make sense to me to even spend money on some of the items that were like a 20% gross profit margin when I had items that were more than 50%.

Steve: Does that imply that he was losing money on those campaigns then?

Dana: He was, but he didn’t know it because, and this where I see this happen a lot, and I think partly because I’ve lived it so many businesses for sale and I’ve talked to so many sellers. The start up phase is, as we all know brutal and tough. You spend a year not making any money. You spend a year guessing on how to run this business, or possibly you outsource things that you don’t understand, and they get put in place in that first year.

In the second year and maybe the third year you finally start making money, but it’s like this guy when he sold, you know he’s making about $40,000 and he’s just– they get to the point where they are tired of it. So now what happens is it didn’t grow to be the business they wanted, they hoped it was going to be, and they are tired. And now because they are three to five years in, it actually needs everything upgraded. All the technology is now behind. The website is behind, everything is behind.

Well, the only thing they can liken that process to was the startup process. They don’t want to rebuild it. They don’t want to redo it. This business when I bought it, his adwords campaign was set up in the very beginning by someone he outsourced it to. He never went in and looked at it. He never tweaked it. He didn’t—he just kind of lost interest. And this is really common theme in sellers. I mean I see it over and over and over. And that’s why sales start plateauing, and revenue just kind of baseline because they are like, “I don’t want to go rebuild the website. I don’t want to look at that ad words campaign. I don’t really know what I’m doing. I don’t really know what to do next.”

Steve: I see. So where did you find Home Health Testing? Like where do you find the companies that…

Dana: Well I always subscribe to BizBuySell as far as the—that’s the largest market place on the internet, BizBuySell.com and they– almost every broker, almost every listing broker will put their listings through BizBuySell.com. So I get a daily email of any internet business that comes up for sale on there. And then any internet, any broker who specializes in internet businesses I’ll subscribe to their mail list as well. So sometimes they’ll advertise something for sale to their list before they put it on BizBuySell which this was the case with Home Health Testing was that way. It came to me through quite like brokerage, because I was on their email list.

Steve: Does that imply that you are constantly on the lookout for companies to buy?

Dana: Always, always.

Steve: Okay. So how long did it take from the start to finish of acquiring Home Health Testing?

Dana: Like when I got the listing and when I closed? Pretty quick.

Steve: Just trying to get an idea how long they…

Dana: Two months.

Steve: Oh really? That fast, okay.

Dana: Yeah I got the listing probably, I know we closed in June, I probably got the listing late April. And then we just—you go to the offer stage, and then you move through due diligence which allows you to see everything, and then you set a closing day. And there are slower processes. I mean it’s not always that fast, but it can be quite quick. Now what you don’t see when you say it only took two months, is I had read businesses for sale for two years before I found it. I mean I used to always say I look at, at least 100 before I buy, but the truth is that I probably look close to 1000.

Steve: Oh my goodness. Can we just kind of talk about the process. So you are interested in Home Health Testing, I’m just trying to understand how the process works. So you reach out and you say, “Hey, can I have access to your financials?”

Dana: Yes, so when the broker sends you a listing, or if you see a listing on BizBuySell you respond to the broker. Then they ask you to sign a non-disclosure agreement that says whatever you learn in this process you are not going share with anyone else, and you are not going to go compete against the business. So you sign that and then they email you a prospectus of the business which the broker typically writes the prospectus, so you can get all different kinds. There’s no set way you get it. Some are really good and they are ten or twelve pages long and they give you a really good overview of the business, and you will see usually annual financial statements.

And then it depends on how the broker works. Some brokers like to really control the process. Other brokers are a little more customer-service oriented, but usually the next step is to have a phone call with the seller and the broker and you get to– and it’s usually maybe like an hour or so phone call where you get to ask a lot of questions, and then if you have more questions by email.

And then pretty much after that, it’s in the rare occasion, you might go visit the business depending on, if there’s inventory involved, or machinery involved that you want to see, if it’s a smaller ecommerce company. When I bought Home Health Testing, actually the owner was living in Thailand, and he was shipping out of a warehouse in Florida. So there was no visit needed. But after you go through that process, then it’s pretty much up to you of making an offer.

Steve: Hi everyone, I just want to take a quick moment to thank FameBit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now Fame Bit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing, with over 15,000 you tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more.

Now video starts as low as $50 and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from you tubers. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emmanuel Eleyae used FameBit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywifequit@famebit.com you will automatically get $10 off. So go to FameBit.com right now and get famous you tubers to promote your products, now back to the show.

Steve: How did you deal with the inventory? You just had everything shipped from Florida to your warehouse?

Dana: Yes.

Steve: And in terms of– so I had Bill D’Alessandro on the interview, on the podcast many months ago. And he was mentioning that he likes to go into the office and just see how they just operate on a day to day basis to just to make sure that there’s nothing like ridiculously manual about how they run their business. But it sounds like here you didn’t even visit or get to see the day to day operations at all.

Dana: Right, I did not, and actually Bill and I are opposites on this, because I’ve talked to Bill about that as well, and I heard him speak at the Ecommerce Fuel, and he likes to see if they are organized and how they are running. I love it when I see a horribly disorganized mess, because I know I’m not going to run it that way, and it tells me that’s one of the reasons they have plataeued.

It tells me that they are not running it like a business. They are not organized. And that’s the strength that I bring to a business. So it doesn’t scare me off. I’m not looking for a perfect business. I’m actually looking for a business in bad shape, but it’s still profitable. That doesn’t scare me. I’ve seen some pretty horrendous things.

Steve: It’ll just scare me a little bit personally, like if a business is being handed over to me and I would have no idea how to operate it for that initial period before you had a chance to improve it. You are seeing where I’m getting at?

Dana: Yes it’s scary. I mean it is scary, but it still doesn’t bother me. I don’t feel like—I think the way I liken it is if they are running it that way then most likely, almost 100% of the time, their customers are getting shitty service. And I know I’m not going to do that. So even if I continue at their level for a week or two weeks, or even a month, they are going to—the customer are going to see such a difference after I get it organized, that we are going to shine. So I don’t worry too much about that.

Steve: Okay. And what are the typical multiples that you like to see when you are buying something?

Dana: I mean I would love to see a multiple list than we are seeing right now, but right now what we are seeing is– two would be a good deal. Right now, we are seeing more like two and a half to three on the net profits. So something like Home Health Testing right now in today’s market would be, two would be $80,000, two and a half is $100,000.

Steve: So it sounds like you make your money back within a year or so, right?

Dana: Yes.

Steve: Okay, amazing. So let’s talk about the transition phase. So the company is—you’ve done all the due diligence, the transaction is closed. Company is handed off to you. What are some of the things that you do right off the butt as soon as you take ownership?

Dana: Well obviously what we were just talking about. The very first thing is making sure we can manage day to day. So shipping, getting the product out, but getting the right product out of the door, which takes that a little bit of a learning curve. When we take over the inventory, we have to quickly learn it well enough. At the time when I bought Home Health Testing, I didn’t know the difference between the different drug tests, or things like that. So that’s just kind of like getting thrown into a really bad job with no training, but it doesn’t take long.

Here’s the other thing, and I think this is kind of how my personality operates. I need pressure. This is why I don’t do well in a start up. So throw me in warehouse full of inventory and I have twelve orders to ship, and I will do well. I will do fine with the pressure if I have to get it done. But if I have to sit around and just pick products and think about what niche market I want to be in I won’t get anything done. So it’s just for me, the pressure of taking over a business, I can really thrive in that.

Steve: Do you tell all your B to B customers that the company has a new owner?

Dana: If we need to we do. It kind of—each one has been different. Yes if we need to, sometimes not. With Home Health Testing we did not. So what I did, first and foremost within obviously the first day within the week we had shipping done without a problem. And then the next step within two weeks I had launched a new website on that one.

Steve: Wow, within weeks.

Dana: Yeah. It was a—we only had—we had less than 50 skiers [ph] when I bought it. Yeah, that was pretty easy. It wasn’t bad. And the old website was so hideous. We knew that that was immediately needed. And I made some mistakes in that process. I ended up—I made a big mistake, and I put it on osCommerce and realized that I had no business being wound up in source. That just wasn’t what I wanted to spend my time managing that side of it. So then I switched it to a platform.

So I actually redid the website twice in the first six months. Yeah that was stupid. That was dumb on my part, but that was learning. You know, when I make mistakes like that, I always say, I’m glad I did it now. I’m glad I made the mistake now, and I’m willing to make the switch when I know I’ve made a great mistake. But I don’t consider– I don’t beat myself up over it. I just say, make the mistake now, because later it would have been much more painful to make the change. Or if you make a bigger acquisition later, thank God I know not to do that now, so I won’t make that mistake again.

Steve: So you’ve mentioned a couple of things already. So redoing the website, improving adwords campaigns, what were some of the other things that you did to triple the growth I guess within three years with Home Health Testing?

Dana: Content, tons and tons of content. We blogged in that first year, I think we were writing– I had a writer on staff for a while. So we were writing two or three posts a week, and that really helped us get an idea. It really helped us learn the products too and just kind of learn the whole industry. The more you write about it, the more you are going to learn.

Steve: What were some of the example posts that did really well?

Dana: The one that did the best that we really capitalized on, and I think that was the other thing I learned over the years was if you watch your content to see what’s doing well as a blog post, then put more resources behind it. And the blog post that got the most traffic for us for a good solid year – was just so much traffic – was how long does marijuana stay in your system. So it was a blog post, and it was just a text blog post, but it got a ton of traffic and a lot of comment from readers.

So we took that, the content on air. We made it an infographic, and then hosted it on our main site instead of just on our blog. We put the infographic in that same blog post as it was, but then we also put it on our blog and sent that out to some other bloggers. And it started getting picked up. It got picked up by lawyers.com, and different things, because it was a really good info graphic in that it explained, you know very well how long does marijuana stay in your system.

And then we took that, this is one of the best thing we did, we took that infographic, I have the same graphics guy that does our infographics and things. I said, “Can you make that a video without us– just add some animation to it and let us do a voice over for it.” So he took the same, you know all the art work from the infographic and made it a video, and we put that same thing over on You Tube answering the same question. And it’s done excellent over there. It’s probably even done better on You Tube than on our site.

Steve: So I’m just curious on this content page you have this infographic and text, do you have buy-buttons for your products right underneath, or how do you get them to your shop?

Dana: I don’t worry about that. I mean they can click over on it if they want to. I mean it says, I think it says somewhere at the end of the article, “The best way to know is to test yourself,” but I’m not too worried about converting as a buyer, but I was more worried about the content and Google. So that’s where we got the biggest paying for our buck is the more we wrote on our blog and the more we explained our products, the better Google liked us.

Steve: So it was kind of like a domain strength kind of play.

Dana: Very much so. And that was—I think I didn’t mention that in what do I look for when buying a business. All my niches are very different, but I will say there’s one thing that’s about them is they are somewhat moderately complex. They are—either the product is, or it needs explaining. And I’m drawn to that, because I know in due time you can really become the expert. And I find being an imposter expert that I haven’t done this all my life, but I will learn everything there’s to learn about drug testing, so in due time within three years.

And I think by the time we did that infographic, I think I already had Home Health Testing three years. So I’m kind of in it for a good five to seven years when I buy a business. So I’m not looking for everything. Typically changing the technology and just upping your game and treating it like a business on the ones that I buy is enough to double the profits. I can usually hit my triple by just gaining more traffic, and the website is speaking like an expert.

Steve: How do you know when it’s time to sell?

Dana: Well if I lose interest, that’s the tell tale, and if I in any way feel that I can’t keep growing it, because I like to work in a growing business. If I feel and when I sell—you get the best multiple if you have a very pretty increasing sales graph. So I don’t want to be the owner that stayed too long. Actually that’s who I buy from, is maybe the owner that stayed too long. They’ve lost interest and sales were declining. I don’t want to be that guy. So I want to sell when I can still get a good multiple because my business is growing.

Steve: So here’s the thing about your products, and I kind of did a little bit of research prior to this podcast. There’s a lot of big bucks companies that sell drug test kits, and a lot of them are very similar to what you sell, right?

Dana: Mhm.

Steve: And so if I’m a B-to-B customer like — so number one how do you acquire more B-to-B customers, and two how do you beat out some of the big bucks companies?

Dana: Being that expert, being– having more information that’s accurate, and more information that’s useful to them. If you look at a lot of the bigger companies, and definitely if you look at these products on Amazon there’s a lot of missing pieces to the information. So knowing what a B-to-B customer wants, and I think being a small business myself really helps, because I know what I want from my vendors.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: I want service, I want them to ship on time, and I want all the information to help me make a decision. So we have volume discount price thing, but if you are sitting there thinking should I — if I’m going to use 1Ks of drug test per month, and I look at the prices and I’m thinking about buying three months supply, well, and — for drug testing you need to know the expiration date then of the test they are going to sell.

So we use things like that adding things like expiration dates to our — which means we update our data product listings every time we get new stock. But that’s minor in the grand scheme of things, if they move someone from buying one box to six boxes, then that’s a good thing. And that’s why I see great opportunity in ecommerce, we are all worried about the Amazon effect, and how it’s going to affect small ecommerce properties in the long run. When it comes to B-to-B, I think we can still shine, I think B-to-C is getting tougher and tougher for the small business.

And if Amazon carries your product it’s going to be hard. But if you are in the B-to-B realm, you have customers who have very specific needs, and they need someone to tell them is this going to ship today. They need the assurance that it has the right expiration date, that it’s fresh inventory. And not everybody has an expiration date issue, but if you have a moderately complex product, and they know you are going to stand behind it, and you provide great service, it’s worth it.

It’s worth it and especially for the repeat buyer, they want that consistency, they want to come back and you are going to do the same thing over and over for them. So I see huge opportunities still in B-to-B, near as much in B-to-C as six years ago when I bought Home Health Testing.

Steve: Right, that’s interesting because after one of our little talks about what you just said essentially B-to-B, we actually went out and started focusing more on that with our business as well, because we deal with a lot of event planners. And it’s just great consistent business.

Dana: Yeah, it really is, and another thing I have learned about B-to-B, and I learned this back when I had music library service the first time. And the first time I learned it, but I have seen it repeat in more than one business is, I’m a big 80-20 rule person, and I make longer decisions especially when I’m buying a company of how I’m going to tailor our growth by focusing on the 20% that really is producing most of your profits. But one thing I have learned is there’s another force in the 80-20 rule, so I kind of call it like the external 80-20. So when I look at customers — so if my 20% best customers are somebody else’s 80% worst customers.

And I don’t think I understood that, I don’t think I believed it in the beginning, but like for music library service our customers were music libraries, very-very specific niche. And when I bought that business, using 80-20 rule what’s my 20% best customers, and I studied
all their demographics and how can I get what I wanted. Our best customers were spending $15,000 a year with us with that company, and so one of my one year goals was to get five more of those excellent customers. So I went out and started doing either direct mail, campaigns to other libraries that fit the demographics of my best customers.

And in the second year of that campaign I landed a customer that spent $200,000 a year. And it’s never failed that I have always found customers that were four to six times as large as what I went out to get. And I think it really does work in industry that we are a small business, and we sometimes don’t think big enough. So there’s your best customers, or somebody else’s worst customers, which mathematically speaking means that there’s another customer out there that’s four to six times larger than your best customer.

Steve: So Dana you said a lot of things in that last statement, and what kind of just put me up also was you mentioned direct mail campaigns; you are talking about snail mail?

Dana: Yes.

Steve: So I’m just curious, when you acquire B-to-B customer, like how do you attack that problem, do you snail mail, do you call them as well, reach out via email, like what are your strategies?

Dana: We will do, definitely we’ll do snail mail, we’ll do postcard campaigns. I think it’s very noisy online right now, as far as we just — we all have a lot of information coming at us when we are online. And then some of it depends on who your customers are, and where they are at. So for one area we are expanding on Home Health Testing is the specific small doctors’ office. And we have found the doctors’ offices while they may purchase online, they are not really online a lot.
They are not searching kind of people; they are a little more old school business. So a mail campaign, we do postcard campaign has proven to be excellent. And we did the same thing we started fishing for our target demographic was a customer that spends $400 a month. We’ve been mailing a list that we have for five or six months now. And last month we got an order for $4,000 for one customer.

Steve: Wow.

Dana: Like greatly exceeded what I thought I was fishing for, so…

Steve: Do you give them — like how do you track that, do you give them a special URL or a coupon code or something like that?

Dana: No, and then these customers are actually so old school they call.

Steve: Oh they call, okay.

Dana: Yeah, and they are like you sent me — they tell you, you sent me a postcard.

Steve: What’s a good conversion rate on like a postcard campaign?

Dana: I don’t know, I don’t track it; this is where I’m a little more into we live on this. So we haven’t been tracking it, and I’m not going to track it, because I know a minute for the long haul. And if I hadn’t seen any results at all, zero results in six or eight months, I would probably re-visit how we are doing it, I wouldn’t discontinue it, I would just revamp it. So I try to give everything a long enough a runway to work. And I think that’s part of why I’m successful is I don’t have to have a return metric immediately.
And I’m willing to learn from it, so we were taught — we found out in the first round that we sent the emails out we were trying direct — or the postcards, I’m sorry. We were trying to direct them to our website, and our phone number was really small on it. And they were calling us, and they said we want to get the prices. And I’m like why would they; I mean I didn’t ask them this, but why would they go to the website. So in our second printing of the postcard our phone numbers was big, so we try to learn and just listen to what response we get. And not give ourselves such a short leash that we can’t run with it.

Steve: Interesting so are you doing all the other things to advertise your business like Facebook, Google, comparison shopping engines?

Dana: We do adwords and shopping ads, we do Bing. We don’t do Facebook; drug testing doesn’t do well on Facebook, so…

Steve: I would imagine that scare campaign might work right?

Dana: It might yeah, it might, so we just try to — we have an issue of what type of expert we want to be. So we just pretty much try to — the biggest thing we do to set ourselves apart from other competition is to promise discreet shipping and no contact after the sale. That’s certainly not as much for the B-to-B customers, but for the individual customers. So our promise of total privacy pretty much prohibits us personally from being on Facebook, so…

Steve: I see and also email too, right?

Dana: Right, we don’t do any email marketing, and I think that’s been a good learning experience, because the product, the niche demanded, that — and when I bought the business he wasn’t advertising it that way, that was just something I learned along the way. Because the only comments we would get on order when they put something in a little comment field when they check out, is make sure there’s no return address, or make sure that the shipping is discreet. We had some comments never contact me again.
And that just struck me as funny, and I was just like well, we should — if people are asking for that, then we need to be upfront about it. So that’s what we try to do is like listen to every little thing customers are saying, because we know if one customer said it, then probably 10 or 20 or 30 felt it, but they just didn’t say it. So then we put that upfront and said it on the website, and that was one of our– that really spoke to people, and that was something that drove our growth.

Steve: That’s really smart, so you don’t ship them in a box that says drug test?

Dana: Yeah, here’s your drug test.

Steve: Cool Dana, well, hey, you know what, I have learned a lot from talking to you today and I want to be respectful of your time, we’ve been chatting for quite a while. If people want to find you online where can they find your various businesses and your blog?

Dana: So my blog is 44ideas.net, I’m not a very religious blogger, but occasionally I put some thoughts out there, but you can definitely contact me there. If you are in need of a drug test, you can go to homehealthtesting.com, and no one will know about it.

Steve: Yes, she will be very discreet about it. Are you on Twitter or any other social media platforms?

Dana: I’m on Twitter occasionally yes.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: So not a lot.

Steve: All right, Dana thanks a lot for coming on the show, I’m really happy to have you today.

Dana: Thanks Steve and thanks for all you do, and the great information you put out.

Steve: All right take care.

Dana: All right bye-bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. If you listened to one of my older episodes with Bill D’Alessandro in episode 48 you’ll notice that Dana and Bill took completely different paths when it came to purchasing an existing online store, which just goes to show that there are many different paths that can lead to profitability.

For more information about this episode got o mywifequitherjob.com/episode85. And if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.
Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up right there on the front page.

Once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design to sourcing to payment processing is all built in. So all you have to do is populate it with your own products that you want to sell and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to big commerce.com/mywifequitherjob sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best web hosts out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. And in fact I started mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email and you can install WordPress in just a single click.
They have an easy to use website builder design services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So go to HostGtor.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. And once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit, to get 30% off thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

084: How To Make A Million Dollars In 21 Days Selling An Online Course With Amy Porterfield

How To Make A Million Dollars In 21 Days Selling An Online Course With Amy Porterfield

Amy Porterfield is one of the most successful mediapreneurs that I know. She started out by working for Harley Davidson as a cool biker girl. Then she worked for Tony Robbins as his director of content marketing. And then she branched out on her own and has built a 7 figure empire selling products and training focused on Facebook marketing.

She’s the proud author of Facebook all in one for dummies. And to top it all off, she also has a top 10 business podcast on iTunes.

What You’ll Learn

  • What Amy learned from working with Tony Robbins
  • How to build a large and loyal audience of followers
  • How to get big names like Lewis Howes and Sean Malarkey to lend you their email lists
  • How to structure an online course
  • How to keep people engaged with your material
  • How Amy made a million dollars on her last product launch
  • How to run Facebook ads for an info product

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the free mini course right away via email.

Now before I begin I want to give a quick shout out to my sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support via chart, phone and email, one click WordPress install and easy-to-use-website builder, design services, marketing services and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Amy Porterfield on the show. Now Amy is one of the most successful mediapreneurs that I know. And she started up by working Harley Davidson as a cool biker girl. Then she worked for the D. Tony Robbins as a director of content marketing. And then she branched out on her own and has build a seven figure empire selling products and training focused along the Facebook marketing platform. Now she’s the proud author of Facebook “All in One for Dummies,” and to top it all off, she also has a top ten business podcast on iTunes.

Now here’s the thing about Amy and her podcast, first of all, when my wife found out that I was having her on the podcast, she went nuts. And second of all, I don’t normally listen to podcasts, but Amy’s podcast is actually one that I check out from time to time especially when I’m stressed out. And why is that, she’s got this soothing voice that tends to calm me down. So bad day at work, bad day at sales of an ecommerce store, I hit up Amy for some stress relief. And with that, welcome to the show Amy. How are you doing?

Amy: Well thank you so much for having me. That just makes my day.

Steve: I hope that didn’t come across as creepy.

Amy: It’s so sweet. I love it.

Steve: So you know what’s hilarious is that when I was emailing with your assistants to get you on the show, they stressed multiple times that this interview was going to be audio only, so it kind of gave me this impression that you like to do these interviews in your pajamas and underwear, or something like that.

Amy: I have had so many instances where I didn’t know it was video and I’m literally like not ready for camera, meaning I don’t do a lot to get ready when I’m working from home, and maybe I’m just vain and that’s maybe the girl in me. But come on, I got to do my hair, makeup and stuff. So I like to be prepared.

Steve: Yeah I mean just for good measure, I mean my pajamas right now too. So it’s all good.

Amy: Okay, right. So you get it.

Steve: So Amy gives us a quick background story, tell us about your background and how you went from working for Tony Robbins to being an online entrepreneur.

Amy: Well it was a really cool situation where when I was with Tony, I was—what is that?

Steve: I have no idea. You are playing music?

Amy: Oh no, have I? I don’t know what that is. I thought it was you. Okay I am so sorry. That was something on my phone. I don’t know why it kind of went off. I’m not even touching it. I’m sorry; do you want to repeat the question?

Steve: Yeah just start over from what you were going to respond.

Amy: Hear me out. Okay, no brainer. So it was kind of a really cool situation. And what happened was I was the director of content development over at Tony Robbins. And at the time, he was getting into more online marketing, and wanted to do some online marketing launches with his programs. And so we ended up bringing in a bunch of online marketers that were doing amazing things in the space, and a lot of them lived Brooklyn San Diego which was where the headquarters was, but others flew in for the little meeting we had. And a bunch of these guys sat around the table, Frank Kern, Eben Pagan, Jeff Walker, Brendon Burchard, some names you might know, they are just these big guys in the internet marketing world.

I literally kind of was like a fly on the wall. I didn’t realize what I was getting to witness at the time, but these guys went around and Tony said, “Tell me a little bit about your business, what it looks like, what you do?” And instead of talking about their exact products or their exact business, they were talking about their lifestyle, what they loved about what they did, the time they spent with their families, the vacations, where they lived, the downtime, and they did talk about the hard work, but in a way that was just full of passion. And my years popped up like, “Wait a second, this is like a whole new world I’ve never known.”

I was in corporate since I was really young right out of college. So having a business of my own was never even on my radar. And so when these guys were going around and talking, and I just started listening a little bit more, and I instantly got that entrepreneurial bug. I wanted to be a part of it. So for the next year I asked him to move me to the marketing department and work on the launches that these guys were teaching us. So I literally was in the trenches working on online launches, loved every minute of it like couldn’t get enough of it.

And so about a year from then, I also started dabbling with social media, helped Tony with his Facebook page, he took off on Twitter, it was amazing. Tony fell in love with social media. So I thought, “Okay, that’s what I can do.” So taking a lot of baby steps, I ended up going out on my own and doing consulting for social media. My business looks a whole lot different today than it did five years ago, but that’s basically how I got my start.

Steve: I’m pretty big Tony Robbins fan. So if you can give me a quick example of kind of what you did for him before you left, and what you learned from it, that would be great.

Amy: So when I was there, I was in the content development department which meant anything that Tony would think of or create, it would go through our department. And we had a lot of writers, a lot of designers, creators, and we would turn it into his audio programs or live event content or work books, books, anything like that. So all the content went through our department.

Now Tony is a genius in the sense that he always has ideas. He’s very much involved in the content creation, and so there are many, many meetings up to like two or three in the morning working with just, I call it riffing [ph], but he was riffing on all these ideas. We would take tons and tons of notes, and we take all of that together and try to put it into something that made more sense for the audience. And so were really into that content. So I got to travel the world with him, and worked on the content that he would do on stage so e.g. in the Philippines, in Australia. It was a pretty amazing experience.

Steve: Yeah that’s amazing. Did you actually start your own stuff while you were working for Tony, or like was there any overlap?

Amy: Great question. There was overlap. So what I did is I started waking up at 5:00 am every morning, and from about five to seven I would just start learning everything I could learn about internet marketing and starting my own business. So I did that for a good three months. And then I asked to go part time. So I had just gotten married at the time, and I was travelling way too much anyway, so it was a really good segway. And I asked, “Can I work part time on this specific project I was doing.” With some reluctance they said yes, and then I continued to work on my own business, got my first client on the side and built that up a little bit. And then finally I had to take baby steps and big decisions.

So I finally got the nerve to then jump off and go out on my own. It was hard not to look back because it’s funny, when you go out on your own after being in corporate for so long, I feel like all these crazy opportunities come your way, like “Do you want to work for our business, or come work for us, or be our VP or whatever.” And I had to say no to all of it, because it would have totally derailed me which is really hard. But I took that leap and I didn’t look back.

Steve: You know what’s funny Amy is I’m kind of in a similar situation. So I’ve got three online businesses that each make six figures. And I have this job which I recently just went down to four days, and I’m still playing that game. The difference is I’m in the tech sector with my fulltime job. So it’s a little harder to leave, because I don’t want to give that part of my life up.

Amy: That’s really tough. And the fact though that you’ve built three businesses, six figure businesses, while having a full time job, that’s insane. Like that is—I hope you talk about that a lot, because that’s crazy.

Steve: I hope like we can — I’m curious to compare some notes once we get to that point, but one thing I’m always curious about actually was did you leverage any of the audience of Tony Robins, or was your audience completely on your own, nothing related to it at all?

Amy: So I had to completely break off ties in a sense that I couldn’t really leverage that audience, I didn’t really have access to it. However, I definitely took advantage of adding the Tony Robins in my bio. I always talk about him because he is a huge part of my life, and so that is always part of my story which I know helps, I definitely know it helps always.

Steve: Absolutely, so you quit without any incoming place at all, is that…

Amy: Yeah, which I don’t necessarily suggest to everybody. So I did end up quitting. I kind of got to that point that is like bubbling up inside me that I just had to either do it or not do it at all. It just got to that emotional point for me, and I was probably scared I would never do it if didn’t just finally take a leap. So I had a few clients and we had a little bit of savings, but truly nothing that was going to sustain us. So when I went out on my own, I was a hustler, I had to definitely make money. Luckily my husband was making money as well, but not enough that that was just going to completely support the lifestyle we had created. So yeah, that was the most stressful year in my life.

Steve: Okay, and so but you did have some consulting gigs, and then you knew you didn’t want scale that because it’s not — in here it’s not scalable right?

Amy: Exactly.

Steve: So one thing I admire about you Amy is that you are awesome at building a large and loyal audience of followers. And so by the time you started selling online training you probably had a large audience, right?

Amy: By the time I got really serious about it yes. So there were some attempts in the beginning with not a large audience and they were huge failures.

Steve: So let’s talk about back in early days when you had nothing. So how did you get traffic early on, and how did you build up your name?

Amy: So webinars were my tool of choice, I had done some webinars while at Tony Robins kind of behind the scenes, and I knew that I felt comfortable on these webinars, so I ran with that. So I learned early on that if I could create a really good webinar and get really good at the presentation, I was going to be able to sell on that webinar. And so I just studied everything I could about webinars, and I started using Facebook ads early on as well. So I would fill up my webinars with Facebook ads and Lead Pages a company that I love, they say this all the time that webinars are great to sell, but really where they are powerful is growing your email list. And I think that’s how my list grew so quickly.

Steve: So you would go on these webinars without having a product to sell just for the purposes of building up an email list?

Amy: No I wish I had that smart; I didn’t start webinars till I actually had something to sell. Now in early days, I didn’t sell that much, but I did get kind of the experience I was transitioning into a seller on a webinar, I had like a $97 program.

Steve: Okay, and so before you — actually in the early days before you had anything, did you kind of build up an audience part of the Facebook ads?

Amy: Oh, gotcha, okay, so not really and here is why. I had a mentor that would tell me every time we met Amy focus on growing your email list; focus on growing your email list. In that first year and a half I did not focus on growing my email list probably because it scared me, I didn’t know exactly what I needed to do to make that happen.

It seemed very confusing to me and overwhelming, so instead I focused on growing my website. Meaning like writing my blogs every day, and working on my logo and my business card and all of the things I shouldn’t have really been focusing on. Now at the same time I had clients I was consulting, so I had to care of all of those clients which pretty much derailed me from focusing on the things I should have been focusing on.

And so for a year and a half I did not, so I had about 600 people on my list after a year in the business. And then when I tried to launch my first online training program it was a huge failure, just because I didn’t really have anybody that was listening yet. So that’s when I felt the sting and I thought all right, I get it, now I know what I need to do.

Steve: So what was your first product?

Amy: My first product — I’m embarrassed to say this, my first product was how to — I think it was something like how to launch your book online now. I had never launched a book online in my life, however, I had worked with a lot of authors whether it would be Tony Robins or at the time I had worked with the [inaudible] [00:14:20] group, not him individually but his group. So I had worked with a lot of authors, so I though this is perfect, I know social media, I work with authors, I’m going to do have—launch a book online. I should have never done that, I didn’t know enough and I just didn’t know what I didn’t know. So I thought I was going out with something great, but looking back it’s kind of embarrassing.

Steve: So was that launch from your list, or did you use Facebook ads for that?

Amy: So that actually was from my list, so I had maybe 20 people on my first — actually I didn’t even start with the webinar, I started with a tele-summit kind of thing. And I had probably 20 people on that first one I remember, and no sales came through. And then I graduated to webinars.

Steve: Okay, well, let’s talk about your first successful product, how’s that?

Amy: That would be much better, you are trying to get to cry, are you Oprah or something, what’s going on?

Steve: Your first successful product obviously isn’t your gigantic membership course right, it’s probably something…

Amy: What happened was this is actually a good story and a good lesson for those just kind of started now, or trying to get out there and do something. I had started to go to a lot of networking events, good and bad. It took away from me creating my first real successful online training program, but I wanted to get my name out there, and I was working with Mike Stelzner a social media examiner. He had just started his website and he invited me to a few events one being BlogWorld, or at least it was called BlogWorld at the time and [inaudible 00:15:42]. And I would help him carrel people to an interview, he was interviewing a bunch of people for his own show. So I was again like taking a back seat which is what I did at Tony Robins as well, it’s really easy for me to play that role, because I had done it so long.

So I did this with my Mike, he was amazingly wonderful to me and a great mentor, but still I was behind the scenes which I had to be really careful with. So I did that for about two years while I was building up my business, and I met a lot of amazing people. So the good thing about it is that these awesome-awesome people in social media, and online marketing were at these events and one that you find out was Lewis Howes. Lewis Howes and his partner Sean Malarkey, and we became friends — and yeah, so we became friends, and at the next event that we saw those guys again, they had seen some of my webinars and asked me if I wanted to partner with them on a Facebook product. I would create the product, it would be on my content and they had the machine to market it, I still didn’t really have a list.

And so I created this product, super scared to do it, I had never really created a big product like this before. They helped me out a little bit, and we did tons and tons of webinars for it. And it became a huge hit, and it literally is what I felt propelled my business into the Facebook marketing. I got the book deal after that, and I started to create more online training programs. But I definitely got lucky in the sense that someone asked me to partner, now if I hadn’t done the work beforehand, if I didn’t go to the events, if I didn’t constantly blog and put myself out there and create the content, they would have never found me. So I don’t feel like it’s luck, but I think it’s good that I hustled a little bit in those early years.

Steve: So let’s back up a little bit; was Stelzner huge back then when you were working with him?

Amy: He was well known because he had this white paper business, but nowhere near what he is now. And here is the funny thing though, it all kind of comes together, your life experiences, there are some parts I would like to erase, but then I look back and think it all like just is happening for a reason. And when I was working at Tony Robbins, Mike Stelzner — so weird, Morris Smith and I met to talk about…

Steve: Molly Smith, Jesus okay, go on.

Amy: I know, I got really lucky working with Tony, because there was these cool people I got access to. So Molly and I had lunch or coffee to be exact, and we asked her to look over the Facebook page we had just created for Tony. So she had lunch with us and looked over the Facebook page. And then she said, “You should really talk to Mike Stelzner, he’s created creative white papers if you need one for Tony, and we happened to need one. So Mike and I started working together while I was still with Tony, and he wrote this incredible white paper, and I was the middle man between Tony’s edits and Mike’s work that he did. Mike and I became great friends and one day he is like, hey I have got this idea that I’m doing, it’s called social media examiner.

And I remember he showed me the art work and I’m like that’s a little weird, it’s kind of [continuation], and I didn’t know this guy that much, but I really liked him. So he said “Hey, if you do go out on your own, let me know, I could hire you for starts.” So he was literally the first guy that hired me for anything. And it turns out he became this huge success with that, I mean the website is amazing, and what he’s gone on to create is pretty cool. So he wasn’t ads big of a deal then.

Steve: And Lewis Howes and Sean Malarkey, same thing?

Amy: Lewis kind of was a big deal, I think he was born a big deal, so he knew everybody; he was already doing his LinkedIn programs, so he was definitely a big shot. I didn’t know enough about Sean Malarkey to know what he was up to just yet.

Steve: So why did they choose you, like how did you stand out early on like — because you didn’t have an audience, what was their incentive yeah?

Amy: Yeah, so that’s such a great question. So here is a good lesson in that, Lewis had asked me to do a free training for them, like record a video about Facebook for a whole different program they were doing. And because I liked the guys, and I wanted to get my name out there I said yes, and so I recorded something for them. And Sean was watching it, and he just loved my style, and the lesson here is do what you know how to do best. I knew that I was going to do this webinar while I had this training in my blood, I loved to do it. So I knew I would come across one, and so I said yes to it.

So Sean saw it, he is like this girl knows how to teach, like this is really good, come watch this Lewis. And then Lewis watched it, and so when the opportunity came up that, hey we want to publish online for the Facebook product, I was top on mind, because I had done a good job. Now if they told me to write a book, they probably would have not really paid attention. I’m not the best writer, so I put myself forward on what I did do well, and I came across well to other people.

Steve: So that implies you were doing a bunch of webinars before you met these guys, is that…?

Amy: I’m trying to think, I did way more webinars with them than I had ever done, but yes I had started to do my own webinars before I met them.

Steve: Okay, I hate to break this to you too, but I think it was your soothing voice that got them too.

Amy: It was the voice? I’ll take it, whatever works.

Steve: All right, so you got these two — did you have your book deal, like I can’t remember?

Amy: I did not.

Steve: Did not okay, so how did that come about?

Amy: So what happened, it was literally, it was a good year for me. It came about the same time where I was blogging regularly on the social media examiner blog. So they finally had invited me, I kind of moved up the chain over there, they invited me to guest blog, post ads, I was doing it a lot. And this is another way of things, so I was at a networking event, I did way too many networking events in those early years, I don’t think I should have done that many but I did.

And one that I did it was like how to get your mojo on business, or something like that, it was a silly name. And I went to Colorado, it was a great event though, it was just like ten of us girls and we were talking about building a business. I sat next to a woman named Andrea Wall, we hit it off, and we just exchanged like stories about Facebook, because she taught Facebook as well, and I was just getting into Facebook.

And two years later, someone came to her and said we are looking for a co-author of Facebook marketing online for dummies, do you know anybody, and she remembered me and suggested me. They went on social media examiner, saw that I wrote a bunch of blogs on the topic, and invited me into the book, which was huge for me because it really solidified. I became a Facebook expert when that book came out.

Steve: Okay, so I’m getting a lot of key takeaways here, it sounds like networking events was a huge part of your early success okay?

Amy: Right and I find a tease like oh my God I went to way too many, but then when I look back, they did kind of shape some big things that happened to me in those early years.

Steve: So doing these webinars with Lewis and Sean, they probably had huge lists at the time, right?

Amy: They did, they had huge lists, huge affiliate partnerships, and they made me do like, it feels like 100 of them. So when you do that many, you get pretty good at it.

Steve: So when you had one of these webinars, were you adding to your list members of their list?

Amy: I was, so I worked up this deal with them that anybody who bought and anybody who opted in for a webinar, I also got that list.

Steve: Okay.

Amy: So that was huge.

Steve: So that sounds like a pretty big jump start into just your own properties, right?

Amy: It was yeah.

Steve: Okay, and did you use a lot of paid advertising then, or was that something that happened later on?

Amy: I’m trying to think when the paid out advertising really took a big jump. It was probably right around the time that this program FB influence came out. Sean and Lewis used a lot of ads for it, so I was featured in the ads and this is something funny with Facebook ads, especially more so back then, but it still works in similar ways now. My face was everywhere in those ads, and it’s funny how ads were, because if you are own personal brand or if they just hear your business name everywhere in ads, people automatically think you are doing amazing.

So I heard this all the time, your business must be boiling up, I see you everywhere on Facebook, in my head I’m thinking yeah, because I’m paying for it. But it’s just like a perception, and then luckily our perception actually became real, but at the time it wasn’t necessarily real. So something kind of funny happens with those Facebook ads.

Steve: So someone starting out today, would you recommend that they kind of try to take your path, put out good stuff, go to networking events, and try to take advantage of people who are bigger than you and partner with them.

Amy: Not necessarily, so here is why. I think that if I — if someone already told me– if I could do it all over again, the one thing I’d change is, from day one I would start building an email list. I would create some great free giveaways whether it would be a webinar, PDF or cheat sheet or whatever. I have a few of them out there, and I take advantage of Facebook ads 100%, and I build my own list. And I don’t like the idea of having to have a partner like I love Sean and Lewis, they were wonderful to me, but it’s always — I just don’t want to give up any of my content and have to partner with somebody.

So I would go that route first, and then if you do have these opportunities just be really careful what you say yes to and no to, because I said yes to hundred other things that never turned out to anything, which probably took away from me really focusing on my business. So I wish I was a little bit smarter with the yeses, but the yeses that I did say yes to, obviously panned out for me.

Steve: Well, some of these yeses that were bad idea, were they partnerships or were they just products that you kind of developed in — okay?

Amy: They were people asking me to create content for them. So not necessarily partnerships, but hey will you put a free session to my program. I said, yes, to a million of those, and then nothing ever came out of it. When you are new though, you’ve got to kind of experiment to see what’s a good idea or not, and then everything seems like a huge wonderful big idea or opportunity, so it’s hard to say no.

Steve: So any tips on selecting the right opportunities?

Amy: Yes, and we hear some very big tip that I have, and I do this now and I could have done it then if I was smarter at the time. And that is plan out let’s even say your next six months, I like planning out a year, but if that’s too daunting efforts, plan out your next six months. What do you want to promote, what affiliate deals do you maybe want to do, what do you want to create, all that good stuff. And have it very clear, like I literally get into my digital calendar and plan out the space for me to create, and get things done and promote, and it’s all in the digital calendar right now.

So when someone comes to me now and says can you do this? If it doesn’t fit into my six months goal, it’s a no. And so I can put in the banner and say “Hey, let me kind of think about that for the future, right now it’s not going to work.” And if I ever want to come back to it I can, but it’s so much easier to say no when you know what your next six months looks like.

Steve: Okay, I’m glad that coming on this podcast was a little piece of that next six months, awesome.

Amy: It was a yes.

Steve: All right, so I’m just trying to get the chronology correct here, when did you launch your membership site? So you did a bunch of smaller products with Lewis and Sean, right?

Amy: I just did one, the FB influence yeah.

Steve: Oh just one, okay and then that wasn’t a membership site there, right?

Amy: It wasn’t and — so when I think of membership sites, I always think of like you pay a monthly fee to stay in it, and then if you stop paying the monthly fee you are out of it. And I haven’t really ever done it like that, but still I could see where a lot of people think my programs are membership sites for specific reasons will get into that I’m sure. But when I did FB influence I got the confidence, I had this $97 program that was doing well. So that’s when I branched out for the first time and created my most successful program which is the profit lab, and that started in 2012 which is right around the time about six months after FB influence launched.

Steve: Okay and how did you know it was time? So you did that one product with a partner and then you had the confidence, so you decided to do your own thing where you had complete ownership of the product, right?

Amy: Yeah, there was a big part of me, I don’t know where this comes from, but there was a big part of me that wanted my own thing, and I wanted it to be really careful that my revenue was not controlled by other people as well. And I wanted to make it really clear, they were amazing to me, it’s the mindset in my head that I had a partnership and it worried me sometimes.

So that’s when I thought okay, I got into FB influence, it was doing well and then I started to listen to people, we had a private Facebook group. And I saw where they were struggling, what they wanted more of, where they wanted to dive in deeper, and that’s exactly what I created. At the time it was called the Facebook marketing profit lab. Now I just call it the profit lab, because it’s more than just Facebook, but that’s how it was created.

Steve: And by this time when you launched that how big was your list at the time?

Amy: Great question, I’m going to guess, this is so hard to remember, and I have to be careful because I know I have answered this question before. So I don’t want to throw a different numbers, but I think at that time it might have been around like 30,000.

Steve: Okay, so in general do you have any recommendations on what your list size can be before you launch a course or?

Amy: I don’t actually, but I have some recommendations related to this. So Davis [inaudible 00:28:13] a great friend of mine, I love that man. And he when we got into a mastermind together a few years back and I remember him telling me how much money he made, and how big his list was. And he was making — he was just starting, just as much as I was making when I was just starting, but his list was like half the size of mine. So I do feel like I could have definitely done a better job of connecting with my audience, it’s like when you can show your personal side, when you can be yourself, take people behind the scenes, let them in, you are going to have the stride, and I know it sounds like a cliché because we hear it all the time.

But you truly will have this audience that just loves everything about you. And when that happens it doesn’t matter if you have 10,000, 20,000, 30,000, on your list. So I believe that you can have a small list and still make really good money, but you can’t have a small list and make good money if you don’t nurture them and constantly be putting up great content, connecting with them, inviting them in, it really does make a huge difference.

Steve: Hi everyone, I just want to take a quick moment to thank FameBit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now Fame Bit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing. With over 15,000 you tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Now video starts as low as $50, and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from you tubers. Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emmanuel Eleyae used FameBit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with YouTube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywifequit@famebit.com you will automatically get $10 off. So go to FameBit.com right now and get famous you tubers to promote your products, now back to the show.

Steve: Absolutely, so anyway I have an online course myself which has got about 1200 members at this point. So I thought it would be kind of interesting to compare some notes.

Amy: Yeah let’s do it.

Steve: Kind of like how you structure your classes. So first of all, is your course structured like a library of videos, or do you kind of drip stuff out and just give them little pieces at a time.

Amy: So I used to drip it out for years and then just last year I started to give it to them all at once. So I like both models. Tell me real quick, what is your membership site about?

Steve: It’s called profitableonlinestore.com where it’s a training course that teaches people how to start ecommerce stores.

Amy: Nice. Okay great. So that’s what I do. How about with yours? Do you drip?

Steve: No I don’t drip and I was just curious because what the pros and cons work, because I have never dripped. I have like a library of videos where I have a certain number of videos that you should watch as soon as you sign up, but then the rest of it is just kind of watch what applies to you.

Amy: Okay so that makes sense then not to drip for sure. I was dripping. I actually like dripping better and here’s why. I guess your audience would know what that means, dripping. It’s like–

Steve: We should probably define it real quick.

Amy: So it’s like a module each week. So you are dripping the campaign, like open and a module opens up, and then you wait another week and another module opens up till everything is there. And the reason I like to do that is because I do have a live component to my event on my program where I do live Q&A sessions. And my program is put together in a way that is very specific. Like you need to start with video one and there’s 20 videos, and you shouldn’t be on video 20 till you’ve watched all the ones before it. It builds on each other. So it just makes sense to drip it.

But the thing is we stopped dripping it, because people like to learn at different paces and there’s all of these different types of learners inside my program. Some are more advanced, some are more beginners, and so those that were more advanced they hated waiting and it was frustrating to them. And as soon as I stopped dripping and I actually saw my refund rate go down a little bit as well, because people were getting impatient. They are like, “This isn’t for me,” and then they’d live. Well that totally stopped.

However, I have to be really careful now that I don’t drip. I send out a series of emails and call them, “My on boarding sequence.” For the first 30 days in my program, you are going to hear from me a lot, but I have to be careful. I can’t say, so by now you should be on module II video 1, because then it stresses everyone out because they are not there. So it’s more inspiration and like before and after pictures of some of my students of what they’ve done. But I think those emails have immensely helped as well.

Steve: That’s funny because my return rate was higher than I wanted it to be until I started an email auto-responder sequence too, so I send out emails either everyday or every other day for that first 30 days as well.

Amy: So smart. It dramatically changes your refund rate. I never believed it until this recently.

Steve: So how do you keep people engaged and actually making progress? Like you obviously want them to be successful, right? So what are some tricks that you use for that?

Amy: Okay, so one of the things that I have seen that really works well for me is a private Facebook group. Now because – so this is what I do and this is not for everybody, but it works for me. When you get into my program, I do have a time where the cart is open, we get everyone into the program, and then the cart is closed. So it’s not an Evergreen program. So when you start, if you join at the mastery level, there’s two levels, self-study and mastery. If you join at the mastery level, the first 90 days in that private Facebook group and only mastery are in the private Facebook group, the first 90 days I’m in there every single day Monday through Friday answering questions.

Now it is completely overwhelming in the beginning, because it’s a few hundred people and they have a million questions. And then when they see other people asking questions they are like, “Oh well I got this one, and what about this one, what about that?” So I have to kind of calm myself down in the beginning knowing that it’s going to even add a little bit and it has already which is great. But the questions are so smart, and they allow me to correct their journey when they are going through like, “Don’t take that route. Go here.” Or “I would fix this or that.” Like I’m looking at their opt-in pages and their emails and everything they are doing, and I just feel like this is allowing them to hit success so must faster. So I love the private Facebook group interaction.

Steve: Okay, and what was your motivation for doing this on Facebook as opposed to having your own private forum?

Amy: So I actually have my own private forum for self study. So for self-study I have my own private forum and here’s – it’s just really a personal thing. I don’t love forum functionality. We look through so many forums, we’ve tried to find something that I’m comfortable with, maybe it’s just because I’ve been on Facebook for so long, and I’ve done groups for so long that it’s comfortable for me. But I like the flow of the conversation better inside a Facebook group.

And one thing – this is totally a side not – but when I do, because I have so many people on that group I answer question for, I use Snagit and create quick videos of my voice while I’m looking at let’s say their opt-in page. And instead of typing out my entire answer to them, all they are doing is hearing my voice while I look at their stuff, and it’s so quick for me. And they like that personal touch. So that’s another thing.

Steve: That’s a good tip.

Amy: It really helps me.

Steve: Yeah. Probably doesn’t hurt that you have the Dorset voice going on for you.

Amy: Listen, I’m going to work that voice now, oh yeah.

Steve: So one thing I do at my class I just started a show real quick is I had this point system. So if you are like post in the forums, if you attend office hours you get points that you can redeem for free stuff like a one on one consult and that sort of thing.

Amy: Nice. That’s a great idea, so it keeps them more engaged?

Steve: Yeah it encourages them to kind of post more often and share more stuff.

Amy: That’s actually brilliant. I love it. It’s like the game on [inaudible] [00:35:42] people love. That’s great.

Steve: So I’m just curious also. It sounds like you do launches and then you close it down, launch and then close it down. What was your motivation for doing it that way as opposed to an Evergreen type of sequence?

Amy: So I actually have both. I have one Evergreen program. It’s like a Facebook one on one program. We run ads to it daily and it’s there’s a whole sales funnel. I love that. And then the real truth of it is we started doing these launches like I said back in 2012, and I’ve never made it Evergreen. Now I’m a little nervous to do so, because they’ve been wildly successful for my business, like we almost hit a million dollar launch this last one we did. And we really haven’t dialed in.

And so my fear to be really transparent is if I turn that into an evergreen program, are we able going—are we going to be able to generate that, because there’s such a live aspect. I’m doing live webinars. There’s a countdown timer. The cart’s closing soon. All that urgency like our biggest days during my live launches are the days that the early bird price is going to go up by $100, and the final day that the cart closes, are huge days for us, so that all goes away in Evergreen.

Now I will tell you. This is a mistaken magic on my part and I know it’s a mindset block. And I know like I read Russell Brunson’s book DotCom Secrets and I know if he was sitting here with me he’d be like, “You are crazy, and you should turn that into Evergreen.” And I am open to it. So if you could– I say, if you are starting your business, the more Evergreen automated business you can create, to me the happier you are going to be, because what’s scary– luckily, my launches have always been successful, but let’s say the next one isn’t so successful. I was relying on a certain amount of income, it didn’t come in, and now the launch is over. That to me is a little bit scary. So I don’t like the whole launch model, so I only do two a year because of that.

Steve: So let me ask you this, for your Evergreen product, how do you create incentive scarcity?

Amy: So what we do is, one we are playing with Deadline Funnel right now. And so Deadline Funnel’s tool is a little bit more techie than my taste, but I have some people on the team helping me. But everybody is on their own deadline depending on when you sign up for the webinar, your deadline starts. So you are seeing a countdown timer that no one else is, and so that’s your own deadline.

The other thing is that’s not the only way we are doing it. We are just experimenting with that to see if it’s something we would like for our business. But what I’ve done in the past is we do a 50% discount in email. And so we’ll say okay, you get a 50% discount, here’s the secret code and then we email two more times and we say, okay this is it. This is your last email. Well the code they are getting is to the 50% page, but if you went to my jump start sales page, it’s actually a two hundred dollar product. So it’s the discount code that creates the scarcity.

Steve: I see. I see. Actually this is stuff that David Siteman Garland does.

Amy: Yeah, we’ve talked a lot about that at mastermind. So I got a lot of help from him.

Steve: I use a similar tool called page exploration robot. Same thing I think.

Amy: Page exploration robot.

Steve: The difference is it’s not a hosted solution, so it’s just a word press plug in, there’s no monthly fees, you just pay for it once and it’s…

Amy: Well I like that. Okay, I’ll have to check it out.

Steve: Okay, can we talk a little bit about your launches. I know in the past and I’ve kind of followed you for a little while. You have these really long launches, right. Sometimes they are like weeks and weeks.

Amy: 20 days.

Steve: Yes 20 days. So how do you structure your launch to maximize sales?

Amy: So what we do, there’s a few different things. The way our launch starts is that, we start promoting webinars. I do about five live webinars during those 20 days not including the new affiliates. I don’t do a big affiliates place, or maybe like five or six affiliates will do live webinars with me, but not [inaudible] [0:39:20] them. We do about five to our own list and we spread it out over let’s say the first week and a half, two weeks of the launch. And so what happens is we start running ads about a week in advance, maybe five days in advance of that first webinar.

The day the webinar– the first webinar, is the day the cart opens. So the first webinar I do is the first day the cart opens, and that’s when we do the 20-day countdown. 20 days is arbitrary, it’s just kind of it’s what works for us. From there, we are constantly filling up these webinars to kind of we are using Facebook ads like $40,000, $50,000 worth of Facebook ads over 20 days. And we are filing up my webinars and then a lot of the money also for ads is going to retargeting. Anybody that hits the registration page from my webinar or the sales page, they are going to get retargeted with Facebook ads encouraging them to come back, either check up the sales page or sign up the webinar.

Steve: Okay, before you go on can I just ask how much you pay for you to sign up for a webinar?

Amy: Yes, on average between three to five dollars. So that’s basically…

Steve: It’s in line with what I’m getting too.

Amy: Okay, cool. So that’s basically where we are at. And this last launch I will say, we were closer to the five dollar range and sometimes we couldn’t even get it under five dollars. So we actually stopped some of our ads. So you just never know with Facebook, because we targeted all of the same people again as we did back the last launch, but you just never know. So we run these ads. So that is part of the way we kind of keep this launch going is that we have these live webinars.

In addition, a big play is the early bird special. So I come out with the price. It’s $497 for self-study or $1000 for VIP or mastery. And what happens is about five days before the cart closes; the price goes up to full price. So we are constantly talking about the early bird pricing in ads and in emails. So there’s a huge email play as well. And so we are constantly talking about the email, I mean the early bird special going away. And I close mastery on the day that the price goes up. Because usually—I probably should close it a little bit before, once it gets to around $200 is when I want to close it out. And so once we get close to that we say like we’ve got ten spots left and it’s really true. We really have ten spots left and once they are full we close it. And that’s creates some urgency as well.

So there’s a lot of things going on. One other thing we added for this first time, this last launch we just finished that we’ve never done before are what we call timely bonuses, where I got the bonuses on my sales page. And in addition to that, we emailed twice with the special bonus people didn’t know about. So it gave us an excuse to email one of our words like my swipe file for my emails. You’ve got a packed swipe files. So we ran an ad about it, we emailed about it, and anybody who had already purchased got this bonus, and then we added it to the sales page as a new bonus. So it created some hype around that as well.

Steve: That’s clever. So you bring back people and giving them something for them to come back to your sales funnel.

Amy: Yes.

Steve: Okay. How do you—when you run your webinars, how do you ensure that people actually attend, because I would imagine the conversion rate is much better when it’s live.

Amy: Great question. This is kind of like something I’m super passionate about, because it’s a big deal. So for a while my attendance rate on webinars went down. They were on 20% maybe 25%. But it was low and it was freaking me out, because you are right. If people show up and they are live on that webinar, they are more likely to either buy live on the webinar, or they are more likely to pay attention to the my email funnel after the webinar. So it’s a really big deal that I get people on live.

So what we do now is that we send a series of about four emails and these emails are encouraging you to get on live. “Hey you signed up. We are so excited about it.” And then one of my emails is like, “Let me tell you a story about those who show up live and those who don’t. And this is what I’ve seen.” So I actually just talk about it inside the emails. I might give a case study. I give on three questions to think about before they show up live. So that’s another thing I want them to do again. Show up live, show up live. And I give them a work book to get them kind of excited about what’s to come. So we do a really big push to get people on live.

Steve: It sounds like you give away special treats for people who come on.

Amy: Yes.

Steve: Okay. And so what did that do to your attendance rate?

Amy: So we at least got up to sometimes 32% which is pretty average. I know some people have more than that. But if I’m at 30% show up rate, I feel really good especially because if we’re using go to webinar, each of my webinars I can get about 3000 people to sign up and then I cut it off. So if I get 3,000 people to show up or to sign up for a webinar then I know I’m at least going to get 30 of that a 1,000.

Steve: That is not—so what’s funny is for my class, I have done like the low energy method. So someone just signs up for my list and I have this 30-email sequence that just goes out over time.

Amy: I love that.

Steve: Because I just don’t have the time. I mean I have two kids and then a full time job actually, so I don’t have the time to do this stuff. But it’s really cool to hear, I mean it’s crazy the amount of people that you are getting on these webinars. So what is a typical conversion rate on a webinar that you feel good about when it happens?

Amy: That one’s really tough for me, because I feel like we’ve seen it all over the place. Sometimes 10%, sometimes 20%, it really truly depends on where that audience came from. My list versus an affiliate, versus cold traffic, but one thing we do pay attention to is cost per registrant. And so if we can get that around $20, even higher, we are feeling really good. So that’s the number we started to pay attention to. How much money are we ultimately going to make per everybody that registers for a webinar?

Steve: I see. So you mentioned earlier that $5 per Facebook regist—is that a registrant or someone who actually attends?

Amy: A lead. Just for a lead.

Steve: Okay. I see.

Amy: So if we are paying $5 for a lead for a lead and then we are making $30 per registrant, we are doing good.

Steve: Oh yes, absolutely. I see where you are getting at now. So can you talk a little bit about– and we are running out of time, but can you talk a little bit about like how you actually structure the actual live webinar?

Amy: Yes. So with the live webinar, what I do is, in the very beginning, and I’m very much similar to David Siteman Garland, where I tell people if you are here for this reason or this reason you are in the right place. So I just right away, if you are here to do XYZ I’m so glad you are here, because you are on the right place. And then from there, I often talk about objections and for me it’s usually Facebook no longer works, Facebook ads are too expensive all those things I know my audience is staying right off the cuff. So I address those right away.

And I spend very little time talking about myself. One thing I’ve seen in webinars a lot of people are spending like five slides telling people all about themselves, and most people don’t care. They are there, they want to learn the content, and what I’ve done even more so is I’ve started telling the story about myself through some more information. So I will talk about how my email list has grown. So that’s what people want to hear. They want to know how you did that. And I will say “When I started, this is what it looked like.”

So I’m telling stories through some success that I’ve had. And then I get into the content. I always like to gear my content directly to the product I’m going to sell, and I always like to do steps. So usually it’s seven steps to XYZ. And here’s how much they are related. My last—my profit ad program is “Seven steps to create a social media sales funnel.” Well that’s exactly what I talk in the webinar. The seven steps that are included to create social media sales funnel. But no way would I ever be able to teach so much that they are like, “I got it. I’m good. I don’t need your product.”

I get them so excited about the possibilities of what they could do that by the time I’m ready to sell, it is the most seamless thing, like hey you got two options here, you can try to figure out these seven steps on your own, who the heck has time for that. Or if you like my teaching style, and you think you’ve learned a lot today and you want to dive in deeper with me, then I want to invite you to the profit lab, and here is what we are going to do.

So it’s just a really easy transition, and that’s where most people get stuck is the content in the sell. And usually you hear a pause which I have so done this in the past. And then in a little bit of a cranky voice, and then you go into selling it, you kind of lose out, so it takes some time.

Steve: So do you offer any incentives at the end to encourage in the sign up right now?

Amy: I do, I always do a fast action bonus which is just one special bonus that I only give away if you are live on a webinar. And so that is a really big, we actually recently did this with Lead Pages, I did a big webinar — three webinars with them the last three days, ten paged in the webinars to be exact, to my list.

And we tried two different ways and one of the ways was, hey if you are on this webinar now you get this special bonus, but if you buy in the next few days we’ve got these five different things you get. But you have to buy now and we had a bigger cost per conversion, because of that, so or we had more buyers just to say, yeah.

Steve: More revenue. So that implies that you prefer to give a ways as opposed to giving coupons, right?

Amy: You are right, now you and I are in different worlds, so if I was in ecommerce I would probably do more discounts.

Steve: Interesting, why is that?

Amy: I feel like people — okay, so one of the things, do you know James Wentworth [ph]? Okay, so, James and I were talking and we were talking about what people need to actually join your email list. And I always see this; people come to your website for two reasons one, they need more information, they are looking for details to see if they ready to buy. Two, they are ready to buy, but they want to see how easy you are going to make it for them to buy.

And so this is not always true across the board, but in many cases. So when I’m ready to buy a physical product let’s say I’m interested in [inaudible 00:48:54] I need a new hair dryer. So I know I need a hair dryer, I’m looking online, Amazon is offering it for this, this site is offering it for this, but it gives me free shipping, I’m 100% going with the free shipping.

So I like when I’m going to buy a physical and I’m looking for that product, if you make it easy for me to buy, I’m more likely to do something. So discounts, free shipping, maybe a little extra zing in there, I don’t know what it would be, but if I buy this I also get that. I’m ready to buy now, so I want that, versus you again be told about my Facebook program, you might not think you even need it yet, so let me give you a free webinar cheat sheet to kind of ease you into it.

Steve: Yes, sorry I misunderstood you. I thought we were talking about my digital product here not the physical product yeah, for physical product for sure yeah.

Amy: Okay good, I thought maybe you totally disagreed with me, I’m like whoa, I’m not an expert on products, so you are so…

Steve: I don’t dare disagree with you because you are clearly — you got a book and everything so. So just curios and we are running out of time once again, but how would your structure be different if you were promoting a physical product, which doesn’t have the crazy margins that a digital product would on Facebook?

Amy: It’s so true, so I would still definitely make it play for growing my email list, but what I would do is I probably would do more of the weekly newsletter kind of things that I get from Crate & Barrel and [inaudible 00:50:12] and all that good stuff where I’m interested, tell me what you got, what’s going on. So I definitely would do a different email play every single week.

And then I would personally do more discounts and free shipping in those opportunities. I would also would probably, now this doesn’t make sense, because I should be using more video now. But I probably would even use more video if I had a physical products that I could show people what it is, what it does, what it looks like, all that good stuff. So video would probably be a bigger play for me as well.

Steve: Amy incidentally, that’s the only way I have been able to get Facebook ads profitable.

Amy: Really, that’s so good to know actually.

Steve: I send them to a content page and it’s very heavy on the email sign up forms. And it’s just a piece of content like that uses our products, like demonstrate uses of our products. Get them on the email list and there’s links to actual products that they can buy if they want, but then I market to them on the backend with an auto responder sequence.

Amy: Nice.

Steve: But when I was sending them straight to a product page, it was not well at all.

Amy: Okay, that’s really good to know, so the video really does work well for you.

Steve: Not video, just content, just text based content. We are in the wedding industry, so there’s lots of wedding ideas to get around. But we get them on the email list and then we market to them there.

Amy: Gotcha, okay, I love it that’s great to know, that’s really great to know.

Steve: So Amy I have kept you on for quite a while, thanks a lot for coming on. If anyone wants to check you out and check out your programs, listen to your dulcet voice, where can they find you?

Amy: You can find me at Amyporterfied.com, and I want to tell you this is truly been a pleasure, you definitely have a skill for interviewing, you made it a lot of fun, I can’t believe we’ve been on for an hour.

Steve: I know time flies?

Amy: Really good.

Steve: All right thanks a lot for coming on the show Amy, I really appreciate it.

Amy: Thanks a lot, you take care.

Steve: All right, take care.

What an awesome episode, it still blows my mind how Amy made almost seven figures in a single launch, that is incredible. And in fact after talking to her, I decided to do a webinar of my own and managed to make over $60,000, so her strategies really work. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode84, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.

It’s by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web. Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first years business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up on the front page and I’ll send it to you right away.

Once again I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhost out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. And in fact I hosted mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 life support via chat, phone, and email. You can install WordPress in just a single click, and they have an easy to use website builder design services. And the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount, once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in. So all you have to do is populate it with the products that you want to sell and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcomerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again URL is bigcomerce.com/mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

083: How To Create Profitable Email Autoresponders For Ecommerce Stores With Xiao Hui Wang

How To Create Profitable Email Autoresponders For Ecommerce Stores

Today I’ve my buddy Xiao Hui Wang on the show. I met Xiao Hui at the Ecommerce Fuel live event last year and he definitely made an impression on me with his email expertise.

X runs the site EssenceOfEmail.com where he specializes in email marketing specifically for ecommerce.

Unlike email marketing for blogging, sending out emails for an ecommerce store selling physical products is quite different and requires an alternate approach. X is an expert when it comes to email marketing for ecommerce so I invited him on to teach us a few lessons.

Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • The email campaigns that you should be running for your online store
  • How to structure your transactional emails
  • How to create a post purchase series
  • How to create a welcome series
  • How to create an abandoned shopping cart sequence
  • How to create a re-engagement series
  • Which autoresponder sequences to implement right away
  • Should you use images in your emails?
  • Should you use a personal or professional tone in your emails?

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email

Now before I begin I want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support via chat, phone and email, one click WordPress install, so you can literally install a WordPress blog in a matter of minutes. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

I also want to give a quick shout out to my other sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. Now as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. So you can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I have got my buddy Xiao Hui on the show. But for some reason everybody refers to him as ‘X’ which sounds way cooler, so that’s what I’m going to call him today during the interview. Anyway I met X at the ecommerce field live event last year, and he definitely made an impression on me with his email expertise. Now X runs the site essenceofemail.com, where he specializes in email marketing specifically for ecommerce.
Now unlike email marketing for blogging, sending out emails for a physical ecommerce store is quite different and actually requires someone different approach. So X is an expert in this realm when it comes to email marketing for ecommerce, so I invited him on the podcast to teach us a couple of lessons. And with that welcome to the show X, how are you doing today man?

X: I’m doing fantastic, how about yourself Steve?

Steve: I’m doing good and I understand that you are Romanian, and what’s really cool about your business– we were just beforehand is that, X actually travels to different parts of the world for like months at the time and just works there just because his business is entirely remote. So I find that really cool. But before we start X give us a quick background of how you got started with Essence of Email, how did you gain all your experience about running email campaigns for ecommerce?

X: Yeah, absolutely, so real quick background on myself, so prior to starting this company which I started about a year and a half ago, a little bit more than that, I was working for about two years with a different agency in San Francisco, and we were doing the exact same thing ecommerce email. So that’s kind of where I learned the ropes of email marketing, and so if you add up the years it’s been kind of three and a half years just daily [scheme] and there’s particular channels of email marketing for ecommerce.

So I have kind of seen the game in terms of different email programs from various different niches whether it’s apparel, whether it’s furniture, whether it’s supplements, anything under the sun as well as kind of the different sizes of stores from people who are just starting out all the way up to some aisle of 500 big bucks retailers.

Steve: Well, so here is the question, so why did you decide to leave that firm, and how did you know that you could do this on your own as an independent company?

X: Yeah, a great question, so it was a great company that I worked for, I was — I had great relationships with all my co-workers and boss and all that. Well, really I knew — I guess from an early age if you will, that I was just meant to kind of do the more entrepreneurial path or something like that, because it’s just kind of my personality and the way I am. I’m part of that networking group, you might have heard of it dynamos circle, basically a lot of location independent entrepreneurs. I mean they have annual meet ups similar to Ecommerce Fuel, and I went to one I think that was back in 2013.

I got to get my year straight now. So it was the end of 2013, and I was talking to some people I was saying, hey I really want to get on my own, I really want to kind of try to do some long term travel as well as create a company. And actually from that conference I got my first two clients. So it kind of rolled from there, and I decided like hey, let’s just try this thing on my own and we are here.

Steve: That’s cool, so how do you get your clients, I’m just curious in general?

X: In general yes, mostly referral and very specific — people coming in from very specific like content we have. For example Ecommerce Fuel actually has been a good source just because every once the ecommerce store owner there. And what we’ve been doing, we actually haven’t been doing a lot of heavy marketing, which is something I should probably focus on too. But mostly we’ve just been putting out some good content around email marketing for ecommerce, and showing people different tips and specifics on how they can improve their programs. And then we’ve mostly been word of mouth to date.

Steve: Yeah, because I know that, I first encountered you when you — on the Ecommerce Fuel forum you posted like this gigantic ten page thing on email marketing. I was like damn I have never seen anyone post such a long post on a forum before, and that’s what got my attention, I’m not sure if you’ve got any clients from that as well. But is that your strategy for getting clients, just putting content out there, getting yourself known, and then having people come to you?

X: Yeah, absolutely I think on our side, the marketing is important for every business of course, but in our mind it’s really about delivering for clients. So right now we have our current clients, and we are more focused on stream lining our operations to make sure we are giving the most value there. And my philosophy is, you definitely want to do some marketing, but the same time the best kind of marketing is just satisfied clients, right?

People are happy with the work you do, then they let other people know, especially in the space and a lot of other spaces, ecommerce store owners tend to also know other ecommerce store owners. So word of mouth has been pretty powerful for us.

Steve: So what are some of the companies that you’ve helped in the past, do you have any success stories that you would like to share just to demonstrate kind of like the power of email?

X: Yeah, absolutely and we work with kind of a variety of different niches, but I’ll just pull one of the recent engagements we just wrapped up with. And they sell — I won’t get into specifics of the product, but they sell kind of one type of product that’s very — it’s customized, but it’s not like a store that sells a bunch of different skills. And for them they had literally zero email marketing. And what we did for them is we implemented a couple of different auto responder sequences for them. And also on boarded their list which has been — it was — they have been in business for a few years, so they had a few thousand on their list, but they haven’t really sent any email out to them.

So we pretty much took the list, cleaned up a bit and sent the first few campaigns out to get people rolling, in addition to auto responder sequences. And today it’s accounted for about 40% of monthly revenue. Just to do email channel since we got started, so it’s pretty powerful in terms of going from no email to having a program running. So and generally I would say like a target to shoot for, and it’s kind of a big range, but depending on your audience, anywhere between 10% to 30% of total revenue coming from the email channel is a good estimate.

Steve: So all those of that 15% or whatever it was, what percentage of those are new customers, versus old customers, versus recovery customers?

X: Yeah, absolutely so I don’t have the exact percentages in front of me, but I would say one of the more successful parts of that was the prospect series. So that one is geared towards new customers coming in, so we are targeting them primarily through on site overlays, so smart overlay capture forms that’s based on certain set of logics, so it’s not just popping up whenever someone first gets on. And that’s targeting people who have not purchased before and with that’s we’ve seen some pretty high conversion rates, I’d say in terms of the 14% not quite 50%, but maybe like 35 to 45 was coming from that.

And then the rest are sequencers for repurchases etcetera. Now a caveat there is that usually, even though prospects series are quite powerful you usually will still view email as primarily a remarketing channel. So most of the time focusing on the past customers that’s where you’ll get the most bank for your book.

Steve: Okay, so let’s go into a lot more depth about some of the things that you said, so let’s say from this scenario of a business owner, let’s say I’m one of your clients. And let’s say I have like 5,000 emails that I have just collected randomly, I haven’t done anything with them for a year. What would you advice me to do, and what sort of sequences should I focus on first?

X: Yeah, absolutely, so first I would ask you, how did you collect those email addresses, most of the time the majority, the biggest portion of the list is going to come from past customers who sign up when they are checking out, right? So they have the checkout, at check out you have the ‘subscribe to our newsletter box’ and you are getting customers coming in from there. So let’s assume that’s the case where it’s mostly just past customers. The next step then is if they are a year old, it’s not as bad, but if they are several years, we will still probably go through the same process.

But what I’m worried about is we can’t really use that entire list, because there’s going to be — the list is more or less cold as we call it, because we haven’t emailed them really sends, the oldest customers are like a year old. So what we would do is we would do a little bit of a list cleaning. There are several ways to go about that, the easiest way is probably to use a pay service. So there’s a couple of third party software where we can take your list and put it in and they’ll spit out kind of the bad email addresses, and we’ll keep ones that are good, so you can retain the portion that are good.

And the reason to do this is of course to help your deliverability, making sure that you don’t have these bad addresses on your email list that make you get blacklisted, or have problems getting into the inbox.

Steve: So you don’t recommend sending an email saying, hey I know we haven’t contacted you in a while, if you want to stay on this list click here type of thing?

X: See we do want to do that, but this is a step before actually, because what this does is it will clean out the ones that say are email addresses that are typos for example. Or are just bad email addresses that have gone dormant etcetera, potentially spam traps on there. So afterwards then we will proceed to actual sending of the message, right?

So then we will send out email saying, hey something like what you said, we haven’t really messaged you in a while, but we have — we are starting up the new email program with all these cool things going on, if you want to subscribe stay on the list. So that’s one way to do it, and another way is I guess maybe a little bit less cautious, but in terms of response rates it’s just playing on that psychology right? The checked box, pre checked box versus the unchecked box, kind of psychology.

So instead of saying– because if the list the way you got the list was people already checking the box for example at check out, they are technically opted in already, right? So it’s more so just to make sure that you don’t want to opt out. In which case the way I would structure that email would be something like, hey we haven’t messaged you in a while, if you don’t want to be on our new awesome email program then click here to unsubscribe. And thus that should retain you — at least initially, and create a portion out of the list, than if you ask someone specifically for extra call to action to re-subscribe.

Steve: Okay, right, okay, and so what’s the next step, I’m not sending out any emails and now I have this list that is kind of responsive.

X: Absolutely, so let me just back track a little bit on, just a quick little high level thing and then will talk specifically on that. So basically at the high level we see email programs for ecommerce as two parts. One is of the automated emails so auto responders, the triggers, the sequences etcetera. And then two is the kind of regular manual promotional campaigns, so you are setting up and sending to the larger portion of the list. So to answer your question and those are the two parts you want to focus on. So I say number one, you want to just stab on the side of the badge [ph] campaigns.

You want to establish some sort of calendar and stick to that calendar. So even if it’s like a once per month sort of send, the key is sticking to that and not just sporadically sending whenever you remember emails. So that’s one side, even if it’s like a newsletter or once a month promotion something like that they could all work. Start simple, start working, rather than running and have that calendar in place that you are following for the mass sends.

Steve: Do you have a recommendation on email frequency for those marketing emails?

X: Yeah, absolutely, so we would like — it varies depending on your audience and your product and how responsive they are. But on a general level what we say is let’s start more conservative, so once or twice a month, and then scale up, and see the trends and the engagement rates. And then in addition to that there’s another level you can do particular for more amateur programs as well is you want to segment your list based on the engagement, so that different segment and [sketch] different frequency.

So if you think about it, let’s say you have a list of like 10,000 people, right? In the beginning you can send them all at the same frequency, but once you get some more data in, then it doesn’t make sense to send the entire list, say you normally send like three times a month. It doesn’t make sense to send the entire list three times a month. No, because maybe 2,000 of those 10,000 people open every single email. They are really engaged, they’ll open, they’re clicking and then maybe 7,000 of them really open their email every once in a while, but not every single one.

And then the rest of them are almost never opening or once in a blue moon, right? And in those cases what we suggest is at least passing out the list by engagement, you can look at open rates, you can look at click rates, you can look at a combination of the factors and saying hey, the folks who are most engaged with us, we want to send them at our highest frequency. And then the once that are kind of in the middle will scale it down a bit and the ones that are very dormant let’s touch them only once in a while with our really juicy promotions.

Steve: Is there a certain open rate and click rate goal that you are trying to achieve?

X: Well, again, the core of it is it depends right, based on the benchmark of your previous emails and how they do. But in general I would say it like average sort of industry wide open rate that I like to see is at least like 20%. And that’s kind of a really rough bench mark, depending on how your niche it could be much-much higher. I mean we’ve had clients come in and they are at 50% plus straight off the bat just because of their product and their…

Steve: And of course the content matters also right?

X: Yeah, absolutely. And you also want to keep in mind the composition of your list is going to impact your open rates, potentially bias it. For example, if it’s an old list and not really in this scenario, but for example if a client came to us, they’ve been sending a little bit of email, they had an old list and like 50% of that list is actually very dormant, then say we do a list cleaning and take out all those people who have never opened in a long time. Then artificially open rates is going to spike up, you want to take that in context.

Steve: I was just asking that question from the stand point of if the open rates start dropping to a certain number, start getting worried that you might need to clean out your list.

X: Yeah, that’s one thing. Another thing is there’s many factors impacting it. Maybe your copy on the [inaudible] [0:18:47] line is not up to par. Maybe the content that you are sending is just getting old. There’re various things that can impact it.

Steve: So let’s focus actually on the auto-responders because most people are lazy, and they want something just kind of automated. So let’s talk about some of the automated sequences that you advice people/stores to implement.

X: Yap, absolutely. So I’ll just kind of give a list, talk a little bit about each, so obviously number one cart abandonment email, kind of a no brainer. It’s going to be very productive on the revenue front and the pound for pound is a very good email to have or a sequence even. So at the very least having one, and then you can potentially build it out to be multiple attachments.

Steve: So how would you structure your abandoned sequence? What works well for some of your clients?

X: Yeah it’s actually very again we definitely want to start with the first one and generally how we structure is up to three touch points. The first one going out say like four to six hours after cart abandonment, and that is just kind of a friendly reminder. Sometimes we show the products, sometime we just have straight call to action to come back. Generally we don’t offer a discount code within the first one.

And then if we then additionally we do the next one which will like be a 24 hour later one and then maybe like a 48 or 72 hour later touch. Then we potentially will put a coupon code or a free shipping code or something into the second one and the third one. One thing you can do is you can do a scale. For instance on the second one you might have a 10% offer and on the third one you might have a 15% off, the logic being you might need a better discount if they gotten to that point and still haven’t purchased.

Steve: So how do you prep people from gaming that system?

X: If you are a savvy marketer you’ll probably game the system. What I’ve noticed is it’s not the [inaudible] [0:20:44] the audience, the customers who buy from you and all that, but in general people are not as savvy marketers as we are. The normal consumer is not really thinking that deep for most part. So we haven’t found it to be too much of a problem, but of course the key is if we do not want to train them to be in that mindset, right? So not really good answer to how to completely prevent them.

Steve: What I was getting at was would you recommend not giving coupon codes for example for someone who has purchased in the past already?

X: Yeah that’s one way to go about it. I say to you, one thing to look at is just doing like an A/B test on one with the coupon code, one without a coupon code. Not only to see which one performs better because most of the time the coupon code is going to perform better, but also just comparing like the margins that you are sacrificing, is that really worth the lift in the sales.

Steve: Okay, and what are some of the guidelines for– like what conversion rates do you typically see from these abandoned emails?

X: They vary yet again, but anywhere…

Steve: Like when should I be worried? If the percentage is too low, like when should I get worried that I’m not doing the right thing?

X: Yeah if it’s dropping, if you are seeing like a 10% conversion rate or something, it’s probably a bit low. I’d say like keep it above 15% to up, the sky is the limit up there. But…

Steve: So just be clear, you meant 15% on the people who actually click on the link and land in your site, or people who you send, period.

X: On the sent; on the carts abandoned.

Steve: On the carts abandoned. And this is across the entire three sequence or just like the—you are trying them at the whole sequence right?

X: Yeah. Generally you are going to see the majority of conversions come off the first one.

Steve: Wow, so you are saying double digits of the abandoned carts can be recovered and that’s like a standard?

X: Yeah that’s fairly standard.

Steve: Okay, all right. Did you have anything else to say about the abandonment series or?

X: No I’ll jump to the next ones.

Steve: Okay.

X: So cart abandonment is one. Then also is this very based on the product, but basically kind of a reorder/cross-sale/up-sale kind of trigger. So based on the products they purchased, you want to, in a delay of course. So one that is 30 days later, 60 days later, you want to push them different products and promote to them different recommended products based around what products they purchase. In addition if your store is selling something that’s consumable, so if you are selling supplements, if you are selling anything else that’s consumable, then the reorder trigger is going to be key.

So I mean a lot of supplement companies would do like you can purchases a subscription which is great or you can purchase one off, sort of bottle or something. So in those cases you know about what time for each kind of product they will run out, and that’s a perfect opportunity to send them a reminder saying, “Hey it’s time to repurchase this particular product that you bought.”

Steve: What happens if your product is not consumable? Do you have any examples of reengagement series that companies that don’t have consumables use?

X: Yeah absolutely. So in those cases, I’d say you want to lean towards like a cross-sale or up-sale search. You still mention the product that they purchased, and then you would recommend particular ones that either go well with that product, or they are the next step above. Yeah go ahead.

Steve: No I was just going to ask, do you typically include some sort of discount for these people? How do you get them to actually come back?

X: Yeah great question. So there’s two ways to go about it. Sometimes, if we are doing kind of just a generic win back if you will, we would say, “Hey here’s a discount, if you come back and shop at this site.” Other times if we are getting more specific with the product recommendations and really strilling [ph] down to like the skill level, then end and of itself, that is sort of a value add, and generally we get people coming back through that. So in those cases it’s more so like, “Hey here’s more cool things we found for you to purchase, and here’s a reminder,” rather than here’s just another coupon code.

Steve: Hey everyone, I just wanted to take a quick moment to thank famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now FameBit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brand from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Now videos start as low as $50, and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers.

If you’ve listen to my podcast before, one of my guests, Emmanuel Eli, used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code ‘my wife quit’ at famebit.com, you will automatically get $10 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: Okay, so how I’m interpreting that is it’s not necessary to include the coupon code as long as you get a little bit more granular in what you are offering.

X: Yeah and again you should probably test it for a pretty good situation. Do one with a coupon code, do one without, see if it’s generating a significantly higher amount of sales from it.

Steve: Okay. And you are mentioning all of these things, but we are not really talking about implementation so to speak. Is there any particular piece of software that you use to implement these for these companies?

X: Yeah absolutely. So we use quite a few, but let’s just start with kind of the basics. So you have your shopping cart, and you have your email service provider which is just the platform like MailChimp for example is very popular. You can– generally we have a combination of sending out from the email service provider, and some directly from the shopping cart, and sometimes even another kind of another app or extension or some plug-in that we would recruit and use in addition to those two just based on the unique circumstances.

So let’s just take an example, for example Magento or MailChimp. That’s a pretty common combination. We would do the newsletter, the promotional campaigns, through MailChimp; we pass all these subscribers to MailChimp as well. We would set up like the post purchase welcome series, probably some prospect series in MailChimp as well. But things like the order confirmation, shipping confirmations going out through Magento, or a plug-in in Magento if you will, and cart abandonment will go through Magento as well.

And then we need to then do like product reviews and like some even– potentially the product reorder ones. Generally in product reorder we like to just, it’s a little bit more tedious because MailChimp doesn’t have a great way of just doing it in one trigger. So you would need to kind of set up a few based on different skills. We can either do it that way, or we can do again a plug-in with Magento to run those. A lot of times people also use like different review software like Yappo or Reseller ratings and all that, so that’s a different story.

Steve: Okay. I guess it just depends on what your platform is going to be. I was just curious if you have like a third party platform that’s one of your favorites.

X: Yeah I mean, generally MailChimp is a good start in terms of just having an email service provider. They have ecommerce 360 functionality which is cool that you can target based on certain order criteria. It has its limitations, but it’s a good place to start if you have kind of a smaller list and you just want to get started with email marketing.

If you want to go along the– We like to use Klaviyo because they are very focused on ecommerce unlike some of the other email service providers which cater to a lot of different niches. So their functionality is very focused on kind of a lot of the older data, and different scenarios to run into as an ecommerce shop owner.

Steve: Yeah we actually started using Klaviyo ourselves and it’s extremely powerful, and I’m actually having Ed on the show at some point down the line, but let’s go back. Sorry, we took a segway there. We were talking about reengagement series. And what’s another series that you would focus on also.

X: Yeah actually let me just make a small correction there. Generally we wouldn’t call what we are talking about reengagement series. We would say it’s maybe like a product follow up or something like that. In my mind the reengagement series really means a series you are running your dormant contacts through, and attempt to actively reactivate them. So the purpose of a reengagement series then is at the end of the series, for those people who did not respond, you are actually going to clean them from the list. So just a little bit of terminology there.

Steve: Okay. So what would you call the list that we were just talking about?

X: Yes, I’d say it would be like a product reorder product, seller product…

Steve: Kind of like a post purchase?

X: Yeah that would be part of the post purchase series. There’s going to be other touch points within there.

Steve: Okay. So when someone buys, it looks like we’ve gone through the thank you email and then the product reorder, what else goes in that sequence. Let’s finish that one off before we go on to the next one.

X: So for the post purchase series, in addition to the order confirmation, shipping confirmation, that they get anyways, the welcome email, what we like to do sometimes with that is have a call to action focused around asking them to take like some sort of survey, or to manage their preferences in which they self-identify certain characteristics about themselves. So for example what kind of product they are interested in, how they are using it, maybe what kind of demographics they are in, whatever is potentially helpful for you as a store owner to start examining those contacts.

Steve: What sort of questions do you ask?

X: I kind of rattled a few there, but in addition to that, one thing to finish that as well is if they have a particular email frequency. So if they want to receive email once a month, once per week or never, something like that, and anything else that would really help segment. So if you think about [inaudible] [0:31:50] so that’s not necessarily something that you would self-identify of, but for example if you are selling [inaudible] [0:32:00] for example, find an implication that area giving it– you’ve been getting their birthdays, or you can do a birthday trigger on, stuff like that.

Steve: And how do you incentivize them to actually fill out the survey?

X: You can either, not incentivize them and just have coffee with them.” Okay, this will be super helpful for us.” Or you can try a response until finally you can say, “Hey, fill out the survey and we will give you a small code, or small discount to use on your next purchase.”

Steve: Okay, and then once you have this information, how do you– so then you just start creating segments for these people. How is this automated?

X: Yeah absolutely. So I think with the segmentation based on some of those characteristics, is more so to get you started. So you want to continue to build a panel. So for example you want to add other criteria later on as you get more advanced such as if they visited particular product pages, what their past purchase behavior has been et cetera. So once you build out these segments, I think it’s less about automating to them, although there are other certain things you can do. But more so when you are creating sort of bigger promotions, you can be more targeted rather than sending to your entire list.

You can send to different segments, you can also incorporate the data; this gets a little bit more advanced than what you needed in the beginning. But basically you can have conditional logic in the email template itself. So you can say if someone is on X segment, then they will be shown this piece of content in the email, if they are on Y segment, they will be shown a different piece of content.

Steve: So what I was trying to get at is you are using the survey kind of to figure out what content is appealing to your customer as opposed to using that survey to automatically segment the list, is that kind of accurate?

X: That’s correct in this case, yeah.

Steve: Okay. Sorry I interrupted you again. Please go on.

X: Oh no worries, I was done with that part.

Steve: Okay, so survey, so we’ve got the thank you email, the survey, anything else?

X: Yeah, in addition to that, if you think about the process of a customer purchasing, right? Right after they purchase your product, they are kind of on that warm and fuzzy or high if you will after you buy products. So it’s the perfect time to take advantage of that, well take advantage is negative connotation, but use that. We don’t want to take advantage of our customers. But basically if you have– some brands are super active on social media for example on Instagram, on Pinterest, on Facebook, or Twitter. It’s a good opportunity to ask for sharing, for user generated photos, something like that.

So you don’t necessarily– most people after they purchase, they don’t necessarily just jump back and purchase right away again. You do get some of that actually on order shipping confirmation. Sometimes you will see immediate repurchases, after they click through those. But in general, what you want to do is you want to kind of build upon that enthusiasm and try to start building the process by getting them a bit more loyal to your brand, and getting the word out there for you.

Steve: Yes, so what do you recommend for that? just sending out content, pure content, or like what would your sequence be for just keeping engaged with the customer, and then occasionally getting them sales emails.

X: Absolutely. So if you envision the sequence post purchase is actually going to be super long, because how this will go, is that it will dovetail into your main email campaign. So basically it’s a couple of quick points, quick touch points and then they will be put on to your main kind of ongoing email sequence pieces which are more manual.

So we want to thank them, we want to get them to share us. So maybe we mention some of the, if you have a really good blog or something, mention some of the cool piece of content they may find useful within the next touch point. And then if you have like a royalty program and some additional value add for shopping with you, mention that as well. But afterwards then they will kind of move towards your batch campaigns in your regular sense afterwards.

Steve: Okay and so I know we also touched on the reengagement series, can we talk a little bit about that, because it’s different than the post purchase series that we’ve been talking about, right?

X: Yeah absolutely. So the reengagement series, basically with any email list, even if you are doing very good email marketing, a portion of that list will eventually become dormant. Now of course a portion of them will just unsubscribe or complain or something, but there’s so many people who just don’t open their emails, they are dormant, but they never unsubscribe. They are still on the list.

So the reengagement series is really a precursor to cleaning the list. A quick way to do this is just identify your dormant people and just remove them, but that’s not going to be the best way because you can reactivate a portion of those folks right. So it’s not going to be big portion, maybe less than 10% sometimes a little bit higher than that of those folks may still have some life in them, and would engage in your emails in the future at some point.

So what we’re trying to do with the reengagement series is to identify who those contacts are. Basically what we’re doing is we’re sending them maybe like a three or four touch point series over a course of a little bit longer so maybe over a course of a month or something like that. Where the purpose of these email is to get them to open or click right.

So basically if they take that action we know at least their email address isn’t completely dead. So for those folks who do take that action we’re going to keep them on our list maybe have them on a very little frequency, but keep them on our list, and then for the rest of them who are dormant, and have not responded to this reengagement series we clean them from the list.

Steve: So to get them to click do you tend to use very catchy headlines?

X: Yes, so the subject line is going to be key in terms of the series, because you know one of the primary things they see first is that subject line, and that’s going to be very responsible for– to kind of opens that you will get.

Steve: So what are some examples of subject lines that you would use?

X: Yeah absolutely so you can get as clever as you want, but let me just– why don’t I do this, why don’t I break down typically what mail content or topics should be within the series, and then that will give you an idea in terms of the subject lines right. In general you’ll see a lot of stores do this, the first sort of touch on this is a sort of what to call like ‘we’ve missed you’ kind of email.

So you can see different brands be very creative with the copy here or potentially just saying, “Hey we haven’t see you in a while, do you still want to get our emails?” Something like that, and with that one you’re not really offering too much incentive yet, it’s a very light touch point, just reminding them you’re still there, maybe saying, “Hey here are some of our new products since the last time you potentially visited.” And getting them to open the email.

The second one– and series could potentially go wrong, but generally we keep it to a three or four touch points. Second one would be something that’s really screaming to them on the discount front right. So something really juicy that’s on beyond your normal discount, say like if you offer a lot of five percent off discounts you want to offer like a 10% on in here in this case. And you want to at least have the illusion of being it being personalized, sometimes based on technologies you use it’s hard to get true personalized expiring coupon codes within each one of these emails, but for this one it’s what we call like a ‘deep discount’ sort of email, where we’re playing on a different angle to try and get them to reengage right. So we’re saying here’s a really juicy discount, click through, use the discount etcetera.

Steve: Is– oh sorry go on.

X: Go ahead.

Steve: No, I was just going to ask is reengagement series in terms of when to send it out, is this like an automated thing or is it something that you manually kick off occasionally for people?

X: Great question, so generally what we do is we start the first one as a manual, because a lot of time there’s a lot of dormant folks on a list when you’re starting the series. So we do a manual one for the bulk of the lists are dormant, and then from there we want to automate it. And depending on the technologies you use it could be a little bit difficult to automate, because really a true automated sequence for this is if they fall through all of the emails and don’t reengage at all, then they automatically get unsubscribed right.

Sometimes the ESP, the email service provided doesn’t have that functionality where you can say unsubscribe them. So in that case maybe put them on a separate list that you go in every once in a while and unsubscribe. So ideally it would be automated after the first sort of manual sequence, it is kind of a combination depending on what you’re working with.

Steve: Sorry I interrupted you before you were going to talk about the third touch point.

X: Yeah sure so the third touch pint is one– third/fourth sometimes we do four sometimes we do three. Its’ really being very straight forward and saying, “Hey if you don’t respond in some way we’ are just unsubscribing you from the list.” So it’s just black and white saying, “Hey we haven’t heard from you, it doesn’t seem you’re interested we’re going to unsubscribe you unless you click on this or do this action.” So it’s pretty much like a last ditch sort of effort for it.

And then a potential fourth one– so like if you imagine third one saying like, “Hey we’ll unsubscribe you in seven days if you don’t do action,” then a potential fourth one would be like, “Okay, you’re unsubscribed, but here’s a chance to re-subscribe if you ever want to in the future.” So it’s kind of the same part and parcel you can combine into one if you want.

Steve: Okay, so we’ve talked a lot about the auto responders, do you have any kind of advice on how to structure your regular marketing campaigns? And here’s a specific question relating to that, do you advice writing your emails on a very personal tone, or use more professional template like you see some of the big buck stores using?

X: Yeah, that’s a question that in this case is going to be really– I say it really depends a lot but this really does depend right, run A/B test and that’s the only way you’ll find out. So whether it’s a very professional a lot of graphics you know super optimized for images off all that, with the headers and the footers, and navigations, and all that or it’s like more of a plain text maybe just in light [inaudible] [0:43:29] elements, run some head to head A/B tests and you’ll find out.

Sometimes it’s also important to not just base your decision on one test, because a lot of times like for example, if you’re sending out regularly kind of these polished emails, and all of a sudden you send text one, you’ll probably going to get much higher engagement rates. But that might be [inaudible] [0:43:52] just because people respond to things that are [inaudible] [0:43: 55], so if it’s something that’s outside the norm from what they’ve been getting, sort of juicy artificial like in the engagement rates. If you test a couple you find one is a clear winner, then I ask you stick with it.

Steve: Okay, I’m just curious in your experience though for some of the smaller shops what has worked?

X: Great question, so in general we get better performance from more polished, but on that note you have to kind of be cognizant of not having like too much images where if it’s images off people just see blank email, and certain architectural elements, where in general we see kind of better click rates where we’re giving them more options. Of course you have the main call to action whenever you’re sending out email based on the topic of your email, but having the ability to have like header navigation with different categories, or footer navigation, that generally increases aggregate grades.

Steve: Okay, and then when you’re trying to optimize these campaigns, you talk about click rates and open rates a lot, but do you factor in the actual conversions?

X: Absolutely.

Steve: So you don’t really care– that was a damn question actually, but what I meant by that was what is your main metric in the beginning when you’re focusing on these emails, do you just look at conversions irrespective of click through rate and open rate for these emails?

X: No everything is has been taken to context, there’s a lot of different metrics you have to analyze to get the full story right. For example open rates what it’s telling you is primarily is A on that particular email like is our subject line good, is our pre-header good, have we been doing a good job up until that point in terms of having diverse content and keeping people engaged.

Click rate tells us more about– rather we separate click through opens, click through send because they tell a little bit of different story as well. But in general how many people are clicking the emails are– that’s dependent on the content of your emails; it’s dependent also a lot on the layout and how you’re coding your emails, and in the design and other factors around that.

And then of course conversion rate is the [embalm deal] at the end of the day, because you can do the most beautiful emails in the world, if they’re not converting then they’re not doing much for you right. On conversion rates of course the key is to make sure your attribution is tight, because if you for example just Google Analytics, a lot of the times we’re seeing Google Analytics just terribly under attribute what email is doing by the coders magnitude.

Steve: Wait, wait, why is that, like if you’re tagging your links why would that be the case?

X: Yes, so a lot of times email gets kind of under attributed in the sense a lot of times people would be clicking on email and then they either are converting on a desktop later, for example they click on mobile, they convert on different browser later, or they– on notify of the sale from email and they wouldn’t have come to the site anyway if they didn’t get the notification, and then they come at a later day directly to the site and click through stuff like that.

So in general we’ll get that portion that clicking through and ideally purchasing which is a portion you’ll see. At the same time there’s some issues around that, and what we recommend, actually the way we track the metrics is kind of– it’s a bit manual in some cases, but what we like to look at is different sources, so Google Analytics is one source. If your email service provider has their own web tracking we also take into account that, sometimes for example say for Klaviyo they just happen that they one. And then in addition to that if you’re using coupon codes, and even like email coupon codes, so you’re not promoting anywhere else, taking a look and comparing that data against the rest of the data, because sometimes you see some discrepancy.

Steve: Okay and I wanted also your opinion on using a lot of images in emails as opposed to just text, like you kind of touch on that, but I was just curious what your recommendations are?

X: So nowadays – most of the time [inaudible] [00:48:21] Gmail and whatever you’re opening your email with they’re getting better with just showing images, for example Google and this wasn’t that recent ago, but they rolled out kind of the default show images on and have been routing all the images to their own servers to be able to that.

So it’s getting better in terms of just show all your images correctly, but there are still substantial amount of our clients that are going to default with image off, so we are working on, which means if you are heavily-heavily image based in your emails, then a lot of the times your email might just show up with a couple of text and a blank email which is not good.

So we like to have a combination where we are using images, because a lot of products you need that visual to drive people to come back, but at the same time we’re focused on coding elements in HTML whenever possible right. So you’ll see with our [inaudible] [0:49:24] for example the header navigation, the footer navigation, and anywhere where there’s copy for most part, that’s going to be based in HTML and hot coded in.

And then the places where we can avoid it with the actual images, we’ll have like styleless all text, or kind of just a space for the image so that you can clearly tell that if you turn your images on you’ll see it. So it’s a combination, you don’t necessarily don’t want to do any images, but you definitely don’t want to do just a pure image sort of layout which actually you know I see that a lot with big time retailers.

Steve: Yeah, I know I do too, that’s why I was asking yeah.

X: And I think– and again maybe they do their own tests and they found that just works for them, but one of my theories is I think a lot of times is just the bureaucracy, they got creative departments that want pretty emails and the performance is secondary.

Steve: This is my opinion, my opinion is that a lot of these businesses don’t actually split test their emails right, and so that’s why I was just curious.

X: Oh yeah, I don’t want to go into specifics, but some of these big retailers, they may not even be segmenting that well let alone split testing, so yeah just because they’re big doesn’t necessarily mean they’re masters at this particular channel. I mean a lot of them do a really good job, but there’s also a lot that don’t.

Steve: Okay, real big question for me also is how do you escape the promotions tab, do you have any tips there?

X: Yeah so I think it’s less so about escaping it, because ultimately Google is getting smarter and getting smarter, so it’s less about escaping as more so about just keeping your users engaged. In addition into kind of doing your normal promotions you’re adding in less salesy emails, you know maybe craft a newsletter, things along those lines. I remember when the Google firm came out the tabs, the whole industry was kind of in uproar, which was when they brought that priority inbox and all of that.

Every time Google or Gmail does something crazy people freak out about it, but at the end of the day if you look at the stats there’s like some spikes and drops in the beginning, and then [inaudible] [0:51:49] I think they’re all click rates are just like a little bit below prior. At the end of the day I don’t think there is a strategy to try to escape the priorities tab, but rather do everything you can to keep your customers engaged.

Steve: Okay, all right I think those are all the questions that I’ve got, I mean we covered a whole bunch of stuff in this interview. Hey X thanks a lot for coming on the show, I learned a lot and where can people find you if they’re interested in getting consulting, or some advice about their email campaigns?

X: Yeah absolutely, so the best place to be is just our website which is www.essesnceofemail.com, or if you just want to shoot me an email as well my email is probably the simplest one ever, it’s just X@essesnseofemail.com.

Steve: Awesome X, well thanks a lot for coming on the show man really appreciate your time.

X: Sure no problem, I enjoyed it.

Steve: All right man, take care.

X: Take care.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, X is one of my go to guys when it comes to email marketing specifically for ecommerce. And if you could not tell already email for ecommerce versus email for blogging or selling info products is actually quite different as there many more facets to consider when selling physical products online.

For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode83, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business, go to Mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right there on the front page.

Once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. So everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in so all you got to do is populate it with the products you want to sell, and you can literally start you store in a matter of hours. Simply go to Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free, once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank Hostgator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhost on there that I recommend of you want to start blog. In fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email, and you can install WordPress in just a single click. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, basically everything you need, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to Hostgator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount, once again that’s Hostgator.com/mywifequit thanks for listening

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

082: How Ed Hallen Started Klaviyo An Email Marketing Service Designed For Ecommerce

How Ed Hallen Started Klaviyo An Email Marketing Service Designed Specifically For Ecommerce

Today, I’m thrilled to have Ed Hallen on the show. If you’ve never heard of Ed, he is the founder and CEO of Klaviyo, a very popular email marketing provider that specifically caters to ecommerce stores.

Email has been a very central part of my marketing strategy for both my blog and my ecommerce store. And just recently, I’ve been cheating on my other email provider with Klaviyo and I’m thinking about getting a divorce.

I’ve been very impressed with what I’ve seen so far even though I’ve really just scratched the surface and what’s so powerful about Klaviyo is that it allows you collect information about every single customer in your shop and what they purchase.

Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Ed came up with the idea of starting Klaviyo and the back story behind it
  • The motivations for starting a business in a very crowded space
  • How much did Ed invested in his business early on
  • How Ed made Klaviyo the ecommerce store owner’s choice of platform
  • The challenges early on with his business and the difficulties of running a SAAS business
  • How email marketing will evolve as a strategy going forward

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and join me for a free live workshop on ecommerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com and sign up right on the front page.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick shout out to HostGator for sponsoring the show. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend, and in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted in the HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 live support via chart, phone and email, one click WordPress install, so you can literally install an entire blog in just one click. And easy to use website builder design services, marketing services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. Please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the 30% discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit.

Now I just want to give another shout out to my other episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce does not nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products, and you can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quite Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Ed Hallen on the show. Now if you’ve never heard of Ed he is the founder of klaviyo a very popular email marketing provider that specifically caters to ecommerce stores. Now email has been very a central part of my marketing strategy for both my blog and my ecommerce store. And just recently I have been cheating actually on my other email provider with klaviyo, and I’m thinking about getting a divorce actually. I have been very impressed with what I have seen so far, even though I really just scratch the surface of the email marketing service.

And what’s so powerful about Klaviyo is that it allows you to collect information about every single customer in your shop and what they purchase. So therefore if you want to send an email for anyone who has purchased a red lace handkerchief, you can easily do that. If you want to send an email to people who haven’t purchased in 60 days you can easily do that. If you want to offer a onetime coupon to first time buyers only you can easily do that. So Klaviyo is the most powerful email platform that I have actually used for ecommerce that’s far, and with that welcome to the show Ed, I’m really eager to see and learn how Klaviyo got started.

Ed: Hey thanks to you definitely great to be here, it’s been a long time been on the podcast.

Steve: Thanks Ed, how did you come up with the idea, tell me about Klaviyo, what’s the back story behind it. And I’m actually really curious about the name also how you came up with that.

Ed: Yeah, so the quick back story, our background the flunkies background had really been in marketing for kind of the large scale fortune 500 players, so the Wal-Marts and the Targets of the world. And what we saw there was that those companies have a ton of money, were spending tons of money on engineers, on marketers to basically take everything they knew about customers to drive kind of smarter and more personalized just better marketing. And I think we really stopped and said, hey, wait a minute why is this only happening in big companies and also why does it take so much money to not just send everybody the same marketing message.

And so from that we kind of started giving a toss in ecommerce, and really said if newsletters have the most marketing as always been, let’s just send the same thing to everybody. If we can pull in the pages, some things like that, the categories they looked at, what they bought, if they just had a support issue kind of where they are, anything we know about those customers. We can send an email that one the customers are going to like a lot better and we can also send an email that just going to be way more effective.

Steve: Just curious for these large fortune 500 companies, do they have home grown solutions, or do they use third part solutions as well?

Ed: It tends to be a mix and a bit of a hunch pad. I think what has been remarkable through us throughout is that the assumption was kind of that had these giant companies have really solved this and they’ve figured out and they haven’t. And for the most part they are using some off the shelf system, but coupled away with lots of engineers, lots of marketers in a lot of the manual work. And we see the same thing in ecommerce like just because a store has 50 million dollars in revenue, it doesn’t necessarily mean that these are solved problems, it doesn’t necessarily mean that they are any more sophisticated than stores that are much-much smaller.

Steve: Interesting yeah, I can tell you I’m by no means anywhere close to having a large store, but I have been up until the point of trying Klaviyo. I had this hunch pad of stuff where I was pulling stuff out of my database, creating a list, and then using my email marketing provider to send targeted emails, it was just really messy.

Ed: Yeah, that’s pretty common, I mean it’s — and it takes time, and you don’t want to actually do it. Another frustrating thing is that you end up — you can’t just automate it because like as soon as you are fully tied in into all that data, understood, go for basics, like you can just say hey, flip the switch, make these things automated and then you just know they are always going to be running. Which just one has way more impact and two gives a lot of peace of mind, because it just takes me off here like already overwhelmed plague.

Steve: So Ed are you a technical guy at all, or surfer guy or?

Ed: Yes, so I have been in past lives and a little bit in early days of Klaviyo, for the most part also these days. But that’s kind of where my DNA comes from, and I founded the business with co — a past coder who kind of very strong on the engineering side.

Steve: Okay and for you guys how did you guys start, actually I want to get to the name first, how did you come with the name Klaviyo just because — yeah?

Ed: It’s a great question, so at the time we were kicking around a bunch of different names and we wanted something that really evoked kind of trying to help people. And it’s rooted in the Spanish word for — the terms kind of the space ship and the rock faces to help climb and kind of have a big endorsement [ph]. So kind of the idea of what’s hey, can you — what helps people. And then it just stopped, kind of when we started to grow we always thought hey, this is for temporary, but we just never changed it and now have grown fond of it.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of the motivations for you starting your business, were you trying to target the little guys or the big guys, like what was your target market when you first launched?

Ed: To start with, we really started focusing on the little guys; we started focusing a lot on shopper stores, [inaudible 00:08:04] stores, big commerce stores, [pollution]. And the thing was hey let’s take what these big guys should be doing or kind of doing and let’s go to the really little guys. And then as we’ve grown we’ve seen that it paid us, just the really little guys people who have, store sales thousands of dollars not hundreds of thousands or millions of dollars, they had the same needs as then the next set the people up, they are going to be able to sell hundreds of thousands or millions.

And so we’ve just seen it kind of grow and grow and grow until now we work with a lot people who kind of just starting out, we kind of have a whole sets of plan where klaviyo can be like automatically build a bunch of emails for you, automatically build all these automatic flows and just set them up in your base [inaudible 00:08:52]. Obviously we work with kind of some of the largest and fastest growing ecommerce stores.

Steve: Yes, so the thing is with new guys they are probably aren’t even familiar with email marketing in the first place, right? So I would imagine it would be a harder sale for a real small guy as opposed to someone who is larger.

Ed: Yeah, so the thing we see with the little guys– I mean at some point you’ve got to — the key things you have to sort of initially is just get the business up and running, figure out where you are going to buy the product from, how you are going to sell it, get the first set of people to do the same. The second piece though kind of as soon as you will be on that stage, I think we see that parts of the email marketing work really well, very specifically automating things like a banner and carts and going back and strapping people above before. Kind of the things that are just going to run in the background they kind of like maximizing the audience you’ve got are really worth it, because you can spend a couple of hours get fully up and running, and then not touch again for months.

And then over time you can– as that audience gets bigger start to really think about getting newsletters for lead and trying making sure you are just really capturing as many emails as possible. Those things, once you are beyond kind of the first tens of thousands of revenue, it’s — they are really what can make this business have a predictable steady income, because you then have an audience that you are capturing, and get them — work with.

Steve: Absolutely, so in terms of just Klaviyo you started this in 2012 you said right?

Ed: That’s right.

Steve: So when it comes to starting one of these server [ph] companies, there’s actually quite a bit of competition, how did you actually validate your idea and know that you are going to be able to make money before you actually invested serious dollars into the development?

Ed: Yeah, that’s a great question. I think we are big believers in testing and just trying to figure it out. So we basically, it was myself and Andrew my co founder at the time, and what we did was he spent kind of all the everyday examining, like building different little things, testing out like kind of building different ideas. I spent all day every day, emailing and calling everyone I could think of, and saying like hey, this is what I have got, would you buy it? Even though at the time it was either might fully exist, might not exist, might be kind of go together, might be an idea. But just really learning from people and seeing who would buy what. Then it took a while, I mean I probably spent, that phase was definitely kind of three months or so.

Steve: Oh, a couple of months okay.

Ed: Yeah, so it was a couple of months until — but we kept hitting, a couple of months of just a bunch of ideas, bunch of things that seemed like they might work, but now not. But prior three months in, I had sort of honed on ecommerce and beginning [inaudible 00:11:32] exactly what you are saying. I’m pulling resource to my past customers, I’m putting it in excel, I’m tapping into my email system. And I do that once a month and hey; it makes me a lot of money. And so once we had that twice it was like hey, wait a minute this is, we really think there’s something there, so then it was like hey, let’s find the next eight people and call them.

And that phase of we got the customers to start, people who were paying us a little bit and a lot. Started to be kind of validating and then helps us to expand to say hey, people don’t just – it’s not just the special versus it’s just kind of like a widget to email past customers. And I think we then realized hey, wait a minute this needs — it’s kind of got to be newsletters or something else Steve.

Steve: So do you guys run an ecommerce store yourself or?

Ed: We have some good — some very close friends who do. And so kind of throughout we’ve had some people that we’ve known before this, and known throughout where we can call up and say hey, I just want to understand kind of what you are doing, and like how this might fit. And can we test some things out, what really matters to you and those conversations are super valuable.

Steve: I’m just curious, did Klaviyo start out as an ecommerce marketing platform or?

Ed: It didn’t, and I think it started — at first we were thinking just broadly about this problem of hey, all this information about customers is just thrown away, and we are all back on these offers, so we really think actually like a software marketing platform. And you kind of start with what you know and the needs just — in some ways it’s simpler, and some ways it’s much bigger than ecommerce, [inaudible] [00:13:05] what ecommerce is like. With any store you can basically say hey, if you are not running these five emails, you should be and they are going to have a good result and your customers are like, if I have to get on time, like it’s just very clean, in a way that some other markets aren’t as much.

Steve: Yeah, I mean what attracted me to your service actually was that it was very specifically targeted to ecommerce, like your copy all points to ecommerce which made it much more attractive and much easier to figure out what your services are all about because of that right?

Ed: Good that’s definitely, I mean that the goal I think is room for us to improve, the goal was that if you have a source you can plug it in and five minutes later you got good looking emails that are running. We go to your site, we scrap out your logo, we figure out your colors, we build these emails, we set up the best practices, and you are just saying yes, no. And then you see kind of dollars roll in as people come back and buy. So that’s kind of the end state, I think we are close, but we are not quite there but…

Steve: Okay, we will get into those sequences in a little bit. I just want to probe a little bit more about just the start up for Klaviyo also. This is a sales [ph] company, so how much did you invest in the business early on?

Ed: Not much, so I mean to the point that not super specific. So because there were two of us, the costs were really keeping like staying alive, like we surviving. And then for the company it was really just running the servers and then kind of other related email costs, but pretty low, and they really go with our customers. So the great thing about science is that we put kind of the revenues could fuel the business.

Steve: Okay, and then you guys had quit cold turkey before you started it?

Ed: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting. So you had an [inaudible] [00:14:55] from your previous company and so you felt confident that you could…

Ed: Yeah and I just always wanted to do it, and so said hey we’ll just, we’ll give it a shot, will get– push customers and I think is a minimal and see if we can make this work, and then I can always go back and get a job later. I’m not sure that was wise, but it was the attitude at the time.

Steve: No, I mean a lot of people I interview that’s how it goes, so I was just curious in your case. So tell me about some of your first customers, so you have your validation customers, they are probably paying you or not paying you very much, what about your first real customers, how did you get your first real customers?

Ed: Yeah, so a choice we made for better or worse is that we were going to—we’re going to make everybody pay, even if it was five bucks a month, just to say if something is really a problem for somebody, they are willing to pay us a little bit. And so those people came all about kind of three months on, and we largely severally met kind of in the [inaudible] [0:15:54] we met by reaching out to people online.

So one was custom made sweet company in Boston called Blank Label who kind of was one the first piece we talked to about this idea. Pretty early on we met via the Shopigy blog I think, this guy is [inaudible] [0:16:10] who make really cool kind of like wall designs and come to school [inaudible] [0:16:18] manifesto and custom made cards. And all those I think were great, because we could kind of grow with them and we could– they would give us various ideas and feedback and really push us, and also we could just really see this add value right away.

Steve: Okay, and were those early customers enough to just keep the business afloat?

Ed: Yeah, I think they were the– at least enough to get the promise of hey there is going to be more coming next month, you’ll see more coming the next month. It took– there was probably about six months to a year where we were in a largely pouring everything back into the business. We were very focused on because we kind of this was our– because we were watching other software companies, the progress was really, hey let’s get this to a point where it’s a real ongoing business, and if that means pouring all of the kind of money back into it, once we had that little bit of traction we knew the end was inside that we– that was going to be possible.

Steve: Okay, I’m just curious when you had these first couple of customers, was your service open to the public, or were you just kind of capping it at a couple of people until you were confident that you can roll it out to the masses?

Ed: Yeah, we opened it immediately, and it was just being real like hey if something is really a good idea you know you don’t worry about necessarily being copied and hey quite frightening when you are starting out like you just want people to have heard of you. So if anyone did come our way we’d kind of go out of our way and try to make sure we could work with them or figure it out. And that worked and it helped us refine that idea, and we started to see people that we never heard of or had reached out to, or met in person actually showing up on our door and that kind of really helped us validate and kind of stick with the mastering too.

Steve: So I’m just curious when you first launched you didn’t have like this built in audience already, like a huge email list or anything like that, right, it was mainly just going out networking and meeting store owners?

Ed: Yeah, it was all, yeah exactly, so it was a lot of hustle either, hey here’s where store owners hangout, so I’m going to try to just know people who know store owners, or hey I know a couple of store owners, can they introduce me to their friends, and then also saying hey if I look back at the people I know, whether it’s from schools and like alumni networks or other people I know, and software companies in the latest phases like who might know someone. And if I for every person I talk to there is somebody who refers to, do they know somebody. And so it was just like, hey let’s get on the phone, I mean here [inaudible] [00:18:39] and I’m like hey do you know anybody else who might be good and kind of through that process enough to get like a whole set kind of validating customers came out.

Steve: Okay, and by going that route is obviously not scalable, and so how did you start generating larger and larger amounts of customers?

Ed: Yeah, so and we’re very interested [inaudible] [00:18:57] we’ve got to find an idea that’s just buyable to people and enough people, we’ve got to know how to sell it and market it to do this. So that was kind of our core focus, but in terms of going from that so like to say how does this become a sales stream, we just tried lots of things. One was putting ourselves in app stores for platforms like Microsoft app store, things like that, that definitely worked; we tried some guest blogging and kind of blogging at our own site, that worked in different ways…

Steve: For SEO or for other reasons?

Ed: We were trying if for SEO we are also trying to serve. If people with the right audience, if we could just kind of guest blog or use their audience to just get some name recognition too, because given the numbers and to start with we were like we just needed to find the next like 10, 20 people. So we tried doing that, we tried some cold outreach just of like hey we’d see stores without any cool stuff and we were just like dropping in and say hey, are you doing this like we think we can basically be helpful, and yeah it was just kind of trying a bunch of different things.

Steve: So out of all those, which tactic kind of worked the best?

Ed: Yeah, I think to start the app stores really worked well.

Steve: And so yeah I’ve noticed your app in the Shopify store, do people just kind of find that naturally, or do you kind of have to push people towards it too?

Ed: No, people tend to find it naturally, something we are doing in Shopify and also have this– we have a free app that we give away that’s– people can easily build a response of email support, and so a lot of people find that free app and then from that say hey I want to use this for all my emails or I’m trying to send this email, can you help me out. So that’s– at first [inaudible] [00:20:56] and for the kind of new just running out stores has been a really great way, they can get started for free and kind of understand what this is like. We also have a free plan on that app, and so they can also start free there and then gives kind of that path upwards.

Steve: Okay, yeah it seems like when I was just looking at your integrations it seems like you integrate with almost every cart under the sun, so it sounded like that was one of your main strategies right for proliferation?

Ed: Yeah, exactly it was basically hit those– if we stick with one it makes it easy for us to get all the customer data. Number two we can– they’ve got these ecosystems of people who are looking for products that can do this, and so that was just like an easier ways to get to a bunch of customers.

Steve: Okay, and so do you have tight relationships with all these shopping cart builders, and have access to kind of their customer base so to speak, or negotiated something on those lines?

Ed: Yeah, exactly, so for us there’s been just a great—one they are great partners and fun to work with, but two they’re– this a great distribution channel, because they just have that prebuilt reach.

Steve: And there is no resistance, right I mean it’s a win-win on both ends, I would imagine right?

Ed: Yeah, right exactly, like at the end of the day it should make their platform stickier and they just — the happier their customers are the more their stores are growing, the better off they are and like our core goal is just to like get stores grow.

Steve: Okay, everything is in line. So you got these customers now, what are some tactics that you have to just keep them around, like how do you reduce churn?

Ed: Yeah, so the great thing about email, the two great things about email, one is if you– a lot of it can be automated, and once this is automated it’s– there is no effort required, it’s literally just a money machine. And so if we can get people up and running and make them really successful, it’s great on both sides, because there are basically delivered a certain number of dollars every month, and our goals is to try to way less than that, and it’s good, everything is good.

The second is that because it is about growth kind of if we can help people grow the newsletter list and kind of expand and just like grow the business overall, in addition to the automated emails, but also by targeting the marketing by newsletters, by bettering emails, that just is stickier as well, and it’s kind of like once you have that engine running, you as a store it’s not really worth moving to a platform where you are going to have to then hire an engineer and make them do more work for you, hire more workers, like we can replace a lot of that, so that’s worked well for us.

Steve: I guess in your case it’s a little different, because you have access to the sales data also, and you can literally tell your customer this is how much we’ve made for you this month, right?

Ed: Yeah, so it– and it keeps [inaudible] [0:23:37] too and it’s like a the—it’s very [inaudible] [0:23:41] if we were not doing a good job, and somebody was not making more money like they would just know right away. And so it really holds us accountable to if we can deliver value, you are going to stick around, if we don’t you are not.

Steve: I guess the hardest part in your case then is getting the customer to actually do the integration and then install it and set everything up, right?

Ed: Right, so the goal and this– it’s a challenge that we are continuing to solve and we’ve solved for some platforms, how much work can we do for the customer? And so for some platforms like Shopify literally if you just enter your store name and click go, tell us what your logo is, tell us who your customer is, we can set up all these emails, build like 10 different email templates for you, we can kind of get this all the way, and so that’s great.

And so that makes it much easier to people over the line, if you are not a custom platform or for some of the other platforms where their APIs are—or how they work is a little bit different, we do less of that to start, but our goal is we’re going to constantly try to figure out ways to just to kind of shorten that time to value as much as we can.

Steve: Incidentally I was in that camp, right I heard a cart that you guys didn’t support, and I had to hand you everything, but I got on the phone, you guys I think I always kept talking to the same guys I felt bad.

Ed: We try to keep you with the same person, so…

Steve: But, yeah it only took me an afternoon pretty much, so it wasn’t that bad, I don’t know, but…

Ed: Good, that’s why we have that team too, so there are kind of like just how to hack the game.

Steve: So it seems like your platform is naturally averse to churn once you get things right, and the way you get people to get on the platform is you have these one click integrations with all the popular shopping carts, so okay, so I can see that. So there is a lot of other platforms that use similar things to Klaviyo. And so I’m just curious from a marketing perspective, what are some of the things that you point out that set you apart from some of these other competing services, and do you ever find yourself going head-on with some of these other platforms?

Ed: Yeah, so the way we see the email market generally is really broken into two buckets. I think there is one which is just people who are afraid of newsletter centers, that’s also where we see most people right now. It’s like, hey I’m seeing the same more than everybody, maybe it’s kind of I’m plug-in in some of my store data, but not really I’m definitely not setting again a course through that, or probably not like say when you keep on like what they have and they haven’t bought.

And really for against those platforms, it’s really just explaining the integrations and the data we bring in and what we do, and the time it takes to set up. And that’s the key thing there, and there is both kind of allowing people like that and there is also then you know the people have been around like the high end ecommerce platforms have been around for ten years they are really expensive, but just don’t– they aren’t that much better to be honest than those these other centers, so that’s one.

Then there is a separate bucket of a bunch of people who are kind of just trying kind of doing the same types of things we are trying to, and what we largely see is so far the– we’ll see the people like coming off like little pieces like they are really nil [ph] and that kind of thing. They are really nil like the win backs and the follow ups, start to try to like cover up these newsletters, but we just haven’t seen kind of anyone who is like a very effectively sort everything, and that it’s [inaudible] [0:27:05] since we can’t hear there is like big missing holes in the features ads.

So I think the presence of these kind of smaller guys who are out wholesaling it’s like enough for us to say how can we constantly be– and like hey let’s get like awesome product recommendations, can we add also personalization, like just it’s more room for us just to constantly get better, and that’s our focus, it’s like hey at the end of the day how do we make stores more money, and how do we like have them put in real assignment, and if we do both…

Steve: I can tell you from my personal experience, I actually wrote my own abandoned shopping cart thing for my cart, yet what ended up happening was like I could use it just by—it was pretty hands off, but then my wife didn’t understand it. I didn’t make it user friendly, so my wife couldn’t do anything about it, and so when I moved over to Klaviyo like okay, wife you can handle everything now, which is really nice. It made it really easy for some– my wife is not a technical, so it made it really easy for her to manage. And so let’s switch gears a little bit, and talk about some of these automated flows that you have in place.

Ed: Yeah, so the way we think about ecommercing or marketing, we actually think this is, it’s true beyond ecommerce, we have a bunch of customers who are not ecommerce kind of a separate topic, but if you think about like the first time somebody shows up in your store, there is a period before they buy, and there is a period after they buy when you are trying to get them to come back. And the goal is to really say you kind of put yourself in the customer shoes. What are the messages that you might want to get, and what are the messages that really are going to speak to you at those different times in your life as a customer?

And so before you buy it’s– the automation is hey the first time you see somebody tell them the important things about the brand or the store. And so if you are selling something that’s like highly branded or you have a pretty diverse set of products, it’s introducing them to the unique products you have. If it’s– there is something unique about you, if it’s hey here is the back story or here is who is creating these products, or here is some cool uses for these products, or here is our great occasions for these products, it’s really kind of providing that context around yourself or to somebody who’s proactively said, hey I’m interested and I like what you are doing. So that’s a whole set that we typically call like a welcome series, but it’s really just to think about your introduction to somebody.

Steve: Son this is before they either make a purchase?

Ed: Right, this is kind of from the moment somebody gives you their email address for the first time, so then later on your site kind of you invested to get them to your site, and when on your site then say, hey yes I want to learn more about this, I’ll give you my email address. And then we really think about and just hey what– if you had five minutes with somebody, or if you had a minute kind of four times a week like what would you want to say to them about your store so that they really knew when this was going to be a good fit.

Because a lot of buyers are going to show up and either they are not going to have the knee jet or they are going to have other things going on or if it’s occasion based thing they are not going to be ready for that. They are not at a point where they are going to buy, so they just need to know more. And kind of rather than just hitting them with your typical newsletter, it’s just a good time to like make that a more personal introduction to what you are doing.

Steve: How long have you seen the sequence to be like for most stores?

Ed: Yeah I think we recommend kind of three or four emails over a two week period. It definitely depends on what you’re selling and how much there’s to say. I mean if your business is extremely simple, you know maybe it has just a one or two email flow, but it’s really just kind of focus on a few different emails that go out automatically over a couple…

Steve: Do you have an example? So you mentioned the first one. You explained kind of what your company is all about. What do the second and third look like?

Ed: Yeah. There’s kind of a few a different types. The first is often just depending on where you are at and kind of how smaller you are, it tends to be just—and so much it’s just a personal welcome and kind of like explaining maybe the context of the store, or any of kind of the important back-story. It’s really just like a branding email of, “Here’s what this is about.” And a lot of that is also just a reminder to say, “Hey, we know you are interested. Here’s an easy way to get back.” Put a big button to go back to the store. And kind of just make that good first impression.

The second is often times around products especially if you have—I’m just selling… what are the things you typically see people buy first, or what are the products you think really will put your best foot forward is often a good second introduction. Getting into the third and fourth is really, we see as either going further on products or branding. But also depending on your customer likes, like depending on when you think people buy for the first time, will often see like the last email on that series which could be two weeks in, it could be three or four weeks in or even ten weeks in.

Basically say hey, “If we’ve— kind of we’ve invested to get somebody to the website, and they haven’t—we’ve kind of told them about us and they haven’t come through and bought yet, is there something we want to offer?” And it could be a financial offer, it could be something else. It could be anything. And whatever it is, it is really persuasive to say, “If at some point you’ve chosen– you are interested because we know you kind of came and gave us your email, but you haven’t taken the next step. Like is there anything we can do to make that next step easier?”

Steve: What’s an example of a non-financial offer to get someone to the site?

Ed: Yeah so we’ll see— the best way we tend to think about it is kind of seeing why hasn’t somebody bought? And this is going to vary by business. And so one is there’s something about your product that they don’t understand. There’s something about what you are doing, where they have like a reservation like this is going to be hard to set up, or it’s going to be hard to do something.

So we see people then either offer help. It’s kind of like you are– send us any questions or let us know. Or see people point to things like help and do that. We’ll also see, so that’s kind of one, financial and financial could be free-shaping, it could be discounts, pricing, whatever. We’ve seen a couple of people doing like exclusive products. Like, “Hey, here’s something that’s only available to first time people or like kind of a unique sort of offer.”

Steve: Hey everyone, I just wanted to take a quick moment to thank Famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now FameBit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer for marketing with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets and more. Now videos start as low as $50 and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers.

If you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests, Emmanuel Eli, used Famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code ‘my wife quit’ at famebit.com, you will automatically get $10 off. So go to famebit.com right now, and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: I’m just curious, do a lot of people use the customer behavior aspect for these emails. Like for me for example I instrumented it in such a way that I could see exactly which categories or products that a customer was looking at. Do a lot of people use that information in these first introductory emails, or is that information primarily useful later for different sequences.

Ed: Yeah it’s a good question. So the most important thing especially depending on what you are—if you are going to do some sort of offer as often turning those off if somebody buys, so in so much as using that customer’s photo to say “This person has not bought. They are on a different phase.” I turn those off. The second piece is we do see some of the people use that conversation around, hey here’s the products you are looking at, the categories you are looking at and starting to really to customize.

It really depends how important that is to your store, if you’re apparel and you sell men’s and women’s it’s more important. If you have two very different products or you are a store that sells music and then they sell apparel, and like the buyers are very different. So then it’s important. But if that’s not the case, then usually it’s maybe important down the line, but at scale when you are smaller it’s not a big deal.

Steve: All right so we cover the pre-purchase sequence, what are some of the other sequences that you have in place.

Ed: So kind of pre-purchase, the next real big sequence is around abandonment. I think that tends to be both like pure shopping cart abandonment, as well as more often set up kind of site visiting abandonment basically because Klaviyo has built in web tracking. We know when somebody has clicked their email, or they have entered through another site we then know who they are. And so if somebody is visiting the site repeatedly and not buying, we’ll often see flows that have to go target those customers. And kind of it’s the same type of offer of either help or questions, or even after a certain time like a financial offer.

Steve: Let’s wait a little bit until the…

Ed: Yeah. I don’t know what’s going on outside today.

Steve: I know it’s a second one. Hold on. They just marked down the time here. So I know when to cut this. Let’s see 33 minutes, okay. It’s gone. Yeah, so Ed, I actually was pleasantly surprised when I went to the abandonment sequence in Klaviyo. I clicked on flows and clicked one button, and you guys already had a sample thing already set up and all I had to do is customize it, which was very nice.

Ed: Good. Yeah that’s definitely the goal, just to pull the pictures of the product and just be ready to go.

Steve: Yeah and so in terms of the abandoned cart, would you say that as a new user, would that be one of the biggest low hanging fruit in order to get a return on your email investment?

Ed: Yes. I think if we’d point to the absolute mass set ups, I think abandoned carts would be right at the top of the list [inaudible] [0:37:25] a second. But the meetings you invest so much in getting somebody to your store, that abandoned carts is just really important way to—everybody is busy, everybody’s like going on. Often times when you find something cool you are not going to buy it right away, so they are just an important way to make sure you capture as many people as you can.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of the number of emails for these sequences what are you seeing that most people are doing that works well?

Ed: Yeah we tend to see two emails works best. One that comes relatively close to the purchase, which really serves as just a reminder, but also just as an easy way to get back to the store. So kind of like when somebody does think that, “Hey I’m interested,” they can just click one button and go back to the store and have their cart and be ready to go. And then the second, which is really more about, “Hey, it’s a couple of days later. You’ve all sort of stuff happened. Here’s a reminder what’s good.”

We do see that segmenting that email which is kind of super easy to do based on people who’ve bought before and haven’t bought before, kind of opens the door to say, if somebody started to buy, didn’t buy, hasn’t bought five days later, they are worth including in like reaching out, reshaping or just kind of something like that, those things definitely work. It really depends on what stage they are at, what the margin of the business is, how promotional you want to be, but also then making sure those are turned off for repeat buyers.

Steve: Interesting. So for people who abandon and they’ve already purchased in the past you do not give a coupon?

Ed: Typically no.

Steve: All right. And just curious from my knowledge, what conversation rates do you typically see from these abandoning sequences?

Ed: Yeah so it really depends on product. And so we see anywhere from you know, we’ve got some businesses that have crazy conversion rates of like 30%, 40%, 50%.

Steve: Okay, I’m not seeing that, but yeah…

Ed: And that is not what I would expect. So it really depends on how much thought someone has to—how much thought they put into the purchase, and the reasons they don’t buy. The core goal of abandoned cart, so one is a reminder and then two is overcome any like even reasons in the customers that they don’t want to buy. And for some reasons that might be “Hey is there a cheaper price somewhere else?” You just tell them how unique your products are. For others, it might be, “Hey is this really going to be as good as they say,” and that kind of be like an address for like a customer testimonial or something like that.

For others it might be just like is shipping going to be super costly or how long is it going to take to arrive or things like that, you can kind address those too. And so really the more of those you have to knock down, like the more it’s just a reminder, you’ll have a lower conversion rate, but we typically see two to ten or even kind of a higher percentage. But the more kind of objections you can knock down, the better off, the better those do, but it is product specific.

Steve: Okay, I was just curious, but I think my second email has not been converting well. The first email converts great. I think I’m getting like tenish percent, but in the second one is, which is expected I would guess.

Ed: Yeah, it does tend to be…

Steve: It’s like a big drop off.

Ed: But it does totally—it really depends how much people—we have customers who are the reverse. Or it’s like if this is up high intention product, then that second email tends to be really the kicker that works best.

Steve: And the next one that you were going to talk about was the win-back campaign?

Ed: Yes so this is, I think, if we did this too will be, you’ve got to run [inaudible] [0:41:01] and you’ve got to run win-backs. And then basically is people who have bought in the past are kind of your already big funs. You’ve spent a lot to get them the first time. You’ve sent your product, hopefully they love it, like you—this should be somebody who’s very proactively fond of you.

And so the win-back, the idea is just saying, hey if that person that we’ve already won over who’s already a fan, either hasn’t bought the next product that you might expect, or has come back if it’s product so he can purchase twice, follow up and just kind of remind him that you are there. And make a choice whether that’s going to be promotional or not. And it’s really a choice around like, your margins and how much value you think that might bring. But it’s just like capture the audience that likes to hear from you.

And so typically you can run those as campaigns, you create a segmented list and say, hey find everybody who purchased six months ago and hasn’t bought again. Or kind over time you can just automate that to say, hey average 20 buyers at three months, six months, nine months, here the emails are going to get.

The first one is just going to highlight product they might like, the second one is going to get them free shipping, the third one is going to be like a more personal outreach that asks them to tell their friends about the business. And then just like have those running. And so basically every customer that comes through and buys first time, you know you are going to be nurturing them over the next year to get them to come back.

Steve: Yeah. And this is like really key for people who sell consumable products, right?

Ed: Yeah, so it’s key for consumables, but really anything that someone could buy twice. And so it’s key for apparel and anything where it’s not like a once-every-three-years type of thing.

Steve: And do you find that it’s helpful to provide product suggestions in these win-backs because you know exactly what they purchased and what they are interested in, right?

Ed: Yeah. So as much as you can exactly, and this is where I like that customer data of, here’s what you’ve looked at, here’s what you bought, all that stuff can be super useful. And sometimes might, depending on your business can change with that flow, like we’ll see people say– say you are selling something like iPhones and you also sell headphones where the natural time for somebody to buy is right after [inaudible] [0:43:28] so we’ll see them have that win-back go out really be more of a cross email that goes out like two or three weeks after somebody buys.

Steve: Interesting.

Ed: So we have some customers who sell bikes and they also sell a lot of kind of bike accessories. It’s also a great fete because if somebody buys a bike it’s just very natural like once you have that bike and you are riding it, there’s these other things you start to think about. And so following up to say, “Hey, you know now you’ve experienced the product, what’s next?”

Steve: That’s cool and that’s completely automated for these customers, right?

Ed: Yes. The goal is that if you can think of an idea, it takes a couple of minutes to set it up because you’ll say, “Hey if you bought a bike and you didn’t buy xyz then three weeks later send this email, and use this existing template and kind of drag in some texts and pictures and you are good to go.”

Steve: Are there any other flows that you can think of that are pretty easy to set up and worth doing?

Ed: Yeah. So the others we see that are valuable I think, maybe not as valuable like the win-backs, but of course which is good with structures, one is product reviews. I mean it’s pretty straight forward, but worth following up on a purchase. Any sorts of cross-sale type emails specific to your business of if somebody buys X we think they like Y, setting those up. We’ve—as you are scaling it a bit larger, flows around “Hey I’ve been emailing you, you either stopped engaging, you stopped opening, you stopped clicking. You just seem less intriguing to stop visiting the site.

We see people setting up flows around those to then basically automatically clean the list over time to say, “Hey I just want to let you know we are going to follow up and take off the email list. Let us know—click this link if you want to stay on.” So those can be good too. Those are part of the main ones. I think the key thing is like just for every business, think about– put yourself on the customer shoes, think about the emails you would like to get, and whenever possible automate it, because you still don’t have time to handle all those manually.

Steve: Just curious, I was wondering if you can comment on some things that you can do to kind of improve deliverability, open rates, click through rate, and that sort of thing.

Ed: Yeah, so deliverability really shouldn’t be a problem. If it’s a problem it’s either something with your email sender and it’s not a promise you went in to, and so follow up with them, switch ISPs, social email senders. The second piece is, I mean it can happen based on how many emails you are sending and what they look like, there’s some other legitimate reasons it can happen. I think the main thing there is as long as you are putting kind of yourself in the customer shoes and sending emails of what you think the customer would like, you should be good. That’s kind of on the liberal side.

In terms of open rates and click through rates, so we tend to kind of break that into two problems. The open side is pretty much all that can go on is, the subject line and like the experiences with your past emails. And the main thing there I think we’d say especially if you are starting out is—I mean we kind of always go back to this think-like-the-customer and that definitely works. It tends to happen when either when you are either sending too many emails, and so the customers are not getting a ton of value from each one. Or you kind of send a series that no one was clicking and no one was reacting to.

And the main thing is put a little bit of attention into the email the first time. And think about if you got it the same thing you would want to click or you will want to react to and if not then either, “Hey could you send less” and that actually gets to that point which strangely converses you that the other problem is not just sending too few. Like if you are emailing people once every two months they typically will forget, like they are not going to remember and like also your opens and clicks go down.

But yeah, I kind of think about both those. And then the A/B testings, people can over use it, but also start to experiment with just say, “Hey whenever I send an email, I’m going to send two different versions maybe two subject lines, maybe two different pieces of content, and I’m going to see which one does better and start to kind of learn what people like.”

Steve: Is that kind of automated in Klaviyo? I haven’t got to that point yet.

Ed: Yeah it’s super easy. And basically for every email, you click a button and then it gives you two versions of the email, and you can click one and change the subject, click the other one and change like take out a different picture. And then when you click go, one is going to be by default. It’s going to say, “Hey take the first chunk of my list and split those emails up and send them up to those different chunks, see which one does better.” And then for the rest of the list it’s going to send out the winner to everybody else. And so it’s kind of a low cost wage. So start to learn but also like, rather than ever stressing on “Hey are people going to like this. They are not going to like it.” If you do that you just kind of have— it’s just low risk, because it’s going to always push the winner out.

Steve: And I was just curious what your take on single versus double opt-in was. I know in the blogging world it’s pretty controversial, but it seems like in the ecommerce land, no store that I shop in out, has asked me to double opt in for something.

Ed: I think we are big believers in—I think we tend to fall on the single opt-in side for ecommerce. And the key thing is—it’s got two key parts there. One is, just be super clear about when someone’s signing up. Why they are singing up, I think in eCommerce we tend to see it that people who are signing up because they know what the—you’re going to send them to. The second thing there was be super clear on how somebody gets off emails and unsubscribes, and can choose to get either fewer emails or no emails from you. And once you are doing that I think it matters less. I think we just see that double opt-in just confuses a lot of people. Like they have already said they want in, so they don’t expect to be asked again.

Steve: So I was just curious is there a time in place for double opt-in in ecommerce?

Ed: You know the problem—it’s a good question and that one is important. There probably is like if for some reason you think, based on how your email capture flow or kind of like, if you think there’s any ambiguity to the person signing up about, whether like they are actually signing up on email list then double opt-in is probably a good fit. But as long as it’s very clear to the customer, then I think there’s at this point less info.

Steve: Yeah I know it’s interesting that you said that because I had my other favorite email provider on the podcast and he was like strong double opt-in. It was quite the contrast between what you said, but it was two different industries of course too. One was like kind of online marketing so to speak and this one is just purely ecommerce.

Ed: Right. And I think that’s like a big difference.

Steve: Hey, Ed I know I’ve kept you on for quite a while. It was a pleasure having you on. If anyone wants to check out Klaviyo, or if they have any questions for you and your team where can they find you?

Ed: Yeah. We’d certainly love to hear from anybody. They can email us at success@klaviyo.com K-L-A-V-I-Y-O or we always love to see people sign up for accounts. And so we are happy to help get you going. And so that’s just klaviyo.com

Steve: And it’s K-L-A-V-I-Y-O, right?

Ed: That’s right. Got to keep it, keep you on the toes.

Steve: And Ed I’m doing your job here for you, but you guys offer a free tier right?

Ed: That’s right. So as a source of getting going, yeah it’s absolutely for you to start and own it till you can—you know the same stuff around, plug in your store, it takes minutes, we’ll set up a whole bunch of template for you, and also a bunch of these emails just come in like pretty build out of the box. So you should be able to get depending on your platform, you get a lot of these going just in minutes.

Steve: By the way just for the listeners I’m not affiliated with Klaviyo in any way, it’s just I really like the service. And there’s actually—if you are just a brand new shop owner you don’t have that many customers yet, you can actually, I can’t remember how many people you can track for free, but it’s something like 50 or a 100 or something like that.

Ed: Yeah so we actually let you until you have your first 100 customers, it’s just totally free. So it’s a great way to just like get started and see. And even you will see kind of the value, and you also see your customers get some cool tools and they are around like. Seeing the customer who they are and their full history of what they looked at and done and kind of a fun and just like a cool tool to just help manage the store. So yeah with all that, it’s kind of great, we [inaudible] [0:52:27] come through. Our new stores come through on every plan because I know they are kind of the most exciting, they are very exciting businesses because they are out there out of par.

Steve: I mean if anything, go and sign up and just implement the abandoned cart plan tool. Cool Ed, it was a pleasure having you on the show. Thanks a lot for coming by.

Ed: Thanks Steve. I appreciate it.

Steve: All right, take care.

Ed: You too. Thanks.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now Klaviyo is actually not a sponsor of the show, but I’ve been using their email service now for many months and I love it. Running an ecommerce store is so much more complicated than running a blog, and you can tell that many of the features of Klaviyo had ecommerce specifically in mind and I think it’s fantastic.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode82, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now I’m also offering free ecommerce workshops on a regular basis if you want to learn, for more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. If you’re interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up of my free 6-Day Mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, and sign up right on the front page.

Once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. Everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing, is all built in, so all you got to do is populate it with the products you want to sell, and you can literally start your storey in a matter of hours. Simply go to Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhosts out there that I recommend if you want to start a blog. In fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email. You can install WordPress in just a single click, and they have an easy to use website builder and design services. And the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. Please go HostGator.com/Mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/Mywifequit. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

081: How To Market Your Online Store On Reddit And Make 6 Figures In 8 Months With Eli Zauner

081: How To Market Your Online Store On Reddit And Make 6 Figures In 8 Months

Eli Zauner runs a subscription box service called UniversalYums.com which sells boxes of yummy treats from all over the world. What’s cool about Eli is that he launched his business while working full time and his business has been profitable from day 1 and is growing very quickly.

In fact, he is doing a solid 5 figures a month after only launching just 8 months ago. And here’s the kicker. One of the main reasons I wanted to have Eli on the show is because he grew his business using Reddit as his single largest source of traffic.

Eli’s experience is truly unique and I love that he’s grown his business so quickly in such a short period of time. Enjoy the episode

What You’ll Learn

  • What the startup costs are when launching a subscription box service
  • How Eli validated his business idea
  • The hardest part about running a subscription box service
  • How Eli got his early customers
  • How to market your online store on Reddit
  • How to adapt to the Reddit culture
  • How to reduce churn for your subscription box

Sponsors

BigCommerce.com – If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free
bigcommerce-logo

HostGator.com – If you are interested in starting your own WordPress blog, then click here to get 30% off webhosting at HostGator.com!
Hostgator

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and join me for a free live workshop on ecommerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in the class. Now here’s what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you merely have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

There’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs so you don’t really need to hire a designer. Everything from design to payment processing is all built-in, and you just have to populate it with your own products, so you can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitmyjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob.

I also want to thank HostGator for sponsoring the show as well. HostGator is an incredible webhost that I highly recommend. And in fact did you know that mywifequitherjob.com was hosted on HostGator in the very beginning? They offer 24/7 life support via chart, phone and email. They offer one click WordPress install, so it’s super simple to install WordPress blog. They have an easy to use website builder, design services, marketing services, and the best part is I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. So please go to HostGator.com/mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGator.com/mywifequit, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quite Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Eli Zauner on the show. Now Eli runs a subscription box that is called Universalyums.com which sells boxes of yummy treats from all over the world. Now what’s cool about Eli is that he launched the business while working full time and his business has been profitable from day one and is growing very quickly. They are doing a solid five figures a month after only launching eight months ago.

And here’s the kicker, and one of the main reasons that I wanted to have Eli on the show, he’s one of the few people that I’ve spoken to that has created a business using Reddit as their largest source of traffic. Now Eli’s experience is unique. And I love that he’s grown his business so quickly in such a short period of time. And with that welcome to the show Eli. How are you doing today man?

Eli: Good. How are you Steve?

Steve: Pretty good. So tell us about Universal Yums, what you are selling, and how you came up with the idea.

Eli: Sure. So I started working at Universal Yums just about a year ago with my girlfriend at the time. And we basically wanted to start a business with a goal of trying to leave our corporate jobs. Neither of us were very happy with what we were doing and we both really wanted to start a business. But being pretty young we didn’t have a lot of savings in the bank. And so we were looking for a business that we could start that would not be very capital intensive.

So we obviously we are aware of subscription boxes and we thought it would be a really interesting space for us to try and get into, because it’s kind of like a trend right now with a lot of new businesses. And it’s also very low capital because you can kind of see how many customers you are going to have and only order inventory for those customers as opposed to like a traditional ecommerce business.

So we really—I mean we set out with that in mind and also it was like a good match for our skills set. My partner is more like a marketing guru and I’m a bit more technical. So it was a good fit for us. And then we basically just took a month and did a lot of research on what existed today, and where we felt that there might be opportunity in the market.

And we kind of settled down on Universal Yums which is– it’s kind of similar to some existing concepts today, but we kind of put our own spin on it. So basically what we do is we pick a different country each month to feature, and we curate different snacks and candies and chocolates from that country. And then we put it all together in a box and we send it out to our customers first each month.

Steve: And so you mentioned that your start off costs were really low. What were they?

Eli: Yeah so I think we spent maybe like 500 bucks just to get like software and just like very basic packaging supplies. But really the business paid for itself after that especially because people when they sign up they give us money for their order, and then we can then use that money to fuel the cash flow of the business. So it was very, very inexpensive for us to start.

Steve: I see. So you collect the money upfront and then you deliver the box next month? So you have 30 days?

Eli: Yeah, right exactly. So what we do is—when we first launched we set our sign up period for about two months before we were ever going to ship products. So everyone that signed up in that two month period, we got all the cash from that and then we could use that to fuel our first month’s inventory. And then from then on it’s month to month. So we get everything that people pay to us the month prior and we use that.

Steve: So what about people who want the boxes to be delivered as a gift right away? How does that work?

Eli: So unfortunately for them we only ship once a month. It just kind of works with that kind economies of scale of our business, because we want to do all the fulfillment all at once with all the products and we don’t want to be placing orders repeatedly with our suppliers. So I mean yes people are willing to buy gifts, but the gifts won’t be delivered until the day of the month that we are shipping.

Steve: Okay, and so you mentioned, so $500 and you mentioned software was part of that. What platform are you using? Are you using like a fully hosted platform or a custom coded platform?

Eli: So we started out on bluCommerce using bluCommerce subscriptions. And I mean it’s very, very cheap compared to other subscriptions like recurring billing solutions. It’s been good so far, but I actually think that we are going to re-platform pretty soon just because it’s not a hosted solution. And I end up spending a great deal of time kind of managing the website, updating it, security, all those things. So we are trying to focus on really growing the business and it’s tough to keep up with that at the same time. We are probably going to re-platform.

Steve: Just interesting, yeah which platform are you leaning towards, just curious?

Eli: I think right now I’m leaning towards using Shopify and then integrating with a like a third party of recurring billing solution, like Chargify or Recurly.

Steve: And then you mentioned that you run through a bunch of different ideas for boxes before you settled on treats. So two questions, what were some of those ideas and how did you kind of validate Universal Yums before investing money in the project?

Eli: So I mean we came up with a really wide variety of different ideas. I mean we came up with everything from like a more localized like experience-based—it wasn’t even really a subscription box idea, but where we were kind of how people like interact and kind of like—almost like a murder mystery type style, where we would send them like a clue and then they would give the clue to somewhere they would go in town. And then we would have another clue set up there and will kind of lead them through, and then basically everyone would be competing to reach the end of the mystery first and we would have a house full of fries. I mean honestly it was very fairly. We just kind of jumped all over the place before we settled on Universal Yums.

Steve: So how did you know that Universal Yums is going to work? Like did you test the idea before you started or?

Eli: So honestly we did some like very basic stuff. Like we posted a survey on Facebook with a couple of different price points and we got – and I personally read as well – we got maybe like a hundred responses. But it was all very qualitative at the beginning. I mean really of course we talked to people about the idea and thought that some people had interest in it. And I think honestly my biggest opinion is that if you have other businesses that have like a similar concept and they seem to be doing well, the idea is already validated. So really at that point it just comes down to the price point and the specific executions of what you are doing. So we felt like the idea was solid enough, because other business were already doing something similar and in our own twist we could kind of make a niche for ourselves.

Steve: Interesting. So what businesses were you comparing yourselves to that did similar things?

Eli: So there’s an adventure funded business called Try the World, which is similar in some ways. They don’t just send snack items, they kind of curate different food items. It could be anything from like ingredients to spices, everything like that. And they feature a different city. It’s subscription box. They do it once every two months. So that was probably the closest competitor to what we are doing today. And then there was another business called MunchPak which is completely snack focused, but they don’t feature a different country each month. They just kind of send out unique snack stuff within the US and all over the world.

Steve: I see. So given that, you saw that these two services were making money and doing really well. You felt really comfortable with your business model basically?

Eli: Yes correct.

Steve: And then you mentioned you sent out some surveys on Facebook. Was this a Facebook page that was tied to your business, or was this your personal Facebook page?

Eli: No just personal Facebook page, and more so just seeing if friends would be interested in the idea or not.

Steve: Okay. And a couple of questions also, what are some of the huddles of running a subscription box business versus just kind of regular goods selling online? I know we just kind of touched on that, and you liked the cash flow aspects of the subscription box. But what were some of the other considerations that were in your mind?

Eli: Yeah I think for us the biggest issue is that when we are more working with suppliers, suppliers are set up to work with businesses that are just selling items on like a normal basis. And the biggest problem for us is that suppliers don’t seem to understand that if we don’t have the item by a certain day, that it’s a really big deal for us, because then we have to delay our shipment, or we have to find a substitute at the last second.

So I mean the biggest huddle by far is saying like “Hey, if we don’t get the item by this day, it’s a really big deal.” And suppliers don’t seem to understand that because for the most part—I mean our suppliers are mostly working with ethnic groceries. And so if an ethnic grocery doesn’t have an item on the shelf for a couple of weeks, it’s not going to kill their business, but for us it’s huge deal. And really making people understand that is really difficult, because subscription boxes haven’t really permeated the market to the extent where everyone we are talking to understands what we need. And so we have to be really-really specific and clear and reiterate it over and over again.

Steve: So do you ever have any problems with getting wholesale pricing because you can’t — can you promise a certain amount of [inaudible 00:12:12], since you’ve already collected the money. Like how does the pricing work, and how does the negotiation work with the vendor?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean we get a wholesale pricing no problem, I mean they basically have like — they have pretty set prices. I mean it’s like; it’s a pretty well defined industry at this point. I mean the companies that are importing the products like we can look at the same product across five different suppliers, and the price—we are not getting more than like plus or minus 10%. And the food industry is just probably like it’s pretty set.

Steve: Okay, and what are the margins typically for food item, just curious?

Eli: Yeah, I mean so if you are like operating a grocery store, unless you are like [inaudible] [00:12:50] food typically retails for like roughly like 30% to 35%, kind of 40% or 45% margin.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of actually getting the box in place, you don’t actually tell the customer what they are going to be getting right, it’s kind of like a mystery box?

Eli: Yeah, I know so we try to keep the onus of price, we think it’s fun. What we do is we include a hint to the next country. So will do like a little like a poll that runs, and then — most people will be able to figure it out based on that, and then a little bit closer to the date that the box is going to be sent, we will announce it on our Facebook page, just to get people excited.

Steve: Okay and then so your primary motivation for going the subscription route is one, the recurring revenue and also the fact that you don’t really have to carry inventory, is that accurate?

Eli: Yeah, I know it’s true, I think — I mean I think the other reason though is that it lands really well to what we are trying to do. I mean we are like – it’s kind of an experience right, so you get the box and it has not just the snacks, but it also has a bunch of information about the country, some history, some facts about the snacks.

And so it’s kind of like for a lot people, a fun way to learn about the country without having to be like reading a text book. And so it means well to be a monthly service because each month you can kind of focus on a different country, and try their food, learn more about their culture. So I think that it would be difficult to run and just kind of like a one off service just because the recurring revenue wouldn’t be there. And you would have to be holding on this inventory for a lot of different countries all at once.

Steve: So is it just you and your partner, because it sounds like there’s some editorial stuff that goes in with the box right? Someone’s going to write the content that sort of thing?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean my partner writes the content for the box and right now it’s just us. So yeah I mean it’s a lot of work.

Steve: So okay let’s talk a little bit about just kind of the — how you got the word out early on. So let’s say you just launched, how did you get your early customers?

Eli: Sure the first way that we really got traction was honestly on Reddit, that was our first big traction. And really what happened there is I posted the product onto a sub Reddit called ‘shut up and take my money.’ And it has like about 200,000 subscribers. And I mean really with Reddit, on that sub Reddit it’s [inaudible 00:15:05]. So I mean if you get a lot of up votes, the post gets a lot of visibility, lots of people see it, lots of people click on it. And if people don’t seem to like the product, then you won’t really get much out of it. So for whatever reason our product got a lot of traction, I think it was very appealing to that specific community.

We were the number one post for about 24 hours and over that 24 hour period we got about 10,000 people that clicked on the link and went to our website. And we got about like 100 to 150 sign ups off that. And that was kind of our very first like push which is great, we were very excited about it. And I mean before that, like the only other real traction that we got coming up to our launch was through basically what we call like influencer marketing. So reaching out to bloggers, You Tubers, people who enrolled like receive a free sample of the product, and then review it either on camera for YouTube or just write about it for a blog.

Steve: So can we talk about — how did you know about that sub Reddit ‘shut up and take my money’?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean I’m a native Reddit user, like I do it personally just for fun. I never really personally browsed that specific sub Reddit, but I mean I know that Reddit is such a massive community, and I knew that the product would land well to the community. So I spent some time just like researching what different sub Reddits would be that would be open to like hearing about my product. And I found that sub Reddit, also a few others.

Steve: How do you do this research? Do you just kind of type in like treats or in Reddit search, like how do you find these sub Reddits?

Eli: So I mean there’s a few different things, so I’ll kind of walk through a little bit how like I would not just me specifically, but how I would advice someone to try– how to use Reddit. So first of all there’s like obviously the generic shopping Reddits, so ‘shut up and take my money’ is generic, it can be any kind of product. And there was a couple others like deals for example, where you post a product that’s on sale.

And when we first launched, we put our product on sales, so it was appropriate for us to post it there. And there was kind of like just like the generic, wherever your product is you can post it there. And then there’s more like industry specific sub Reddits.

So for us there was this sub Reddit called snack exchange, which is pretty interesting and it [inaudible 00:17:26] existed honestly. It’s basically people who from all over the world send each other boxes of snacks, who live in different countries. And so they get — it’s basically our business, but it’s like they are actually legitimately selling snacks to each other from all over across the world.

So that was I mean — there was like 35,000 people on there. And there’s honestly sub Reddits for just about every industry. I mean if you have a health product, there’s a sub Reddit called fitness that’s really big. If you sell watches there’s a watches sub Reddit, so pretty much every industry has a place where people who will be your target audience are hanging out.

And I mean you can introduce them to your products, but you just have to be careful about not doing it anyway that’s like very commercialized. So Reddit really doesn’t like when there’s like companies trying to get them to buy their stuff. And so you really have to do it in a way that doesn’t feel like you are pushing your product, but you can do it and you can do it really successfully, you just have to be smart about it.

Steve: Okay, so can you walk me through how one of your posts looks like?

Eli: Sure, so for example our snack exchange, one of the ways that we try to engage with the community, is to have like a giveaway. So we figured people on that community are like really interested in receiving international snacks. So we posted like a giveaway on there and people could sign up for the giveaway, and we collected email addresses etcetera. And that was like one easy way to do it. Another way though is to do something like for my specific business; I would post something and like a country specific sub Reddit, you know like hey, like I have this business, I’m really interested in what the best next song from France.

And then people would engage with the post because people want to tell you about the often snacks from their country. So that’s, I mean you basically just have to find organic ways of interacting with the community. And it really depends on the product, like if you have a product that you think solves a specific problem, then go on the sub Reddit where you think your target audience is hanging out.

And ask like, “Do you guys feel like you have this problem, and how do you solve it?” And then engage when people say, “Hey, yeah I have this problem.” They are like, oh, well, I found the solution it’s this product here. So people really look for ways, people will really engage with you when you feel like you are offering something that’s helping them solve their problems.

Steve: So does it require like a strong Reddit account to get any sort of attention?

Eli: No, not really not at all. I mean I honestly started a completely new account for the business, just because I wanted it to be not associated with any of my personal Reddit accounts. And people don’t really check on that very much.

Steve: Okay, because I used to have a pretty strong Reddit account, but then it became a zombie. Maybe I just did too much self promotion who knows. But I remember like having someone with a strong account post made it much more visible. And I guess this doesn’t apply to the Reddits that you were using, the sub Reddits?

Eli: I mean on Reddit, the only reason that your account — I mean Reddit keeps track of how much like how many votes you’ve gotten, it’s called karma. And the only way that that really apply like will affect anything that you do, is there is someone who is checking out your post history to see if you go spamming stuff about your business. So I mean Reddit’s rule of thumb is that no more than 10% of what you post can be about your website or your business or whatever it is you are trying to promote.

So what you should do is you should make sure that you are interacting with a broad variety of audiences, and that 90% of what you are posting has nothing to do with your business, because then you fall within the guidelines, and you won’t get banned or get in trouble.

Steve: When you are posting about– on these other sub Reddits and you are asking for information, those don’t count as you promoting your business, right?

Eli: No, no they don’t. I mean as long as I’m not linking to my website or pushing my service then people won’t take it that way.

Steve: Okay, and for that sub Reddit though the ‘shut up and take my money’ one, I looked at that one in particular, it looks like you just kind of posted your product on there, was that just the etiquette for that particular sub Reddit?

Eli: Yeah, I mean you are actually not allowed to do anything other than post what the product is in the title. Like you are theoretically not supposed to say anything about like the price or anything more except literally just the product name. And it’s just only supposed to be a link to the product, otherwise it will get removed.

Steve: So can you tell me a little bit about the personalities that are on that particular sub Reddit, because it sounds like that one is like generic one that applies to a lot of people right?

Eli: Yeah, definitely it is, I mean so in general Reddit is predominantly male, so and it is predominantly younger men. So I mean honestly it’s kind of a community where your product has to be really targeted towards them. Luckily for us I mean younger men eat lots of snacks, and I mean [inaudible 00:22:14] are more likely to be into things like technology or video games. And so it just happens to be a market that really fit well with our product.

Steve: I see so if you have like a product that’s more feminine that sort of thing, it probably not going to work well in ‘shut up and take my money’?

Eli: Yes, I mean less likely to work well. I mean there are other sub Reddits that are more appropriate for that, but yes probably not going work as well.

Steve: And in terms of finding the Reddits, how many — how did you find the shopping ones in particular, where you just post the product, and then people would like it or they don’t?

Eli: Yeah, I mean honestly just exploring around this big site, like Reddit search function is pretty terrible, but if you just Google search different things like Reddit shopping, Reddit products, Reddit sale, or whatever, then you’ll eventually poke around and find there are more active sub Reddits.

Steve:Okay, and then you mentioned giveaways as a way to kind of give back to the community, were there any other posts that worked well for you?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean obviously giveaways were useful, because people think that you are giving them something, but there’s a couple of other things that we did that are useful. One is you should really find your competitors if they are on Reddit. You can do that just by kind of like searching for their products and their website and seeing if they are posting anything about it. And every time that your competitors are kind of posting in a conversation that’s giving some traction and you feel like you have something to add, then you should engage and say hey, my service does this too and this is how we do it better.

So we actually had a competitor that launched by doing an AMA on Reddit, which is kind of when we say hey this is my story, this is something interesting about me, ask me questions about it. And for whatever reason Reddit took a lot of interest in this particular person. And it blew up, they were the number one post on AMA for like a day, and AMA is like a huge sub Reddit. So I mean they were probably hitting on 100,000 new websites and so after that, it’s huge.

And I mean the only– the way I found out about it is I was looking at Google analytics and there was like 300 people on a website, and I was like that’s very strange and it was all coming from Reddit. And someone had just mentioned us in a comment on this thread, and so by– I went down there and joined the conversation, and through that experience and just being mentioned in a thread I was popular, we got like over 150 website sign ups.

Steve: Holy crap, okay so do you recommend doing an AMA, did you do an AMA after that for yourself?

Eli: I didn’t, I really feel stupid about it honestly, because if we could have had the same sort of success that they did, it would have been fantastic, but lots of people when they start a business they do an AMA. Most of the time it doesn’t do anything, I guess for whatever reason this particular person’s story was interesting to people, and so it got a lot of traction, there’s really no harm in doing an AMA, especially if you have like an interesting back story to your business as a really—it’s like your personal life, then you should do it, there is nothing major [ph] can come out of it.

Steve: So are you– like if you were to do an AMA, would you just set it up and then send traffic to it, or does the traffic just kind of come naturally on Reddit?

Eli: It will come organically on Reddit, I’ve never like done anything outside of Reddit to try to get traffic to my Reddit posts.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of just the success that you’ve had on Reddit, what are some of like the conversion numbers and the traffic numbers that you’ve gotten?

Eli: Yeah, so it will all kind of depend on where it’s coming from, on the shut up and take my money sub Reddit, we were converting like just above 1%.

Steve: That’s incredible.

Eli: Yeah, I mean it’s nice, the thing is on that sub Reddit there is no further information that’s available, you literally can only click the link. So it obviously– it makes sense to me that my conversion rates would be a little bit lower, because there is nowhere else that you can find out about that other than just clicking the links. So you get a lot of people that are clicking the link just to see what it’s all about, they don’t necessarily have a large purchase intent.

And then in other places like for example in like the snack exchange sub Reddit when we’ve done, our conversion rate will be a little higher, may be more like 2%. And then when we got put in that AMA and the comment was there, I mean those people have like very little purchase intent when they are just reading something very generic on sub Reddit, and so it will be more like 27%.

Steve: Hey everyone, I just want to take a quick moment to thank famebit.com for being a sponsor of the show. Now FameBit is the number one market place for You Tube influencer marketing, with over 15,000 You Tubers looking to promote brands from beauty, tech, gaming, pets, and more. Now video starts as low as $50 and it’s completely free to post a campaign and receive proposals from You Tubers.

Now if you’ve listened to my podcast before, one of my guests Emmanuel Alley used famebit.com to make over $65,000 in four months with You Tube influencer marketing. And the best part is if you use coupon code mywifequit at famebit.com you will automatically get $10 off. So go to famebit.com right now and get famous You Tubers to promote your products. Now back to the show.

Steve: And how much traffic are we talking about here?

Eli: I mean for the shut up and take my money post, both– I’ve done it twice now, and both times I did it there was about 10,000 unique group visits and then…

Steve: In like a day?

Eli: Yeah, in a day.

Steve: Holy crap, okay.

Eli: And then the AMA was about 15,000.

Steve: So how many times can you do these things on the shut up and take my money, you said you did it twice like what’s like the etiquette for how often you can do it?

Eli: Yeah, so on this sub Reddit the rules that can– if you are the creator of the product, you can’t post more than once a month, and we waited actually eight months. So we posted it right when we first launched, and then we basically wanted to give it a long enough time to ever and we completely forgot about it before posting, because if you can’t spare, I mean the sub Reddit people will frown upon that. But if you are posting different products, then once a month is fine, if you are posting the same products you should wait a little bit longer.

Steve: So just curious, have you tried Reddit advertising as well?

Eli: I haven’t, I’ve read a lot about it, and from what I’ve heard for the most part, people don’t seem to really having too much success with it, but I’ve not personally tried it.

Steve: So you’ve only done that one particular sub Reddit once every eight months, but you mentioned that Reddit is one of your primary sources of traffic. So how do you kind of keep it going if you can only publish every now and then, does that make sense?

Eli: Yeah it does, so there are a couple of other things that we’ve done, so for example best sub Reddit snack exchange, it has on Reddit each sub Reddit has like a side bar that typically has just read in a piece of information, like the rules of the sub Reddit, other related sub Reddits, things like that. And on a specific sub Reddit it also has like links to basically subscription box companies that have products that the people might be interested in. So we messaged the moderators about sub Reddit, and we had our product posted on that side bar. So that’s the source of sustaining traffic for us, because it’s always there regardless…

Steve: You don’t have to pay for that link, it’s just there forever?

Eli: No, correct.

Steve: Amazing. Okay, how did you negotiate that?

Eli: Honestly it was very simple, I just messaged the moderator, he didn’t respond, I followed up and then he finally put it up right there. Depending on the sub Reddit, if they have something like that, then you can definitely message the moderators. People on Reddit, I mean they like to see people who are like active Reddit users. You have a business. So if you are nice about it and you approach them, they will probably help you out.

Steve: And they can tell—so what is your comment [ph] at this point with that Reddit account?

Eli: Like 1500 or 2000 or so.

Steve: Okay and does that factor in whether you can get on one of these side bars or…?

Eli: Yeah I think in general, anyone who is like a hard core Reddit user will look at your [inaudible] [00:30:32] and your post history and your comment history. If you are like a really active user that is engaging with the community on a variety of different topics, then people will be very willing to help you out.

Steve: And this account is not your own personal account, right? This is your separate business account. You just kind of developed that kind of over time?

Eli: Yeah I mean honestly when the posts are successful I get a lot of comments from them because there’s a lot of up-posts. And it doesn’t need to be like little things every time. They can just be like a few big successful posts that add up quickly.

Steve: And then how many of these companies are actually on these side bars? Is it just yours or there are a whole bunch?

Eli: There’s like ten maybe on that specific one.

Steve: Okay. And so that’s one source of traffic. Are the other ones like kind of more manual in terms of like getting traffic from Reddit?

Eli: Yeah so one thing that’s nice about the Shut Up and Take My Money is that what people will frequently do is they’ll sort it by top. So Reddit is like– their normal algorithm basically demotes posts over time after they’ve been up for a while, so that fresh content always rises to the top. But you can also sort sub Reddits by top over a period of time. So I can say like “I want to look at the best 25 posts over the last you know.” So what happens is if your post has been very successful then when people sort by top, it will still be up there even though maybe three months have passed.

And this is really great especially when people are coming up to the holidays, because that’s one way that people will book for a gift ideas, is they’ll to something like Shut Up and Take My Money, or sort by top over the past year and then also look at the top 25 posts, they’ll say, hey I think blah, blah, blah would like this particular product. So honestly that’s sub Reddit even though we are not on the front page or anywhere near it, it still gives us a lot of traffic.

Steve: Any secrets to getting one of these Reddits to the top? Did you do anything or was it just you posted and that was it?

Eli: I mean honestly, it’s just about the product and crafting a good title. I mean I think that one thing that helped us is that our concept can be very easily explained in about ten words. I mean what we posted was snacks from a different country delivered monthly. So if you have to find like a very concise way to explain the appeal of your product, because that’s all that people are going to see. And then beyond that, just make it really easy for selling the by the products. Like we linked literally to the product page, the person has to click like one button and then they’ll check out.

So people on Reddit aren’t patient. Make it very easy for them to buy the product. And then obviously like people will comment on your post. Make sure you engage with them, don’t just post it and then go away. I mean respond to people’s questions, provide more information about the product that people are interested, and that will instill more trust in people about your product.

Steve: Okay. So what other advertising mediums have you tried besides Reddit?

Eli: I mean the other place that we found the biggest success is kind of like You Tube and bloggers. So we actually got really lucky. Our biggest You Tube success was not from something that we initiated. There’s a famous video gamer guru called TotalBiscuit. His wife actually was just like a customer of ours. I don’t know how she found our products, but she did and she signed up.

And then they decided that they would film TotalBiscuit trying all the snacks from the different country each month and post a video to You Tube. I mean goodness knows why they decided to do that, but I mean it was fantastic to us. I mean each of those videos has like around 200,000 views and drive a lot of traffic to our website. So that’s great obviously.

And then obviously we have like also engaged in some of the You Tube marketing ourselves. So really what we do is we look for people who we think would be a good fit for our product. People who do like product reviews and people who have like a lot of enthusiasm, who we think will be like fun to have try the snacks because you know our product is very fun.

And then we reach out to them and we say hey, “Can we send you a free box that you could review on your YouTube channel?” And sometimes they say yes, sometimes they ask for money and at this point we are not willing to pay them. So we just say, “Could you do it for free?” And a lot of times they will. And we’ve probably gotten 15 or 20 people to do that. And it definitely drives a lot of traffic to the website.

Steve: So how do you reach out to this people? Is it just the You Tube contact link?

Eli: Yes, so I mean they’ll typically provide like an email address for business purposes that you can reach out to them through. There’s also a website called Famed It which we don’t use. But that’s basically if you want to pay for You Tube marketing you can do that. And I mean what we found is that you kind of have to craft the story a bit. You kind of have to talk about like, maybe watch five to ten videos, get a feel for their personality, get a feel for their back story. Make more of a personalized email.

I mean our business receives like 10 emails a day of just xyz blogger that wants to feature our product, but they don’t ever say anything about our business, and we don’t feel like they’ve researched us. So I mean it’s really important to make the person feel like it’s just not a spam email that you are sending to hundreds of thousands people. You know really craft the content in a personalized way and that will make your response rate much, much higher.

Steve: Hey Eli, I’m going to ask you a very selfish question now. Let’s say you run like a wedding linen store for example, is that Redditable or not?

Eli: Yes but only in weddings specific sub Reddits, and I guarantee you there is a wedding specific sub Reddit.

Steve: Okay so that implies that there’s females on that Reddit– sub Reddit?

Eli: Yeah there are. I mean Reddit is predominantly male, but there are also plenty of places where women are more likely to frequent. Reddit is very diverse and luckily they’ve already done the segmenting for you by breaking it up under sub Reddits, so really no matter what your product is, if you spent some time poking around, you’ll find places where people that are your target market are hanging out, I guarantee that.

Steve: And so what would you recommend a giveaway, or just asking questions like what would you recommend doing?

Eli: There’s really two ways that I think would be useful, one is just market research. I mean looking at the ways that people are interacting, like the kind of questions that they have, the problems that they’re facing. Those are really-really useful things to know for your business. Then secondly just engaging with them, I mean yeah you can run giveaway [inaudible] [00:37:00], but also just looking for people who got a problem that your product solves and talk with them about it, and seeing if your product could be a good fit for them.

Steve: Well is it okay to mention the product though?

Eli: Yeah it is. So I think that one thing that really helps in that regard is if you don’t just mention your product, but your mention your product and maybe like one to two other competitors. People really like when you feel like you’re giving them information to help them rather than pushing your product. So that’s one way to kind of like disguise your actual intent and people will react much more positively towards that.

Steve: Okay, and then back to just kind of your business what are some of the logistics of running the box company, like how do you get products for your box, kind of how the economics work, and how do you decide how much to charge that sort of thing?

Eli: Sure so in terms of logistics every month we work with a variety of different suppliers. Obviously because we’re featuring a different country each month, it’s very difficult– it’s basically just a supply chain challenge because we have to constantly be making contact with new suppliers that have new products for us. So I mean we do a lot of different things to find suppliers, we went to a trade show last month, and we’re going to one this month and that’s a good way.

We do a lot of Google searching, which is quite useful, but it’s also can be very difficult because a lot of suppliers especially in this particular industry are not online at this point. And then one other way that we do it is by kind of reverse engineering. We have like a local international food store that’s really great, and we kind of see where they’re getting their products from.

And then obviously we do like a lot of research just by asking people online who are from the different countries, like what are your favorite snacks, we have personal contacts with people who live in different countries, or were born there and they can tell us what they like the most and then we try to find those products.

Steve: So it always means contacting the distributor right or the manufacturer?

Eli: Yeah so I mean right now we don’t actually import the products ourselves, that’s probably somewhere our business is going to head eventually. But today we work with the importers and so we basically have to find people who are importing products from that country, and then make contact with them, see what they have available that we could purchase that would be an interesting snack or candy. We typically work with like somewhere between two to four different suppliers each month.

Steve: It just seems like and I’m not sure how many customers you have, but like the volumes for food that you have are they high enough to actually cause like the vendors to actually care about you? You kind of get what I’m asking?

Eli: Yeah I know I do. At the very beginning it was hard to get the vendors to pay any attention. At this point it kind of depends, some vendors are still just a pain in the butt to work with, but some vendors are actually really responsive now. Honestly, I think you just kind of have to be very confident coming into the negotiation, like when you first make contact be– project very high in terms of what you think you’re going to buy to try to get better service, and I mean only at the very end you actually have to reveal what you’re ordering so.

I think at this point like the useful thing for us is that a lot of our suppliers are selling to ethnic groceries, and so a lot of ethnic groceries are kind of Mom-and-Pop shops, and so they’re used to dealing with businesses that are a bit lower volumes. Like their minimum orders are really only like a pallet or so. So it’s not too difficult for us to deal with them. Now we’re talking about dealing directly with like an oversea manufacturer, they’re probably not going to pick up the phone for anything less than a container full. So it’s a bit more difficult there.

Steve: Okay and then since you’re a subscription box, how do you reduce churn?

Eli: Yeah, I think the number one way to reduce churn is just by having a really awesome product. I know that’s I mean– I think that’s the bottom line, I think if you’re– I think a lot of subscription business have a reputation for kind of starting off really great, and then kind of reducing the quality and value of the product over time, because they’re trying to make money, but then as a result their churn goes way up.

We really try to focus on putting all of the value into the product itself and not spending any money on paid marketing. I mean pretty much all the subscription businesses have like your first box is free or it’s half off, and like you can get referral credits by referring people, and this and that the next thing. And instead of doing any of that we basically price the product as low as we can to have it be like sustainable for us, and then we put all the value back into the product. So we honestly just try to make the best product that we can, and people stick with us because of it.

Steve: Here’s what’s interesting, when I was looking at your site it seems like every month a box costs a different amount. So when someone signs up are they just signing up for an open ended subscription where you can charge them any amount between a certain dollar amount, like how does it work?

Eli: Yeah so the cost that they pay to us is consistent month to month, so I mean we offer the larger box for $25 and the smaller one for 13, and that never changes month to month. Obviously our cost changes month to month. So I mean it’s really just a balancing game, one month we make like we’re making very-very little, because the products are very expensive, maybe it’s from like a European country and it’s more like fine chocolate some things like that, and the next month maybe it’s an Asian country and the products are a bit cheaper, and so the margins go up. So it’s just kind of a balancing game for us.

Steve: So when they sign up, it’s like an open ended subscription, they actually have to cancel it in order for it to stop coming right?

Eli: Yeah I mean so we’re offering both subscriptions like you said they operate exactly as you just explained, and then we also offer gifts which is basically it has an expiration date, you pay the full amount up front.

Steve: Okay and so you basically have like a 30 day peak into the future in terms of how much you need right 30-60 day?

Eli: Yeah, so I mean at this point we have a pretty good idea of what our trend rate is. We know how many subscribers we have today, and then we basically have to estimate how many sign ups we’re going to get into the future. Unfortunately at this point we have enough volume that we really have to start ordering products two to three months ahead of time. So we’re projecting pretty far out into the future relatively for us at this point.

Steve: So do you do any other sort of marketing like email marketing or like when someone says they’re going quit do you have some sort of sequence in place that will try to keep him to stay, or anything along those lines?

Eli: We don’t right now. I mean pretty much every subscription business does and it’s something we’ll probably be implementing in the future, but now I mean right now we don’t do any email marketing. Honestly, we right now we’ve kind of consolidated our efforts to the channels that have been the most successful for us so far, because we’re being able to grow the business that way. And since it’s only a two person team we kind of try to stay focused on that. I mean really for us it’s like social media, bloggers, that have been the most successful, because the product itself is pretty like interesting for people to [inaudible] [00:44:18]. So that’s what’s been the best for us thus far.

Steve: So outside of Reddit and reaching out to influencers, have any of the other social media platforms been good for you?

Eli: Yeah, so I think Facebook has been good for us, but not in terms of like customer acquisition. I feel like Facebook honestly for most people is just a place to kind of like maintain the community and to interact with the community, and that’s how we’ve used it. Twitter I think can be a way to acquire new customers, but it’s kind of like ground work. I mean one thing that we tried early on was kind of like tweeting out to people who were mentioning, interacting like international snacks in their twitter conversations.

And I mean that it works, but it’s like it’s very slow and very time consuming. So Twitter for us at this point is just a way that if a customer has a quick question [inaudible] [00:45:12] respond. And then right now I think we’re going to start focusing on Instagram and Pintrest, because I think our product is pretty visually appealing. I mean the packaging is interesting, and the products themselves are pretty interesting, so I think that will be some good platforms for us to work on.

Steve: Interesting, and then it sounds Reddit is kind of low maintenance at this point it sounds like right?

Eli: Yeah, I mean it is. I mean the thing about Reddit is that you just have to be monitoring it, like I said we kind of check on what our competitors are doing like every few days, and just see if there’s anywhere that we can hop in. But Reddit is more about like looking for the right opportunity to post something, looking for the right opportunity to jump in and get a big win, rather than every single day grinding it out in very small amounts.

Steve: Okay, hey that’s really helpful Eli. For all those people who are interested in getting some yummy treats from other countries where they can find you, and where and they buy a box?

Eli: So we sell only on our website which is Universalyums.com. And like I said the larger box is 25 bucks, the smaller one is 13 and you can cancel it anytime.

Steve: And what do you get in each box, just curious small versus large?

Eli: Yeah so the small box we say is six or more snacks, but most of the time it’s more like eight or nine. And the larger box we say 13 or more most of the times it’s like 14 or 15. We try to include like a variety of different flavors, so like sweet stuff, salty stuff, spicy, some like smaller candy, some bigger treats, so we try to put a lot variety into the boxes.

Steve: And if anyone has any questions about just your business in general, do you have like a Twitter account or some place where they can reach you?

Eli: Yeah we own the Universalyums twitter handle, you can also email me if you have any questions, the email is just support@universallyyums.com.

Steve: Awesome well thanks a lot Eli, thanks for coming on the show, I learnt a lot today about Reddit especially.

Eli: Thanks Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, man take care.

Eli: You too bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Before talking to Eli I would never have guessed that Reddit would be a great place to advertise physical goods online. I guess I’ll have to go try it now and write about it on the blog. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode81, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to write a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now I also offer free ecommerce workshops on a regular basis if you want to learn. For information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. If you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information and sign up there.

Once again I just want to thank HostGator for sponsoring this episode. HostGator is one of the best webhost out there that I highly recommend if you want to start a blog. In fact I hosted Mywifequitherjob.com on there in the very beginning and loved it. You get 24/7 live support via chat, phone, and email, and you could install WordPress in just a single click. They have an easy to use website builder design services, and the best part is that I’m offering a 30% discount for all podcast listeners. Please go HostGater.com/Mywifequit to redeem the discount. Once again that’s HostGater.com/Mywifequit.

I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts out there that I recommend if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. Everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in, so all you’re going is populate it with the products that you want to sell, and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to Bigcommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is Bigcommerce.com/Mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

080: How To Achieve Financial Freedom With 8 Different Income Streams With Nick Loper

How To Achieve Financial Freedom With 8 Different Income Streams With Nick Loper

Nick Loper is someone who I met just recently at The New Media Expo in Las Vegas and he runs the popular site SideHustleNation.com where he teaches others how to build a sizable side income.

What’s cool about Nick is that he built up his businesses while working full time just like I did. He’s got 8 different income streams and he’s a huge proponent of using your free time more wisely to achieve financial freedom. He also runs a popular podcast called Side Hustle Nation which you should all check out.

So without further ado, enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nick created 8 different streams of online income
  • What Nick advises if you have very little money to invest in your business
  • How to get customers and visibility on Kindle, Fiverr and Udemy
  • How to create an audience for your blog
  • How Nick weaves his podcast in with his other revenue generating properties
  • How to create a paid mastermind group
  • How to attract clients for coaching

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and please join me for a free live workshop on ecommerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com and sign up right on the front page. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have my buddy Nick Loper on the show. Now Nick is someone who I met recently at NMX, and he runs the popular site sidehustlenation.com where he teaches others how to build a sizeable side income. Now what’s cool about Nick is that he built up his business while working full time, just like I did. And he’s got over eight different income streams and he’s a huge proponent of using your free time more wisely to achieve financial freedom.

He also runs a popular podcast called Side Hustle Nation as well which you should all check out. But before he begins, just a quick note, you know kind of up until this point, I focused on guests worth seven, eight, even nine figure businesses, but today I want to kind of discuss some of the little things that you can do to make money, period. And Nick is an expert in this regard. So with that, welcome to the show Nick. How are you doing today man?

Nick: I’m doing excellent. Thanks for having me.

Steve: Yes, what is your story? How did you kind of get involved in Side Hustle Nation and what are all the various ways that you actually make money online.

Nick: Well that’s what we can dive into. I think since I put that different—since I put up that podcast up, I’ve added a few more to the…

Steve: Is that right? Are you like over ten now, I mean double digits?

Nick: Maybe ten, a bunch of different projects going on, but so my background was exactly like Steve said, trying to build the business part time. After graduation, I do what you are supposed to do. I got a corporate job, moved across the country, and pretty immediately found out that sticking around here for 40 years is a pretty scary preposition. And I really didn’t have the desire to climb the ladder. Even the vision or the desire to like see myself being a manager here, or like it just didn’t appeal to me. So I was trying to figure out, how can I get out of here?

And the first business and painfully I actually started this even prior to graduation or as in affiliate marketing. And the site that I ended up having built was a footwear comparison shopping site. So it had been like a next tag or a price grabber, so specifically for shoes. And so the way the site made money was Zappos and Amazon and these other footwear retailers would pay a commission for any sales that were referred through the site. And aggregated all of these catalogues and you would say, if you are looking for Nike shocks, women’s model, xyz or whatever, you know here’s what you can find it and here’s the best deal. You know find my size or whatever the button said to click off to the matching site.

Steve: Just curious, did you get stores to send you their product feeds, or did you manually gather all those for that site?

Nick: So it was all aggregated through a handful of different affiliate networks. So Commission Junction was big, Link Share was big. Google affiliate network at the time and Amazon has their own product catalogue. And so the technical challenge was matching all those together and normalizing the data, because some people will say this is new Valence, some people will say this is new Valence Inc, some people will say this is new Valence Software and try to teach the system to say, “No, no that’s all the same brand,” and stuff like that.

Steve: So Nick are you technical? I know we live in kind of the same area where there’s a lot of tech workers here. Were you in engineering at any point or?

Nick: I’m not. I guess I saw a couple like IS classes and like one CS class. So you know enough to be dangerous, enough to speak the language, enough to be like well should your query really look like that. And the tech team is probably just annoyed at me at this point. They are like, “Look, we got it. Just stop bothering us.” So no, I didn’t program any of this myself. It was all just kind of laying out the specks and the groundwork for it.

Steve: Okay, and then I remember just before we were chatting you mentioned you just recently shut this down. So I thought we kind of just go over some of the ways that you make money today. And so you mentioned now that you’ve hit double digits. So can we just kind of go over kind of at a high level what those are, and then we’ll just kind of focus on the ones that are making you the most money.

Nick: You bet. So I was so involved in affiliate marketing even though the shoe business has– the sunset has fallen on a few business. We still have a handful of different affiliate sites that are varying in performance from very good to not so great. So that’s before the—what else is going on, like we’ve been to self publishing on Kindle and that’s been a really fun side hustle. I started that probably almost three years ago at that point. I remember getting my first like royalty cheque from Amazon for like $47. And I’m like, “I’m a professional author! Somebody paid me for my thing.” It was really cool.

Steve: That’s true.

Nick: I’m doing some peer to peer lending which is not really a side hustle, but more of a alternative investment strategy selling some stuff on Fiverr which is the market place, because it serves starting at $5. After meeting a gentleman whose claim to fame was I have made enough money on Fiverr to buy a house in my first year. And I was like, “Tell me more. Okay, I’m saying this because I’ve been on Fiverr a ton of times as a buyer, but never really as a seller.” And so he kind of broke down what happened to get that. I thought that was really interesting. So that inspired me to get started there myself.

I’ve got the blog and the podcast which makes money through referral sponsorships, affiliate stuff, sponsor posts occasionally. I run the Side Hustle Nation inner-circle mastermind and some coaching that happens through the site as well which is growing a little bit over the past year or so. That’s been a ton of fun. I’ve got some by the minute consulting on clarity.fm and I think you can set up a similar thing on Google help outs now which I have yet– it’s on my to-do list, just pretty fun building online courses through Udemy. I haven’t done any self post the ones I give, but I do the Udemy thing, testing that platform out. And just in the past year or so I’ve gotten a little more involved in freelancing both in writing and book editing. And then my latest is Amazon business. I’m starting out with some clearance arbitrage, and actually just made my first sales on that on Friday.

Steve: Awesome. Congrats man.

Nick: It’s pretty cool. Pretty cool although refresh that app, or open that app and see actually numbers, not zeros in there.

Steve: So let’s talk about your big money makers here. Now you mentioned a lot of stuff. What are like your top three money makers?

Nick: So it varies month to month. You know when there’s a book launch going on, the Kindle stuff will rise to the top, but probably the affiliate stuff is consistently up there.

Steve: Okay. And then which sites are you doing affiliate offers on. You mentioned it’s not like you had a lot of sites actually.

Nick: Yeah, a handful of sites, so some of them do better than others. And actually lately the affiliates stuff through Side Hustle Nation has done the best. But the other site that’s done well is a directory of Virtual Assistant Companies or outsourcing companies, it’s called virtualassistants.com, and I started that in 2011. And that site is monetized with some cyber advertising, some referral like Regent [ph] for this type of companies. And then they buy the minute consulting stuff feeds into some of the clarity stuff.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about that. So how do you create a site like that? How do you drive traffic to a site like that? So is it similar to your shoe site in a way where you aggregate different things, and you are making affiliate revenue off of it?

Nick: So unlike the shoe site, this one where the shoe site was heavily relying on pay traffic and Google adwords and Bing search ads, this site is entirely organic search. Because our ranks are well for much of our outsourcing related terms and especially like long tail key words in that sense. So having had to do a bunch of pay stuff on upfront, but my inspiration for the site was like browsing. I had started a wine site. I don’t know why like within one country even though I know nothing about wine I thought this was good niche to get in to. And I saw this site. It was like a review site for these different wine clubs. I knew how much these wine clubs were paying out to affiliates sites. This guy must just be printing money. This is like the easiest site in the world to build.

So I literally like tried thinking of what can I– you know you are listen to tropical MBA, what can I [inaudible] [0:10:19] in jam on this guy’s idea, and came up with the Virtual Assistants space. I work in—especially for software products that you can do this. The other one I wanted to build for ages is like the affiliate marketing—the email marketing version of this like the AWebers and the Getresponses and the Infusionsoft, all these companies, and a ton of them have like recurring payoffs it would be really cool to set this up. But that’s what I did. So I started using the exact same theme as that guy, starting out, use the exact same plug-ins, and just have somebody on Elance and then put it together for 50 bucks, a 100 bucks.

Steve: So is it a WordPress site or no?

Nick: Yes it’s a WordPress theme and just replaced the content with—content about outsourcing instead of content about wine. And it took a while to take out gain and traction, and I was stalking people on twitter to like—if they would tweet about the company I’d send them a note and be like, “Hey would you mind dropping in a review?” And that’s kind of how I seeded the initial reviews.

Steve: That’s really interesting. For some reason I don’t see it mentioned in the Side Hustle Nation or at least maybe I didn’t maybe go through the material close enough. But so you just put up a site and you did some research on Virtual Assistants, and then you just started writing articles about it? Is that how you drive traffic to it?

Nick: Yes a lot of it is based on my experience in outsourcing and trying to find assistants for the shoe business. So we ended up being a cool pivot because we were just trying to find out which of these companies overseas are legit and which ones are scammers and which ones are actually decent operators. And so now there’s like over 150 different companies with profiles on the site and close to a thousand user reviews. So it’s really taken off and it’s all user generated content that Google loves to chew on.

Steve: So how do you get users to leave a review?

Nick: Just at the bottom of every post. “Have you worked with this company? Leave a review.” And so initially it was reaching out to people on twitter, like if they mention this company, reaching out to the companies. “Hey if you have any happy customers, send them by to leave a review.” And you can kind of see based on the time stamps because it’s a marketing channel for the companies. So you can tell when they send out an email blast to their customers, and then you go like six within two days span or something.

Steve: Interesting. And then what was your content base strategy for that site?

Nick: It’s a couple of different ways. You know, one is kind of my personal experiments and trials and failures in outsourcing, and the other is just kind of news reporter style like who or when, where and why on different companies.

Steve: And how often do you publish?

Nick: It goes in spats. I go get inspired and do five posts in a two week span or something like that, and then do nothing for a month.

Steve: So do you have anyone who manages the site or is it mainly your content? Do you have writers or–?

Nick: Mainly my content. Have you used—I mean I’ve tested several different writing services. So I can profile them on the site. Like Iwriters, I’ve gotten articles from Fiverr, I’ve gotten articles from Copywriter today, Textbroker, all those places.

Steve: For some reason whenever I think of Virtual Assistants these days, I think of Darker’s site.

Nick: He’s on it. He’s on there.

Steve: No I would imagine that you are kind of competing against the guys like Darker who are putting out content—not competing, that’s maybe the wrong word. But I guess you are outranking guys like Darker and then you’re referring traffic to his services. Is that kind of accurate?

Nick: Yeah, probably not outranking Chris, because he’s got his whole empire built up. But he’s only one out of 150 companies. So there’s plenty of other options that people are looking for answers on.

Steve: Okay. And so your basic strategy there is to pump out content, get the content ranking for long tail key words, soliciting reviews by just soliciting some of these companies for their positive reviews to put on your site. And so everything is pretty much organic?

Nick: Everything at this point is relatively hands off. And now what I’ve started doing is you know recording video interviews with the founders and doing trials of the services myself. So I’ve got that kind of firsthand content to put up there as well.

Steve: Okay, so you have that site which sounds like it’s more or less on autopilot. What are you actually actively working on right now that is generating a good amount of income? Or what are you excited about right now?

Nick: I spent a lot of time on this Side Hustle site. It’s a very content intensive content revenue, writing the posts kind of the case studies experiments that go into those, recording the podcasts and doing that sort of thing. Lately, the past couple of weeks, I’ve spent a lot of time trying to learn the Amazon business, the importing business just because it’s such a hot side hustle right now, it’s such a hot business that people are interested in. And I’ve been probably ignoring it for too long. And I need—because of the nature of the other site, I need to be able to speak intelligently about it. Whether it works or not, I need to at least have an experiment to write about.

Steve: I see. So let’s talk about Side Hustle Nation real quick. So how does Side Hustle Nation generate income, and how does the podcast kind of all come into play here?

Nick: Sure a couple of ways or several ways. So there is services like you can hire me for side hustle coaching. There’s a private mastermind that I host. The site runs money through affiliate revenue and some sponsored content.

Steve: Okay and then give me an example of one of your affiliates.

Nick: So I’m an affiliate for Blue Host and I’m not putting up [inaudible] [0:16:21] numbers, but occasionally generate sales for that. One of my cool like examples is my friend Sean Marshall came on the show like in January, February. And he’s like, “Hey, this is my business kind of open the Commono [ph] on. This is my business. I run a local marketing support for local businesses to the point where it’s an amazing lifestyle business. I up and moved my family to Cozumel Mexico and we are Scooby diving and the girls are learning Spanish, it’s great. And by the way I have a Udemy course on the topic. It’s 75% off for your listeners. And so when we affiliate linked that, you know after 30, 40 minutes of him delivering the content, they converted really, really well. So those are kind of affiliate relationships that perform best on the site more so than the Blue Host stuff.

Steve: And you said a bunch of stuff there. You also mentioned some sort of membership site or mastermind. Is that what you said?

Nick: Yeah. So I host a quarterly mastermind, five or six people at a time. We meet, we agree to talk about side hustles and accountability and goals for the quarter.

Steve: And these are people that pay you on a monthly basis? Is it like a subscription or–?

Nick: Yes.

Steve: Okay. So how did you get those customers? Are they just people who follow your blog or–?

Nick: Yes. Podcast listeners, primarily blog followers, email subscribers. So that’s where I’ll talk about it on the basically on the podcast and then in the email list, “Hey, we are starting a new session. Get your application in.”

Steve: I see. How much do you charge for that?

Nick: $97 a month.

Steve: $97 a month and then you take what, five people every month or so?

Nick: Yes, there’s actually two groups going now. So I have ten people in there.

Steve: Interesting. So how did you come up with the idea of doing that, and how do you kind of run things.

Nick: This was an idea from Alex Parker actually. We were recording a session last year on the topic of masterminds– the importance of masterminds and more so like the ability to host paid masterminds. It was something I never had even thought or heard of before. And he was like, “Nick, you have a relatively decent following. The Side Hustle Nation people would love to hang out with you.” I said, “Okay, well let’s see what happens.” Put it out there and you know had eight, seven, or eight enquiries and founded a pretty solid crew there.

Steve: Interesting. So you just put yourself out there and then you got five people to sign up. Are you actually present during these? Do you moderate all these discussions?

Nick: Yap. I’m on every call.

Steve: Okay. Is it just like one gigantic Q&A session or how do you run it?

Nick: So we take a couple of different formats. One way is just to be around Robin format where everyone has kind of ten to twenty minutes to talk about, “Hey what did you get done this week? What are you working on? What are your challenges?” And kind of solicit feedback from the group on whatever topic you want and then accountability. What are going to get done before next time? And format number two is the extended hot seat format where you do very abbreviated round the horn with everybody. And then somebody else has 30 or 40 minutes to dive into their business and what they want to get done in the next three months or maybe some bigger longer term stuff than just this week, like “Where do you want to go with this over the next three months?”

Steve: So these guys – you meet with these guys once a week for a month. And then are you ever in the hot seat or is it just primarily for the people who pay?

Nick: Yeah, just for those guys.

Steve: I see. This format sounds exactly like the other masterminds that I belong to. It’s just funny though that you’ve—it’s creative that you’ve monetized this actually. So do you find that the people that you attract, are they all trying to create blogs or is it just kind of all across the board?

Nick: It is across the board, more — a couple of people also probably doing ecommerce business, since that’s kind of hard right now. A lot of the people in the authority business space and kind of building their personal branded blog, and I want to be known for this, I want to start a podcast, I want to be known for this.

Steve: Okay, and so right now it sounds like you have 10 people paying you $97 a month for this? Okay, and then you also mentioned Udemy, so for the listeners out there Udemy is an online course platform, can we talk about what type of courses you are offering on there, and how much that generates approximately?

Nick: Sure so I — my main course is on how to rock your kindle launch, how do you rock your book launch basically, especially for like first time author, nonfiction, here is the system that works. The course was created after I put up a guest post on Steve Scott’s site, yeah, and it was like really like in terms of like 5000 words guest post. I got a ton of love on social media, a ton of love in the comments, and people were like you are joking, hey this could be a book in itself. And so I realized okay, there’s an appetite for this kind of information, how can I expand on this? And I had been wanting to try Udemy, I decided to interview people like Scott Braden and Rob Cabin [ph] and we were having a ton of success on this, like okay I got to give this a shot.

Or rather I got to give this another shot because I launched a course previously, and it did nothing and it was like this is a waste of several bits of…

Steve: On Udemy you mean?

Nick: Yeah, I said man this is — I don’t know maybe I just didn’t just do it right or whatever, so I kind of studied from these experts on how to launch it a little bit better. What worked best during the launch actually, so Udemy is a lot like Amazon, like if you can provide that initial push in terms of traffic and enrollments and sales and reviews, then their internal algorithms start to take place, like if you can provide that initial push like with your book to climb the ranks, then all over sudden it’s on the best seller list, and people will find it organically.
Similar with Udemy, and so in the first couple of months after the launch, this course generated maybe 3,500 bucks and then it’s between 3 and 600 a month since then, so relatively and passive since then, so I made it in November and haven’t touched it since, so it’s been kind of a cool.

Steve: So what is the main difference between your failed launch versus your successful one?

Nick: Okay, so the biggest success driver for the more recent Udemy launch was finding a couple of high value affiliate partners. So Udemy has an affiliate program through LinkShare that is I think a 40% pay out, and then if you are a top performer you can ask them to like bump you up to like 50%. And what that will do, so somebody could get 50% of your course for selling it for you. And so in my case that was Steve Scott, so he had built up a good report through that guest post and some other channels and hanging out at New Media Expo and all that. The other was Spencer Hass from Niche Pursuits.

And so in Steve’s case, it was like I have referred — I referred ten people to your post all the time and they ask me how should I launch my book, and it seems like it would be great to have this page thing to recommend and get paid on. And in Spencer’s case, him and his partner parent had been working on some kindle projects kind of like quietly behind the scenes and so I knew they were working on that, because I’d been following their stuff for a long time. You just send them early access to the course; hey I know you guys are working on this, check this out. And so they were very-very generous when they did their book launch recap report like, hey we owe Nick a huge thanks for teaching us all this stuff, and that was a great endorsement from both of those guys.

Steve: I see and how much do you charge for this course, how does like the pricing and your cut, what does Udemy take as well?

Nick: So I set it at $99 initially, and since bumped it to 149. I should probably bump it to 199. So how Udemy works is a very discount driven platform. And so with the courses that were sold through Spencer and through Steve were priced at $24. It’s like hey, get 75% off through this affiliate link. And that means my cut on it was $6 to $12 depending on how the structure is set up. So not a huge, not like the $2000 super premium courses that are out there, but an interesting channel. The reason people go to Udemy, a couple of reasons. For traffic that you refer as the instructor they are going to give you 97%.

So you could theoretically put your course up there for $500. And if you have that audience to sell to, they are going — and you don’t have to worry about video hosting, you don’t have to worry about payment processing, you don’t have to worry about any of that stuff. And if you are going to drive all those sales, sell it all day long for $500. You can also opt out of their promos to say like when they run like their monthly — because I launched right before in November, like right before black Friday. And so they had a big whole like black Friday thing, so everything was like $15.

Steve: Like every course on Udemy was $15, okay.

Nick: Yeah, and which was cool because it sold a ton of copies and it was all theoretically incremental, but it was also like if you have like some super premium material, you wouldn’t want to discount that to $15 either. So you could opt out of that.

Steve: Interesting, so yeah I do notice those coupons flashed by and it seems like everything is always heavily-heavily discounted on Udemy. I’m Just curious why Udemy versus your own platform?

Nick: Okay, so the second component of that is like Amazon, here is an opportunity to reach a platform of 6,000,000 students versus how many people you talk to on your blog, podcast, email list. It’s from that 6,000,000, and so if you can hit this right for your target key words that’s kindle publishing, that’s self publishing, that’s kindle launch, that’s book launch, whatever it is.

If people are sourcing for that, you have the opportunity to reach a much wider audience and that can be — and some people are using it purely as a discovery platform. They’ll put my course up for free; the minimum course is 30 minutes. And now I can funnel those people, I can send educational announcements to those emails or to those people which generally pings their inbox. And basically it’s an exposure challenge for a lot of people.

Steve: So that’s interesting, so you can list your course on there and then once people sign up you have access to their emails at that point?

Nick: That’s a good distinction to make, you don’t have their email, you can message them on platform, and you can send them either educational announcements, or promotional announcements. And I think you are limited to like four promo announcements per month.

Steve: Okay, that is really cool, and so let’s switch gears a little bit, because I want to kind of go through a little bit of list of all the ways you make money. I’m really curious about Fiverr; I don’t see how you can possibly make significant money with that platform. You are making five bucks or so off a customer right, so how does it work?
Nick: So Fiverr works like this, it’s all about the up sales and the $5 gigs are all about the pre made files, you can just hit send on basically. So it’s just like selling a book or a course, it’s no — there’s no work required to send this. And that’s what the guy in his screening was AnarchoFighter if you want to look him up one of the best Fiverr sellers on their top rated seller.

So he said hey, all my $5 gigs are just PDF, video, audio file deliveries real quick. I followed the script he had sent two seconds. If somebody wants my actual time and involvement, that’s when it’s going to be into the gig extras, the up sales and stuff. So one of his — they had — last we spoke was like I’ll send you the seven steps secret to a killer auto responder or something like that.

And there was — in the up sales I will write message number one for you, I would write message number two for you, I would write the whole thing for you. As he is upgraded to like a top level seller like he can charge, I don’t know up to 100 bucks on extra or something like that.

Steve: But he still has to manually respond to each one of these request right or no?

Nick: I think at that time definitely yes, at this time they may have added like a quick delivery like so somebody orders just the basic, and it’s just like a file you can paste in. Or like you can have it set to auto reply a certain script, and here is the Dropbox link to download the file or something.

Steve: Okay, and then I think I read one of your posts that you made several thousand dollars on Fiverr?

Nick: Yeah, I was doing around 500 bucks a month during my first year on the thing, so that was pretty cool. I did do some manual labor for part of that, how did it start? I started selling a couple of eBooks that I had, and they’ll say well, but then I got brave and said I’m going to turn on the screen recorder. I’m going to look at your website and for five minutes I’m going to just tell you what I think about your website, how you can improve your SEO, your conversion, your usability well. And that gig did okay; I got a couple of orders here and there.

Probably three or four, five months after I had it live, or I wake up in the morning I’m like flooded. My inbox is like flooded with Fiverr orders, I’m like what is going on. In short if I log on to a website and I see my mug on a homepage, I’m like oh my God, what am I going to do?

Steve: The homepage of Fiverr?

Nick: Yeah, the homepage of Fiverr just top 50 or top 100 site in the world, like very high traffic site. And it was a ton of fun and it ended up being okay, hourly maybe 20 to 30 bucks an hour with up sales and extras and everything. That went on, plus you meet some cool people on the platform just because it’s such a high traffic site, like I met coaching clients, I met mastermind members, I met bestselling authors. It’s kind of weird who’s on there on Fiverr, but it’s a really cool, I look at it as kind of a fun platform to play around with. I definitely wouldn’t go there if you are trying to purely make dollars, and there’s a million people out there trying to teach like Fiverr arbitrage, and do all this nonsense.

I’m not really doing any of that, but one way to think about is if you do have a larger service that you want to sell or similar — even a digital product, perfect for digital products, they have a larger service. Think of like what’s a bright sized like gateway drug that can get people into your service. Some people are doing — graphic designers are out there doing like little Fiverr cons for people’s websites and stuff like super quick, super easy as of entry point.

Steve: Okay, hey, just talking to you for like the last half hour, it seems you get a lot of stuff cooking in the oven. Whereas if I look at myself I can barely keep up with like the 2 or 3 websites that I’m doing, do you ever find yourself overstretched. And what is kind of your view on focusing on one massive money making project versus lots of little ones?

Nick: So I was massively focused on shoe business for a lot of years. And that was probably good at the time, but also there’s some risk in that right? Same thing if you work in a day job, if you are relying on one source of income for your livelihood, that’s an inherently risky position to be in, because Google can shut you down at any moment.
They shut me down two or three times over the course of the ten years I was running the business. Just by saying — and actually they did that one my first day of self employment, like I gave my notice, returning keys for my company car, and somebody said, hey your reviewer site is poor quality like this doesn’t meet our guidelines. You don’t have any problems for two prior years of account history not to mention the thousands of happy customers, like who are you to judge Google, but…

Steve: So they shut down your Adwords account or what happened?

Nick: Yeah, they shut down Adwords and so overnight 80% of traffic revenue was gone.

Steve: Oh my goodness!

Nick: And it was a battle, it was a struggle to kind of get that back going. And eventually they said oh, looks like we made an error, like 2000 is really expensive error, but thank you, for turning me back on. So that’s where kind of the desire for this diversification comes from. Well, I’m totally with you and if I try and focus on one thing at a time, but I have got to have, I don’t know, I have a little bit of ADD too, it’s like I’ve got to have several things going on, so I’m not going get bored. And so I try and preach diversity a little bit or diversification.

Steve: So I know a lot of the listeners, at least a small sub set of them are just trying to make money in any way they can, whether that be in ecommerce or side hustles and that sort of thing. So for someone who is just trying to make money as soon as they can, and you got a lot of experience in doing a whole bunch of different things, what would you say is probably the best way to start?

Nick: Start out by selling a service, you don’t have to worry about building a website, or having a product, or having an audience, or doing any of the stuff. Like you just need some skills that you have, some service you can offer and customers know what they want. I think Bryan Harris puts this really-really well, and say, hey look this is the fastest, absolute fastest way to get started. And he goes into detail in episode 87 of the side hustle show, on how exactly to get that done, reaching out to this target list of customers and offering something valuable to them for free in advance just to start the conversation, and go from there.

Steve: So let’s talk about that a little bit, so I’m just — in your opinion let’s say you have the skill, what is your next step?

Nick: So in my case I have been doing some nonfiction book editing, specific like business book editing. So if I wanted to grow this and kind of add capacity, but if I want to grow this what I would do is look on Kindle, look on Amazon for some business books. And I found one the other day that was like just atrociously written and formatted, because it was actually repurposed from like Udemy content, it was very clear like, oh I just hired a transcriptionist to like transcribe my video with no — didn’t care about sentences ending in periods, they didn’t care about spelling, it was just like horrible.

I said man this is your — you are signing your name to this, this is your brand. And so what I can do is take screen caps of that book, read, pin it up, and like look these are all of the errors I found just in the first chapter. Like let me clean this up for you and especially mister Udemy instructor you’ve got ten different courses, I know you are going to repurpose all of these over to Kindle. So that would be a perfect client team to land in the early stages.

Steve: So you would reach out and you would contact an Amazon author directly?

Nick: Yeah, so I would reach out to the author, I would just figure out their email address or website or what I know, probably first name at website name.com usually. You can try to look it up on reporters see if you could find somebody that way and say hey, mister author, I was checking out your book, thank you so much for publishing it, great content. However there’s — I don’t know if you had this proofread or not, because clearly you didn’t. I noticed a ton of errors, here is just what I found in the first chapter, my editing rates are blah, blah, blah. I don’t know you just want to start that conversation and see if there’s something that would be interesting.
And you could even go the — you could kind of instill some fear like, hey this is going to hurt you in the reviews which is going to hurt your sales, it’s going to hurt your credibility, like you are leaving money on the table by not investing in editing, whatever.

Steve: Okay, have you tried this tactic before in the past?

Nick: I have done it, I haven’t done it on this particular author that I have one. And in that capacity with all these other stuff, but that’s how I would go about it.

Steve: Okay, and then — so you have this first client and let’s say you do a good work, what’s the next step after that? Obviously you can’t go and keep scrounging for clients this way, right? In the long run it’s not scalable is what I should say.

Nick: What is and it isn’t; you don’t need that many, like if your goal is to make a thousand bucks a month, your goal is to replace your day job income, like you can absolutely get there this way up to your hourly capacity. And then it’s a matter of raising your rates and things start to snowball from word of mouth from that point.

Steve: Okay, and so it sounds like you’ve got a bunch of gigs where it requires your time, and then you also have a bunch of different passive sources. What is kind of your philosophy in balancing those two?

Nick: What’s kind of funny because somebody asked me this the other day and what percentage of your income is passive? And I was like well, I don’t know, let me add it up, and so it was probably 70% or 75%, but at the same time, almost all of my time is — a decent percentage of my time is dedicated to building those passive assets. So it’s like does that really count as passive? Because it’s like every time you write — it takes a month to write a book and then, but after that like that can be a passive income asset, so it’s like, is that—does that count as passive or not.

So there is two sides of it, I think there’s the speculative investment in putting that time to create that course, to create that book, to build this authority blog or whatever you want to do, that may never pay off. Or if you really want to bring the cash or just in a hurry I go the freelancing route of selling some service.

Steve: Okay, then and that example that you just gave regarding the editing. How would you conceivably turn that into something that was a little bit more passive in the long run?

Nick: So what you would do, I mean the productization opportunity would be to hire editors underneath you, would be to build a software like Grammarly or something like that, I think like machine learning somehow automate that. You could throw on some insularly services like oh, we are going to format this for — CreateSpace. We are going to help you with your launch — we are going to recommend cover designers and collect fees on referrals or something like that. So a bunch of different ways you can do add on services.

Steve: Okay, cool and then what — I meant to ask you this, what is like the kind your Side Hustle Nation podcast come and do all of this? Does it generate income directly, and how do you kind of track the effects of having a podcast on your overall business?

Nick: Podcast has been the number one growth driver; it’s absolutely the highlight — absolutely the highlight of my week. It grows – it’s probably grown twice as fast as blog leadership just in terms of downloads and reach. There may be a common theme to all the stuff we talked about, whether that’s leveraging these existing platforms, leveraging Amazon, leveraging Udemy, leveraging Fiverr, and iTunes is one of those platforms. When I started my podcast I had email list of 11. There was no audience and it just — and being happy with every small milestone along the way. But it’s grown like crazy and it’s just been — the feedback that I get makes it totally worthwhile.

What I have been doing too — and this is kind of the secret source for podcasting is content marketing because I realize I’m never going to have Johnny doing this. Download numbers, sponsorship numbers, and on top of that it’s a weekly show rather than a daily show, the numbers are just are never going to look like here is the sponsors. And so there was a light ball moment, they said look this is just content marketing for Side Hustle Nation, for services, for affiliate stuff, whatever.

That’s going to be– like the goal of the podcast should be to get people on the email list. And so I started creating these episodes specific often and offer a free show, which takes, admittedly takes more time, but you almost have to do it like the results are just night and day and these things convert like crazy, and so I plug it at the beginning and end of every show.

You could do this, you can put together an action guide, you can put together like the checklist, you can put together the transcript to give away. What I do is like the extended show notes, I call like the highlight real. This is like the sports center version of the podcast and you can grab it at sidehustlenation.com/whatever. Plug that the intro, outro, and these do really-really well.

Steve: I see, so it’s like a content specific bonus except for a podcast as opposed to a Blog post?

Nick: Content upgrades.

Steve: Okay and then what do you do with these subscribers once you have them, like they are all signing up for different reasons, right? How do you market to these people on your list?

Nick: So one core thing, so I do create a separate sign up form for each week. And so you do get some tagging, this is where it was little weak. You do get some tagging on what they were interested in. Okay, they opted in an episode about Amazon FBA, that’s great intelligence to have. Unfortunately people can opt-in for as many of these as they want and it’s just like file delivery mechanism after the first one.

And so you don’t have any data on what else they signed up for, but you do get the first one which is valuable. So you can segment if you have a special offer, special something, hey this could be interesting specifically to the Amazon FBA people, specifically to the Kindle publishing people, like that’s great to have. So you can segment to those people who have a little more relevant email.

Steve: I’m just curious for a lot of your affiliate stuff, is it primarily driven through email or through your post on your blog?

Nick: There’s– so like the Bluehost stuff is primarily driven in other kind of like web services stuff. It’s primarily driven through the blog. Anything that’s side hustle specific, or like people’s courses and stuff does much better through email.

Steve: Okay, cool Nick, hey, it was great chatting with you today, we’ve already been chatting for quite a while. If anyone is interested in Side Hustle Nation and any of the other different income sources that you talked about today, where can people find you for questions?

Nick: You bet, nick@sidehustlenation.com if you want to send me an email, or would love to have you stop by the side hustle show. Check it out new side hustle, new part time business ideas every week.

Steve: Awesome, hey Nick thanks a lot for coming to the show man.

Nick: You bet.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I really like Nick’s initiative and how he has managed to create such different and diverse income streams for himself in order to support his family. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode80, and I just want to remind everyone that I’m now offering free ecommerce classes now on a regular basis.

So if you are interested in learning more about selling online, please sign up at mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you enjoy listening to this episode, please go to iTunes, do a search for My Wife quit Her Job and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keeps this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can find this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice.
It’s also the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or share it on the web. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

079: How To Take Your Talent And Turn It Into A 6 Figure Business With Grant Baldwin

How To Turn Your Talents Into A Scalable 6 Figure Business With Grant Baldwin

Grant Baldwin is someone who I’ve known for a while but we didn’t actually meet face to face until recently at NMX. In fact, I was featured on his podcast “How’d You Get Into That” several months ago where he interviews unique business owners.

Not only does he run a popular podcast but he’s also a professional motivational speaker for students. And the man is very prolific. I think last year he spoke at 60 events throughout the year travelling all across the country.

So here’s what’s cool about Grant. Giving incredible speeches all across the country is lucrative but it is not scalable because you have to physically be there.

And after having kids, Grant realized that he wanted to scale back the travelling to spend more time with family.

So he sat down and figured out a way to turn his talents and passion into a more scalable business and he’s had a lot of success in a short period of time.

How do you turn motivational speaking into an online business?

Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Grant turned motivational speaking into a thriving online business
  • How does GrantBaldwin.com generate money
  • What does it take to create a digital product
  • How to structure a webinar for maximum exposure and conversions
  • How to get traffic to a webinar
  • Tools to use to run an efficient webinar
  • What Grant’s actual numbers are for his course sales
  • How to land professional speaking gigs

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners, to teach us what strategies are working, and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses. Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes.

And please join me for a free live workshop on e-commerce which I give on a regular basis. For more information about the workshop, go to mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. And if you want to get a jump on starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love, here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Grant Baldwin. Now Grant is someone who I have known for quite a while, but we didn’t actually meet face to face until recently at NMX. In fact I was actually featured on his podcast, ‘How did you get into that,’ several months ago, where he interviews unique business owners. And not only does he run a popular podcast, but he is also a professional motivational speaker for students. And the man is actually very prolific, I think last year he spoke at over 60 events throughout the year travelling all over the country.

But here is what’s cool about Grant, now giving incredible speeches all across the country is lucrative, but it’s not scalable because you have to physically be there. And after having kids Grant realized that he wants to scale back to travelling to spend more time with his family, so he sat down and he figured out a way to turn his talents and passion into a much more scalable business, and he’s had a lot of success in a very short period of time. So how do you turn motivational speaking into an online business, now let’s find out, and with that welcome to the show Grant, how are you doing today man?

Grant: I’m doing awesome dude, that’s a good intro, I like that that was nice. I’m just going to steal that and take it with me everywhere I go.

Steve: I’ll send you the slides afterwards.

Grant: Please do.

Steve: And so give us a quick background story, tell us about your business, your speaking business at first, and then how you got started with everything.

Grant: Yeah, I have been a speaker, a full time speaker, for about eight years or so and travel like you said all over the — primarily the US, speaking in a lot of different conferences, conventions, a lot of what I did early on was with students, still do out with students, high school, college students. Today we also do a lot with entrepreneurs and small business owners. And so yeah, a lot of it — a lot of what of what we talk about is kind of along the lines of motivation, we also talk a lot about careers and work in general.

So it’s been a really cool gig, and even cool like you eluded to there. It’s fun, but it’s not very scalable. So it’s a very — I had a friend say one time, it’s a very high paying manual labor job, meaning when you go get on stage and you get to run your mouth for few minutes, they are going to give you a good check for it, but you have to actually go there.

So we’ve been in this process of trying to figure out, how do we cut back on travel. Because travel and speaking it’s so a lot of fun, but again it doesn’t scale and you kind of hit that ceiling, how much you can charge, the number of events that you might want to do, as well as like you said, I’m a husband, I’m a father, I have got three little girls. And so as much as I enjoy speaking, it’s way more important to me to be a good husband, to be a good father. So trying to just figure out different ways that we cut back, and we got an online course that we’ve been utilizing to help with that, that’s been going pretty well as well. I think will get into it a little bit today.

Steve: You know real quick, I actually didn’t know this about you, but are you doing this full time — the speaking thing is full time right? You obviously wouldn’t have time to hold down a day job in addition to the speaking gigs, right?

Grant: Correct, yeah, we’ve been self employed for I think — self employed for seven years now, eight years full time. So yeah, when it’s good, it’s really good, and when it’s bad, it’s really bad, and that just kind of the highs and lows of entrepreneurship.

Steve: And I’m just curious about this too, did you ever have a day job, like a corporate job at any point?

Grant: Well yes and no, not like a traditional corporate job. I worked as a youth pastor actually for a little bit in my church. So I did that full time and that was kind of — it was kind of like my first like, real I guess career. And once I decided I want to do the speaking thing, I worked at a security company doing sales work for them. And it was just a 100% commission deal, which was nice because it provided a lot of a flexibility to go out and to travel, and to do booking, and speaking engagements. So that’s kind of — I would say the ball — more of my career has been self employed or not, so that’s been pretty fun so far.

Steve: So I’m just trying — so I actually went through your site today, and I was just curious how everything kind of ties together. I know you have a website and you also have a podcast, are all those things kind of tied together, like how does grantbaldwin.com generate income?

Grant: Yeah, good question, so the bulk of my revenue up until this point has been primarily through speaking. And we’ve got some products that go along with that for a lot of the student audiences that we speak to. So we’ve got a book, we have curriculum that’s used in about 400 high schools right now. And so that — between the product and the speaking, that has been the bulk of our revenue, and again that’s fun, but a lot of the product revenue which scales a little better than the speaking, a lot of the product revenue is driven from the speaking. So meaning I go speak, and I can turn around and sell product there as a result of the speaking.

So again that’s all well and good, but it still kind of comes back to this challenge of scale, and you just — you hit the ceiling that there’s only so much you can do there. So a little over a year ago we started a podcast called ‘How did you get into that’, and part of it kind of came from — a lot of people were asking me that question as a speaker.

People would come up to me after an event and say, “Hey, I’m curious, how did you get into that?” And I found that people always fell into one or two groups, either people wanted to become a speaker, and they are like I’m just curious, like what would be the next steps I would need to take. Or people would be like I have zero interest in speaking, that’s just fascinating that you make a living from that.

And so I found myself asking this similar question to other people that I would meet too, just have something like unique, random type of career. It’s like that’s just — I don’t necessarily want to do that, that’s just fascinating that you do that. So if you can make a living doing that thing, then surely I can figure out my thing.

And so we started the podcast, just interviewing people that were just doing something interesting, things that just caught my attention, things that I was like how do you go by getting into something like that. You are a great example, we had you on Episode 89, and we were talking about that like, how do you create a business selling handkerchiefs, like I didn’t even know like that seems like a very small niche thing, how do you go about getting into that.

And so we’ve had over 100 episodes now just talking with people about this. So naturally as a speaker there are a lot of people who would say, hey, one of the things I’m interested in, in terms of a career and how to get into something is, how to become a speaker. And so a couple of months ago we started a course called ‘booked and paid to speak,’ where we are teaching people about that process of going from I have zero engagements, I just know that I want to speak, I have no idea how to get started. And teaching them how to go about and get that going. So that’s been going really well, that’s been a fun project, and it’s definitely an opportunity to help more people, and to scale both impact and income.

Steve: So let’s talk about your class real quick, so how is it structured and when it comes to public speaking I would think that it’s kind of a hands on sort of teaching requirement, right? Like if I’m going to learn about speaking, I’d probably want someone right next to me kind of looking at me and just telling me what I’m doing wrong and that sort of thing. So how do you kind of turn that into a digital course?

Grant: Yeah, a good question, well there’s basically two sides of the coin. You have the art of speaking, which is the actual speaking itself and being on stage and presenting that, and then you have the business side of it. And so I don’t — within the course we talk a little bit about the art of speaking, but the bulk of it is on the business of speaking.

And so that doesn’t require as much of the personal — the one on one interaction. And so that’s a part I personally enjoy, I really like speaking, but I don’t — all the hand movements, and I walked this side of stage to make this point, and then I do this thing, and then I have this voice inflection, and like all that stuff like I just — like I understand it, but I just I don’t gig out on it, that doesn’t do a lot for me.

And to be honest with you and I guess it’s been a bit difficult for me to kind of reverse engineer. Like people ask me like, why are you a good speaker, how do you become a good speaker? Like you just do it a lot, like I don’t know that there’s any like magic seeker recipe of — if you are speaking in this way, and if you talk like this, and you have a deep breath, and then you get really quiet.

Steve: So like lesson number one, just go on and do it a lot, all right.

Grant: Well, honestly like that’s kind of how I felt, like I think am a really good speaker, but how did I become a good speaker? Because I have done it hundreds and hundreds of times in a lot of different situations, so you just kind of figure out what works and what doesn’t. So how I would reverse engineer that, I don’t know that I have a great answer for it. But what I’m interested in and what I do feel like I have a good grasp on is how you actually get bookings, because whenever I got started as a speaker, I didn’t have a podcast, I didn’t have a blog, I didn’t have a platform, I didn’t have any social media, nobody knew who I was, yet for my very first speaking engagement they paid me $1000 to go give a 45 minute talk.

And so that was just mind boggling to me that — here I’m with no platform, no prior experience, but I went out and I found them, found an existing event that had a need with — and I offered a solution for, and so it was a great fit. And so from that we’ve been able to build a very successful business, we’ve been able to teach other people, here is how you would go about – actually let’s assume that you are a decent speaker, let’s assume you know what you — you have some idea of what you want to talk about, now what? Do you just sit back and wait for the phone to ring which is what a lot of people assume like, hey I’ve built my website or I have a video, I have got it up online. If I build it they will come and they are not coming and I don’t know what to do now.

So instead we’ve told people no here is how you actually find events, here is how you find bookings, here is how reach out to them, here is how you find decision makers, here is how much to charge. And all of those type of pieces that when you are just getting started, you just don’t know. And so that’s a lot more of what we focus on within the course.

Steve: How did you know that there was demand for this?

Grant: Well, partly it was just paying attention to the people that are asking me questions. And I think that’s a great thing for anybody and any type of industry is what are the things that people are regularly asking you questions about? So Steve in your case, I assume people are coming up and going like, okay you built this business on handkerchiefs, and I’m interested in — My wife wants to quit her job and come home, and we’re thinking about doing– even if we made like 500 bucks a month, that would be game changing for us. How would we go about starting an online e-commerce store?

And so when you pay attention to what it is that people are regularly asking you for, then you can start to kind of piece together and say, okay clearly people are viewing me as an expert, I may not be the best in the world in this, but obviously I have some basic knowledge from my experience, and now I can start to put that into work. And so that was part of it for us, was you just over years, you just have enough people that are interested in this subject or topic, and you’re like I think there’s something there, I think we can give this a shot.

Steve: So here’s the piece that I’m missing here, so you mainly give speeches to motivate students, right, and so this audience that you’re talking about, are these people that just follow Grantbaldwin.com, or these priority students that you’re speaking to?

Grant: Correct, yeah. And really on a lot of our business was for students, and today we do a descent amount of adult stuff as well where parents, teachers, educators, business owners, entrepreneurs. This year I’ll be keynoting Fincon, speaking at NMX, those types of events that are also in our space and in our niche.

So there’s plenty of people that are wanting to become speakers that want to speak to students, and they recognize that I have a lot of experience in that, but there is also people who are saying, hey I would love to talk to busy mums, I would love to speak to people about fitness, I would love to talk to people about overcoming divorce.

So there’s a lot of different people in a lot of different niches and industries that are part of the course, who just say hey there is this thing I want to talk about. Here is this life experience maybe that I have had. Here is this group that I really resonate with. I just don’t even know how to begin to find them.

And so the– although a lot of my experience this far has been with students and high schools and conferences and colleges, the process for getting booked in and paid to speak is relatively universal. There is going to be a little nuance differences here and there, but for the most part, the way that you go about getting booked for something whether– for me the way I went about getting booked for Fincon is going to be probably the same way I would go by getting booked for let’s say a college.

So there is a lot of overlap there. It‘s not like you have to do it this way in that industry, you have to do a different way in a different industry. Yeah there may again maybe a couple little subtle things there, but for the most part there is a lot of overlap there.

Steve: So you are getting questions from people who you are giving speeches to, so what’s the next step, like how do you know that all the– all your efforts in creating a class, whether it’s actually going to sell or not, did you do preorders, like how did you kind of launch it, once you had the feedback?

Grant: Yes. So we did the– we did a validation process which is what I would highly-highly recommend and basically what that means is you kind of get a rough idea of what this is going to be. And so for me I wrote out on Evernote, I wrote out a long description almost like what the sales page could be, and just like hey this is a rough idea of what this is going to be, here is what I think are some of the modules we’re going to include, here’s an outline.

And so basically what I’ve done is I had started kind of collecting some emails of people who would had expressed interest in this subject or topic, and then this is in January, this couple of months ago, I emailed– I don’t know maybe 100, 150 of these people and just said– just sent them the link to this Evernote like note that I created and just saying like, hey here is this idea I’m playing with, it’s not built, I don’t have anything, I don’t have anything to show you, but here’s what I’m playing with.

And so I’m thinking about building this and it’s probably going to cost a few hundred bucks, but I tell you what, if you are interested in it, I’m going to take some preorders here and determine even this is even worth of building. And so we had, I think it was 22 or 23 people that paid 197 for basically and in reality as bizarre as it seems they’re paying thin air, they are paying for an idea at that point. Because I don’t have anything, there is not– I have nothing to give them.

But by doing that, now I have some revenue, now I have some– I have people that are interested, people that are bought in, because you’re going to have plenty of people that are like yeah, I’d love that, that’s a great idea, you should totally make that, but people will validate it by actually paying for something. So by having 20, 25 people that would pay for something, now not only has it validated it for me, but also I get their feedback as I create the product.

So what I would do is I would give them an outline and say hey here’s the lessons, here’s kind of what we’re going to be covering, what are the gaps? What are the things that you see that you wish I would be talking about or what are particular lessons that you are really looking forward to or you really hope I go deep, or you really want me to answer these questions.

And so I’m able to get this feedback and I’m creating not what I just think that people want, but I’m also creating something that people actually want in getting their feedback. And so there’s that kind of balance there, because when you are getting started on something like speaking or building an e-commerce site, like you don’t know what you don’t know. But there is also some pieces that like they are really interesting, man I really– this is this something I’ve been wondering a lot about, and so I hope that he covers this within the course.

And so it’s good to get that feedback from actual customers and clients and students that are in the– that are planning on going through the material. So it took me about 60 days or so to create the entire course, and the whole thing is digital, it’s all online, it’s eight modules, 26 video lessons, each lesson is anywhere from 10 to 30 minute or so. And they can– I would say it’s– there are some courses that are built where you have to go through module one in order to get module two, through two to get to three, and they all kind of build on each other. And there’s some of that, but in the same way there’s– it’s a bit of an encyclopedia where if you want to start at G, you can go to G and then you can skip to R and do that.

So you can kind of bounce around of what you need some help with as it relates to speaking, and everybody is going to come into the course in a different place as well, there is going to be some people that have spoken 100 times and some people that have spoken zero. So you have to kind of account for that. So whenever we launched the course in March, we knew we had a– we were getting good feedback from the students that were going through it, it seemed like we had a good product.

The challenge then for I think most people was like, okay how do I– I’ve sold to a handful people who reached out, but do I just sit back and wait for those other people to continually ask me questions on email and then I say oh by the way I’ve got this thing, how do I continue to pitch it?

Steve: Yeah, that was my next question actually Grant.

Grant: Yeah, [inaudible] [0:17:29] and so for us one of the things I was interested in was doing webinars and running Facebook ads to webinars, and I know whenever you and I hang out in Vegas we spend a ton of time chatting about this, because it was something I’d seen some people do and I was intrigued by the concept. And again it seemed like there is a lot of people out there interested in this subject topic of speaking, and so that was kind of the path of travel we’re planning on taking.

Steve: Okay. So let’s dig deeper into that. So you mentioned driving Facebook to a webinar, so can we talk about like who you targeted, how much you spent, how did you structure ads, that sort of thing.

Grant: Yap. So I’m pulling up here just numbers, we got a spreadsheet that we keep on all of this stuff. So our very first Webinar was march 3rd, we spent $535 in Facebook ads. So I think it worked out to about 100 bucks that day or so, from that we had 341 people register which worked out to $1.57 per person registering for the webinar.

And that’s a key number to look at there is how much does it cost to actually get someone to register, not just someone to click on the page or the registration page, but someone to actually register. So that’s a key metric that we watch and we look at. So the ads themselves, we– I went through– I think I used Rick Mulready’s Facebook ads course. And so went through that, just to kind of get a basic understanding, because it shouldn’t be as complicated as it seems. And so you have campaigns and ads and ads all of that jazz, and so I just wanted to get like a descent overview of how like how does this work.

So we created like a really basic ad, a picture of me on stage speaking, I don’t even remember what the hell was with that, but literally just kind of like going through existing ads of other people and just kind of following the template that kind of existed there. And so that went to a lead page where people could actually register for the webinar itself. We tried to do– I think we started promoting it basically five days out, because the further out you promote it, the easier it is for people to lose interest and to just forget about it, or things to come up and life to happen.

So we would try to do five days, is usually what we tried to do, and we tried to have some emails in between there, because if someone registers at day five and it doesn’t happen for five days, then there is a lot, again even an app here where they could go– it could happen that people just lose interest on. So on the retargeting itself, I tried to target people that I knew were speakers, there I targeted interests like public speaking, motivational speaking, toast masters, speaker’s bureaus, speaker’s associations, like those type like speaker related subjects and topics.

As well as again you can target Tony Robbins or Zig Ziglar, or people that are big name motivational speakers, or just speakers in general that maybe people would be following. So I think that’s…

Steve: But those people might not necessarily be interested in learning how to book speeches, right?

Grant: Oh, they are 100% like there is plenty of people who are like I just like Tony Robbins, I have zero desire to do that. So that’s where a lot of it on Facebook is it requires a lot of testing and it requires a lot of just playing around. So one thing that I learnt early on was within ad sets and I’ll try to make this as simple as possible, within ad sets a lot of times what people will do with ads is they will just pick like 10 different enters [ph], and look and lump those all together within one ad set, meaning like you can’t really tell which ads or which interest groups are converted.

I can’t tell if Tony Robbins interest is converting better than public speaking interest, versus motivational speaking interest. So what you would do is you create individual ad sets for each of those interests. So now I can look at just Tony Robbins and I can see how much is it costing me per register of people that clicked from that interest? And I can compare that to just motivational speaking or just public speaking, or just [inaudible] [0:21:35] whatever the other things are.

Steve: How big are there audiences typically for the given amount of ad spend that you’ve been spending?

Grant: They are all going to be– the ones that we’re kind of looking at are usually a couple of 100,000 and how good or bad it is, I don’t know.

Steve: So, for a hundred bucks a day, how much of that audience do you reach in five days– you do it for five days, right?

Grant: Yeah, typically five days, I mean we started at around a hundred bucks a day, now we spend anywhere from like three to four thousand per campaign, which is going to be again like kind of three to five day type period.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And so it’s – and again a lot of it is testing, just trying different options, trying different ads, different titles, different headlines, different copies, all those different variables there.

Steve: So what’s the process? I mean it sounds like there’s so many different variables there, so what is the process that you guys kind of went through to kind of narrow things down? Obviously you can’t be targeting all these variables all at once, right?

Grant: Correct, yeah, the process I went through is I hired a guy.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: Basically to sum that up, because I did it a couple of weeks on my own just to get a feel for it. Just to figure out like okay, I just need like a basic understanding of Facebook ads, and Power Editor and that kind of stuff, and then hired a guy, and I’m happy to give you his name for the show notes and all that jazz, but…

Steve: Okay.

Grant: So I work with him at just a contract basis. He is doing a lot more testing than I could. So where I might target you know people that are interested in Tony Robbins, and that’s my whole interest, he might look at okay, we’re going to specifically target women who are 35 to 55, on mobile phones in Canada who are interested in Tony Robbins.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: It’s like Jeez, okay, I didn’t know you could — you — like that’s crazy granular, but– so he’s doing a lot more of that, and he can get a better feel for it. So I did it the first few weeks on my own just to get an understanding, and then turned it over to him, and…

Steve: How did it work when you were doing it yourself, just curious?

Grant: Honestly, I didn’t really change much, like I basically just used the same ad, and the same interest. And then if an interest like — if like for example on that first week of my average cost per customer per webinar registering, was a $1.57, again that’s kind of an average between all of the different ad sets there. So some may be a little lower, some may be a little higher.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: But the ones that may be really, really high, let’s say that there was some that were like five, six, seven bucks per register, I could just turn those off. And that way I’m spending more on the ones that are converting better. Or I could just, I could put more money towards those, whether I’m turning the other ads on or off anyway.

Steve: So do you find that the conversion rate is the same across all the different interest groups once they opt in for the webinar? Does that make sense? What the question I’m asking is?

Grant: Say that again.

Steve: So is the convert — like once they sign to the webinar, a percentage of them will convert naturally, buy your class, right?

Grant: Right.

Steve: Is that conversion rate similar across all the different audiences that you’re targeting on Facebook?

Grant: Not really. And so, then you need different tracking pixel for that. So it’s one thing to track what they — what interests people have that they clicked on that they would then register, but then you can also put a tracking pixel on the thank you page of the actual checkout card. So that when someone — that way, you can go back in later into Facebook on the back end and see that okay we had – let’s just, you know, for just round numbers here, let’s say it costs two dollars to get these people on a webinar.

And it costs five dollars to get these people, but the five dollar people converted better so in fact it made us more revenue even though it cost us more upfront. And so that’s why it’s important to have some of those have that tracking pixel on the thank you page. And again I’m not smart enough to figure out how to actually do that, but that’s why — but you do need to have that, so you can figure out not only what — just because it’s cheap to get someone on the webinar doesn’t mean that they’re going to actually buy.

Steve: Okay, okay.

Grant: And so that where you have to also play with the targeting a bit.

Steve: Just curious, what’s an example of audience that’s been converting well for you?

Grant: Women have been converting well. Women interest in…

Steve: It’s because you are a ladies’ man, Grant. Sorry go on.

Grant: I don’t know about that, I don’t know, maybe because I have a wife and three daughters, and so that resonates with the women. But in fact that’s an example of where it has typically we’ve found it costs us slightly more to get a middle aged woman on the — to register for the webinar, but they convert better. So even though it may cost me a little more upfront, I can also generate more revenue on the back end from there, so.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: Again, like, there is — I’m with you, there’s a ridiculous amount of little nuance to variables that you have to play with, so you know we’ve played with variables on what day of the week should the webinar be? Should it be an afternoon or an evening one, should you show a replay. How long should you leave the replay up? Should you do a promo? How many days should that promo run? So there’s just a lot of different variables, but one of the things that I really, really like about this webinar model is that every week you’re doing a new webinar. So every week you have a new opportunity to try something.

Steve: Right.

Grant: Whereas let’s just say you’re doing a big quarterly open close launch. And let’s say you know, parts of it work and parts of it didn’t, but you don’t really get to play with any of it, any of those variables you want to test for another let’s say 90 days or so, but with this — with the webinar stuff, if you’re doing it on a regular weekly or bi-weekly process, then every time you do another one — okay let’s try it this way. Okay let’s do it on a Tuesday night, let’s do it on a Thursday afternoon. Okay let’s try ending it on a Sunday, the promo. Let’s try ending the promo on a Friday. Let’s try this fast action bonus, let’s try…

Steve: Can you share some of your results, like I’m sure it’s going to be different for everybody, but when is the best time that you can run a — you run webinars?

Grant: Well, typically we do either a Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday. I try to do them in the middle of the week, and we do either three o’clock or seven o’clock central time. And so part of the thought on that, and part of the reason why we kind of go back and forth is we have a lot of people in Australia, a lot of people in Europe that are interested, but if you’re doing a seven o’clock, let’s say central time webinar, that’s in the middle of the night in Europe, but it’s first thing the next morning in Australia. But if you do let’s say three o’clock in the afternoon, you’re catching the Europe crowd, because it’s at night there, but it’s the middle of the night in Australia.

So you have just – again like just because weird little nuances that you have to think through, and it’s not like we have massive amounts of business that come from Europe or Australia, but those are little things that you have to keep in mind as well as you just have to consider people’s schedules. Like just within the US, you’ve got four different time zones, and those are always going to fall at different times. You know, you’re catching people around lunch time, or dinner time, or their commute time home. Or they are putting their kids to bed, or — like you just got to think through some of those different types of nuances, and that’s where I think it’s good to test. And so we haven’t seen like a dramatic difference between the two.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And so some ones we go back and forth. So one week we may do a night time one on a Thursday, and then the next week we may do a Tuesday afternoon one. So…

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Grant: It is just kind of playing with them. So one of the next things we want to try is — and I can’t speak a lot to this, but we’ll just be doing more of an automated evergreen thing, so people can join our webinar when it makes sense for them, or when it’s most convenient for them and time zone becomes less and less of a factor at that point, but that’s some more we’re interested in, but I haven’t gotten…

Steve: Does that mean it’s just a recording then at that point?

Grant: Yeah, so it would be a recorded webinar, so it’s — you know there’s huge, huge value in doing it live, and there’s a lot of people that I’ve — you know I’ve kind of explained what we do to, and they said, oh you should totally do a recording. And I was like yeah, but A, I like doing the live one, and I think by doing a product about speaking, it helps to do a live one.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And then I think there’s huge value in making that connection. You know as silly, and as simple as it may seem, you know answering someone’s questions live, or giving someone a shout out or saying their name on a live webinar is a huge deal to them, you know.

Steve: Right, yeah.

Grant: And so by doing that live, it builds that connection, and it builds that rapport with people that you just don’t get from a recording.

Steve: How many people typically attend and what’s your conversion rate look like typically?

Grant: Yup, so we have typically right now about a 15 to 20% show up rate, which you’ve got to — which is a low show-up rate, but keep in mind this is a — it’s not bad for cold traffic. Because remember when they sign up from Facebook, they have no idea who I am. This isn’t people that are already on my list, they have no idea who I am, so usually around 15% will show up. So if you have 1000 people register, then we’ll have about 150 that will actually show up. Now from that group, we’ve had anywhere from like 6, 7%, up to — we’ve had a few that are like 15 to 17% that will actually then buy.

Steve: Okay.

Grant: And again there’s a lot of variables that go into that, because we’ve had the course out for three months, but we’ve also been — we’ve raised the price numerous, numerous times. And so the– how a $200 product converts is going to be different from how a $1200 product converts. And so that’s — and again the web bonuses you include or what — how — like if the promo is just up for that night, or it’s up for a couple of days, and what day of the week it ends on, so that’s where some of those different variables come into play.

Steve: And in terms of just your return on Ad spend, what is that typically?

Grant: Yeah, right now — I’m just scrolling over here on my spreadsheet. Right now on average for every dollar we spend in Facebook ads, we’re getting anywhere from like $3.50 to $5 back.

Steve: Okay, wow.

Grant: So…

Steve: That’s excellent, okay.

Grant: Yeah, so it’s pretty good, and it’s, you know, it’s going well, so it’s…

Steve: What’s stopping you from just scaling this even higher?

Grant: Yeah, that’s how we’re playing with is you know if this works at 4000 per campaign, would it work at 10,000 per campaign? But one of the big variables there is the — something about the — and again the guy that I’m working with could explain it better than I could, but just the — like if all of a sudden, you throw a ton of money, then it makes your cost per acquisition higher, and so the algorithm within Facebook kind of messes it up.

So you almost have to start small, and kind of incrementally creep your way up, and Facebook adjusts accordingly, but if you throw a ton of money at it all of a sudden, you’re also going to — like let’s say we’re targeting Tony Robbins, okay? And there’s going to be a — and if he has you know, several hundred thousand, or a couple million likes and people that follow him on Facebook, there’s going to be a percentage of those people that are going to — that will be interested in seeing our ad, and then clicking on it and registering and actually showing up for a webinar.

So early on you can — you’re almost kind of like skimming the cream off the top, but then the longer you keep targeting that, and the more you spend that cost per register will grow, because you’ve already cherry picked the people that were really, really interested in it. And now you have to do a bit more…

Steve: I would imagine you have to constantly find new audiences, because you’re going to exhaust the existing ones, right?

Grant: Exactly.

Steve: They’re going to start see — okay.

Grant: Yeah, exactly, and so if you, like if you continue to just market to just– again just going back to just Tony Robbins, and we are just marketing every single week. Because Facebook algorithm from what I understand is set up where it’s going to initially when you first target a group, it’s going to target the people within that group that are most likely to click and most likely to actually register.

And so overtime, those people are– again you’ve kind of cherry picked those people. They’ve been on the webinar, they’ve registered, they bought, or they didn’t buy or whatever, but then you start getting in to more and more people who historically they don’t click on ads and they don’t register for webinars, but that’s who are you targeting at this point. So you are– the few that you do pick up means that you are spending more to get that person. So that’s where we are kind of at, trying to figuring out before we start spending even more, then we want to make sure that that’s dialed in so that we don’t double it, but then our conversion stays the same, but our cost is much higher.

Steve: Okay. And so just to kind of summarize everything that I’ve learnt from you so far, so you typically do a five day campaign on Facebook. And people who even sign up the day before, if the webinar is tomorrow, that’s fine too, right?

Grant: Totally, yap.

Steve: Okay. And then you are getting like a 10 to 15% show up rate. How many people do you typically like to be speaking in front of at a webinar?

Grant: Well when you are doing a live one, some of it depends on the software you are using. We use LeadPage and its all– and then we use Google Hangouts and Chatroll and that all works out together. It’s a cost effective solution, you pay a couple of bucks for Chatroll and a little bit for Leadpages, but Google Hangouts is free, there’s no limit to the number of people that can be there.

But with Chatroll, one of the things that we’ve noticed at least is that the more people that are on the webinar, the more energy there is. There’s more questions, people feel like it’s an event, whereas let’s say we get 100 people to register for a webinar and we only have ten people on it, like if most people would show up to a webinar and you can clearly see that there’s only ten other people there, you kind of feel like, “I guess this isn’t that big a deal.”

So there is kind of that social proof that goes along with a bigger webinar where there’s a ton of questions coming in, and you can tell that there’s people from literally all over the world. It kind of validates your decision to be there. So I’ve noticed that some webinars we do that have smaller numbers of attendants don’t convert as well as some of the other ones where people feel like they are a part of something that is bigger than themselves.

Steve: Okay so what’s the size that you like to have at least?

Grant: We like to have 100 people. It’s great but you know that’s always the number I kind of shoot for, but even if you have– I think even if you have 50 to 100 people, that’s still a good amount on a webinar. That’s enough conversation and chatter. And a lot of that you can read from– you can kind of get a sense from the how active the chat room is. But if you just have ten people there and you ask, “All right, anybody have any question?” You are going to be sitting in silence for a while.

But just the kind of the law of numbers is that if you got 100 people on there, you are going to get a bunch of questions will start coming in. And again it kind of creates that energy and buzz there. I guess some of this maybe different depending on someone’s particular niche or industry, but for me I like to have 50, 75, 100 people on. So I think that– and again I don’t know if I have as much data to back up it back as much as just kind of gut feel.

Steve: No that’s cool. Just curious, so some people you said 85% of people don’t come, do you guys hit them up again since you have their emails?

Grant: Yeah we are trying to figure out that right now. And that’s something we’ve been playing with some different variables on– they opted in, they expressed interest, so what do we do at that point? Do we just– we are doing our webinar next week. Do we invite them to that one, and then the one after that one? And then do we just keep hammering them? And so right now what we are kind of landing on is we are going to create basically like a 30 day email sequence. I don’t know maybe a couple of emails a week. There’s just more consent and maybe like some soft cells around. And then maybe after 30 days maybe invite them back to another one.

And so we are going to kind of play with that, because that is a huge factor of going like let’s say you have a thousand people register for a webinar. Let’s say you spent $3,000, and let’s say you had ten or fifteen people buy. That’s great but you still had 900 plus there who didn’t buy. So they expressed interest in that subject or topic, so you want to continue to reach out to them without stalking them and without bothering them or harassing them.

And you want to continue to add value to what it is that they came for and what they are trying to learn. And I think you do a phenomenal, a phenomenal job at that of someone signs up for your email list– people need to get on your list just to like see your sequence. That’s what I did. It’s because like you’ve got, what is it like 30 different emails that go out?

Steve: I got 30 right now, but I’m missing the webinar component which is why we are talking Grant.

Grant: Yeah, very well. I’m missing the email part then, so we need to notes for sure, but you do a great job of that like continuing to stay top of mind with someone. And so some of it is they are interested in the subject and topic, but the timing is not right, or the money is not there. But if you stay top of mind and you continue to provide content, then when the timing is right, then they will come back and then buy.

I assume for you, that you can probably speak to this better than I could, there’s probably some people that have been on your list for months and months and months, but they finally buy. I don’t know what the tipping point was, but finally they decided to make that decision to jump in.

Steve: I mean sometimes it takes almost a year really. It’s weird.

Grant: And again some of it depends on where the traffic comes from. Again like right now we have two tiers on the course. The top tier is $1,200 which is a huge, huge financial ask for someone who doesn’t know who I am. Now you have to build– so some of it is just like building that connection and building that rapport and building the credibility and building all that up and sometimes you can do that on a webinar. And we convert fairly well for $1,200 product on a webinar from cold traffic.

But there is plenty of people who are like, “This seems legit but I don’t know who this guy is. I just saw a Facebook ad.” So that’s where having like an email sequence and series beyond the webinar, even if somebody was on the webinar, they really liked it, but they didn’t buy, you know being able to continually just say, “Hey, here’s some other stuff that I think will help you, here’s some stuff to check out. Let me continue to usher you some free stuff. I will send you some free stuff. And then I’ll try and ask again later and see if I’ll catch you at a better time.”

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about the actual webinar itself. How do you structure that?

Grant: So I spend about ten minutes at the beginning talking about some house-keeping stuff and then building some credibility. I’m just telling people, “Hey, we are going to go for one hour. We are going to start right up at the top of the hour. And then I’m going to do Q&A after that.” So kind of establish some of that, “Hey, here’s the chat room. Here’s how this works. I want you to be engaged in that, ask me questions, introduce yourselves, say hi to each other.” I give people an overview of “Here’s what we are going to be covering. Here’s what we are going to be learning.”

Those bullet points that we talk about and the introductions should be the same as what they saw on the Leadpage registration page. So that it doesn’t feel like, “I signed up for this one thing thinking I was going to get that, but then the webinar seems to be about something different.” So it’s basically a lot of the same bullet points that are on the registration page. I’m just using that introduction. So I’m just kind of setting it up. I’m just reminding them, “Hey, here’s what we are covering. Here’s what I’m going to give you.”

Another thing that we do is that we give them a reason to stick around. And so right now what we’ve been playing with is, “Stick around to the end, I’m going to give you just a link to download the slides.” So some people will find huge value in that. So they are like, “I’ll just stick around just until I get that damn link.” And we don’t send them that out in an email. We just wait for– we just give that out at the end of the webinar.

So I spend a lot of time in the beginning, building that credibility and the connection. I show a bunch of pictures. Like if it’s a speaker, I can show a bunch of pictures of “Here’s me on stage, here’s me in front of big audiences. Here’s some numbers. Here’s like the equivalent numbers, the number of times I’ve spoken, number of audiences,” that kind of stuff that just builds some of that credibility.

Steve: So you basically give a background of what you’ve done in the past.

Grant: Yeah you have to. You have to do that otherwise people will, “Why should I listen to you?” You have to give them some context of here’s why you should listen to me. And here’s why I’m knowledgeable on this subject or topic. So from there [inaudible] [0:41:15] meat of the webinar. So we’ll spend 30 to 35 minutes on that or so like really, giving very-very actionable practical stuff.

And so the goal should be that if someone doesn’t buy, even if they click off by the time you get to a pitch or transition to an offer there, they still feel like “That was a really good webinar.” Like it shouldn’t feel like a sales pitch the whole time. It shouldn’t be like, “Okay, I have nine steps to becoming successful as a copyrighter. But I’m going to give you two of them and if you want the other seven you got to buy this.” No. I’m not holding anything back. And I feel like I’m really, really giving a lot of good value in content. So the transition piece then is…

Steve: Hold on in your case, what do you teach them, just as an example?

Grant: Yes, I will teach them how to find decision-makers who are booking events. We talk about how to figure out what to talk about, and who you want to talk to. We talk about your website, your demo videos. Some of those like basic marketing tools that you want to have in place. We talk about contacting the decision maker, like what do you need to ask them, how do you build that rapport with them? How do you send them an email without turning them off?

So like stuff like you could take all, so the transition piece then is, I would say, “At this point you have basically two options, you can take everything I’ve shown you and you can go get booked and paid to speak. It’s exactly what I did in my career to get booked and paid to speak. So you could take that, utilize it and it’s going to win for you.” Or– like there’s still much we haven’t even talked about. Like there’s still so much.

So I’ll get a slide that shows, “Here’s like 10 or 12 bullet points. We haven’t talked about this. We haven’t talked about that. We haven’t talked about– like all these other pieces of speaking we haven’t even covered, we just scratched the surface. And it was so valuable, but there’s still a lot that we haven’t talked about. So like in your case Steve, you can talk about just choosing your product.

And you could spend a whole webinar on that, but we haven’t talked about fulfillment. We haven’t talked about listing on Amazon or eBay or customer service issues, or payment processing. All these other things, like you just can’t just cover all of that. And so that’s where a webinar does good at saying, “I want to give you a bunch of information and some really helpful stuff,” but the reality is that there’s only so much that you can talk about in 45 minutes or an hour.

So then at that point you’ll kind of transition into say, “Hey if you want more, we’ve put together a short cut. There’s a solution for you. And this is a course. I’ll kind of walk through the course and explain what else is in it.

I’ll do some screen showing of the actual course itself which I think has been really helpful for people. And sometimes when you are buying a course, you know like the sales page looks good. It all sounds great. I feel like they are talking to me, but I don’t want to feel like I got been switched,” where on the other side of the curtain it’s like “Oh! I bought a lemon.” You it’s like “I don’t want to feel like this.”

So I think it’s helpful to show like, “Okay, well, here’s where you log in, and once you log in here’s exactly what you’re going to see, and you click here to get this, and if you want this module you’re going to go here.” And so all of that we show here’s the private Facebook group and you can see, like there’s actually people in it, and people are talking, and people are asking and answering questions and getting feedback and advice. So just showing that I think just makes it a little simpler for people to feel like, “Okay, so this is an actual thing and other people have done this, and people are in this, and here’s what I’m going to– here’s exactly what I’m going to get.”

So we kind of layer that on top of each other, build that up, show kind of what the value of this would be. Here’s what the total price would be, here’s what our– here’s what some of the different options are of what you can get it for. And then one of the other things we do is we try to offer some type of fast action bonus. Meaning if people don’t buy then they generally won’t buy, because we– like right then they’re interested, they’re hot, they’re ready to make a buying decision, they’re ready to take a step. And so sometimes they just need that little extra push to go over the ledge and to make a leap and to jump and join.

So we’ve tried this a couple of different ways. So we have done times words like, “Okay, we’re going to a fast action bonus, but you have to buy within the next 15 minutes. And then there’s other times where it’s like we’re going to give you until midnight tonight. And so in terms of the fast action bonus itself sometimes we’ve included, “I’m going to give you a bonus interview you know.” I did an interview with another speaker, and so they’re going some of their best tips and strategies, it’s not within the course, but we’re going give that for people who buy within the next X period of time.

We’ve also– we’ve done I’m going to include a 15 minutes one-on-one Skype call with me or I’ll answer any questions that you’ve got. So that’s a big value add. Another thing we’ve done is because the course is digital we give them something physical and say, “Here are three of my favorite books that I recommend for speakers, and we’re going to ship them all to you.” Not a Kindle, they’re not on PDF but an actual– like the books themselves, we’re going to just send to you. So and that’s easy for fellow members…

Steve: Do you avoid coupons?

Grant: We do, we do them on the webinar and then for whatever that like the promo is, meaning so let’s say just hypothetically let’s say we do a webinar on a Wednesday night, then what we might do is say, “Hi, we’re going to do this fast action bonus that expires at midnight tonight. So they’ve got a couple of hours to make that buying decision.” And then we’ll say, “Now we also have this discount code, this promo code and it expires on Friday.”

So Thursday morning we would send out the replay to everybody because again 85% weren’t there. So we send that to everybody and remind them, “Hey, here is this promo code that you can use.” Then maybe on Friday we’d send like a morning one, “Hey, don’t forget we’re closing tonight,” and then Friday night just a reminder one saying, “Hey, don’t forget this promo code is expiring.”

So you want to have a couple like different points there where they cause people to like to take action, so the closing of the cart, some of the fast action bonus, a discount going away. And I know people are like back and forth on discounts and all that jazz, so one of the things that we’ve been really consistent with is to let people know that whatever price we’re offering right now this is the lowest price you will ever see this. Meaning I don’t want to buy something and then, like if I go to Best Buy and I buy something and then a week later I see that it’s marked down 20% I’m going to be ticked.

So we let people know like, “Hey, we’re not doing some Black Friday deal, there’s not going some half off deal. Like this is the lowest price. And the next time you see this it will– if anything it will be higher.” And so letting people know like you’re not– there’s no magic coupon anywhere else. So I have to always keep that in my mind myself of going like, “We cannot discount it any further than what we’ve given to previous people. So that everybody from here on they’re not going to get a better deal than what anybody before has already gotten.”

Steve: Do you send out the replay?

Grant: We do, and again we’ve tried both. We’ve tried sometimes like over the top expressing in emails leading up to the webinar, and then on the registration page itself like ‘This is going to be live only, there will be no replay, you must show up live.’ Because if people know there’s going to be a replay, then like I don’t have any need to show up live, like why would I, you know.

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Grant: And so we’ve tried both, right now we do a replay, but when people ask beforehand we’re just kind of vague about it and just– because again if they know there’s going to be a replay there’s not a lot of incentive for them to show up live. So I want people there live. I think whenever we– I have to look it up here, I think whenever we– when we did it without a replay, I think we had like a maybe a slight increase in show ups. But then you got again that 85% or whatever the percent is that are definitely not going to buy, because they didn’t even get the chance to see the replay.

So now we do the replay, but where we’re kind of leaning right now is just to leave the replay up or just to leave it shorter. If it’s something or it’s like, “Okay the replay is up and you got seven days to watch it.” Seven days is a longtime. So right now depending on the day of the week that we do it and when we want the cart to close, we try to do like three to five days at the most.

Steve: Okay, Ed I know you run payment plans, do you kind of encourage them to pay in full with these promotions or no?

Grant: Either or. Now with the– a couple of things that we’ve tried is saying, “Hey, we’re going to offer some type of bonus, but it’s only if you pay in full.” Like the discount is for people that pay in full, like for example I’ll give you the exact numbers. We– on the top tier it’s regularly, let me think here, 1397 and then on the webinar we discount at $200 to 1197. And then we have a payment plan of 197 for eight months. So if you want to– if you do the pay in full you can get that $200 discount, if you do the monthly plan there’s no discount, there’s no you know we’re going to take a month off, there’s no $200 deal.

So we definitely try to push people towards the pay in full option. But the reality is also the higher the price point the more difficult– like most people don’t have $1200 lying around ready to pull the trigger on something. So the payment plan maybe more realistic for them in their financial situation.

Steve: Okay, so let’s try to just sum everything up now. Let’s say I’m a new person who wants to start doing this webinar stuff and getting people on Facebook, what would you recommend as an initial budget in my goal for just my first webinar?

Grant: Yeah, well, definitely like all this assuming that you got a product that you know exactly who it’s for, that you’re real clear on the solving a pain, solving a need there. So what I did again is I spend 100 bucks a day on that first webinar with the idea of if I can at that point if I’m selling it for I don’t remember like 300/400 bucks. Meaning like if I can sell basically two, I’m at least break even, and so that was kind of the goal was.

I just wanted at least break even and I don’t want to just to cause me massive amounts. And in fact we have done up to this point– let me see here, we’ve done 15 webinars and we’ve only lost money on one of them. And so I think that was just kind an anomaly, just a little fluke there not that there’s anything that we did or didn’t do wrong. I like our odds right now, and I think that this works, and I think that this can work for other people too. So what I would recommend doing is…

Steve: So you use 500 bucks using your strategy right now for ads right?

Grant: Yeah, $500 and again some of it also depends on the price point for your products. So let’s say that it cost you a couple of bucks to get someone on the list. Let’s say it actually– let’s say you got $100 product, but and even though it only cost you a couple of bucks to get someone on the webinar, let’s say the cost for an actual buyer is let’s say $90, that leaves you only 10 bucks of margin there. So at that point you got to kind of decide like, you know, I did this webinar, I spent all this money, and I had 10 buyers, but I netted $100, is that worth it?

And again everybody is going to be different on that. Again I would say that you take 100 bucks a day, try those Facebook ads, try to get a feel for just how it works, how the webinar process works. A lot of people are very-very intimidated by it. As a public speaker it can be weird, but the same time you’re just you’re talking to people, and they signed up because they were interested in what you have to teach them. They’re interested in what you have to show them.

So put that webinar together in a way where you’re– like put yourself in their shoes, when you were just starting what were the things that you would want to know, what would be things that would give them quick wins, and help them feel like, “Okay, this person, this guy, this girl, really knows what they’re talking about.” And again we made a lot of tweaks along the way, but just starting somewhere and say, “Hey, I’m just going to do this webinar and if we have five people, if we have 50 people, let’s do this webinar and then let’s see what happens from there.”

Steve: Cool man, so I had another question. So have you ever had a webinar where just like 10 people showed up?

Grant: We have done, kind of looking through my numbers here, we have had some that have been like slightly lower attended. The one that we had that like nobody bought was way low attended, I‘m kind of going through a percentage, our show up rates here. I’m looking at 11%, 13%, 20% and then it dips to 7%, and then after that it’s 14, 12, 15, 16, 11.

Steve: What did you do differently, was it just the nature of the ad?

Grant: I don’t know yeah. So in fact we’re like the Facebook ads guys talking to some other people on our team we were talking to and we were all just like just kind of scratching my head like, “I don’t know what happened.” So again like I think you can always in anything with statistics you can kind of throw out the bottom, throw out the top, and kind of get a better idea. So out of 16 if we have one that just we have an abnormally low amount of people show up for whatever reason who knows, you know.

Steve: Yeah, yeah throw that out.

Grant: Yeah, let’s go figure.

Steve: Cool, Grant I actually leant a whole lot just talking to you today, and I want to be respectful for your time because I know you got another appointment after this, but thanks for coming on Grant. And if anyone out there has any questions about this or is interested in public speaking where can they find you.

Grant: Yeah, you can catch me over at Grantbaldwin.com, and if you got any questions feel free to email me grant@grantbaldwin.com. And then if you’re interested in the speaking stuff, all of that is going to be at bookedandpaidtospeak.com.

Steve: Awesome thanks a lot Grant, thanks a lot for coming on the show man.

Grant: Steve really enjoyed it buddy, catch you next time.

Steve: All right take care.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. After talking with Grant I got super excited about doing my own live workshops. In fact I’ve decided to do them on a regular basis now. So instead of offering a free one-on-one consult which is something that I did in the past, I‘m now going to offer free ecommerce classes on a regular basis.

So if you’re interested in learning more about selling online, please sign up at Mywifequitherjob.com/workshop. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode79, and if you enjoyed this episode please and iTunes and leave a review, because when you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this info and find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person to share it on the web. If you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day-mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up right on the front page, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog and www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

078: DIY Pete Sveen – How To Make 6 Figures Teaching People How To Do It Yourself

How To Make 6 Figures Teaching People How To Do It Yourself With Pete Sveen

I first met Pete Sveen at the Ecommerce Fuel Live event in 2014. And then I saw the guy again at NMX where we finally had a chance to chat a little bit more.

Pete runs 2 awesome sites at ThinkEntrepreneurship.com and DIYPete.com. And he also runs a podcast as well.

But the reason I brought Pete on the show today is to talk about DIYPete. DIYPete.com is a site where Pete inspires others to build their own DIY projects. He’s been featured on the Art Of Manliness, Bob Vila’s show, Sirius radio and NBC. He’s attracted top sponsors like Ryobi, Quickcrete and Gorilla Glue.

Here’s what’s inspiring. Pete full on admits that he’s just an average do it yourselfer and not an expert. And what I like about Pete’s story is that he’s taken something that he loves doing and is passionate about and has turned that into a 6 figure income in under 2 years.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Pete turned his passion into a business
  • How Pete makes a living with DIYPete.com
  • How to create a thriving YouTube channel
  • How to monetize a YouTube channel
  • The early keys when trying to build traffic to a website
  • How to solicit sponsors for your blog and YouTube
  • Advice on how to get started with YouTube for beginners.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Pete Sveen on the show. Now I first met Pete at the Ecommerce Fuel live event in 2014, and then saw the guy again at NMX where we finally had a chance to chat a little bit more. Now Pete runs two awesome sites, at thinkentreprenuership.com and DIYPete.com, and he also runs a podcast as well. But the reason I brought Pete on the show today, is to talk about DIY Pete. DIY Pete is a site where Pete inspires others to build their own DIY projects, and he’s been featured on the Art of Manliness, Bob [inaudible 00:02:07] show, Sirius radio and NBC.

And he has attracted a lot of top sponsors like Ryobi, QuikGrid, and Gorilla Glue. And here’s what’s cool about Pete. He fully admits that he is just an average do it yourselfer not an expert. And what I like about Pete’s story is that he’s taken something that he loves doing, and he is passionate about, and has turned into a six figure income in just a couple of years, and with that welcome to the show Pete, how are you doing today?

Pete: I’m great, thanks so much for having me on Steve, and quite the intro, I appreciate it.

Steve: Yeah, no I mean it’s amazing; it’s actually kind of rare that someone can take something that they are really passionate about, and actually turn that into a business in a relatively short period of time. Like I know I’m passionate about a lot of different things, but I don’t necessarily think I could turn a business out of those passions. So let’s start with just your quick background story, and how you got started and how your journey kind of led over to DIY Pete, because I know you have a whole bunch of different sites.

Pete: Yeah, well, I grew up in South Dakota, went to school in Nebraska, and then I packed up in [New Hall] [ph] and moved to Montana, because I always wanted to live in the mountains. But I studied entrepreneurship at Nebraska and started my first business in college. Then I started a number of different businesses in Bozeman Montana once I moved there, and got into internet marketing in about 2011. That’s where I launched thinkentrepreneurship.com, which is a resource for entrepreneurs too, and where I share what I have learned along my journey, and try to inspire others.

And then from that more recently in about 2000 — late 2013, early 2014, I started DIYPete.com, because I have always loved to build things, and my dad kind of got me started doing that as a young kid. I remember I sold snow cones to buy my first tool box. And so I started at an early age and with my internet marketing background that I had from think entrepreneurship and learning about affiliate programs, and how to kind of — I guess you could call it make money online.

I took that knowledge and put it into the DIY website, where I think there’s a lot of people who have great-great websites that share how to build things online. But they might not necessarily have that internet marketing background where they know how to monetize it. And so I think it really did help to have that background in the internet marketing to take into this new space that was less, or I guess you could say untouched.

Steve: I know you also saw — have an e-commerce store that sells signs, are you still running that? And kind of you have a whole bunch of these different sites, how do you juggle them all, and how do you decide what to prioritize?

Pete: That’s a great question, and I have primarily focused on DIY Pete because it’s seen the most growth, and it’s something that I enjoy doing the most. Then I share my story of what I have learned on the think entrepreneurship blogs, so that takes probably that second in line. And signsofthemountains.com where I sell skiing trail signs, I have had since 2011 as well. That brings in a steady income, and so I have maintained that. And I do have some help in running each of these different things, in writing articles, helping make signs, and then in filming and all that. So I do have some help, but I focus on what I’m most enjoying.

Steve: Okay, yeah, I know that totally make sense. And I actually did a little bit of research kind of in your niche on the DIY niche. And there’s actually a whole bunch of people doing similar things to what you are doing. So how did you know that you could actually take this passion of yours and actually make money with it? There’s a lot of competition.

Pete: Yeah, the first thing I knew that I could do is I could implement the affiliate marketing because I knew how to do that already. So I started by – well how I started this website was I was basically posting photos of some pictures that I had — pictures of projects I had created on Facebook and sharing with my friends. My friends started asking how did I build that, do you have any plans for this work; can I go to learn to build one of my own? And so that’s kind of when I got the idea of starting this website where I have plans and video– really detailed video tutorials. So then I started doing this website, and the first thing I did was I put products on Amazon. So I have an Amazon Associates account.

And what I do is in all of my posts and my plans; I have links to the tool that I use. So if I’m using a miter saw, maybe I’m using a drill, a lot of people that come to the website have never built something, or they are looking to see what tools they need, and then they can click on that tool, convert. And I do sell a lot of tools through that website, so that’s kind of what I first started doing to monetize the website.

Steve: Okay, and was — what I was trying to get at actually is, was this whole site — was the business aspect of it intentional, or did you kind of just start documenting your projects, and then saw that it started getting traction, and then you decided to monetize it?

Pete: Yeah, I think it was kind of a combination Steve, I knew that — well, in the beginning, I wasn’t making any money really, I mean it takes time. And so I was just doing it, and it was kind of funny, because I’d talk to friends or call and talk to my parents every Sunday, and they’d be like what did you work on this week? And I was like plans, and they are like, why, I mean does it make any money? So it took time to be able to monetize it. And so in the beginning it was kind of I had the intention of eventually wanting to monetize it, but it wasn’t there yet. And it did take some time, but now it’s there.

Steve: Okay, what I really like about your story Pete is that you are like the perfect example of someone who is really passionate about something, and has managed to create an awesome business out of it, because I know a lot of my listeners out there they have these passions and they are just afraid to get started, because a certain space might be too crowded. Like the DIY space there’s a lot of people out there, but you’ve kind of curved out your niche, and you’ve done an extremely good job with your videos and your presence and you’ve made it happen, so which is really cool.

And what I want to kind of go into with the listeners here is, I want to go into just the different ways that you kind of make money with DIY Pete, just to give people an idea. I know you have a ton fans and a great YouTube channel, but where does the revenue come from, can you break it down for us?

Pete: Sure, so like I said there are a variety of ways that is monetized. One is through Amazon, and that’s with the tools that are sold. A big source of the affiliate revenue is from software believe it or not, because I have the site and people see that I’m sharing projects and they might see that I’m doing this for a living. And so they want some advice on maybe how they can sell projects that they’ve created, a lot of these people are artists and craftsmen. And so they want to be able to sell their like work benches or benches for your kitchen tables, all this kind of stuff. So I recommend software to do that, primarily shopping carts like Bigcommerce or Shopify.

Steve: Okay, so this kind of ties into your sign business a little bit, right? Your experience with your sign business?

Pete: It does.

Steve: Okay

Pete: And then I also recommend hosting services like a lot of bloggers do, so that these people can start their own DIY blogs just like myself. And I don’t think of it as competition at all. I’m just there to you know I think the more projects that are out there, and the more people that can inspire others the better. So I think it’s a win-win there. So affiliate marketing is a big one for me at this point.

Another is sponsors. In the last year and a half or so, I’ve – I think it’s primarily come because of my YouTube channel, because people see that– they see my face, they build a connection and they learn who I am and then they see that these videos are helping a lot of people and reaching others. So that has helped in getting sponsors, and like you said I’ve worked with a number of big companies because of it.

And then I’m also doing product reviews, you may have– like I have a product review for Nest which is a thermostat made by Google. I have a product– I furnished my entire home with blinds from a blind company. And people are trying to reach out to bloggers right now, because they see what we are doing, they see our reach, and they see that we can help them convert sales.

Steve: Can we talk about those sponsorships real quick? How did you get them? Did they approach you? Did you approach them? What was the process involved?

Pete: I think over time I’ve kind of– you know you build your rapport. And first I could say, “Hey, I was on Sirius XM radio. And then the next thing I was on the news channel.” So I can keep saying more things that I’ve done to try and impress these people, so I could have them as a sponsor. So I would– I had an email template and I put in all the information on things that I’ve done of my statistics from my website. And then I’d send that out. And I probably send out ten and maybe hear back from one. So I did reach out. And then YouTube has helped in getting companies to actually contact me without having to contact them. So it’s kind of been a combination of the two, I’d say Steve.

Steve: Okay. So when you are reaching out, how do you know how much to charge? How do you know whether your stats are good enough? Like what are some of the metrics involved?

Pete: Yeah. So YouTube has seen the fastest growth from up to 17,000 subscribers, which is a lot for me. So I’ve taken this and I kind of compare against other people that are creating videos as well and seeing how they are doing it, like I’m in a masterminds where I talk with other DIY bloggers. So I’ve kind of been able to see behind the scenes what they charge, what they do. But in the beginning what I did, was, I was just like, “Wow, you know, they are going to send me Nest thermostat for free!”

Steve: I know that’s pretty awesome.

Pete: So I was doing a lot of them for free. And then like, for instance, the paying company that works with www.nfl.com, they reached out and they told me that they would pay me X amount for each video that I created. And so sometimes they’ve set the amount and as long as I felt that I was getting what it was worth out of it to take the time to create the video, then I went with it.

Steve: Okay. So in terms of when you are reaching out then, you kind of don’t talk about the price at all. Does it– is it very widely or? Basically how did you know that you had enough clout in order to get some of these deals?

Pete: Yeah, I think– I guess it was– I think when they started reaching out to me and said, “Hey, we’ll all throw out a dollar figure.” I mean some of these companies per video or per post where you know I’m doing a post, a video and then sharing it with my audience you are making in the four figures generally around $3,000 to $5,000 per project.

And so I guess kind of once I was reached out to a company and they gave me that, then I felt really confident that I could then go on to another big company and say, “Hey, I’ve got X amount from this company, what would you be willing to pay?” Or you know like, “This is what I would like, where could you come in?”

Steve: I see and so that figure– so I know YouTube people who have like a million subscribers and some have 500,000, 250,000, you have a good amount as well. And so does the subscriber count matter, or is it mainly– do they judge the payment based on the quality of your videos primarily? Do you see what I’m asking?

Pete: Yeah. And I think they do look at the subscriber rate a lot. But I was able– I mean when I had 8,000 to 10,000 subscribers, I was being reached out by some of these– you know these companies were contacting me. So I do think it was a lot with the quality of the videos and how I shared that company like in a good light if that makes sense.

Steve: Okay. And how do they– do they track their sales when you do one of these videos somehow?

Pete: Yeah. A lot of them use the Bitly links in the post. So I try and send everybody to my actual post on the www.diypete.com, and then whatever product that I’m– that’s being sponsored on that post is what we’ll try and put some links into so that they’ll click on it. I also do– I just did a project with meanworks.com [ph] where under the YouTube video there’s actually a Bitly link there so that they can get to that specific page, and get over to meanworks. And so they are able to track quite a bit of stuff.

Steve: Okay. And have you talked to some of your people regarding what like the metrics they would like to see and different things that you can do. Are they doing it primarily for branding or for direct sales? I imagine it’s a little bit of both. But I was just kind of wondering how it works and how they expect out of you.

Pete: Yeah. They expect me to share with all of my audience and to get it out to as many people as possible. And then really I think it’s a lot working with just getting people to know the brand. And something that I’ve found that works really well too in going and finding these sponsors, is just showing them my Amazon statistics. For instance, there was a company that I did a video for showing how to a hang a flat screen TV and to hide the wires behind the wall. And I can specifically track that this one post that I think it has 60,000 or so YouTube views right now. But this specific post is doing about $3,000 worth of sales for them each month, just for these things that hide—you know the skit that hides wires behind the wall.
So that’s really interesting, because you know I can take those numbers, and I’m still making an income off of that affiliate revenue only seven or eight percent from Amazon. But at the same time I’m be able to take these statistics and to show them to different companies too.

Steve: You know for your Amazon affiliate links, are they underneath the video, or are they in the post that kind of displays the video?

Pete: I don’t put them under the video. And that’s just because I’m not – you know if I would I would definitely put a disclaimer, but they are all on resources page on my website, and then in all of the downloadable plans on the website as well as in the post. So it will say “tools recommended” and then they just click on that.

Steve: Okay, for that particular project?

Pete: Exactly, yeah.

Steve: Okay, because you said that you have 17,000 subscribers but some of your videos have like over a quarter million viewers. And so clearly they are going viral on YouTube outside of what you have on your email list or whatever.

Pete: Yeah, YouTube, that’s my biggest traffic generator; YouTube and then Pinterest. So that’s why I’m putting my time – I kind of look back on what worked in 2014, why the do-it-yourself website has grown as it has. And it’s primarily due to YouTube because of the reach that it gets. I mean it’s a huge search engine.

And people when they are building things, they may be able to find plans on other peoples website, but a lot of them just need that hand holding or that extra step to see the actual process and to visualize it, so that they can in turn see which board to connect or which other piece of the project or how to do this next weld. So I think that the visual thing has been really big on YouTube and just the visualization of what I’m doing is where it helps so many people.

Steve: You are actually getting me excited to hear a little bit about YouTube, because even with a subscriber-base of 17K you are able to command four-figures sponsorship deals. Your videos are awesome. My wife and I just watched one before this interview, and the quality was top notch. So if you were to start over again and advice some people who are just starting out on YouTube, what sort of tips would you offer on just how to get your YouTube channel off its feet?

Pete: The first thing would just be sign up for your account, and then create content that is helpful for other people and that’s inspiring. You don’t have to have the top notch equipment right off the butt and I certainly didn’t.

Steve: What did you start out with?

Pete: I started out with an old – it was even called a DV recorder, so it was like the old tapes right before they came out with the digital cards or whatever they are called. And then I just had the built in microphone and Apple iMovie, so very, very bootstrapped start up there. And then I now moved on to a nice lovely little microphone so that I have better sound quality and then a nicer camera and lighting.

So I mean, you will definitely progress and learn what works best for you, but I think that having eventually as good a sound quality as possible is really key. And then just having a tripod and taking time to get some fun different shots and not just one view the entire video.

So I guess that’s what I would start up doing and then just making sure you are helping somebody in some way or another. I mean if you are helping one person, that’s making a difference. And that’s kind of what I thought of it as at a beginning, because of creating these videos, it turns out that it helped a few more than one person, which is awesome, and so I’m really happy.

Steve: For your videos, do you actually have help? Because I do notice that you have different camera angles. And are you by yourself when you are doing this, or do you have like a crew?

Pete: I’d say 90% of the time I’m all by myself doing it. Recently I did do a video, YouTube trailer, just where somebody came and did some filming and did more a real professional job. So that’s something that’s been more recent. But yeah, normally it’s just me in there, because I’m working on the projects when most of my friends are working. Sometimes I will hire some help if I need it, but primarily it’s just myself.

Steve: Wow, that’s incredible. So let’s say you’ve created your YouTube video. What are some of the next steps in your process to kind of get the word out outside of just relying on YouTube search?

Pete: The first thing I do once it’s uploaded, is share on Facebook and then on Pinterest. Pinterest, what I would do is – I spend a lot of time creating a good image where it has like five different photos for the actual Pinterest post, and then just has a brief over view of each step. So it’s a real tall image because Pinterest allows you to have as tall of image as you like, and then it just has to be just kind of narrow. So that is something that I put on there, and then I always create a set of plans with the project. And I put that into a program called Gumroad which – I don’t know if you are familiar with it or not?

Steve: Yeah. You can tell the listeners.

Pete: It’s a really cool program and what I’m trying to do is see if people are willing to donate for any of these plans, because I do have a couple for sale, but I was just kind of trying to test the waters. So I uploaded a few of my plans into this program called Gumroad, which allows you to see anything quickly and easily. They take, I think, it’s like a five percent cut and a small transaction fee– totally worth it though.

And so in my first month of putting one plan up just through the donate option, it brought in an extra $500 for one set of plans. And I have about 13 other plans that I’m working on currently that I can get laid up there pretty soon. So that’s kind of been something that’s fun to see, because that’s a lot of extra money when you think about it.

Steve: It is. Does that imply that you create your own designs for your stuff?

Pete: Sometimes I do. One of my most popular projects is a double chair bench plan, and I did create the plans for that. And then all of my concrete projects, I create the plans for those. There are some projects where, like for instance one of the dining tables that I made, that was designed by Ana White who is an amazing blogger up in Alaska.

And I made a few modifications to it, but I don’t create plans for things that I didn’t create. I just – I really love tri-table and I didn’t want to re-invent the wheel, so I created a video to share with others and even I talked with Ana White. So it’s kind of a little partnership deal where I’m helping her by inspiring more people and showing how to build her project with her plans.

Steve: Okay. Sorry I interrupted you Pete. You were talking about how you put stuff on Gumroad. Please continue.

Pete: Oh yeah. You know, I’m excited to continue experimenting with that donations– I didn’t know if people would be willing to donate, but some people will pay a dollar for my plans. And I’ve had up to $25 for a single set of plans from a donation. So that’s just been another way to learn how to monetize the website, that’s just kind of starting for me.

Steve: Just curious, why the donation model instead of just a straight sales model?

Pete: I think because these projects are ones that I created in the past and so – like maybe I created the video four or five months ago. And I had said, for the free plans, head over to www.diypete.com/ so and so. So I already said it was free. So I wasn’t like going to like change that. I think in the future I will be selling some plans.

And then, I’ve also done some things where I’m working on courses right now. And I collaborated with Bob Vila’s website and I have some courses coming out this year on his site. So that’s going to be another thing that’s just going to continue to bring in more traffic, and it’s another way that this site is monetized as well.

Steve: That’s incredible. Bob Vila, how did you get that gig? Was that– did he approach you or did you reach out?

Pete: That was– actually I was on a trip. I got an email from a PR person that worked for them, and she said that they had picked one of my projects to be on their website in a contest. I ended up winning the contest, and then they asked if I wanted to kind of collaborate and do some projects together. So that really worked out for the better.

Steve: That’s awesome.

Pete: Yeah super-fun.

Steve: Yeah because he’s huge. So you have your YouTube video and you have your plans and I imagine you post this on your DIY Pete website, right?

Pete: Yeah, everything goes to the website.

Steve: So are you trying to drive to your– people find you on YouTube and then you point them to your website, or is it the other way around? How does that work?

Pete: I try to get them from YouTube to my website just because– I mean YouTube people are finding me, but then my website is where I can give them more information, and then where they can get the plans; where I can collect email addresses; where I can get affiliate links clicked on; and where I can get them to see more of my projects, and hopefully kind of build the relationship with them. So my website is my home base where I always try to get them to come.

Steve: And you mentioned your email list. What are you sending them, and do you have an auto-responder sequence, and how often do you actually contact your subscribers?

Pete: Yeah, right now I’m emailing for each of my new plans as it comes out. So this ends up being about twice a month or so. And then if I have a new post that I create then I’ll send them an email as well. I’m collecting emails from the plans. So they…

Steve: Oh okay.

Pete: So like they’ll go through all lead pages to get the plans or through Gumroad now, and then I collect that email address. And the plans have really helped that. I mean you know they are free basically unless they donate, but that’s increased the number of subscribers a lot. So in the last– just since I started the donating thing, I’m getting about 75 to 100 new subscribers for that individual plan that I put up, which is awesome.

Steve: Nice. And then what do you do with those subscribers? Is there like a plan for the people that you have? Do you try to sell them other plans? Do you just point them to your content, or do you just keep them up to date of what’s going on?

Pete: Steve I’ve been keeping them up to date and sending them to plans. I need to get better at that. You know, there are so many things that I can improve on. That’s one of them is working with an auto-responder and figuring out how to– you know just the best ways to create my email plan. So that’s something that I’m still learning. And hopefully I can figure that out.

Steve: Okay. I was just curious because it sounds like you have a really good system here. People actually want these plans so they give you an email address for them. Clearly there’s demand for these plans. So it just sounds like a potential gold mine to me; just listening to you actually.

Pete: Yeah. I think it’s taken time, and I’m continuing to figure things out and hopefully it is more of a gold mine, but I’m having fun with it.

Steve: So did you actually start with your YouTube channel or did you start with your blog first?

Pete: I had the blog a little bit beforehand hand, but – wait here. Yeah, I mean it was pretty much the same time. Yeah because one of my first projects was– one was a desk and one was a table. So yeah, pretty much similar timeframe.

Steve: Okay, and then, in terms of– I’m just trying to get your perspective from someone who’s just starting, who wants to do kind of follow in your footsteps. Do you recommend that they put up the website first and then just start putting YouTube videos up, and then drive those people back to their site to collect emails, is that kind of the procedure that you started with?

Pete: Yeah, I mean, the first thing I would do is just set up a basic word press blog, that’s exactly what I did, it was cheap and easy to do myself. My website was all DIY as well; I made it all on my own. And then, yeah, so then you set up your YouTube channel, that’s easy to do and then just start creating content, it doesn’t have to be perfect. If you look back at some of my videos– past videos, that’s the fun thing is you can see improvement along the way. Some of the first videos were probably horrific. And so they continue to hopefully get better, and to reach more people. So just get started and take action that’s what I would do.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about your Pinterest strategy a little bit, so you mentioned you create a nice long graphic and then you pin it. Are you doing anything else? Are you pinning other people’s content? Are you doing collaborative boards? How are you expanding your Pinterest presence?

Pete: Collaborative, yeah. If you look at my Pinterest account, I’m still– I don’t have that many followers, but I’ve been able to reach a lot of people through doing collaborative boards with other DIYers who have huge followings, one primarily being Ana White. I’m on a couple of her boards, and the traffic is just crazy. One of the pins that just went up a couple of months ago has 43 000 re-pins, and then…

Steve: Holly, okay.

Pete: They just slowly add up and the ones that reach some of those audience– people with bigger audiences just create a snowball effect, so try and get on some more well known bloggers boards, and then just create nice images that look great. And I use a program called Canva which is free, and I definitely recommend it to listeners out there, if you’re looking for any easy way to create images and you are not awesome with Photoshop.

Steve: So, how do you get on these collaborative boards? I know you go to a lot of conferences and it’s outreach, but do you ever do any cold emails to get on these collaborative boards, or is it just all putting yourself out there and networking?

Pete: I think putting yourself out there and networking has been huge for me. There’s a few bloggers that I have reached out to because I haven’t met them in person, and I see that they are doing some amazing things. And so I have reached out to them and– something that has actually helped, when I reach out instead of doing a cold email, I’ll use a video recording software like QuickTime, I think it’s built into my computer, that’s what I use. And then I’ll just do like a 30 seconds to a minute long clip and say, ”Hey, I’m Pete, it’s great to see what you are up to, I would love to connect.”

And so they see a video of me, which definitely stands out, and I’ve also done just video recordings, I mean excuse me, audio recordings where I just record my voice quick, say a message a minute long, and generally I hear back when I do that. It just stands out a little bit.

Steve: Huh, that’s a good tip. So you record a video, put it on YouTube, and then send the link to the YouTube video in an email?

Pete: Yeah, but I– it’s a private– yeah, it’s all private though. It’s a private link.

Steve: Yeah, of course.

Pete: Yeah, and then something…

Steve: That’s a good strategy.

Pete: Yeah, and then something else that’s kind of stood out just a little bit is all of us we get so many questions from people that visit our sites, and so sometimes it’s actually quicker not to type a complete response, but to do a recorded audio response. And it stands out to the person that’s emailed you, so like somebody might ask how did– where do you get five inch screws to build this project? Well, I’ll just do a quick audio recording and the feedback I get there like first off usually they are excited to hear back, and then to get an audio response, really means a lot. So I think just doing little things that stand out go a long way.

Steve: How do you do that quickly, is there a piece of software that you use?

Pete: Yeah, well I use QuickTime a lot of the times, because the audio quality is the best, but some people use and I’m not sure, you probably have something that you use, I think its GIN.

Steve: Yes, Yeah.

Pete: Yeah, that stores it online and then you can just send then a link, so that might be you want to look into as well.

Steve: Yeah, because I mean, I get a lot of emails also and often times I can’t respond with like a full blown response, but this sounds like a happy medium there, because I can often pump out like an audio clip really quick.

Pete: Yeah, definitely give it a whirl; see if it’s a good fit for your audience as well.

Steve: So, are there any other traffic sources that you rely on? I mean you’ve mentioned YouTube and you’ve mentioned Pinterest, has Facebook or Twitter or any of those worked for you?

Pete: Twitter isn’t– Twitter doesn’t work for my industry as well, in my opinion at least it hasn’t for me, and so it’s not something I focus on. There’s just so many done social platforms that I think– you have to kind of narrow your focus. And so what works for my industry since it is visual is Pinterest and then Instagram has been another one. And that’s something I more recently got into, but it’s kind of grown somewhat quickly, so those two platforms have been biggest in my opinion.

Steve: Can we talk about Instagram a little bit, and what you’ve been doing to increase your Instagram account.

Pete: I’ve just been– basically I like and find as many other ‘Do it yourself’ bloggers, so that they kind of see me and then in turn hopefully like me back. And then I try to be consistent about putting up a photo everyday or every other day, and just I think being consistent is one of the biggest things as it is so many other parts of our businesses.

Steve: Okay, and then just gradually followers will just start finding you by just posting consistently?

Pete: Yeah, and I– my following is not huge by any means and I just got on it in the last couple of months, so I’m looking forward to learning from others and seeing what works and what doesn’t, but and then the other thing would be guest posting. That’s been probably one of the bigger things that helps grow the website and getting featured on The Art of Manliness or Make Magazine has definitely brought in a lot of traffic.

Steve: So when you guest post, are these guest videos, or are they hand written posts? Does that make sense?

Pete: Yeah, usually it’s both. So for The Art of Manliness I did it– I showed how to build a whiskey barrel coffee table, and then I did a really detailed post with all the instructions, and then a video tutorial. So they got– they were really happy because it was a lot of content and then it did mention them in the video. And I was happy, more than happy because it just kind of got my website rolling and got me a lot of traffic, and attention. So that was really helpful, guest blog posting.

Steve: That’s cool, and then have you purchased any ads or do you ever drive any pay per click traffic to your side or tried any of those things?

Pete: I don’t too much, I’ve really– the only thing I’ve done is on Facebook, sometimes I’ll do a little sponsored post, just because they– it seems like your post barely get out to anybody anymore on Facebook. So I’ll just do the sponsored thing, but I don’t generally spend money trying to get people to come to my website. I generally would rather get it on another website or on Pinterest, it’s– at least in my industry that would get you quite a bit of traffic I’d say.

Steve: Okay, and I was just curious, how does Think Entrepreneurship kind of all weave into all of this?

Pete: Well, yeah Think Entrepreneurship is resource for entrepreneurs and what I try and do is share my journey along the way and what I have learnt. So, just tips, like something I like to do is right hand written thank you cards when I’m on people’s podcasts, or when somebody gives me– I mean anything like that. And so like I said, the benefits of writing thank you cards, how they’ve helped me in business, and how they can help you.

I say– I talk about like software that helps me, I talk about things I’ve learnt, or conferences I’ve been to, so others out there who are maybe looking to go to conferences have an idea of what would be good to go to as somebody is getting started in blogging. So just a place where I share what I’ve learnt, and with the goal to hopefully inspire a couple of people.

Steve: Okay, the reason why I ask is, often times, at least for me it’s very difficult to work on multiple sites. And so Think Entrepreneurship obviously brings in a little bit of revenue as well, and so I was just kind of curious how you juggle all these things, you do this full time, right?

Pete: I do.

Steve: Okay.

Pete: Yap, [inaudible] [0:39:58].

Steve: Okay.

Pete: Yeah, and the DIY Projects with Pete like I said is the main focus. So I’m putting a lot more attention and working on a daily basis creating videos, creating content for other websites. And then more like once a month or a couple of times a month I’m doing something over at Think Entrepreneurship, so just enough to keep it constant and up there, but not something that’s taking up all of my time. And more recently I do now have help in writing some articles on that website, so that’s been a win-win as well.

Steve: I was just curious what is your posting frequency on DIP Pete, because I imagine these videos take a long time, right?

Pete: Yeah, it really depends on just the project. But I’m trying to put out at least one project a month, and you know if it’s a real– if it involves a video and it’s real detailed, yeah I can’t get out more than a month usually. So if it’s a quicker project then I might be able to get up one every other week. So I’m trying to be more consistent, that’s something I’m always trying to strive to be better at, and so yeah that’s kind of what I’m doing. And then I‘m also always working on other projects like that might not be for my website as well.

Steve: Care to share any of those– these are not business related…?

Pete: Oh, yeah okay.

Steve: Okay.

Pete: No, no they might be projects like for the Bob Vila Website, for Ryobi Company, because I do at least four, but as many projects as I can for them in a year. And then I do projects for just other blogs out there for instance Make Magazine. And so it’s a variety of different websites that these projects are going on, which continues to help kind of bring traffic to the overall website.

Steve: I see, so when you contribute to some of these other brands like Bob Vila and Ryobi, they actually drive traffic back to DIY Pete?

Pete: Yeah, but I always make sure that our link is included and that helps, because a lot of these websites like Humanworks.com I just did a post of them a couple of weeks ago, and that’s a pretty high ranking website that gets a lot of traffic. And so I link back from a website of that stature certainly helps in Google sites.

Steve: Oh yeah for sure. So I’m just curious for some of the listeners out there I’m just kind of curious about the time frames. When did you actually start seeing traffic– not traffic, but traction with the DIY Pete and your YouTube channel? And how many videos had you put out at that point?

Pete: Yes so I would say traction with the YouTube Channel and with the website overall business in about five to six months is kind of when I got some of my first big posts on other websites under my belts. And so I was seeing more– I was seeing over 1000 people a day, which was nice.

And then it’s kind of trickled from there as far as money coming in through Amazon which was my first source of revenue there before I made over a couple of hundred dollars that was probably around six/seven months. And then it’s just kind of kept going up from there. And now Amazon, it ranges between– about 800 to 1800 a month, it just kind of depends on who is buying what.

Steve: Yeah I imagine the holiday season is pretty huge of you too.

Pete: And the holidays are great and then just like the software that I sell, and some of the other affiliate programs started picking up just once I kept continuing to see more traffic. So it’s been fun, and I’ve learned a lot definitely along the journey.

Steve: What about YouTube, do YouTube ads– do you run YouTube ads first of all, and do they actually bring in…?

Pete: I do.

Steve: Okay.

Pete: Well so what I’m seeing for traffic on the YouTube channel is about 140,000 views per month right now, and then it’s at the 17,000 subscribers. And the YouTube channel with that current traffic sees right between $400 a month to well actually about 400-700 right now at that current traffic. And then I also do Google AdSense, and that’s just on the sidebar of my website. And the reason I’m saying this together is because you get paid in one check from Google, so they add the AdSense to the YouTube earnings.

And then so my earnings on AdSense are right actually about the same right now as what I’m making. So I get a check for total around $800-1100 or so from Google right now at the current traffic I’m seeing, if that kind of gives you just a frame of reference.

Steve: That’s cool yeah I know thanks for sharing, thanks of sharing. You know Pete hey, your story is actually really inspiring, just the fact that it gives the listeners some inspiration that they can go out, find sometime they’re passionate about, and just do an incredible job of getting themselves out there, and actually be able to make a living with it. So I really appreciate hearing your story today.

Pete: Cool.

Steve: I don’t want to keep you here too long, but if anyone wants to kind of get in contact with you, or ask you any questions, and maybe get an audio reply, where can they find you?

Pete: Please do. You can stop over to my website DIYPete.com, and I would love to hear from you. My email address is Pete@DIYpete.com, and shoot me a message, let me know what you’re up to, and if you have any DIY questions, or anything else, or just want to chat, and I’ll get back to you, and I’d love to hear about what you’re up to.

Steve: Thanks a lot Pete, thanks of coming on the show.

Pete: Yeah you bet you, thanks so much Steve, have a good one.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. A lot of people actually contact me wanting to know how to make money online on a very low budget, and I always tell these people to simply put themselves out there whether be through writing, through podcasting, or through video. And Pete is the perfect example of someone who did just that, and now he makes a lot of money doing something that he loves.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode78, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can find this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guest. It’s also the best way to support the show.

And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profits in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, and thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog and www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

077: How To Create Software That Automates Your Social Media Marketing With Laura Roeder And MeetEdgar

How To Completely Automate Your Social Media Marketing With Laura Roeder

Laura Roeder is back on the show to teach us how to completely automate your social media and how to create a SAAS business in the process!

If you don’t remember Laura, she was on the podcast back in episode 9 where she taught us the right way to handle social media. Since then, she’s launched an amazing tool called MeetEdgar.com which is what I now use to manage both my Facebook and Twitter accounts.

Stay tuned to hear how Laura created an incredibly helpful and successful Saas Tool. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Laura saw a need for social media automation
  • The motivation behind MeetEdgar.com
  • The business model behind MeetEdgar and how it makes money
  • Laura’s approach to selling her service
  • How Laura got people to sign up for her service early on
  • The best way to market a SAAS business
  • How Laura reduces churn for MeetEdgar
  • Her onboarding process for new users
  • The right way to create a SAAS based business

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcast where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I‘m really happy to have Laura Roeder back on the show, now quick intro in case you don’t remember her, Laura runs LKR social media where she teaches others how to expand their social media presence, and if you don’t remember her I had Laura actually on the podcast way back in Episode 9, and a lot has actually happened since then.

So first off she gave birth to a very cute baby boy, she hasn’t been sleeping for more than three hours a night, she no longer stays out past 8:00 pm ever, but besides that she started a super cool SaaS company called Meet Edgar which is software designed to automate your social media presence. Now incidentally I have been using Meet Edgar for about a year now, and my facebook following has doubled since then, and even though I don’t have a new born like Laura I’m actually getting sleep, with two kids and multiple businesses I have very limited time for social media. And with Meet Edgar I pretty much do nothing, and my social media accounts just continue to go up and to the right.

So the tool truly works and today Laura is going to tell us how she came up with the idea, and then nuts and bolts behind creating your own SaaS business, and with that welcome back to the show Laura, how are you doing today?

Laura: Thank you, I’m doing great, I’m really happy to hear those social media results, you’re actually one of our early users of Edgar.

Steve: Oh yeah, is that’s right. Yeah I remember on your– giving you feedback about it, and I liked kind of how you rolled it out and so I was hoping to get into that a little bit today.

Laura: Absolutely.

Steve: But quick, real quick, give us the quick background story regarding Meet Edgar because I didn’t really give a very thorough intro on what the tool actually does.

Laura: Yeah, so when I was running my social media training business, LKR social media, we were teaching a methodology about creating this giant spreadsheet with different categories in it, and that’s your social media updates and write a bunch of updates in one category, put them in the spreadsheet, then copy and paste them from the spreadsheet to you social media scheduling tool of choice.

So this is the process we were using, this is the process we were teaching, all of our customers were using and whenever you have a giant spreadsheet of social media updates, as you can imagine it gets pretty cumbersome. So what I really wanted in a tool is one, I just wanted a tool that sort of a library of my updates. To this day it bubbles my mind that more tools don’t have this, you send now your social update near your tool, but most of the tools don’t save them, maybe there’s some sort of stats section where you can see the stats, but they don’t have an organized library of all your updates.

So I wanted my library right in the tool and I wanted to repeat my updates automatically, that’s the way we are teaching people how to do it, you go through your spreadsheet, go through everything in your category and once you are done, just go back to the top and start again. So I decided that since it wasn’t out there already, someone had to make it, and that someone would apparently be me basically. So our company built Meet Edgar into 2014, it’s grown amazingly since then and we finally have the social media tool that we wanted to use.

Steve: Yeah, so I remember back in the day before Meet Edgar, I was actually using a couple of other tools that allow you to schedule your tweets and your Facebook posts in advance, and I just could never keep those queues full because it tool my time and energy to do it.

Laura: Yes, I mean we had the same problem, you seal up your queue but it’s going to run out, it’s really unique about Edgar is that it never runs out, because we cycle through your content again and again.on

Steve: Yeah, so real quick for people who don’t know what is actually the business model behind Meet Edgar and how does it generate money?

Laura: So it’s your typical SaaS business, most of our customer are paying $49 a month, that’s kind of our basic small business plan, we don’t have a free plan since we are a business tool, a lot of social media tools kind of toe the line between having consumer usage and having business usage. We’re really focused on the small business, or the monetized blog kind of whatever your business looks like, and that’s how we make our money.

Steve: Yeah, so really quick, I was kind of curious about that because a lot of these guys have freemium plans, so what was kind of your decision making process behind not having that and just charging $50 a month right off the back?

Laura: It’s definitely something that we’ve thought a lot about and gone back and forth on it, and I’m not saying that we would never do it; I think freemium can be a great marketing tool, but the problem with freemium is that you have to support a lot of free users, that’s part of the deal. And we haven’t raised money we’re a bootstrap tool, so if you don’t have millions of dollars in the bank that you can use to support customers that may not ever give me money, it can be really challenging to do freemium,.

So we just really don’t feel like we had the bandwidth to do all the back and stuff and support for free customers and be able to make money, and the other reason was we really wanted to be really clear in positioning like I said as a business tool. A tool like buffer is great for business; it’s also great for just people who are using social media just for fun, just for finding stuff, put on your personal twitter account.

We really wanted to let people know we’re not a good tool to use just for fun, because we are a bit more advanced, you have to fill up your library, you have really think through your contents. It’s kind of a different work flow, than a lot of people use right out of the gate [ph] on social media. So I thought that will definitely make it really clear if we’re charging at least $50 a month, that you really are using this as a tool to market your business.

Steve: Okay, and so you mentioned that you’re a bootstrapped company, how does one actually go about studying Meet Edgar SaaS based business with recurring billing, are you guys using any standard platforms, or is it just kind of coded from scratch?

Laura: No we use a lot of different tools, so for billing we use Stripe for all of our recurring billing.

Steve: But in terms of the side structure itself, like the Meet Edgar website, and then all the back end stuff, is it like standard platform or did you guys hand write a lot of stuff?

Laura: We use both, I’m not like– I’m not a—that is somewhat of a CDO [ph] question.

Steve: Okay, no problem.

Laura: Like I know we use [inaudible] [0:07:27], I don’t know what [inaudible] [0:07:28] sort of is.

Steve: Okay, no that’s okay. Yeah, so and I remember when I first started using your tool, I remember that you kind of had this very deliberate launch sequence. You started out with something very simple kind of bare bones, and then you had people like me kind of test the heck out of it. And so can you just kind of talk about your approach to releasing your SaaS based software and kind of the process that you went through.

Laura: Yeah, so we wanted to, like most SaaS businesses release as early as possible, without being too early, which is always a difficult balance to strike. So we started coding in January of 2014, probably about a month or two after that we put up just a really super basic landing page, basically saying something like Edgar is going to manage your social media, and just letting people know the very basics that it was a social media tool, and letting people put in their email address.

So we started collecting emails of people who are interested. A few months after coding– obviously we started using it ourselves and testing it ourselves as early as possible, and then reached out to a few friends, so you may– I don’t know if you actually started then, but you might have been one of those early friends that I reached out to because you have such a huge backlog of content, which is one of our best used cases for Edgar, people who have spent years generating content like you have.

So we reached out to friends, offered them accounts to play around with it and use, maybe about like 10 people, we did that with. And then we opened it kind of quietly, we didn’t do a huge whiz bang launch, we had an existing list from LKR business, which obviously was a massive help in launching Edgar, and we leveraged that list by kind of trying out different marketing sequences for different segments in the list, trying out different messaging and things like that.

So we did have– I remember we had a Google hang out that we positioned as kind of a launch party that we’ve been in I think July or August of 2014, but by the time we had done that we had already reached out to different segment space, that we were just sending marketing emails saying, hey this is something you might be interested in signing up for.

Steve: So that initial group it was just ten people, I remember I started it back in June 2nd of last year, was I among the first bunch, or how many people do you have in that first squad?

Laura: I think you were kind of like the 2nd probably then sort of the 2nd squad.

Steve: Second squad, okay.

Laura: Yeah, because I remember emailing you, you’re like this looks cool but it’s going to get too much time to set up. I was like no we set it up for you, now don’t worry about that. I had to convince you a little bit, which you know it was very typical actually that’s kind of our biggest challenge in Edgar is it does take more set up on the front end, it actually saves you—I mean your users thousands of hours of time, but it can be difficult to convince people to put in time in the beginning. So yeah I think we had a few people at first, and then I kind of kept reaching out to more friends, getting more people on it and getting more feedback.

Steve: Yeah, it’s funny I remember I asked for a couple of features early on, but of course you were still just trying to get something out there and get feedback, and then since then you’ve added a bunch of stuff. We’ll get into all of that in a little bit, but I wanted to ask actually because I was a little bit curious about starting my own SaaS business at some point, how much upfront investment did it actually take to just get started?

Laura: So we put in a lot of money for advertising, so you won’t have to put in that much money, so it’s really a little misleading to say that we’re bootstrapped. I would say self-funded would be a more accurate way to put it, because we definitely had a period of time where the tool was not paying for itself. We used money from the LKR business to start the Edgar business, so we’ve put, I would– I actually don’t even know the exact number. I would say maybe like about 200,000 or 250,000 into Edgar, but a lot of it is Facebook ads, you could do it for less if you just needed to pay development costs.

Steve: Yeah, I was just talking about just getting the tool out, not necessarily the advertising, like for example you need someone who is a tech, right?

Laura: Right, but you know a lot of people do that with the cofounder relationship, which can be a really great way to do it. So if you’re a marketing person like me, who’s not a developer, finding a technical cofounder is a great way to go. I would say that’s a much great to go by the way than hiring some kind of outsourced stuff [ph] shop, which is how a lot of people do it and is I think most people will tell you almost universally about idea, you need to have people that are more core to your team, building your product.

Steve: So do you recommend marrying your tech cofounder?

Laura: Yes. Well there is no work for free which is awesome, you know you are married and you work together and none has a [inaudible] [0:12:19], you work with your wife; it’s a whole lot of situation you’re at.

Steve: So people who are listening here, Laura started this business with her husband, and her husband is the tech lead on the entire project. And so every now and then she throws in a couple of pizzas in his office and ask for new features.

Laura: Great, exactly.

Steve: So just curious, so when you started out was it just you and Chris or?

Laura: No, because we were able to leverage the team from LKR as well, so he built the initial product by himself, by as far as even like determining the road map, we had feedback from the rest of the team; marketing support from the rest of the team, the team has always run both businesses.

Steve: Yeah, so in the beginning then, what would you say was like a bare bones team that you would need to launch such a product?

Laura: You need a developer and a marketer, and by the way a lot of people skip the marketing side of things. A lot of people are developers and they build a product and they put it out there and they think that if keep adding more features, then they’ll get more users, and not really thinking how people are going to find out about all these features that we are building.

Some people have both skills like Nathan Barry is this really rare brand, he’s like a designer, and a developer and a marketer; he’s just like this amazingly talented human being. If you’re not him which I’m not, I think the two main sides are development and marketing, that doesn’t mean you need a fulltime role for each of those, it can be a project that you are building on the side, for sure but you need to build a good product and you need to let people know about it.

Steve: Yeah, Nathan Barry, he does convert [inaudible] [0:14:03] right, I think he reached out to me in the past. Okay so I didn’t realize that he does everything himself, and it was just pretty much you and your husband in the beginning, and then you had your LKR team handle a lot of the stuff as well.

Laura: Yeah, like customer service, I didn’t have to do that myself because we already had a customer service team, but that was a leg up that I had, and you can defiantly do things like customer service with a two person team.

Steve: So you have the– your husband who’s creating the product and then you have your cell phone marketing and then you have a customer service team, so how did you actually– you mentioned that you leveraged your list to get the word out about the tool, but after you’ve kind of exhausted your list, how else did you reach out to new users?

Laura: So Facebook ads have been huge for us, we also do social media marketing, content marketing, but we’ve gotten a lot of users through Facebook ads and you know that’s another reason that not being freemium has been really valuable for us. We get to collect $49 if not immediately, then sometimes with our different promotions, the two week trial or something like that. Within a month we are collecting $49 for someone, from a customer. So that gives us a really big lee way with how much we can spend per lead on Facebook ads.

Steve: Could we talk about your Facebook ad campaigns for a little bit. And so when you run an ad, do you run them to just one of your sign up pages for a free trial, or how does it work?

Laura: We definitely experimented with different things; we usually are just running people to our Edgar home page. But that is a direct call to action, it depends on the sequence we’re experimenting with, yeah sometimes a free trial, sometimes requesting an invitation, which is the flow that we’ve used a lot really successfully and like requesting invitation, and then you get the invitation for your spot on Edgar in an email a few days later usually. So we’ve experimented with different things.

Steve: Okay, and then have you experimented also with some sort of email sequence or what not, to introduce the tool? Like I was just kind of curious, because I have seen your ads on Facebook, but I didn’t click on them so…

Laura: Yeah, we do follow up marketing via email, calls to action, obviously depending on, are we asking you just to use the tool in the first place, have you signed up for the tool, and we are getting you to activate it to actually use it? Have you already paid us, and do we want to make sure that you are actually getting your content in there, [see you??] or cancel. We’ve built on email sequences for all these different scenarios.

Steve: Okay, but in terms of just getting them to sign up, has the best method been just to drive Facebook people directly to your home page or sign up page?

Laura: Yeah, actually it has, we don’t do, check out this e-course first, or anything like that. The main sort of [inaudible] [00:16:50] we’ve used on ads is just this is a new social media tool for you to check out. It sounds really basic, but a lot of people are interested in social media tools, and there are going to be a good lead, if they are clicking on something that just says, this is a social media tool, take a look. They are obviously very interested in the product.

Steve: Okay, and you don’t have to tell me this, but I’m very curious. How much do you pay per just lead when you are using Facebook ads.

Laura: I know we always keep it under like $10 to $15 a lead.

Steve: Oh, okay, and then how many of those leads eventually sign up for something? What I’m trying to ask is, is it– like how do you determine the profitability of the ad? Do you just take into account like the long term value of that customer, or do you do it based on just getting them to sign up, if that makes sense for you?

Steve: Yeah, so there’s also different ways to look at it, looking it the long term value, SaaS to pull LTV lifetime value. That actually, I think that’s something interesting to talk about, because I think that can be a whole trap– I don’t know, you know what I’m trying to say that a lot of startups fall into. Lifetime value means that it’s going to take a long time to collect that money. So right now, our LTV last time it was around $900, which is great. We cost about 50 bucks a month, but it’s going to take us a long time before a customer gets this $900. And I think a lot of people make the mistake of basing everything like their ads of LTV, and not looking at okay, do we the cash run way to get us to $900.

Because you hear people say, oh, we’re going to make $900 customers, so we can spend $500 for the Facebook ad that gets us a customer. Well, that’s not really true, because you have to pay the 500 now. You get the 900 over a few years, so I like looking at things like one month value, three months value, six month value per lead. And then you are actually comparing money coming in and then time frame where you can afford the money going out.

Laura: So in terms of your Facebook ads, and how do you determine whether the campaign has been a success. Do you compare the three month, the six month, or which time metric do you use?

Laura: I mean we would like to use one month, like I said because we are collecting good amount of money pretty quickly. And it is possible for us on Facebook to break even within a month, so that’s what I look at.

Steve: So what’s really cool about your tool is once you are in and you spent all this time getting your content on there, you are not going to leave. Like you got me pregnant so — I can’t leave. And so I guess that’s one of the advantages of your tool.

Laura: It’s a very sticky tool right, because you load your whole library of social media content and — so we’ve got you there. And also it’s just really genuinely useful once people start using it like you said; it just does your social media for you. So it’s really hard to get rid of that once you have it up and running.

Steve: Yeah, and so — which kind of brings me to kind of my next topic. I was just wondering how your on boarding sequence now, and how that works to get people actually invest the amount of time to actually get started with it. And kind of get them pregnant so to speak.

Laura: Yes, so we found that the more done for you ready to go we can make the tool, the more people will use it. So the challenge with Edgar is that you have to build a small library before you can use the tool. So a lot of people are used to the workflow of doing their social media, one update at a time, think of something to say, send it out. Maybe you are using a tool like Buffer that makes it a little more leverage to sending it out of a time.

With Edgar we really ask you to think differently where you have categories, where your social media updates are at being batched in the categories. So in Edgar, you are going to go through your blog and look through the last 15 posts, and load those updates in Edgar. You are going to come up with 15 inspirational quotes and load them in Edgar.

So it’s a bit of a different mindset for people, and one big change we made that really-really helped us get people using the tool is just simply loading a default schedule. We used to ask you to come up with your schedule yourself of when you are going to send your different categories to different networks. Now we’ve just looked at the data, what are good, just generally performing time slots. And we’ve got that up as a default, the vast majority of our users at least start with that default. And a lot of them just use it forever because it works fine, you don’t really need to make it any more complicated.

So something we are working on now, we have our access input, but it’s pretty buried within the tool. And we are going to make our access input one of the first few steps when you first sign on to the tool. It wasn’t like this when you signed up; we’ve improved a lot, so you probably haven’t seen it. We have kind of step 1, step 2, step 3, and one of the steps will be just copy and paste your blog URL, and then Edgar can automatically go through, pull up all of your blog content into the tool. Now you have priceless content for you ready to go, ready to send out in Edgar.

Steve: That would have saved me a tremendous amount of time.

Laura: Sorry, but now we have it.

Steve: Yeah, great, so what’s funny is I was thinking about this just now. Like the easier you make it for someone to get onboard, do you actually have a tool for them to take their library with them as well? And I was just kind of curious like what are some of the things you do to reduce [inaudible] [00:22:27], because the easier you make it for them to migrate, the easier it is for them to leave as well right?

Laura: Yeah, it can be, I mean it’s a little weird because it’s not like there’s a standard across social tools. We do allow you to import and upload a spreadsheet of your social media updates, but there’s no standard. You are going to have to monkey without spreadsheet, taking it out to another tool. And there’s just little and just to go things like Facebook preview, we can’t do that if you have uploaded it from a CSV. You are going have to — so like unfortunately uploading a book of updates, a good amount of our users do it, but it’s not — the social media platforms don’t allow it to be as seamless as I would like. So that’s actually not the primary way that people get the content into Edgar.

Steve: Okay, and so how — do they just do it manually then right now?

Laura: They do it manually yeah, things like the chrome browser plug-in makes it much easier. Then you can just like open up a bunch of content, you just kind of hit the button over and over again, get it loaded up in Edgar or things like, if you are doing inspirational quotes, like this is where the batching comes in handy. If you are doing quotes, open up a quotes library, do 25 of them at the same time, just copying and pasting into Edgar. Batching by category makes them much faster to get content into the tool.

Steve: So I haven’t actually gone through and signed up for your tool as a real user so to speak. And so can you kind of just go through, like your typical on boarding sequence to get people into the tool? So let’s say I just sign up right now, what’s the first thing that you have me do?

Laura: Yeah, I’m actually opening the App, so I can tell you exactly how we do it. I wish I had like our actual sequencing.

Steve: And you don’t have to give me specifics, but I’m just trying to get out of you, what are some of the challenges in getting people addicted to the tool? And where are some of the hot spots and how did you point those out and get over those?

Laura: Yeah, so we’ve looked at a lot of data, because matrix is really cool for looking at data of what people are actually doing, within your App. So for us the first thing that we ask people to do is to connect to their social media accounts. Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, that stuff has a huge adoption rate, almost everyone who signs up for Edgar, and ever bothers to open the tool at all, connects their social accounts. It’s just so really easy stuff. The next step is getting content in and that’s the hardest step. So something that really helped adoption there is having prefilled categories, I have mentioned categories several times.

We don’t make you come up with your own when you open up the app; we have content from your blog, content from other people’s blogs, words of wisdom, quotes. And so that makes it much easier for people to sort of wrap their heads around. Okay, this is what I do with social media, and I think that’s one of the reasons that Edgar has been so popular. We are very different from other tools because we don’t just send out your social media; we actually help you craft your social strategy, with this category based thinking.

Another category is promotions, a lot of people don’t really seem to strategize okay, how many promotions do I want to send out, as opposed to links to my blog, as opposed to links to other people’s blogs. Edgar helps you do all that automatically, so that really helps people fill in the blanks. And then I mentioned then you go to your schedule page, get everything set up, and we have the default schedule with all your categories already filled in on a time slot to make that super easy for you.

Steve: Okay, yeah, actually all that stuff was actually available when I joined as well. And I remember using your default categories for all of those things as well. So I have actually used a lot of different Saas Apps, and there’s some where I’m too lazy to set up. And I go through like one step and then I forget about it, and then a couple days later lo and behold I get a very specific email, telling me, hey I noticed that you did this step, you didn’t do that’s step, why don’t you just click here and do that step now. Are you guys using — first of all, do you guys do anything similar, and what are the tools that you use to do that?

Laura: Yeah, we use intercom to do that which is really amazing tool, and both does in and out messaging and sends emails. And we are always looking for ways to build out intercom for those specific little nudges that people need.

Steve: Okay and so do you send out those nudges for people that add content as well as connect social media accounts and that sort of thing?

Laura: Exactly, wherever we see in the App that they haven’t done, will send them a reminder.

Steve: Okay, intercom.io, okay, that’s a good one to look up. And in terms of — when I asked on how you actually got the word out about Meet Edgar, you mentioned Facebook Apps. But are you guys doing anything else and why is it just — why is advertising your app just kind of blend to the Facebook platform?

Laura: So what’s really cool about Facebook is that, there are so many amazing targeting options. And the one that we primarily use is targeting based on other pages that a user likes. So we base it on other small business tools. So we obviously do competitors like Hootsuite, Buffer, Sprout Social. We also do tools like MailChimp and Constant Contact, and Aweber that allows you to get really horned in, because you are not really going to like Constant Contact’s page, unless you are using their software, or at least you are potentially using their software, it’s not something that you really like just for fun.

Steve: Right, yeah, exactly yes.

Laura: It’s pretty specific, so it allows us to make sure that the user one is some sort of small business marketing person in that category. And two and that they are interested in paying for tools to market their business. So it’s just a really obvious match. And we also do a good amount of content marketing via blogging and leveraging guest posts, appearing on podcast like this one. All contribute to our marketing, that stuff is a little more slow burn, it kind of adds up over time. I would recommend that any business start blogging from day one, you are not going to bring in a huge amount of traffic immediately, but after a year of blogging, you are going to get your search traffic to a great place.

Another thing we’ve done that’s been really-really effective is asking users to review us on their blog. It creates a lot of really good quality back links, which I think has helped us rank in the search engines. And it’s really genuine; we actually don’t have an affiliate program. So all of anything you read about Edgar online, you know that it’s true, which is something we did very deliberately. I was frustrated as a user looking up reviews for things and only finding affiliate reviews, that didn’t really give me an honest answer. So we are able to link to these reviews and our marketing materials and say you know that this person is telling you exactly what they think of the tool.

Steve: Interesting, so you didn’t actually tell me to write a review, but I ended up writing one anyways last year. Have you been reaching out for those or have just been people just doing them on their own volition?

Laura: It’s both, people write them and we reach out. We tell people; hey we’ll give you a little exposure by linking to this in our emails, and on our social accounts. So that gives them an incentive, but we find that people love talking about tools, like small businesses are very interested in tools that other businesses use. I know I’m, I love hearing about the tools that are running a business behind the scenes. So it seems to be sort of just a natural topic that people like to blog about.

Steve: Yeah totally. And in terms of your blogging efforts have they kind of added value? It’s been a year now, right? – At least since I have been using it – has the blogging kicked in?

Laura: Yeah well I guess now it’s tuning up, just a year now. So we’ve been blogging for Edgar I guess for about six months now. And for us it’s definitely been more of a slow branch channel. I can’t say that we’ve had this huge hit that went viral all over the internet and brought us a ton of leads. But blogging I just think it’s important to give people something to share, to link back to your site.

Steve: Okay, right. And I’m just curious, I’m sure you have a bunch of success stories by now. Have you guys kind of been gathering those together and I don’t know going out and using those in your ads and your other outreach as well, like I’d be happy to do that for you guys too. I was just wondering– you know, just wondering if you’ve been soliciting those?

Laura: Yeah, we get a lot and naturally if you go to www.meetedgar.com/reviews we have a ton of them linked. We actually have way too many and they are not organized. There’s a lot of improvements we can make on this page. But we have email sequences asking people for feedback and people do send– just keep on sending and a lot of great reviews.

Steve: Do you incentivize them in any way or is it just based on an email and you ask them to do it.

Laura: We don’t. You know, we’ve really avoided doing specific incentives for like go to review or for writing a blog post or something like that. I think it’s just sort of better if it feels like a natural friendly win-win relationship.

Steve: Sure, okay. And in terms of other like, pay per click advertising, like are you using adwords or anything with Pinterest or Instagram, that sort of thing?

Laura: No we are hiring someone now for a fulltime online advertising role. And they will be responsible for expanding into those other networks. We just have the bandwidth on our TM to be honest, but that’s definitely the future for us.

Steve: Okay. And you know for some of those people who like myself actually who are thinking about starting their own SaaS business, like what are some of the tips? Let’s say you are me, how much money should I have? How should I start? What’s the best early way to get the word out and that sort of thing? What would you advice? I know it’s a really broad question.

Laura: So above any of that stuff, the most important thing is just honing in on your MVPA, so that you are launching with a really strong and focused idea. I think that’s what– well most SaaS businesses, I mean, most of them never get off the ground. The vast majority do not even make it to the live stage because they get caught up in development.

The classic thing is just feature-create, adding more and more features, getting more and more disjointed, which in turn makes the marketing more and more complicated. You know trying to convey what this tool does. Or people will launch something that they are really not sure if there’s a need in the market for.

Maybe, I think another common problem with SaaS, there’s a lot of great ideas that no one is going to pay for. You see this with apps a lot. I was at the airport the other day and I thought, “I wish I had an app that told me the best terminal to sit in with like the comfiest chairs at this airport.” I think it’s a great idea for an app. I would never pay for it and I don’t think anyone else would either. But I would like to have it.

And you know a lot of people are like “Oh this is cool. I wish I knew a comfy place to sit at the airport. I’m going to build this app or I’m going to build this SaaS,” without really thinking through or testing, is there a market that will actually pay money for this. So you know before getting the word out, the most important thing having this really drawn down specific idea for the problem that you are solving with your software.

Steve: Let me ask you this. I know you guys released Meet Edgar with a pretty bare bones features set, how did you kind of balance the release of features versus like the-must-have versus the nice-to-have?

Laura: I think that’s the hardest thing. And that’s what my husband Chris really taught me a lot about. You have to release with a lot less than you probably think that you can. In my experience that’s kind of– your expertise is in ecommerce and I would imagine ecommerce is similar where you should launch with a more specific focus for what you are selling and then expand from there. Is that accurate?

Steve: Oh yeah absolutely, because you know, you only have a certain amount of capital in the beginning. And you should just release with a product set that you can comfortably feel– that you feel comfortable with, and then just test the market early on and just kind of make adjustments, because a lot of the things aren’t going to sell, and some things are just going to sell like hot cakes. I guess it’s similar to your SaaS business.

Laura: I think it’s actually a really good analogy where some features are going to sell like hot cakes and some features no one is really interested in.

Steve: So can you give me an example of like a feature that you did not have in the beginning that everyone was asking for versus a feature that you put in where no one was actually interested in all of it.

Laura: Yeah. So I have some great examples of that actually. So one of the big arguments that my husband and I had when we were launching was whether we needed our own in-house analytics? Because I thought this is all about repeating the most successful updates. We have to show people the analytics, and he was just like it’s not our core thing.

Our core thing is a library of repeating social media content. That’s the promise of Edgar. Analytics is not 100% necessary. So we compromised by launching without Bitly integration so that you can check out your stuff on Bitly. And I was so nervous to launch. I always was like so apologetically, “oh god, you know we don’t have in-house analytics. I’m sorry but we are going to build them.”

We do have them now and most of our users never even look at that part of the site. It’s really, really neglected. And that’s– it’s so great that we launched later with that. And we launched with a more bare bones, because we could have spent a year building up this amazing analytics far beyond what any of the other tools have. It turns out that’s not the most important feature to people. And that’s an interesting one because actually a lot of people think that’s important, so they’ll ask you about it, like when I tell people about Edgar, that often comes up. They’ll ask me about the analytics. But when they are actually using it, I think people just don’t really have time to even look.

Steve: You know what’s hilarious about this is that when I first started using the tool, I asked for that RSS import feature and you told me that you were working on analytics at the time. And I was like, “I don’t care about analytics, I just want to get my stuff in the tool.”

Laura: Right, I obviously should have listened to you because yes, the import has been a much more used feature. Also the spreadsheet info, I mentioned most of our users are importing this spreadsheet, but a lot more are than I suspected. I thought we were going to add that and no one was going to use it. But people do use the spreadsheet import because a certain amount of our users have just been organizing their social on spreadsheets on their own anyway. So they kind of already have some sort of spreadsheet they can tweak and then put it on Edgar.

Steve: Yeah and totally and actually you could probably do the Facebook snippets also right, by having a separate field on spreadsheet upload that as well?

Laura: Like the preview?

Steve: Yeah like the preview.

Laura: I think there’s some weird technology thing without actually– I don’t know. I can be wrong about that.

Steve: Okay. That’s just interesting that you said that, because I remember when you told me about analytics, I was saying to myself, “Yeah, I guess” I was like “Bitly is probably good enough for me,” is what I was thinking at the time. Okay, that’s hilarious. That’s really interesting to know. So going forward then, what is your next strategy to kind of expand this, like you are probably well beyond the testing and validation stage. You got a bunch of customers at this point, what’s the grand plan with Meet Edgar.

Laura: So the grand plan is just to keep improving the tool based on that core promise. So with any tool, just like – we are talking about with an ecommerce site – there’s a lot of stuff that you could add. So with the social media tool as some people are interested in a tool that monitors your brand on social media, or a tool that does customer service via social media. We would most likely not add those things to Edgar. Those are other social media tools. You can use a different tool that you got.

We are a really content marketing focused social media tool. So our road map just looks at ways of making Edgar smarter. When should you be sharing different types of content? Which is your most effective content? Which is your least effective content? How can we be a little smarter in how we are sharing content from your blog? That’s a really interesting one to me. You know, you want to share new posts in a different frequency, or if you want to share old posts. So our roadmap is focused around improving your content marketing on social media.

Steve: Okay. Are you guys going to be doing like AB testing of post headlines also?

Laura: Yeah, that’s something that’s possible. It’s not in the roadmap right now, but I think that would be aligned with this core theme of improving the content itself on social.

Steve: Okay, I was just curious because that’s like the first things that popped into my head actually when you were talking.

Laura: Yeah, I knew that was going to come.

Steve: Let’s see, what else did I want to cover here? Because I just think the whole SaaS model is just really cool, because once you have that customer base, the money just continues to flow in on a regular basis. Are you guys planning on doing– so Edgar is going to stand on its own, but at some point, once you have all those nice features in place, are you just going to leave that tool as is and then start something else or—? What I’m trying to ask is are you encapsulating all the futures in Edgar and then creating new tools to fulfill different needs for people, or are you just going to gradually expand the features of Edgar and make it a more encompassing tool? Does that make sense?

Laura: Yeah, neither is the plan, but if we were going to do one, we’ll probably do other [inaudible] [0:40:26]. But I think it’s an interesting question, because I actually think that a big mistake a lot of entrepreneurs make is diversifying too much too soon. We have so much room to grow Edgar. Right now we have about 2,500 customers.

Steve: Wow, nice.

Laura: That’s great. It’s so far from hitting every small business in America that uses social media marketing. We have hundreds of thousands of customers more just in the US that could sign up for Edgar. So I think a lot of tools make the mistake of, maybe they build an enterprise tool to go alongside of it. Maybe they go international. It’s a lot more boring to say, “No, we are just trying to reach every small business,” but that’s our strategy.

Steve: Okay. Well it sounds good then. So Laura, I know we’ve been chatting for a while and if anyone wants to check out Edgar, or reach you if they have any questions, where can they find you?

Laura: Yeah, so Edgar is at www.meeetedgar.com and that’s also our handle on Twitter and on Facebook and my Twitter handle is LKR.

Steve: Awesome. Hey Laura, thanks a lot for coming on the show and thank you for introducing me to Edgar, because for me at least, and I’m like a walking testimonial here, it’s really done wonders for my social media platforms, because I don’t really have time for that stuff. And it’s just– the fact that it’s been able to automate everything has really saved me a lot of time. So thanks a lot for that.

Laura: Awesome. You are welcome.

Steve: All right Laura, take care.

Laura: Thank you.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode with Laura Rhoda. Prior to meetedgar.com managing all of my social media accounts was one big chore that I did not look forward to doing every single week. And Laura has created an awesome tool that I whole heartedly recommend you check out, because it has saved me a bunch of time. And I just to make it very clear that I am not affiliated with this tool at all.

For more information about this episode go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode77, and if you enjoyed this episode, please got to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner, every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

076: How To Make $5000 Per YouTube Video Teaching Men How to Dress Well With Antonio Centeno

How To Make $5000 Per You Tube Video Teaching Men How To Dress Well

Antonio Centeno is someone who I met at the New Media Expo in Las Vegas a few months back and I’m really glad that I did.

Antonio runs the popular site RealMenRealStyle.com which is a site that helps men educate themselves and build a wardrobe that best complements their style.

He also a regular contributor for the awesome blog Art Of Manliness.

Antonio’s blog gets a ton of traffic and he also has a very strong YouTube following of over 250,000 subscribers. Today, he’s going to teach us the secrets to his success. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why most people give up when they are about to succeed
  • How Antonio created a large following for his YouTube Channel and blog
  • The method by which Antonio proliferates his content to different channels
  • Antonio’s scalable content strategy
  • How Antonio attracts email subscribers
  • How Antonio makes money with his business
  • Where Antonio gets most of his traffic from
  • How Antonio ranks his articles in the search engines
  • How Antonio is able to attract sponsors willing to pay $5000 per YouTube video
  • How to approach companies to solicit sponsorships

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle. So you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Antonio Centeno on the show. Antonio is someone who I met at the New Media Expo in Las Vegas a couple of months back, and I’m really glad that I did. Now Antonio runs the popular site realmenrealstyle.com, which is a site that helps men educate themselves and build a wardrobe that best compliments their style. And he’s also a regular contributor to the Art of Manliness. Now Antonio’s blog gets a ton of traffic, and he also has a very strong YouTube following of over 250,000 subscribers.

Now it’s funny when Antonio and I first met and he told me about his website and his YouTube channel, I immediately got self conscious about what was I wearing, which I think was an old red t-shirt and jeans at the time. Anyway not only is Antonio well dressed, but he is a very cool guy, easy to talk to, down to earth, and with that welcome to the show Antonio, how are you doing today man?

Antonio: I’m doing good Steve, and if I were to remember the meeting, you actually were dressed — you weren’t dress super — you weren’t wearing a suit. But you definitely went out wearing a redy t-shirt there anyway. You looked sharp and your hair if I remember correctly was perfect, you had it slicked back, you were looking good. So and you actually had nice shoes if I remember correctly.

Steve: Thank you Antonio, I appreciate that. I generally do not actually do too much about my appearance.

Antonio: And a lot of guys they think that, that isn’t the case, but we don’t walk outside naked do we? Or if you do you often times, in California I know you get arrested.

Steve: You know west Californians, yeah.

Antonio: Yeah, but it’s something that I find it’s a door. It’s a way for me to reach men in particular, although 10% to 15% of my audience is women. But I find it this is a great way for me to show them how this one thing when they make a change, can affect their business, can affect their personal relationships, can affect their confidence, and that’s what I get excited about. Honestly Steve, clothing doesn’t mean that much to me, it’s about helping these individuals become what they know they can be. And I get really excited when I get all these success stories, because it starts with the clothing, but it leads to so much more.

That they go up and they speak to that woman they’ve been almost invisible to, but she noticed his shoes and all over sudden he had the courage to talk to her. And a year later they are married, or a guy that wasn’t doing well at work, wasn’t getting recognized, all over sudden he started dressing the part so he can be a customer facing rep. And next you know he is getting promoted twice, in the period of a year, and all of a sudden he is making three times more money than he ever was. And these guys come back; I mean that’s what I get excited about.

Steve: You know Antonio I must say that you stood out in the crowd right away. Not only because you were wearing a suit, but because you kind of held your way in a certain way that I knew that you were important so to speak. And so when you sat down next to me I was like okay, I got to talk to this guy.

Antonio: Yeah, and I think when I saw you I had — and I had seen you multiple times at the conference. I’m like, that guy looks familiar, and as soon as you — I think you said your website, I’m like boom! I know it, when I knew it, because I had found you on the web. And I remember reading your story years ago when you started off. So it was mutual, and I’m very happy that we are able to connect. So for your audience what can I give them?

Steve: Yes, so the reason I wanted you on the show specifically, was because you have such a strong YouTube presence. But before we kind of get into that, probably some of the readers, listeners out there don’t know who you are. And so I was hoping you could give a quick background story, how you got started and how your journey led to Real men, Real style. Because I understand you used to run an e-commerce store as well, or do you still do that?

Antonio: I have pretty much turned that off. But I’ll take a step back, so I grew up in west Texas, I don’t come from a family of style. I grew up in the trailer park, so I guess you can call it a type of style. But no, I was just a kid who grew up in the trailer park, west Texas, we feared tornados, yadi yadi yada, but I did go out to California during the summers. My parents were separated and divorced, and I learned a lot about, wow, there’s a whole world out there, when we would go out to a thousand notes [inaudible 00:07:00]. Now first forward in a Cornell College in Mount Vernon , Iowa, small River [ph] large school, and we take one course at a time. I didn’t know what I was going to do, but I knew I wasn’t going to go to med school.

I had tried to go to med school and very soon I realized well, I do not like the organic chems. I ran to a Marine Corp recruiter, and that’s when my life, I think went down a very different path than I had planned for it. And all of a sudden, I’m in the United States Marine Corp, I’m in OCS training. I went through and next thing I know I’m finding myself in Iraq, and this is before the war. So we were right in there and I was with 3rd battalion first marines. And we went to — walked through [inaudible 00:07:36] and then over in to Bagdad. So I’m able to leave the Marine Corp as an officer of marines, having learned a lot about leadership. And for the first time, I had my first costume suit, and that was my Marine Corp uniform.

I learned what it’s like to actually wear a suit of honor, and feel like wow, I felt great. We would have the Marine Corp birthday, I would go out on the town, and I would feel like a million bucks. I mean when people would look at you and you wearing your medals, you’re wearing your uniform, you know it makes you just look — I mean, I would never get so much attention from women, is when we wore uniforms. And that’s when I think when it dawned on me, the power of presentation.

Now like many — most things we learn in life, you learn about something and then you forget about it, and you move on. So I went to business school, University of Texas, after living in Ukraine for a while. My wife is Ukrainian and I was running a nonprofit over there, right after the Marine Corp, but over at business school in Texas, I started getting excited about entrepreneurship.

I met a number of people who do amazing things. Guys like what was it’s — founder who is — not Herb Kelleher, I’m think the founder of Southwest Airlines. I can’t remember his name, but the guy came in and just I loved his presentation. Because he walks into a building, it’s non-smoking, he is smoking a cigarette, he didn’t care, he is like, I just gave five million to this school, what are you going to do? I’m like, I like this guy, because everyone else want to go down consulting. Everyone else wants to go down investment banking. They are making it sound like this stuff is exciting and I took that– I don’t know — I couldn’t become an excel jockey and get excited about it. So I’m like, I like this entrepreneurship thing.

And I ended up speaking with a guy; I had some custom suits made by a travelling tailor. He explained to me he is from India, had a fourth grade education, he was making a half a million a year, after 35 years of building up his customer base. And he only works six months out of a year. And I’m like you know what, I have more than a fourth grade education and I think to be back to that Roosevelt quote, about you get a college school education you have a high school education, you’ll steal a rail car, if you have a college education, you should be able to steal a whole rail road.

So the idea is okay, I can do this, and I can do it quicker and so I went in into the custom clothing industry as a mercenary. My whole goal was simply to make money; I saw there was a hole in the market, and I knew a little bit about custom clothing, I just felt that there was opportunity there. And that did me pretty well, but what I learned very quickly it’s a hard industry, it took me about five years to figure out that my business model scaling up wasn’t going to work, especially if I wanted to be able to free myself in the business.

So at about that point I started to pivot, I created my own marketing company called Real Men Real Style, so I wanted to get traffic to my website. And that’s when I realized that marketing side in the men’s sphere was a lot more profitable, scalable, and enjoyable, than what I was doing.

So that’s about the time I turned off tailored suits, it still exists as an information portal, gets about 70,000 people a month to it. But Real Men Real Style, we get about, close to a million visitors a month, about 35,000 a day. Our YouTube channel gets that, sometimes more. And then I got a couple of other men style, Q&A websites, and things like that.

So all in all — I don’t know, I have daily audience of about 80,000 men, 90% men. And I leverage that to sell my information products, to sell my kindle books, to sell my courses, affiliate linking, all the various different ways your audience has probably heard, and I learned through the school of hard knocks, how to make money.

Steve: I was just curious, it sounds like a tailored suit, was that like an ecommerce store, or was that a brick and mortar?

Antonio: It was an ecommerce, so I was the middle man; I had a partner over in Bangkok. When I first started my company in 2007, I traveled the world, I went Boron [ph] in London, Bangkok, Hong Kong, and I had tea with about 200 tailors. And I identified about five or six that I could possibly partner with. I had 20 custom suits made, tore them apart, ended up going finding two people I could partner with, and they were my back end. And I had to create sales. And I created a website where you could enter your measurements, you could enter design the suit, and it would be delivered to your door in a few weeks.

And in 2007, that was a great idea, there was only one of the company in the world, two maybe that were like me. First forward 2013, there’s 200 companies like this. It’s a much harder market, everyone else is taking the investment capital, I’m still growing organically. And honestly I wasn’t going to play that game, when I knew my competitors had money to spend and were rebuilding their sites every two months, and could focus on increasing those conversions and use paper click advertising. And I really was at a point where I didn’t truly understand the value of a customer. So I was not sophisticated enough to play in that field.

Steve: I was just curious though, I mean it sounds pretty scalable too though right, your ecommerce store?

Antonio: No, I would say it’s not, because custom like that, it wasn’t scalable, because I didn’t control the back end.

Steve: Got it.

Antonio: So it’s like if I could have orders coming in, and then I would guarantee them that it’s going to be there in three weeks. And then my partner would — because he is got other partners, he would say, “Hey sorry, a machine broke and it’s going to be six weeks till I can get you anything.” And that’s why, when I had that stuff sort of happen to me, and literally I’m having to refund, apologize for things out of my control, I realized I didn’t want to be in that sphere. I didn’t want to be in that area anymore.

Steve: Okay, and so then you decide to start Real Men Real Style and I know you got a ton of friends, I don’t actually see a whole bunch of ads in your site. So is it mainly just your own info products and affiliate offers?

Antonio: That’s true; I don’t allow ads on my google videos. And that brings me — pull me back anywhere from a couple to a few thousand dollars a month. And that’s nice. But my goal is to sell my own products. One thing I learned years ago, I think it was Ryan Dyce or somebody talked about the importance of owning your own products, because even if you promote a great affiliate system, like for me I’d say he has a great affiliate system. I’m proud to be associated with him, but also only get a percentage of what he sells. When I sell my own products, I get 100% of that, and I like that a lot better.

Steve: Okay, and so in terms of your sales, like how does your YouTube property and your blog kind of tie together. Which would you say generates the most sales, or do they just kind of work together. Like which is your more valuable properties is what I’m trying to ask?

Antonio: Oh, my blog of course, because I don’t own– anyone that thinks they own their social like their Facebook page, or YouTube page, or Twitter account, you don’t. Twitter can shut you down, YouTube– every day I go on there, I know that they can turn off my channel. And I saw it happen, you ever seen that six pack short guy?

Steve: Yeah.

Antonio: A couple years ago, his channel got shut down for a couple days. And now he is a darling of YouTube. They spend I mean it’s like a $30 million a year business of which like half of that is placement on YouTube ads. But yeah, before that…

Steve: Mike Chang that is his name.

Antonio: Yeah, Mike Chang yeah. He got shut down and he just go – it doesn’t matter how big you are, if YouTube doesn’t think you are playing the game, or if their algorithm — somebody says you are violating things, they can shut you down. So my goal is always to get them off of YouTube, get them off of Facebook, get them off of Pinterest, which Pinterest believe it or not, is my number refer of traffic.

But get them off of that and onto my email list, because I own my email list. And I use Infusionsoft, I started off with AWeber, but Infusionsoft is really where I build my email list now and I own that.

Steve: So did you start out with your blog or your YouTube channel first?

Antonio: I started off with the blog first, and then YouTube was how I differentiated the blog from anything outside there. And if you go back to Michael Porter, do you ever study him, I knew you are…

Steve: I did not know.

Antonio: Yeah, so business guy, really he wrote the book on — we talk about like unique selling positions and stuff like that online, or having an edge. He wrote the book Competitive Advantage back in the — it was the early 80s, late 1970s. So go find that book, Harvard business school press, but what he talks about; three ways to differentiate yourself. And one of them is being unique, the other one is offering an amazing service, the other one is price. I knew I did not want to compete on price, so my thing is to offer amazing service and to offer a unique position. And so to stand out from the crowd, I realized that there was only one other guy doing video, and his name was Erin Merino.

And I looked at his videos, and honestly I was like this guy sucks. I could do better than him, What’s funny now, he is one of my best friends, and he is a business partner. And we started the conference together, but at the time I was jealous. And for two years, I wrote and I created content, but I didn’t put up– maybe it was a year and a half, I didn’t put up video, I kept complaining and my wife, she just said shut up or put up. You need to go out there and if you are going to do it, you do it.

So yeah, I started creating videos, I said I was going to create ten, then I created 100, then I created 200 videos in 200 days. And it’s one of those things you got to give the fair shake. And he wanted — I think Gary Vaynerchuk has said you know he had someone complain on Twitter once that, “Hey, I tried a million ways and I can’t make this work.”

And Gary — I was like are you sure — I mean on tweet spot; it was like really, you tried a million ways? He is like, “No, I didn’t try a million.” He is like well, maybe you tried a 100, he said, no I didn’t try 100. Maybe you tried ten, he’s like I only tried it once yet he is complaining he didn’t try—he went and tried it a million ways.
So the point is if you are going to do anything, you need to give it a fair shake. And that’s what I did with YouTube, and it wasn’t until we put those first — I mean it wasn’t until I put 200 videos, I hit my first million views, now we are closing in like on 20 million.

Antonio: Wow, you know Antonio what you are experiencing with these people is not uncommon. I get people who come to me they say, “Hey, ecommerce is not working.” And then when I dig a little bit deeper, I realize that they’ve only doing it for like a couple of months, right? And that’s just not enough time to establish any sort of business.

Antonio: And they see the best out there, they see guys– and Pat Flynn he is a great guy. I have him– good friend of mine, and when they see John Dumas, and they see these numbers, because they put out their finance reports, they think that this is normal or that this is doable within 18 months, or six months. Understand John it made him a partner of a high speed low drive; this is a former army tank officer. This guy has been through a lot, and he works seven days a week. He is the hardest working man I know, and there’s a reason why he is as successful as he is.

Pat Flynn, I know he’s pulled back on the number of hours he works now, but he used to work crazy hours, and he’s dedicated, and if anyone knows better I mean this is the kind of guy that he really is an amazing person. Those results are achievable, but they are not typical and people need to understand that you can get to that point, but it may take you five years. It may take you ten years. It’s making money online is not simple.

Steve: So it’s funny you mentioned that when you started your blog you wanted to differentiate yourself, but you chose to do that on a property that you didn’t not own. And so I was just kind of curious in the very beginning it takes a lot time to do stuff. So how did you kind of juggle writing actual blog post versus doing videos? And which did you prioritize in terms of content in the beginning?

Antonio: So I think it’s J. Bear who talks about this, like how to create one piece of content, and then create eight more pieces from it. So my strategy now is that, so I start everything with bullet points in a video, and then from that articles will be created, show notes, transcripts, podcasts. So I usually — but I already had hundreds of articles that I had written over at the Art of Manliness at a tailored suit in our style guide section.

So I simply created videos that were based off of those articles, because I already knew that content super well. In addition, in my emails, I always ask the second question I ask which I stole from Derek Hopper over at Social Triggers, is to ask people what’s your biggest problem. And people love to tell you their problems, and they love to complain, and guess what, that is perfect information. You can read off word for word in a video and solve that problem and other people are going to love it.

So right there, you will never run out of ideas, if that’s what you use. But as to what is my priority, initially it was the written content. Now it has become the video, and I stay on YouTube even though I don’t own it, because it is the best platform right now for video, for reaching out. Although Facebook video is blowing me away in terms of engagement, but like YouTube I don’t only– and it’s a little bit– Facebook is always about pay to play, so.

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit, so you’ve been dabbling with Facebook video, so you just have one piece of core content, you create a blog post out of it, a podcast, and then videos, right? All around the same theme, and then you post it on all these platforms?

Antonio: That’s what I try to do, and I try to scale as much as possible and I’m actually pulling back on the amount of content I’m putting up, because it’s one of those things I don’t have enough platforms to share it all on, and that’s now becoming– I’ve got — the good problem of I got to find out ways, because we’ve got so much great content and how to better distribute it.

Steve: And in terms of just YouTube, was your growth to 250 000 subscribers, was that kind of organic, or did you do anything special to accelerate that process?

Antonio: There is a lot of things that you want to do in a video, so make sure you’ve got a call to action. I find that when I ask people to like, I ask people to subscribe, I don’t have to do it as much anymore, but I– if you don’t do that in a video, you won’t get them to take action. In addition, you want to have certain incentives for them to do so. But again my goal was always to get them over the Real Men Real Style.

I’ve got a nice little opt in page, and I’ve got a free eBook, which that eBook has been downloaded over 200,000 times. And so you think about that we collected almost over 200,000 email addresses, and we’ve got a great free eBook that I really could sell. But it’s something that I just love giving away that great lead that exists sends an immediate sign of good will, and it’s something that is powerful now that other people passed around.

Steve: Okay, and then just in terms of your income sources, your own products is the primary source from what I’m hearing then?

Antonio: That, I also have premium sponsors. So a lot of people– I’ve got a media kit and whenever somebody comes to advertise with me, I’ll put it out there, but I charge $5,000 for a video, and that turns away a lot of people, but the one– here’s the issues. I used to not have that, I used to– okay, I would even take– you could send me a great $500 pair of shoes, and I’ would– okay I’ll try to do a video for you.

The problem there is those $500 shoes, unless I resell them, I can’t use them to pay my rent, I can’t use them to pay my mortgage and my employees don’t take that as payment. And I’ve got about seven people that work, I’ve recently cut back, but I used to have almost a dozen, but those– and I’m sorry those are contracts, because I’ve got them all over the world.

But it was something that I realized, well I need to have more liquid cash because I’m making commitments and people aren’t always valuing. And so I remember– I’ll never forget, once I flipped that switch, yes I had the say no quite a bit more, but all of a sudden I had companies saying sure, not a problem. And all of a sudden you’re getting paid $5,000 for a video, $4,000 for an article, and it allowed me to do a better job. All of a sudden I’m able to hire an artist, I‘m able to hire a content manager, and I’m able to work less, I bring in better.

So it’s one of the—it’s kind of almost like a catch 22 though because you want to be– how much traffic do you need, how– at what point can you do this, but I would recommend at an early point putting together a professional looking media kit, because that way whenever you– I even say yes to somebody, but I don’t charge them. And I do that occasionally with an non-profit or somebody that like stands out for military virtue, or people that have prostate cancer or things like that. I can show them that, hey this is what I normally charge, so they don’t– they realize what they are getting, and that’s– you’ve got to put value on your services, and what you offer, because no one else will.

Steve: So would you say that this YouTube channel and sponsorships have become a significant source of income outside of the products that you sell?

Antonio: Oh yeah, it’s like 20%.

Steve: Okay, and at what point did you– were you able to solicit these offers, and did they come to you? Like what’s your strategy for getting these offers in the first place?

Antonio: At this point they’d come to me, and it really was a reaction to getting so many people reaching out and wanting to guest post, wanting to advertise, wanting to place things in there. And we feel we’ve taken this to a whole another level, now we have a conference that the goal of the conference is simply to bring in all of our advertisers and other content creators so that they can strike deals together and their super fans are just there just to hang out and have fun.

Steve: Okay, but if you can take us back to just the very beginning when your YouTube channel was just starting to get a little bit popular, did you actually go out and seek this deals or were they still coming to you?

Antonio: No, you know I wasn’t seeking them, I’m in this sphere, and I say it’s specific enough, then we were attractive to them, you have to look at what kind of an audience you’re getting in front of. So I have a friend, his problem is that most of the audience, the people he attracts are 14 to 20 years of age, and they really don’t have much to spend, so he’s got to figure out other ways to monetize.

My audience is usually between the ages of 20 and 45, sometimes even a bit older, and they are mostly men, and they are looking to make purchases. So if you got a shoe company, if you have a neck tie company, if you have a– if you’ve got an app that is going to target men, then we’re a great company to work with. And they can very quickly figure that out, but I just found them because now our traffic numbers are so great, opportunities keep coming to us.

We’re now trying to do a better job of reaching out to other companies, but I’m very careful with that, because if a company doesn’t understand the power of online marketing, it’s going to be a hard sell, so I’m still going for the low hanging fruit, which has been companies coming out and reaching out to me.

Steve: So how did you get your first sponsor? Did they come to you or-?

Antonio: Let me see, my first sponsor– it was a friendship started and it was a bag company called Blue Color Luggage, and they were just getting started and we agreed that they would pay a certain amount per month, and we would create two pieces of content for them. And what’s funny is after a year of doing this more opportunities came may way, and I was always– I’m always trying to get people to come into a long term relationship, because the amount of time that you’ve got to sell a premium sponsorship it’s worth– ideally what you want to have is somebody that can come in a larger company like one of my best was Lee Jeans. And we had them for a year and a half, and that worked out really well because for them, it’s about awareness of their brand.

And Blue Color was a great company, but they always had to see a direct return on investment. So that’s the danger with smaller companies, is that it’s often times performance based versus larger companies, it’s more of like they don’t need to see the direct performance, they just need to build brand awareness.

So and it’s two different types of sales channels in my opinion, but we have found that both of them were coming to us, we’re able to strike a deal and make it work, but I’m always– I always tell people try to get in for a longer term deal, you want repeat customers.

Steve: That’s curious I was– just based on what you said I’m just kind of curious how you convince the smaller customers who want direct response, do you offer any sort of guarantees when you put up one of these videos, or can you suggest certain numbers that they might achieve?

Antonio: I can show them a little bit a back end, or like a link of the quantcast so they can see the numbers. I also show them examples, our media kit has a few testimonials in there, and I can show them some back end stuff. But they can often look at our social media, the numbers that we get there, it is something that I– because we get so many offers now, I haven’t had to pursue those too much. And it really is a –there are no guarantees in life, you get married there is no guarantee, when you have kids there is no guarantee.

So I’m sorry, this is– I can’t guarantee this, but I can show you that this is what we’ve done and this is who we’ve worked with, and it’s a great offer in my opinion, if I can get you that return on investment that you’re looking for.

Steve: Okay, and then earlier you mentioned that in your videos you want to bring people back to your side, so and yet you have a whole bunch of subscribers. So do you have two calls to actions in your videos, or are you just mainly trying to get people to your side, but then they just happen to subscribe anyways?

Antonio: No, I have to admit I experiment with my call to actions, and we probably need to standardize a little bit more. I’ve recently brought on, that’s been six months, I have a video gentleman now who edits all my videos, and has been working on that, so we can now link directly, from the video over to our Real Men Real Style. I usually do try to get them off though, you can look it out we’ve got like well over 250,000 YouTube subscribers. To meet that number is honestly it’s a false number because a lot of those, they’ve been on there so long, they don’t check it. YouTube changes that up too, because it used to be that they would always get an email from me, whenever I put out a new video, YouTube has changed that up a bit. So it used to be you could almost email people through YouTube, you can’t do that anymore.

So, that’s why I like owning my listing, getting them off of there. Now it’s a number that some people get fixated on. I do keep it public because I know certain companies will look for that. But to me the big metric is really whenever I send out an email, how many people can I direct to a website, or get to make a purchase or get to take action, and join a course or a product.

Steve: Okay. So when someone sponsors one of your YouTube videos, you actually send out a complementary email blast as well driving people.

Antonio: No I wrap that in. So I got every thick in my media kit individually priced email, podcast, video, blog article, and if they want then buy a package, then we can wrap it up. I do notice that it’s much more effective if I put together a video with an article, and wrap it with an email blast. And that’s when I usually sell, because I like to wrap those up together. And then I try to wrap it into a three part where we do it in over three months, because you need to warn people up to a company. It’s one of those things that you can’t just expect them without ever seeing this, to just buy. Online people like to get touched where they like to see something multiple times.

So I also I try to work with companies that are smart in doing things like remarketing, because then if someone goes to their website, they can follow them around the web. So I’m also careful about what companies I work with, because if they don’t understand remarketing, or retargeting, or any other ad of Facebook, you know it’s just hard the stuff. Then I really– I don’t think they’ll be able to effectively use our advertising.

Steve: Okay, that makes total sense. And I noticed that too with the info products that I sell. Often times it requires multiple touches. I have people sign up after following me for years actually before finally deciding to sign up. So just curious, once– I just signed up for your email list today to get my seven deadly sins menu. Thankfully I’m not violating too many of those. But I was just curious how you run your email list. Since I haven’t had a chance to go down the entire funnel, how do you kind of structure the emails that you send out, and what frequency do you send them out at?

Antonio: I need to do that better, we’re actually reviewing it right now. But I had, I would say definitely I’m going to get you used to getting emails from me. We send out an email immediately which you received in one day or received one that will ask you what your biggest Style question is. The second email, I’m going to go in and start making offers to you. And then I will run you through a series of emails in which I’m making offers. I’m telling you stories. I’m telling you why this matters, but I’m still sending you to my sales page. My goal is to get you to make a purchase and to get you in there. I’m going to actually lengthen this and add more information, marketing into it.

And now that our product, Dec we are about to launch a new course called “The Personal Image System.” So I’m going to want to integrate that more. And I’m going to double and triple the length of my current drip response. But now I’m moving towards the schedule of– emails from me go out on Tuesdays, Thursdays, and Saturdays, and I’m wanting to make sure that my sequence kind of trains you up for that. I want people to get used to getting more emails from me. People ask, “What’s the best time or how often should you send an email?” It really comes down to what have you conditioned your audience to expect from you, and are you delivering value pretty much every time or are you making an offer?

Steve: You know, Antonio I’m just on you totally– I was just on Pat Flynn’s podcast for this, but I lengthen my out of response sequence from 9 emails to about 30 emails and my conversion rate 3Xed. So I was making 3X the number of sales that I was before. So clearly it works.

Antonio: Yeah, and it’s one of those things we let things hold back, like yeah I use this as an excuse. It’s simply moving over to my new product, but yeah we’ve got so much, because I’ve used broadcasts way too much, and I want to pull back from using broadcasts, they are a lot of work, and people just stop tuning, or they tune out of a broadcast, but it’s about recency. There’s a guy named– do you follow Jermaine Griggs?

Steve: I do not, but I’ve heard of him.

Antonio: Yeah Jermaine Griggs, he brings in the– he talks about recency all the time. And when someone signs up for your email list, that is the best time to engage with them, those first few weeks they are interested. And my problem is I’ve got people on my email list, and I’ve taken off a lot of people that become non-responsive, because after a few months, they’ve moved on. They don’t care about Style anymore. They went through the interview. They got the job. Now they are focused on their job. And you know that’s great for them, but it’s bad for you because you sometimes end up getting a lot of dead wood on your email list, and you need to get those people off.

Steve: Absolutely. One thing I also want to comment, because I went through your site pretty in depth before this interview, and I like how you set up the start here page. I actually went ahead and watched your video, and it told me what your entire site was all about. And I thought that was just an excellent introduction. I like the way you structure that, because then I was introduced to all your products. I got to hear you speak. I got to know what you look like, and so I thought it was just really good the way you had that set up.

Antonio: Thanks. I feel bad I need to update it. It’s one of those things that we get so many things on our plate, and I know that I’m going to update that at the start of like two years. But the cool part about that is any one listening knows and that’s the beauty of an online business; is it does force you to think in systems, and allows you to create something that if you create it in a timeless manner, it can live on. And literally years later, somebody is watching that and they are getting a feel of what everything is about.

Steve: I think it was just key that to actually hear you speak and the way you dressed and the way you hold yourself. I thought that was pretty key especially for a site like yours.

Antonio: I’m trying to– on my video– and that’s why video has been so successful force, because we get out there, we show we are a real person. It really has helped with sales. I think three times an increase– you know this is as an old step, but when I went from having just no video to having video, I found that sales of my e-products increased three times. I’m not going to say that has held up for three years, but it is something that I do believe in the power of video sales.

Steve: Absolutely. Can we talk a little bit about traffic? So where does all your traffic come from? The break down.

Antonio: Mostly Google organic; the vast majority, Google organic. And that is a good thing; it’s also a bad thing. A good thing because it’s free, bad thing, but we could get– if they change the algorithm, things could come crushing down. So I’m always trying to figure out ways of– I would say don’t be afraid of paper click, if you have something to sell and if you can actually figure out what the value of a new customer is, then you can always pay for that, but for us, organic traffic and the area because– that really has been useful force.

One thing we did about a year ago, we started focusing more on infographics, and that has really helped out in a space which not a lot of people were creating new infographics or images. So we went out there and I hired an artist in the Philippines. Now I have an artist in Ukraine. And she’s now helping create amazing infographics and banners and images. And in fact if you spent some time on my website, you saw that it’s very banner heavy. I use a lot of image and there’s not so much wording although once you get to the text and the articles, there’s tons of wording. But my actually home page is mostly made of the banners and just arranged in ways, but I find it, visually, that’s what I wanted.

Steve: I assumed that you’ve done that because of Pinterest. Right is that– some of the larger graphics that you have on some of your posts.

Antonio: You know it wasn’t so much about Pinterest, but we do go back and we pin them and that’s kind of been a where you go– you give and take. And I have noticed that because we were doing well on Pinterest, I wanted to have more images. And once I– when I made the hire for my latest artist, it was about that she could create these type of banners, and she creates 10 to 20 a day. And these are so great for Facebook, for posting. Anytime we post anywhere, we use these banners. And that’s much more attractive than just assuming that Google Plus or Pinterest is going to grab the right image. We actually create that image.

And I try to have some strong copy. The copy is more– I’m an educator. I’m not so much an entertainer. And I guess three ways I feel about getting traffic online, you are an educator or you are an entertainer, or you are basically providing latest and greatest– you are engaging with the latest and news. I’m a bit of an entertainer. I would say not too much, but I’m definitely an educator. And I love that space because what I educate and talk about is timeless. So I can step away– we are talking about I’m going to take a trip to Ukraine, and I can step away from my business for a few months and it will be fine. I could technically place– step away from my business for a few years and it would be okay.

Steve: So just curious, you mentioned that a large portion of your traffic is Google organic. Is there anything that you did to kind of accelerate your search ranking? Or was it just kind of based on content?

Antonio: So you do want to– I focus on creating the best content in the world for a very specific [inaudible] [00:39:39] area. If you have a good way like in– if you put in a question and you find an e-how article, I pick on that one a lot, but I feel because I read those articles, I feel less intelligent after reading that article. I mean it’s like that was so bland and so useless that I don’t even know what you just said.

I get ultra-specific. I talk about how a man over the age of 40 who’s recently divorced, how he can dress better and have more confidence. Now I can tell you that’s not for most men. But if you are a man over the age of 40 and you are looking to dress or dressing [inaudible] [0:40:11] you’re going back on the dating scene, that article is a god-sent. And you are going to share it, you are going to love it, you are going to pay attention to it.

And I try to focus in– each of my articles is probably only written for 5-10%, the most maybe 15% of men and that’s by design. Because I want to be useful and I want to be relevant for the man looking for that particular answer. So that helped a lot. The other one is I gave away some of my best content. I write with The Art of Manliness and I have always given Brad some of my best content.

I started writing with him when he first started off with like 8 articles. And I believed in his mission, and I’ve always given him some of my best content. And that’s perfectly fine because that website gets like half a million visitors a day. It just sends me a good amount of traffic of very high quality traffic. And it is probably one of the portals that people tell me that– how they found my website.

Steve: Okay and so to summarize what you said, it looks like you focus kind of on the long tail of search for your articles. You focus on various specific topics that might not necessarily be as difficult to rank for, put out a great content and then the content just kind of naturally ranks itself, because it’s so specific.

Antonio: Yes, it’s more long-form. So we are getting into one, two, three thousand words and we are very specific with the wording.

Steve: Yeah, I noticed that. And then so was it just kind of luck that you and Brad kind of hooked up early on before his traffic really took off?

Antonio: What do they say about luck? Preparation equals– plus opportunity. He was randomly– I had written fifty summer articles, or not randomly. I had written 50 summer articles over a tailored suit, and he reached out to me via my blog at the tailor suits one day. You seem to know what you are talking about. I have this blog, would you like to come write with me?” Which I like to always think I’m the only guest poster that has ever had Brad reach out to me versus– because he gets tons of requests all the time. I’m like, “Okay. I like your mission. You seem like you are a nice guy, and I’d like to put my stuff somewhere else. So sure, I’ll write for you.”

And we just– yeah, I’m a big believer when you put out quality, people will find you. There’s always a need for people going the extra mile, for people that are putting out amazing content. So if you are specific, you put out an amazing content, and you make sure it’s smart, so that it can be ranked in the search engines and found, you are going to do well.

Steve: And do you guest post for many publications, or is it just primarily Art of Manliness.

Antonio: Primarily on Art of Manliness. I have to be really careful. You know it’s one of those things– I have four young kids and I just– guest posts take up a lot of time. And I’m really not at that point. I will occasionally create a video or conduct an interview with somebody, because that is usually within the one hour time frame, but I’m pretty careful about who I’m going to guest post with. Because often times, there’s also now this expectations that you send traffic to your own guest post. And that’s not always– it’s like, so you’re putting all this work, and then you are sending traffic to a website that doesn’t get any traffic. It really doesn’t make sense when you are getting big numbers.

Steve: Right. That makes sense. And I was just curious, we’ve been chatting for quite a while, but I did want to touch on your conference, and kind of how all that comes into play, because running a conference is a lot of work. And so do you do that just from a community perspective, or is it actually to try and improve your business monetarily.

Antonio: It’s really both. I mean I’m not afraid to make money. I think making money is a great thing, and if anyone else disagrees with that they should go read, what is it– Rabbi Lapin, over here you know, “Thou Shall Prosper.” It’s a great book. And he did a video series on why making money is important. So I never shy away from that. But the conference, the goal was to take what we are doing online, offline and to get people together. If I have had one thing that has really helped accelerate my success and that’s building true friendships.

Any time I’m driving through the state of Oklahoma, I stop and I see Brad. Anytime I’m out in California or I’m driving out, I stop and I make time for people. I had a buddy pop up, hadn’t seen him in 15 years, we served in the Marine Corp together. He’s four hours away from me one way, but I mean gave 24 hours notice, grabbed my– pulled my son out of school, we are taking a day trip to go meet a good marine buddy of mine.

So I think that real– people need to make time for those human relationships. And I didn’t see anyone doing this in my sphere, so I created one for it. I mean there’s fashion blog, or fashion conferences that are about catalogues and stuff like that, but nothing that was geared towards men that are wanting to get practical advice, to bring the retailers, to bring the content creators together, to bring the super fans together, and that was the goal.

Steve: Okay. The reason why I ask is because I have been thinking about starting a conference of my own, but just the shear amount of work is kind of daunting. And so if there is already conferences that kind of cater to what you want to do, is it necessary to start a conference, or should you just be going to more conferences in the first place?

Antonio: Well first you want to go to some conferences and you want to see the difference between a good conference, and a not so good conference. And I’ve been to both and I knew that I wanted– that was the one thing I wanted in my conference, that it would not suck. So that was number one.

I also had a great partner, Aaron Morino over at I am Alpha M, and many people presume to me as my competitor. This guy has been on Shark Tank, amazing PR man. He’s got an amazing business, and he’s now a great friend because he’s the only person in the world I can commiserate with him on what it’s like to get– have people tear apart your style on YouTube.

And we started ten months before the conference and we met every week. Maybe five minutes sometimes, maybe other times an hour. And we would talk about what needs to be done this week and we would do it. And when you have 40 meetings like that, you get a lot done. And I can tell you that I didn’t feel the conference what that much work, partly because I had a great partner and partly because we started it, and preparing for it early and it just happened. And it was great. It was a lot of fun and we are going to do it again.

Steve: Awesome. Also was this the first time you launched it?

Antonio: It was the first time we had it truly as a conference. We had it one time in July, and that was just an impromptu meet up out of actually what was called VidCon. And VidCon is in Anaheim, California. About 25,000 people came out. And we saw the power of that conference, but also that conference sucked from the perspective of if you paid 500 bucks, you really didn’t get much. But what I did get is a perspective on what the power of video, the power of interacting with your super fans, the power of having brands meet with content creators. And that’s what I wanted to create in my industry.

Steve: Okay. Hey Antonio, I want to be respectful of your time. Gosh, I learned a lot about how your business works and everything that you do, all the little details that you kind of think about in order to create a thriving business like Real Men Real Style. So I really appreciate that. For anyone who’s listening and wants to be able to get a hold of you or find you online, where can they find you?

Antonio: Hey Steve, I always recommend my contact form, and the reason being I have a little bit of fun with it. So they can go check that out. Now that email will go right to me.

Steve: Okay. Sounds good, well hey, Antonio thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate your time.

Antonio: Thank you. Bye, bye.

Steve: Bye.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. Antonio is the perfect example of someone who has built a very strong brand on YouTube as well as his own website, and he’s now reaping the rewards. And it just goes to show that you really need to put yourself out there right now, and start creating a following.

For more information about this episode go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode76, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode, please got to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner, every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

And once again I also want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I personally recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can chose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Ali Baba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

075: Making 7 Figures Selling Digital Courses Online With David Siteman Garland

david siteman garland

I’ve known David Siteman Garland since December of 2008 back when he ran a tiny local television show in St Louis. Fast forward to today and he owns the popular media blog, TheRiseToTheTop.com, where he teaches other people how to make money creating digital courses online.

If you’re interested in starting your own digital course, make sure you click here to check out his training class.

Also most recently, he launched his own software designed to help people create their own membership sites without any technical knowledge required.

David is one of the most successful mediapreneurs that I know and today he’s going to teach us what it takes to sell digital courses online. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How David went from running a local tv show to selling online digital courses
  • How to build a large audience of loyal followers
  • How David built up traffic for his media blog
  • How David uses Facebook ads to drive traffic to his courses
  • The step by step methodology for creating your own course
  • How to get signups without a large email list
  • The pros/cons between having a launch and an evergreen product
  • The best way to start a membership site
  • How David launched his software product and his launch process

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcast where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I have an old time buddy with me on the show, David Siteman Garland. Now just the other day I was looking through my emails to find the first time that we actually corresponded, and it is actually way back in December of 2008, back when David run a local television show in St. Louis.

Anyway today David runs popular blogs/video blogs/teaches other people how to create courses at the risetothetop.com, and he also teaches other people how to create awesome interviews, all of that’s– I think that’s one of your older products, and most recently he launched his own piece of software designed to help people easily put up their own membership sites. Now David is probably one of the more successful online mediapreneurs that I know, and with that welcome to the show David. How are you doing today?

David: I am awesome Steve, that’s so funny that it goes back to December 2008. I remember that, that’s– it’s amazing how time flies, but thank you so much for allowing this email blast.

Steve: Now, yeah, crazy, right, what is that like seven, eight years? That’s crazy.

David: I still– there’s no math, but sure, we’ll call back.

Steve: Well, just a quick aside before we begin, just before the show your assistant asked me whether it was an audio or video interview, and when I replied audio only I got this email saying sweet, no video, I’m not going to shower or wear pants. So…

David: Right and I am wearing shorts, but I did shower because I did cross fit today, so I had to that, but that was more for the sake of my wife and other people, versus obviously this interview.

Steve: Excellent. So give us a quick background story and tell us about– because I know you’ve moved a lot of times, or the course of your career, tell us about the Rise to the Top, how you went from running a local television show, actually even before that, I think you did something related to hokey, right?

David: Yeah, that’s right, so I’m– when we’re doing this interview I just turned 31, about a month ago, I started kind of entrepreneurial journey right out of college, worked for a local– this could sound so crazy because it was, a local professional inline hockey league for a couple of years out of college, and I was– I kind of got broad in there, I kind of do everything all the older people didn’t want to do, and sort of became– I kind of took it over a little bit, over those two years. So I ended up basically running the league, and the sponsorships, doing different things, I ended up talking on the radio like those– it was just as like crazy real world MBA, if you will for a few years after college.

And then I started a television show/website here, I’m from St. Louis Missouri, and I came up with this idea, and it really actually happened I think at a coffee shop, I was sitting with a friend of mine, and I said, you know, it’s just so funny, looking back it’s so ridiculous. I was just like wow what have– how do you create a TV show? Like what if I did a TV show where I interviewed different types of entrepreneurs, and kind of make it—I made it like a talk show into this– but I want to put it on the local TV and I want to put it on the internet.

And I started way back in 2008 because I had sort of generated an interest with entrepreneurship, and that’s kind of where it began, I began– I took all my permits for money basically, and started this local TV show. I went around and sold local adds, and no clue what I was doing, really no long-term plan, or anything like that, and that’s how I got going essentially with my business which has changed a lot up to today now.

Steve: Yeah. So this television show, why did you decide to shut it down in order to go online?

David: Well yeah…

Steve: Was it not getting any traction or?

David: No, no. it got plenty– it was really just an evolution, because what happened was, I interviewed local entrepreneurs, I’d buy some studio space like I would rent studio space, and I would get videographers and stuff like that, and I would interview a lot of local entrepreneurs. And it was a blast, right, people in St. Louis, then I actually traveled around a little bit, I went out to Los Angeles, I went to New York. For example, [Jerry Vinokurov] [ph] was a very early interview on the rise to the top, went actually to Los Angeles, said if you did a million match maker party [inaudible] [00:06:54] like really-really interesting people.

But a shift for me came, and there’s been many shifts sort of throughout my career so far, a big shift for me came actually when I met my wife Mercy, because I realized I didn’t love that model at that time, I mean I said, you know what I don’t really want to travel around everywhere. I don’t really want to be kind of be slapping all over the place, I want to come up with something that’s more– I don’t want to say automated because it wasn’t into that yet, it was more like– well I could shoot this from home.

And that’s when I started doing interviews online basically via Skype, and I remember the very first one I did was with Peter Shankman, who since he sold the company was called Help a Reporter. And I remember we did it, and this by the way before it was super easy to do stuff on Skype. This was video interviews on Skype before everyone was doing video interviews on Skype, right?

Steve: Okay, yeah.

David: So we had really like Jimmy rig this thing up and I don’t– I’m not a techie by the way. So we had people in here trying to help do this stuff, and I remember we did the first interview, and we got– I got like look at it, and edit it, and we realized that we interview– we recorded all of him, and missed all of me, right awesome. So he was super understanding, and we ended up shooting it again, and stuff like that.

But then for the next few years, that’s what I did. I interviewed entrepreneurs– all different types of entrepreneurs online, and that allowed us to also leverage, go from kind of local, kind of ads and sponsors to more internet based ad and sponsors like HubSpot, CITRIC, were some of my sponsors, and we did that for several years until kind of the major shift that happened.

Steve: Okay, and then you had a kid, did something change again after that or?

David: Well that was just– that was recently.

Steve: That was recently, yeah.

David: So, shifts came a few years ago, I mean what happened was first of all, did 500 sport shows, and at one point I was showing five days a week. It was a blur– it was crazy looking back again to as far as these stories, like I said in retrospect are really crazy. But let’s– we got to do it sometimes, you know, and so I was doing this and this is where the shift started to happen. First of all, I started to realize, and this is kind of [inaudible] [0:09:04] obvious speaking here, but when you have something that’s 100% sponsor based, you have very little if any control of your revenue.

Steve: Okay.

David: Right, is that fair to say, because the sponsor could wake up on the wrong side of the bed, someone could get fired, someone could shift jobs, and boom. What if 80% of your revenue is gone over night, you don’t control it, you don’t take control of it. And for me, I started to get more and more worried about that, because people come to me, and start saying David you need to have your own products and programs, right.

And I started interviewing these people, which I have now the mediapreneurs are people that were creating their own online courses and products and programs and selling them, the Andy Porterfields of the world, the Ryan Lees, the Marie Forleos. I interviewed these people and like you know how that CV– it’s probably happen in your life before too where you kind of like have this light bulb of like Oh my God, this is what I’m supposed to be doing, like this is like Oh my God, I can totally resonate with these people, because I started– everything they were saying, I was nodding my head and I was like they were talking about, that they were making amazing revenue.

They were helping people, how cool is that, you’re helping people get results whether it’s in business, fitness, life, whatever it might be, right. They were not tied to a computer doing one-on-one work or working with sponsors 24/7 or anything like that; they had very much that elusive, freedom-based lifestyle we talk about. Not that there’s no work, there’s plenty of work, but you got to do it on your own terms, right.

And also they were– they just had these killer lifestyle, they can just spend time, they could do what they want, they can spend time with kids or family or going out or traveling or sports. Whatever they wanted to do and they just didn’t seem as stressed and as ridiculously bogged down as a lot of the other types of entrepreneurs that I interviewed. You know, they were raising money, they had very high margins in their business, how cool is that, right.

It’s not like I’ve been watching, I don’t know if– have you come to the show Steve it’s called The Profit on MSN base A?

Steve: Yes I love that show, yeah.

David: Amazing show, I love it like I got my wife and we watch it all the time, and it’s really a good show and I always fascinate when someone’s like it’d be great if you made 25% on what you bring in, I mean or 20%. If I bring in a million dollars, let’s just say and I make 200,000 they were saying that’s amazing. I look at this business, and I’m like Oh my God, the numbers are almost reversed.

Steve: Yeah, I know totally.

David: It’s almost reversed, it’s such a high profit margin, and it’s so much fun. So that’s when I started obsessing over online courses and what ended up happening is I launched my first online course, I did hundreds of interviews, thousands of hours of research in about– it was about four or five years or so. I launched my first course called Create Awesome Interviews [inaudible] [0:11:51] introduction, which is teaching people to do what I was doing, right online interviews. So it’s all about that, and I remember the very first launch that I closed, did $19,800 to 400 people, just 400 people on that, that raised their hands and I said, you know that I might be interested in this, right.

And for me, it wasn’t the amount of money, but it was just a life changing shift, to say Oh my God, there’s a tremendous opportunity here to be teaching and to be sharing knowledge with people, and walking them along a path to get them results, and that’s when my business made the shift into online courses.

Steve: Dude, I think we have like the same story, so I started out with my blog with just affiliate advertising revenue?

David: I remember that absolutely.

Steve: And then one of my affiliates, my top affiliates decide to cancel the affiliate program.

David: Yes.

Steve: And so I was like crap. And then I decide to create my own online course too, but your course wasn’t around, so I was sitting there and having to figure everything out from scratch as well.

David: Right, which is a pain in the butt, right, I remember it, right.

Steve: Pain in the butt, yeah. But now you know that revenue just kind of comes in and like you said the margins are like 99% right, so-

David: Right, it’s cool, and a great point that you made there, that’s a scary amount like I’m a big believer in entrepreneurship that you want to have control of your revenue, right you want to have control of it. And for me, that was just crazy, we’re able to build it up, we did 90,000, then 100 and the next launch we did 75,000, then it got over in to six figures. And it grew it grew and then we did more products and more programs over time and kind of perfected the process, and that’s when I really kind of turned the ears and I said, okay, what do people want to know that are following me?

And my subscribers, what do they want to know, what do they want to know more about, and what happened was the dialogue had changed over the years from, hey David how do I do interviews, to hey David how do I create, promote and profit from my own online course, how did you do it, like teach me how to do that, and that’s when we came up create awesome online courses, because we really perfected it over the years, I mean exactly what to do to walk someone through the process of doing this and being successful with it.

And so that’s when we launched that course and that’s when I hate to say the world changed, that’s exactly what happened with us. We– it was our biggest launches to date, out biggest success stories, people come in and say hey, I remember a girl in– Nikki Brown, she’s one of our earlier customers of create awesome online courses. She’s an army wife, she lives in Hawaii, she’s amazing, and she was a part time park ranger and college professor, and a killer copywriter, just absolutely amazing.

Steve: Okay.

David: Watched the course about copy, and did 50,000 dollars on her first launch, you know…

Steve: That’s crazy.

David: And it started propelling and it’s not just about stories like Nikki and I’ve got a thousand stories like that, right, but it’s also the people that make the 2,000 and the 3,000, that could be life changing, right?

Steve: Oh Yeah.

David: And so for us, I’ve done the podcast for five-plus years, and I looked at it and said this is the way we’re going with our business. So I actually– and I was a little burned out too after doing interviews almost five days a week for a long-long time. And so we shifted our whole business to be solely focused on how big people, create and promote and profit online courses, and helping them with that. And that was software and now different things that we are doing, but it’s all based around that very specific niche and need. And we become one of the world leaders at it which I’m super proud of.

Steve: Yeah, I mean, I always recommended your products on my blog and they kind of sell themselves in fact so…

David: Yeah, and I think that was cool is the dialogue kind of changes over time with products and programs right. Because when I started it you did too, same as I think, a lot of it in the beginning is you say, “Hey, here is what I have done and I have gotten my results. And now I want to teach you how to do it, right?” That’s how it starts, it says, “Hey, I have done this, now I’m going to teach you how to do this right?” But over time as you get success in it and testimonials, now it’s like, “Hey, I learned how to do this, I taught myself how to do this, and did it. Now I taught these people how to do it, they did it. And boom you are off to the races, you know what I’m saying is it snowballs over time; you gain a lot of momentum.

Steve: Yeah, hey, Dave one thing that I kind of admire about you is that you’ve always been really great at building kind of large and loyal audiences, followers. And so I was just thinking by the time you started selling online courses you already had a pretty large following, right? And so I was hoping that you could actually take us back the old days of The Rise to the Top first. In the very beginning, how did you kind of get traffic around, how did you build up your name so that when you did some of these launches they had immediate effects?

David: Yeah, that’s a great point and FYI even my first launch I didn’t really even focus as much on email list building back in the days I should have. And now that’s really the crux of the business is your email list and your relationship with said email list, right? With the people on the email list, and so back in the day I didn’t even have all that big of an email list, but the way I got started — and again this is just the way I did it. There’s probably a lot simpler ways, back there, first of all I didn’t know what direction we are going to end up going right? All I knew is we’re doing interviews about entrepreneurs.

So early on, a few things would happen. Number one, I literally started — when I first putting my show up I just– like my own Facebook page, like personal facebook page. That was one of my first kind of little audiences or people just — big people I knew from college, stuff like that or family. Like that’s how it kind of started a little bit. Well I just — my first probably 50 people were people that were probably from my private Facebook page. Or people that I had met — one former fashioner, I would literally send out individual emails Steve, back in 2008 and say, “Hey, I’m starting the show, if you want to know [inaudible 00:17:51], this guy you want to spam anyway. And then I would be like add them all to an email list or something evil.

So I said, “Hey, I’m starting this show and interview people, here is what’s going on with that,” like — kind of like a little like personal PR, like type thing there. And I said, “Hey, if you are interested, let me know and I’ll add you to our email list, I’ll let you know when new episodes come out right, like that kind of stuff. And we started to kind of roll it a little bit that way.

Then what happened is — and again the climate is a little bit different now than it was in 2008 right? Like there was not as many with shows as there are now, it was very kind of new — most of people who had shows were like super techie people, which is not me by any means. Or just kind of people that happen to be on the bleeding edge like myself. And so what ended up happening was people were going — ended up sharing their episodes when they got interviewed. And this was critical, and the thing was, here is the thing that’s important Steve.

I did 500 plus interviews, I never once asked someone to promote, ever, not one time. Because I think that gives a bad feeling in peoples’ mouth when and it was like, “Oh, you just interviewed me so I can promote it.” Do you know what I mean type thing? And so for me I always just said, I sent them a link and I said, “Listen, thank you so much for coming on, I just want to share this with you.” And my thought process behind that was also, hey, if they like it and they watch it, they are like “Oh, this is really cool and well done, and I liked the questions and I liked how I sounded.” Like all that kind of stuff, then they would share it.

And if they share it with let’s say — let’s just use a random example, a thousand people Steve. What I have noticed is let’s say 200 come and watch it and 50 people say, “You know what I liked it so I’m going to subscribe, right?” Well, compound that over time, I mean that happened with almost every interview. We had a lot people share them and that started to grow the list early on. And that was how really I started to build those relationships. And also I think the key that I have always tried to do Steve is talk and type like I’m in real life.

Steve: Yeah, you definitely talk — I mean talking to you, you definitely act like you are doing real life for sure.

David: Yeah, and I think that was the greatest compliment you could ever get. Like I remember when I was speaking at events, I don’t do events and stuff anymore. But when I was out kind of speaking and stuff like that, that was like always the greatest compliment I could get, if someone is saying, “Hey, you are just like you are online, right?” And I think that’s a good teaching moment there because it’s not the case with everyone, let’s just put it that way. So I think that — you hear this, it’s almost cliché, you would agree, but I talk to people like they are friends of mine, and we are having fun, like that’s why I talk to people.

I don’t talk like a marketer or an infomercial, or a CEO or anything like I’ll talk down to people, anything horrible like that, that you wouldn’t want to do. I treat people just like we are friends and it’s a family. And I think that’s helped really kind of grow it over time, because at the end of the day getting traffic and bringing people in is one thing, but it’s really about building the relationship with those people that’s critical.

And now, honesty the relationship a lot of time is built through commerce with us. Do you know what I mean? Like the relationship is built through great content if you will, like meaning a free webinar or a free video series, or some kind of free teaching element. And then really the relationship is solidified by some kind of commitment, meaning purchasing a product or program and then it goes from there. So it’s definitely been an interesting journey for sure.

Steve: As you were doing these interviews, you mentioned that the landscape has changed right? And so I remember you hosted everything on your own site, and you used to collect subscribers that way. So how would that have changed today, like given that there’s podcasting, there’s YouTube, there’s all these other avenues. How would you proceed today if you were to get started?

David: That’s a really good question, what I would do today. It would be similar; there wouldn’t be a ton of changes. For me – it’s [inaudible 00:21:54] with my brand, I could get away with a broader show like I did then. You know what I mean; a lot of times if you were to start today you are going to need something much more specific, because there’s so many broad shows out there, right? Like on entrepreneurship right, like — for example doing a show about people that have online stores right? Like that would be a type of specific thing that would be pretty cool.

But in terms of the marketing, I would definitely obviously be on iTunes again, maybe on YouTube; I have to think that through. But here is the thing that I think would be the biggest thing, Steve is that I would have plenty of calls to action in my podcast, basically doing ads for myself.

Steve: Okay, would you take on sponsors then?

David: Maybe, but I would say that my first — I would say my primary goal though of a podcast besides create content obviously and having fun, would be that I want to get leads and people towards my products and programs, right. So I would want them to walk them down a path towards create awesome online courses, maybe towards Course Cats that you mentioned earlier, which is helping — it’s a theme and a closed website to help people create their own course website on word press without needing an insider to develop or write. So might be walking them down a path to that.

So I think a lot of times I would be promoting free stuff that you would have enter your email address for during the podcast, does that makes sense? So like I would say, ‘Hey, check out this free video series on creating awesome online courses. And send them over there and whatever that link is and they could enter their email and start down a path to get free videos, and then eventually the invitation to join the program. Maybe for cost cut, it might be something that I’m working on now, it could be like a tutorial on how to set up a course from start to finish. Whatever it might be, I would be my own advertiser.

That would be my number one thing I would do, maybe later on I would consider other ads, but I would make sure that I didn’t cannibalize my own sales. Because that’s really at the end of the day what the crux of a business is.

Steve: You know what’s hilarious about all this David is that I had the same struggles with my podcast also. So in my podcast in the beginning and the end I pushed my own stuff, my free mini course, and starting your own online store. And just recently I have been getting offers for sponsorships. And I debated to myself for a long time whether to take this, because the money actually isn’t that great and so right now I’m just trying with a sponsor right now, with the podcast and want to see how it goes.

David: Sure I mean running is fair, and that’s what’s cool about this business and that’s what I love about retreats. If you want to kind of lamp it all together in the media entrepreneurship, is that you could do these experiments. And either it’s not going to be — it’s not like you are building a hotel, and you are taking on like $20 million in a day, and it might not work, right? Like this is not that big of a deal, you give it a shot and you are like okay, it’s either good or not.

And I think in my opinion it’s going to be a numbers thing whether you feel like it’s taking away from your own sales, is it making sense or not, it might, it might not. I mean, a great example Steve is John Lee Dumas entrepreneur on fire. He does a good job of kind of walking in the line with sponsors and his own products and programs.

And I also know for a fact, that his products and programs by far outsell. I mean in terms of his—I mean not even close, but he still does sponsors as well, so there’s not a perfect answer to that, I think you really want to keep your goals in mind. Because the last thing I would want though is cannibalizing my own revenue of my products and programs, because I’m promoting Snookies Cookies or whatever, whatever it might be.

Steve: You always come up with these whacked out names for stuff that I don’t know where you pull that stuff from.

David: I don’t know, neither do I.

Steve: So you know I got an online course myself, which is got about 1,200 members at this point. So I thought it could be kind of interesting to compare some notes on the entire process. So let’s say someone in the audience wants to create their own digital course and this is right up your allay. Walk me through the steps. What is step one and what is the logical progression in doing so?

David: Yeah, there’s really seven steps to creating an online course for sure. And the first step there’s a little bit by depending on where you at right? So the first step that I recommend is that people either know what topic they want to create a course on or they are not 100% sure on what topic they want to create the course on, right? So they either know or they don’t know if you will, when you started yours where were you?

Steve: I knew exactly what I was going to do, just because my whole blog had just one theme to it.

David: Right, which is so awesome, and that’s why you are a genius and the rest of us struggle Steve, right?

Steve: All by accident my friend.

David: Right, but it’s funny because I was actually more in the number two. And a lot of people I talk to, people I have done webinars with and things like that; they are often in number one like you are. They kind know what exactly what it is, I’m like well aren’t you just lucky. But regardless of whether you are number one or number two, here is a couple of tips. If you are not sure exactly what you want to do your course on, I call this the paying attention principle okay. Start thinking about what questions have you been getting online? I had coffee at cocktail hours at — wherever you go via email, on your website, like anything like that start paying attention.

That’s how I started back in the days I said, “Oh my god, people are asking about interviews, it’s been right under my nose the whole time and I had no clue right?” So I would start with that. Another way to look at that is if you have a podcast or blog. If you don’t and you know how to post, someone walks people through stuff that’s gotten really good attraction, I think that’s another good thing to look at there as well.

But regardless whether you are at one or at two, if you have an idea come up with some kind of idea you want to test, right? And what I would recommend doing is actually sending out a quick little survey. And use whatever assets that you have to promote said surveys. What I mean by that is, if you have an email list or a Facebook page, a blog, a podcast, some combination of all those things, if you’ve got none at all you could start with your personal Facebook friends, something like that right?

And I ask them one open ended question, and that question is, what do you want to know more about blank? And blank is obviously don’t type blank, you want to type in the topic. What do you want to know more about opening your online store? Or you could even tailor it Steve, what do you want to know more about growing your online store, it’s very different right, starting versus growing, very-very different. You could start to tailor these things, right?

And what ends up happening, it’s not about getting a thousand responses or anything like that right? It’s just about kind of testing the waters a little bit to get some feedback, get some ideas, get the language used, build some confidence up. Because a lot of times what I realized, is people don’t realize how much they know until some people to fill out their survey.

They are like wait a minute; I thought everyone knew how to set up an online store right, or whatever it might be. And you realize that you have — a lot of people get trapped in this, well, who am I to be an expert, right? Why– I’m not an expert, and I always tell people you don’t — the expert fairy doesn’t come flying in the window at night, and come in and like tap you and like sprinkle you with expert dust and fly away, right? If you done something where you’ve got results and you can share this with other people, you are good to go. This is not like you have to have 50 books and live on a mountain, have you noticed that Steve?

Steve: You know what’s hilarious about what you are saying just now, I remember like when I first created my sales page for my course, and it wasn’t converting that great. I sent out this survey, and then people started telling me what they want to hear. And then I would use their exact language on the sales page and it started to convert better.

David: Right, and you know what’s also interesting about that is a lot of times you will pick up stuff that you didn’t even think about, right? Like for example I’m making this up or let’s just say it’s about an online store and oh my god, like the number one question is which shopping cart should I use, right? Well, now boom, lights should be going off in your head. This could be a great leading point on my sales pages. This could be a free video that I could do, like, “Hey, here’s the best shopping cart to use, I am going to show you exactly how to do it right now, if you want information on the course go here.”

You know what I mean, like there’s a lot of different things you can do with that, because the foundation of this kind of stuff is critical. And I think that’s one of the key things. People want to skip, and just kind of go start recording stuff, let’s focus on the foundation first, and it’s going to make the rest of this process very easy, in all honesty. If we know what to do with, it’s very easy.

Steve: Sure, so what – let’s say you have your idea already. What’s the next step?

David: Do the survey, right.

Steve: Okay.

David: And then the next thing is like to kind of get the core stuff out of the way. So that means; naming, pricing, all that kind of good stuff, right. Like kind of that foundational thing about your course, before you even record it. And I’m a big believer — I love recording stuff first, I mean recording stuff before I sell it, versus, you know kind of doing the hey I’m going to release it as I create it type of thing, because I’ve noticed that actually adds a lot of stress on top of people. Meaning that now they have to worry about marketing and promoting, and they have to shoot module four, and like this and that. There’s a lot of stuff that goes on, so I’m actually a believer that you want to record early on, but…

Steve: Interesting, I actually went the opposite stance, just because I needed a kick in the butt to get working.

David: Yeah, some people do. And that’s why I always encourage people regardless of which way you’re going to do it, and this is important Steve, that you want to get a date on the calendar, right?

Steve: Okay.

David: I don’t give a crap what you need to do, put a date on the calendar. It will be this is it, like it will be done. You know what I mean? And you’ve got to do that, and you’re right. Some people do need that actual kind of pressure and that’s totally fine. But in terms of naming your course, this is something people get hang up on, and it’s a lot easier that they think because at the end of the day, the name doesn’t matter. And this is so important — like the name doesn’t matter.

At the end of the day, it’s going to be about the result you’re getting people and the hook. What’s the promise? What’s the result, you know. How can you — it’s the sexy part of it, if you will. Like what’s the promise of doing your online course? So for example Steve what’s your promise?

Steve: My promise is that you will have an online store up and running and you will be profitable.

David: There you go. And our promise for example, is that you will have an online course, right?

Steve: Right.

David: And you will do a launch, and you will bring in sales. So you want to have something that’s specific, that is if they follow exactly what you do to a T, what’s the result? And if you can’t get that, you don’t have a good topic, you know. And so, the key here is not worrying about the name. I would just grab a .com, you know, and this is — I think it’s important. I don’t — you could have your core website, and put a bunch of courses up on it, I like to have each course being its own little mini-branch.

So — because when you’re — I’m a big believer in charging premium prices, and getting premium customers, and creating premium products, Steve. And the thing is, I love having little mini-brands. So I would love if people grabbed the .com that they want for that course. You know supersexycourse.com.

Steve: Yup.

David: Steveistheman.com course, whatever [Inaudible] [00:33:04]

Steve: I totally agree with you Dave. We like took the exact same path here, go on. Sorry.

David: Yeah, so — yeah exactly, so, right on. So you want to grab a .com, it’s great for branding. It makes things a lot easier. And then in terms of pricing your course, you know people have different philosophies here, and I’ve learnt a lot of this over time and tested it, and there’s really no reason to not be in the top 10% of your market. And I think this is so critical because people say; well I want to try to undercut people, or I want to do a special ridiculous discount, no.

The top 10% of your market is going to attract the very best people, the least problem people, in all honesty, and also people that are much more likely to get results because they are invested in it, right? We’ve always heard, I going to get what you pay for. Right or you’re going to get what you pay for. [Inaudible] [00:33:51] someone over there, so we went to Las Vegas, and we went to the most expensive buffet in Las Vegas, Steve, I don’t know, $200 or so. I don’t know how much, the most expensive one. So I’ll say it’s $200, I’m going to eat a wheel barrel full of lobster if we do that. And the reason for that is I want to get my money’s worth, you know what I’m saying. You want to get your money’s worth.

Steve: Right.

David: And so, I think that’s where you want to think about pricing is towards the top end of the market. Now people calling me and say, David wait a minute, how am I going to stick out from the competition? There’s another course out there on my subject. I can’t believe it. What am I going to do? Should I pack my ball and go home? And the answer is of course not. Other courses on your subject is a good thing, is a good thing. If there’s other courses out there on your subject, that is showing you that you have a hot market, and it’s something that people are willing to invest in, right?

Yet someone in my Create Awesome Online Courses program even [ph] private Facebook group just for customers, and we had someone coming in there and say you know, I want to do a podcasting course, but I’m really nervous about it because I see so many out there. I see this one, is great. I see this one, it’s great.

And so there’s many, many ways that you can stick out from the pack, and one of those ways, besides your own experience and your own teaching style which is going to be unique to anyone else, which is important, but also the fact that you can come up with some kind of gap or specific niche, that you can serve. So for example, this customer we realized that he works really well with people that sell services. Okay, so sell service based businesses. He had more specific terms for that, but I’m just basically blank.

Steve: That’s fine, yeah.

David: Service people, and he wants to teach them how to podcast with also the specific end result of using the podcast to drive to a funnel that will help generate more business.

Steve: Okay.

David: And that’s very, very different than teaching people how to podcast and get sponsors. Or teaching people how to podcast, and just have some fun, and not have a business to associate with it, or this or that. So there’s always ways that you can niche down. And I think that’s one of the key things to think about during these foundational periods of your course is you know can I niche down on topic? Can I niche down on people?

So for example on topic would be something like that, and on people, right? Maybe another one, instead of doing a course on how to generate leads on social media, which is very broad and ridiculous, you might want to do one on how to generate leads for attorneys on LinkedIn. So the more specific you can go with something, and not just have a broad process, the better off you’re going to be when it comes to your course.

Steve: So to summarize what you’re saying, basically you want to get fewer customers, but those customers will be higher paying. So you want to create a premium course to a very tailored audience, right?

David: You want people who will make comment and see your great free content, and when they see a great course, they say; heck, yeah, that is me, or that’s not me at all. You want one or the other, you don’t want that middle ground, it’s kind of for me, I don’t know, maybe, maybe not, right?

Steve: Right.

David: That’s not good. You want people to be like; oh my God. He’s — he or she is talking directly to me, that’s me, that’s me, I’m totally on that. And that’s when you’re eliciting that emotion, where people are going to invest because they want that, they want what you’re offering, versus like; it’s kind of for me and my neighbor, and the puppy down the street, right? And that’s where people start to get themselves in a little trouble.

Steve: Yeah, so one thing that a lot of people get concerned about is if they have a course or something, how do you going to get people to sign up if you don’t have a big audience or a big list already built in. Like you had that luxury when you launched, but your students obviously won’t, right?

David: Well, I got across the board and I always tell people that — and this is the way I design this Steve, I designed it for people that have an email list of some kind. I design my programs– because another lesson here — let this be a lesson is that a course for everyone is really a course for nobody, at the end of the day. So we draw a little line, the same way we say; hey, you might have 50 people, you’ve got to have some people.

Well probably 10X the amount of people that you have after you do a launch of your course, because a lot of people don’t know this, but a launch of your course is one of the best email builders itself, by going through a launch and doing that whole process. But we have had people come in, that have had less of an audience, we just don’t — we don’t — I don’t specifically teach list building. I can give advice and do different things there, because everyone comes at it from a different stage. We want to look for people that have an audience of some kind, and they’re ready to create a course and promote it to that audience, and also grow that audience, you know.

Steve: I see, I got it.

David: But that being said, you know, there’s plenty of ways you can start out with that, and one of the greatest things that you can do is start with a give-away. Start with a give-away. A give-away that you in return, someone gives their email address, you give them something free. A free video series, a free cheat sheet, a free resource guide, a free infographic, whatever it might be, and that can be one of the greatest basis for list building is having this great free give-away, that then — you then promote your butt off on the internet.

There’s a lot of different ways you can do that, right? You can start with again a personal Facebook page. You can start by doing Facebook ads so that seeing if people sign up, right. You could do — you could go out and try to get on podcasts and say, hey I’ve got this unique angle on this topic, I would love to come on and teach it, and then at the end, you get to plug yourself, on the podcast, or whatever it might be, you say, hey check out now my free resource guide, my free cheat sheet, my free video, at this link, right? Same thing with guest blogging, if you could get out there and do it. So there’s definitely a massive hustle element that comes with building a list, Steve. Would you agree with that?

Steve: Absolutely, and so just curious, you have a bunch of students. Have any of them one with really small lists have been successful selling their courses?

David: Absolutely, absolutely. And the funny thing is, I tell people it’s designed for people that have a list of some kind, and people won’t listen to me, all right. They’ll say oh I know, I’m going to give it a shot, and then it’s funny; we’ve created this kind of fourth category of people that buy our course. Like our categories a lot of times are; a blogger, a podcaster that wants to create a course.

Someone that has a course right now and maybe it’s not going so well, or maybe they want to do even better, so they want to come in and learn the process, or someone that does like one-on-one work or some kind of other work and wants to scale it. You know, they speak, they are an author, whatever it might be, and they want to scale it. They come in, but our fourth category has been what I would call the committed beginner.

Committed beginner is the person that comes in and says you know what, I don’t have a list, but I’m going to listen to everything you say, and I’m going to learn a little list building on my own, you know a little bit, and I’m going to go out there and get it. Maybe I might grab an ads program, maybe I’ll do whatever. So, there’s a guy named Brian who just launched a course — this took him less than a month. I’ve got to double check on it, I don’t want to completely quote that, it might be five weeks, you know shoot me. But he started with nothing, Steve. Nothing and we’re talking nothing. And he came in — he came out of the great opt-in, it’s — he actually didn’t want me to talk about his topic all that much, because it’s pretty competitive…

Steve: Yeah, that’s fine.

David: But here’s what I can say about the topic, the topic is teaching people how to pass a specific exam. Does that help?

Steve: Okay, yes.

David: So its teaching people how to pass a specific exam, he literally came up with some free videos, put up an opt-in page, used LeadPages or whatever he did for that, sort of driving some ads traffic, and he actually started a little blog where he’d get some articles, and get some things out there, that are all pointed towards this free object, okay. He got just a few people, now. I want to say it was like 80 people, 70 people. Something like that, walked them then through where they got this free piece of content that made — walked them down a line towards the course, and said; hey, you like this free stuff? Great here’s the course, right. He ended up doing about $3600 already in the sales from this.

Steve: Nice.

David: And realize this is from nothing. I mean what else could you say about what other type of business would allow you to do that so quickly, and so, now he can build on it. He’s built his credibility. He can use those people for testimonials, and he can grow from there. So you know, if you want to start and your assets are relatively low as to who you can reach online, I think a great way of starting, if you know exactly what you’re going to do, and I think that’s important Steve. The problem is when you have someone that comes in that has no audience and no clue what they want to do.

Steve: True.

David: That’s not really who I serve, and I think those types of people just need to get out there and get more experience, in all honesty. But if you know, you’ve got this great thing you want to teach, but you don’t have an audience yet for it, that could be very doable, because that’s when you can start testing offers. Testing ads, hustling your butt off to get on to podcast, and doing guest blogging, that’s where all that stuff can happen. So I don’t want to deter people and say oh my God, I have no lesson out of here, it’s just if you’re clear on your topic, and what you have to offer, there’s a lot of ways you can do that as well.

Steve: Cool, hey David. I wanted to spend at least a couple of minutes talking about standard platforms and kind of throw you a little soft ball here. So let’s say someone wants to create a course, what platform do you recommend, and does there happen to be some sort of plug-in that makes the whole process easier?

David: Yes. Well four — actually four steps is not a plug-in, so we’ll talk about this. This is…

Steve: Okay.

David: This is interesting, so let me back up the story on this, is that when I first started doing courses and teaching courses, it was a massive pain in the butt to get your course website up, right? Because you had two options, essentially, option one is that you get a third party site. So somewhere you pay a subscription or something like that, and you put your course up on there, and you pay every month, but I don’t mind paying every month for something, but there was also a lot of other weird stuff that would happen. Like transaction fees or you couldn’t customize anything.

So it didn’t look really good. Or their sites were not reliable, or they would take your customers and start marketing them other stuff, right. All kinds of stuff, because at the end of the day, remember we talked about control of revenue, it’s the same thing with your course website. You want to have 100% control of your course website. Not 98, you want 100%, right?

Steve: Right.

David: So the best option, what I’ve always used is WordPress. WordPress because then you can build something that’s really cool. But here’s the problem, until now with WordPress has been– I’ve always told people listen, WordPress is great, but to get it looking, you know amazing, and working perfectly, you’re going to have to hire a designer or a developer. Unless you’re a super techie person, which not so many people are. I mean, if you are, and you’ve got great design ability and great tech ability, you are in the very small percentage, okay.

And so what we realized — and you know what, a lot of people do go out and hire people [Inaudible] [00:44:40] and it’s great, but there was never a solution where you could build something that looked like a six figure designer and developer did it, but you did it yourself. Or you could even pass it off to a virtual assistant. That — it’s that easy. So I got to gather with my developer Brad, who I’ve been working with for five years, and I said “Listen, in all honesty, I’m sick of answering the WordPress question.” I get it 50,000 times a week, people say, hey what theme should I use? Like what’s this?

And we’ve tested everything out there, and we just didn’t like a lot of stuff that was out there. It’s either it didn’t look good, or it didn’t work well. And we said we want to make something that is very easy, that people can customize and make stuff look a million bucks, get their course up online, move on with their day. So that’s where we created coursecats.com.

I mean Brad really did all the heavy lifting on this, because he took what he normally charges $5000 to $6000 for and made it into a very affordable piece of software that people can get, where they get this template, they get this theme and template and sales page for their course, and then a guide with videos and everything to walk them through, okay, now you do this, now you get your hosting, now you do that, now here is how we are going to put our videos up. Here is how we are going to do this; here is how you make the colors. And we did a kind of soft private launch for this to my customers, and it sold out in 50 minutes.

And then we opened up another 100 sponsors, sold out less than in two days. And we’ve had people on and this is coolest thing that were procrastinating and there was stock, they said — one guy actually said, he had been waiting for five years which is a little scary for everyone. But they were able to get their courses up over a weekend, over a day, over three days by doing – you know however time they wanted to put into it. They were able to get it up, but not only up but up where it works and it looks good.

So that’s of Course Cats this [ph], so the way that we do it, think of it as a framework Steve. And then we actually have just a few, very-very few, recommended plug-ins, because we didn’t want to reinvent the plug-in game, because there’s actually amazing plug-ins out there now. I mean plug-ins for those who don’t know, what I’m really referring to is what we call membership site plug-in, or a course plug-in.

And what essentially that does is protect your content, so just your customers can see it and it integrates with your payment processor and your email service source kind of things. So we have four that we recommend inside the Course Cats to help people. But you can think of Course Cats as basically as if you would hire a big time developer or designer to create your site and make it look awesome, that’s what it is.

And I’m very-very proud of this because we’ve never done anything big like this before, and it just came from years of people asking for something like this. And we said, “Well, we can’t find a solution that we want to recommend, so we are going to go create our own, and that’s where it’s gone from there.

Steve: So would say it’s a WordPress theme then?

David: Yeah, I would say it’s a theme on steroids because it’s much more I think, because you get a theme, but you also get a full guide to walk you through everything. Not just a theme but also other stuff, like how do you get this plug-in and put in there right, for example. And also– and this was Brad’s idea in all honesty, is that we kind of came up with this thing called the perfect sales page for just for online courses. And you get the sale page as well, all that integrates there at least. So it’s yeah, so that’s a good way of looking at it.

Steve: Okay, and then you recommend membership plug-ins that kind of work with the theme seemlesly.

David: Exactly, we walk you– and at the end of the day you don’t need that many pieces to create a really successful course website. Like we were talk about this the other day, you need hosting and a fresh WordPress installing, we recommend Bluehost for that. Then you get Course Cats and that takes care of like 98% of the rest of it. Meaning now you have got okay, a place to put your marginals, a place to put your bonuses, your downloads, your full website, right? Your sales page, okay, then you simply integrate it with one of the four plug-ins that we recommend, and we are going to add more over time. We are really– we are really specific on that stuff because we don’t want people adding stuff that’s crappy, right? Like we want to make sure that they are like okay, we don’t want to add something that breaks.

We want something that works really well, so we got our recommend plug-ins like WishList and PowerPress and a couple of other ones in there. So that will then protect your content and also integrates with your email provider and stuff like that. And then we talk about your payment processor which could be something like Stripe or authorized.net, and that’s it.

Then you are off to the races and I think that, for me watching my students and myself with this, this could be one of those thing that people waste so much time, not only on, but thinking about right? They are like, what I’m going to use? What’s plug-in? What’s this? What’s that? They drive themselves crazy and it causes what we call techno stress, right? And the thing is we just wanted to alleviate that, we wanted to be like let’s not worry about this. Let’s get it up and get it done.

And now we can worry about the fun stuff like promoting and marketing and creating great testimonials and really helping people. Let’s get past the tech stuff and move on. And that’s really why I want to get pass it because I got — frankly sick of hearing people say well, this plug-in or that plug-in? You know what I mean? This theme or that theme or like well, we are just going to lay it out for you and do a step by step system on what to do.

Steve: I mean this piece of software seems like a very logical progression to what you’ve been going towards, right?

David: Yeah, for sure because it’s simply listening and understanding what people’s problem and ambitions are in my niche and going with it, and making sure that it makes sense. So I think to me, people, one of the mistakes I see out there is people say, “Well, I’ve got my course on creating teddy bears. Now I’m going to create a piece of software on kettle bell swinging.” And you are like, “This doesn’t make any sense my friend. This is like two completely different universes.” So I think the more you can bring things together and make it into a really integrated thing, makes a lot of sense and it’s also a lot of fun.

Steve: Cool man. Hey, we’ve already been chatting for 50 minutes Dave. Where can people find you if they have questions for you either about creating courses or your theme.

David: Yeah, so and I’m sure you’ll have some links you can put whatever you want.

Steve: Yes, absolutely.

David: There are some special wants. One is www.createawesomeonlinecourses.com which you can be, you start with that and Steve I might have a special link for you for all that kind of good stuff. My main site is the www.risetothetop.com which links to everything. So it links to Create Awesome Online Courses, it links to Course Cats. And then of course you can check out Course Cats at www.coursecats.com meow, you don’t have to put in the meow. You don’t have to put in the meow.

Steve: Are you taking new customers for that right now.

David: Yes. So we are actually officially– we are actually in the– well this will be up for a Russian or—yes we are open and customers can come in absolutely right now.

Steve: Awesome dude. Hey, well thanks Dave for coming on the show. I learned a whole lot about online courses and I hope this kind of pushes some people who are sitting on the sidelines over the edge.

David: Awesome Steve. Thanks for having me. It’s been a blessing and a pleasure.

Steve: All right man, take care.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. I have known David for seven years now and it’s been really cool to watch him become a media mogul, and find his calling teaching others how to start online digital courses.

For more information about this episode go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode75, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode, please got to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive, I’m also giving away free business consults to one lucky winner, every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Once again I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I personally recommend, if you want to start your own online store, without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can chose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Ali Baba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design, to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in, and all you got to do is populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

074: How To Create Amazon Listings That Sell Like Crazy With Karon Thackston

How To Create Amazon Listings That Sell Like Crazy

Karon Thackston is the owner of MarketingWords.com where she teaches others how to write high converting copy for ecommerce stores.

She’s been a professional copywriter for 25 years. She’s the author of over 10 books which include popular titles such as

She also consults individual ecommerce companies as well.

Recently, she launched an Amazon bootcamp where she walks sellers through her detailed process of keyword research and how to create conversion-worthy titles, bullets and descriptions. If you are interested in this program, Karon’s offering 20% off to MyWifeQuitHerJob listeners.

Click here and use coupon code: BOOT20 to get 20% off

In this episode, Karon is going to teach us how to create Amazon listings that will sell like crazy. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • The most common mistake that newbies make when listing their products on Amazon
  • How to properly fill out the keyword fields on an Amazon listing
  • The process that Karon uses to list a product on Amazon for conversions
  • The most important guidelines when it comes to choosing keywords
  • Why you shouldn’t price your products the lowest on Amazon
  • How to differentiate your products from the competition
  • How to avoid duplicate keywords
  • How to find new keyword ideas for your products
  • The right way to fill out your product bullet points
  • Karon’s framework for deciding how much copy to write for a given product

Other Resources And Books

Want To Learn How To Start A Profitable Ecommerce Store?

Create  A Profitable Online StoreDid you enjoy listening to Arree’s story? If you would like to create your own profitable online store and join a community of like minded entrepreneurs, then sign up for my full blown course on how to create a profitable online store.

My course offers over 60+ hours of video and includes live office hours where you can ask me questions directly.

If you want to learn everything there is to know about ecommerce, be sure to check it out!

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce. Unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured, and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design, to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products.

You can literally start your own online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have Karon Thackston with me on the show. Now Karon has over 25 years in combined experience in marketing, advertising, and copywriting, and she’s actually been helping e-commerce clients get both higher rankings in the search engines and higher conversion rates on their Amazon listings with the power of copy. Now she’s the author of ten books and she runs the popular site, www.marketingwords.com which I highly recommend that you check out.
And today we are actually going to delve deeply into Karon’s techniques for creating a high converting Amazon listing as well as learning about her entrepreneurship story. And with that, welcome to the show Karon. How are you doing tonight?

Karon: Great, how are you? Thanks for having me.

Steve: I am very good. I understand that you just celebrated a landmark birthday. So I was kidding, you told me not to go there and I will not.

Karon: Well all anybody has to do is to check my Facebook page and will immediately learn what that landmark what day it was.

Steve: So Karon I’m just curious, how did you come to specialize in the field of copywriting?

Karon: Oh gosh, forever ago I was in college and started working for the college newspaper at the University of South Carolina. One day there was nobody in the production department. We only had two people to in there to begin with. And it was the back to school issue of the newspaper. So things were crazy and that’s the one that all the local advertisers wanted to be in.

And somebody said, “Look, you are just going to have to write the copy for the edge yourself.” And I said, “Write the what?” And that was the first time I ever wrote copy. Since then I worked at a local radio station filling in during the summer, and wrote copy for radio ads and that grew into TV ads and newspaper and all of the things that build up before the internet. In 1999…

Steve: Did you ever work for a larger firm or was it always independent?

Karon: No, before I started marketing words?

Steve: Yeah.

Karon: Yes, there were a couple of ad agencies that I worked at, and then some a couple of in-house ad agencies as well as some full service ad agencies.

Steve: Okay. And then why— just curious I always ask this question, why did you decide to leave and go out on your own?

Karon: Well I was kind of tired of doing what everybody else wanted me to do and in the way that everybody else wanted me to do it. So that was part of it. And then my husband and I decided that it was time for us to start our family, and I wanted a way to work from home. So we looked into me starting some sort of business at home before we began to start our family, so that we would be ready when this child came and the child never did. But we birthed a phenomenal business and have watched it grow and flourish over the last 16 years. Every time I say that I stop and think, “Men has it been 16 years?”

Steve: That is a very long time especially in internet years.

Karon: It is a very long time, but it just doesn’t seem like it’s been that long at all. Not even a little bit.

Steve: How did you get some of your early clients?

Karon: How did I get some of my early clients? There were online bulletin boards.

Steve: Oh you’re talking of BBSs?

Karon: Yes.

Steve: Oh my goodness! Okay, wow.

Karon: The early, early-dark-cave-man-days internet. And I remember I got some of them through the Target Market magazine Bulletin Board. I used to get some really great clients through the early days when the practice of article marketing was—and submitting to a Brazilian article directory and what not, I used to get a lot of big clients from that. But steadily over the years it’s been a combination of folks seeing me or hearing me on podcasts like yours or webinars or things of that nature, SEO, good rankings, and marketing that I do with advertising or live events or things of that nature.

Steve: How many of your clients would you say are e-commerce focused clients?

Karon: I haven’t done a count in a while, but I will just say it was probably 40-50%.

Steve: So a large percentage are definitely e-commerce focused. That’s great. And in terms of, I know Amazon is becoming more and more popular which is why I wanted to have you on the show, are there—are you finding that you are getting more Amazon clients these days?

Karon: Oh yeah. I mean you can always tell when somebody has some sort of major training going on, if there’s a shift in Amazon. You know maybe you’ve got the dates coming up where the inventory has to come out with additional piece [ph] and what not; you can always see influxes of sales from those particular product listings coming in. You know people that need them tweaked, or people that need them written, we just got over that. Like last month was a launch for another product that happens a couple of times a year and we got blooded fast.

Steve: Okay, and would you say, do you cater more to the little guy or do you have larger clients, or do you like focusing on smaller guys?

Karon: We are kind of in the middle. The newbie sellers that this is their first time out and they are watching every penny that they spend, you know they are trying to do a private label or something to that effect which can be a little bit costly depending on what you are doing. Sometimes it’s a little too high of a price for them. But the ones that are right in the middle, that have established themselves as private labelers, maybe they have two to three four, ten products to their name now, and they are used to doing this, they don’t have the inclination to write the product listing themselves. Maybe they run out of time because they are focused on other things, those are really the ones that we work with the best.

And then we have manufacturers who have their only comp sites and are looking to move those products on to Amazon, and we do a lot of business with those too. Major retailers, big buck stores, national chains, things of that nature, we don’t tend to be a good fit with.

Steve: Okay. And before I get into like some of the details, do you have any cool success stories that you care to share that just kind of demonstrate the true power of copywriting.

Karon: We got a really excellent conversion rate. I guess if I don’t tell you—I don’t have permission to share the details publicly, so I’m not going to give a lot of them. I can tell you what the number is, but I just can’t tell you who the client is.

Steve: That’s perfectly fine.

Karon: About a 14% conversion rate on mermaid tail.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Karon: That was fun. I actually thought they were joking when they sent out that over. I opened up the questionnaire that we have for clients and went, “Okay.” Never done one of those before.

Steve: So you know when someone comes to you, what would you say is the most common mistake that most people make when listing their products on Amazon like kind of as a newbie?

Karon: Not formatting the keyword, the search term fields correctly, and not understanding what the best use of those fields is.

Steve: Okay. And I think there’s probably some people listening who aren’t familiar with the terminology that you are going to be using. So I’m going to ask that you kind of elaborate some of these at first, and then once the terminology has been established then we can go on. So you mentioned the key words, are you referring to the key words that are being used to search on Amazon?

Karon: Yes, when you create a product listing, you are allowed 50 characters and five different fields labeled search term fields. And a lot of people refer to this as key words not to be confused with the section that you will see right beside that, that says “platinum keywords.” If you are not an invited designated platinum seller, it doesn’t matter what you put in the platinum keyword fields, they are not going to work for you.

So you are looking at the ones labeled search terms. And there are five of those fields; you get to put in as many key words as you can fit 50 characters per line, maximum. And then you also have your product title, which is I believe the technical name when you add the product is, product name, but most people refer that as a title. So that also counts as a key word field.

Steve: Okay. And you generally don’t want to duplicate your keywords in these fields, is that right?

Karon: You do not want to duplicate keywords in these fields. And Amazon makes quite clear in several different places that they are working with individual key words that can appear in any order and that it’s not necessary to use commas in there, as a matter of fact they make the statement that “Amazon system ignores punctuation in the key word fields.”

So you just want to put a space between each one. But what most people do is they would go in, they are Google sensitized, so they go into these five fields for the search terms, and they put one key phrase in each of the five fields. So if you are talking about dog treats maybe the first field they would have gourmet dog treats, and then organic dog treats, and beef dog treats, and whatever and whatever. So it’s a huge waste of space.

Steve: You know what Karon— oh sorry, go on.

Karon: I was going to say there’s the duplication of the word dog treats to start with, but they are not filling those spaces with keywords. You have all of that space. I always try to put as many keywords, individual keywords in there, as possibly could fit in order to drive traffic.

Steve: Okay, I was just going to say, I think we are jumping the gun a little bit. I know you—I understand like if I were to come to you for a copy, you probably have some sort of process in place before we even think about the nitty-gritty like the key words, right?

Karon: Keywords come first.

Steve: Yeah, so I felt what I would do is let’s do a hypothetical case study. Let’s say I came to you, and I wanted you to write a copy for some of my handkerchiefs, what are some of the questions that you would ask me, and what is the kind of mindset that I need to take in order to effectively create an effective high converting listing on Amazon?

Karon: The first thing that we always take into consideration is the mindset of the Amazon site visitor, unlike somebody that is going to Google to search for something. Maybe it’s information, maybe it’s entertainment, you know it could be a dozen different things. When a person shows up on Amazon, and does a search, it is with the exclusive purpose of making a purchase, or at some point in that buying process. Nobody goes to Amazon to look up TV listings or find information about whatever. They are here to buy something, eventually or right away.

So we want everything about these handkerchiefs to be appealing to a shopper, not just to a “site visitor,” but to somebody who is in the mood to buy. So it’s a lot like organizing a display in Macy’s or some other physical retail store. You want to make everything as attractive as possible, including your words. We start with the keywords, because those need to be incorporated in the title, and then we also naturally would include those in other areas of the Amazon product listing, just because they are going to pop up anyway. It’s hard to talk about handkerchiefs, without using the word handkerchiefs.

Steve: That is correct.

Karon: We want to find out what makes these handkerchiefs special. If you just go to Amazon and you type in handkerchiefs, you are going to get millions of options. So if we have organic cotton handkerchiefs, or silk handkerchiefs, or personalized and monogram handkerchiefs, so it’s a bundle of different types of handkerchiefs. Or whatever it is that makes these particular handkerchiefs special, and we start to narrow it down. Okay, so if it is not just ordinary handkerchiefs, they are organic silk handkerchiefs imported from Thailand or whatever. How many of those are on Amazon?

Well, if you’ve got more than a couple that are coming up in the search results, you need to start looking at ways to differentiate that product even further. What will make you standout as different as or better than all the other listings for organic silk handkerchiefs on Amazon.

Steve: What are some of your guidelines, when you say there’s too much competition and you want to narrow down more. Like how many identical listings would you expect to see before you make that determination?

Karon: I would say that if the first page of Amazon search results are filled with identical or extremely similar products, you need to start thinking about ways to differentiate yours from everybody else’s.

Steve: Okay.

Karon: Yeah, so we are just looking — I mean it doesn’t take 15 different ways to differentiate your type, it only takes one thing. And a lot of times it can be done in one word in your title, instead of organic silk handkerchiefs, if it’s the set, you can put a set. Because not everyone is going to have that, if you have some special packaging, it comes in a gift box, maybe it’s monogramable or has special trim around the edges. I’m coming up with these off the top of my head, but whatever it is that yours has that others don’t have. Or you can look at ways to just position your product differently.

If it’s absolutely identical to everything else that’s on Amazon, then maybe you position it as a gift item. Or maybe you position it as perfect for christenings or something to that effect. But keep looking until you find something about your product or service that can set you apart. When shoppers get on Amazon, and you are looking at a thing right now, anything silicon is huge. You can go look up silicone cupcake liners, and you will just have pages and pages of the exact same things.

And when that happens, what you put on the page is over looked by a lot of shoppers, because they are defaulting to price. And you don’t want them to default the price, because if you play the price game, it’s always a race to the bottom. One person under bids or under cuts somebody else who is on the listing, and then may come back especially with automatic re-pricers, and before you know it nobody is making any money at all. So you don’t want to get caught up in having all of your shoppers looking at price, because everything else sounds exactly the same as the last 25 listings they’ve looked at.

Steve: So you are looking for keywords that differentiate yourself from the competition. And are you including this in the title tag, or the keyword sections or both?

Karon: Well, it’s not — there’s the product name, is that what you are talking about?

Steve: That’s what I mean yes, sorry.

Karon: Yeah, well, you wouldn’t put them in both, because you don’t want to duplicate. We would either put it in the title, or put it in your search term fields, but you wouldn’t do both. But yes, if it’s a viable keyword, then you would put that in there. If it’s something like, somebody else has gold plaited whatever, and yours is [inaudible 00:19:55] whatever, then you can use that. But even if it’s a matter of positioning it as a gift instead of necessity, gift may not necessarily be a good keyword, but it would be good for attracting folks to click on your listing instead of somebody else’s.

Steve: Okay, so once we have the keywords down, what is then the next step?

Karon: The next step is to finish your listing. And while these keywords are going to naturally appear when you are writing your bullets and your product description section, it is not necessary contrary to popular belief, to put them in there for the sake of Amazon, it’s so funny. I guess maybe a year ago, I was doing summer search in Seller Central about this very thing. And I found in seller support where Amazon list what is automatically included and indexed for search, and what is not indexed for search. And I have in there what used to be just a bullet in a bullet list, that said, ‘Bullet points and product description copy are not indexed for search.’

Steve: Okay.

Karon: Because I’m doing a webinar about this, so I went the other day back to that link that I’d saved to get a new screenshot of that. And they are trying to get that point across to people so much, that they have now moved that bullet out of the list and put it in a yellow highlighted box, so that people can see and it’s so funny because there’s this huge debate about whether that’s true or not. And I just shake my head and wonder why people would think that Amazon would not be truthful about that particular thing.

Steve: It’s funny because I have encountered listings that have gigantic text box for the bullet points. And at least on one of the forms that I frequent, this guy said that increased the traffic for his listings when he started doing that. So I mean no one knows for sure, but apparently if Amazon says it’s not, then it’s probably true I would guess.

Karon: Well, I can’t imagine why they would say something like that; I mean their whole purpose in life is to make lots and lots of money. So if they tell you that bullets and descriptions are not indexed for search when they really are, that means that you are going — if you follow that advice you are going to have less of a chance of ranking on Amazon. So that means that they are going to have less of a chance of you are selling as much as you could possibly sell.

So I don’t know, you are absolutely right, we will never know everything that’s in Amazon search ranking algorithm, because then it could be easily manipulated. And I do know for a fact, that the search ranking algorithm is not static, it is dynamic. Meaning that it doesn’t always operate the same way every time, which was very interesting to me, as it moves in shifts, and mops, and people type in different things and what not. It is actually changing as the results show up every time.

Steve: Okay, so we were just talking about bullet points, what are some of your best practices for these bullet points?

Karon: I like to put the benefit first, most copy writers are taught to do features and benefits. You tell them what it is, and then you tell them why they should like it. But when it comes to bullets on Amazon, I have found that putting the benefit before the feature works better, because it captures attention.

So instead of saying — let’s see, I’m looking at a bottle of water that I have on my table right now as we are talking. So instead of saying that this bottle of water or this bottle is — won’t add anything to the taste of my liquid. It’s made from a particular type of plastic, so that whatever beverage you put in there is going to be absolutely unaffected by the plastic. You won’t get that buckeye [ph] chemical taste.

Then that’s what I would probably start with, is something about not having a buckeye chemical taste. Edward [ph] had a water bottle that made you scow when you drunk from it, it probably had this type of chemical or that type of chemical. No worrying about that with this particular bottle. If you have an exfoliator, those are very popular right now. The ones you’ve probably see them on TV, or maybe your wife paid more attention to it that you didn’t.

Steve: Yeah, I don’t know what you are talking about, but yeah go ahead.

Karon: With your little pedicures and the automatic rollers and you use them on your heels and what not. So instead of saying this exfoliator gets red of dry dead skin, you could start the bullet with the benefit. Show off — you are saying, get your sexy sandals out. Show off your foot flops this summer, go bare foot with confidence, that’s what they are looking to do. And then you can tell them about some of the features of this particular exfoliator.

Steve: Is it even important to mention the features, if you just mentioned the benefits, would that be good enough?

Karon: Depends on what it is, for some things folks are looking for specific features. Maybe they want — for these exfoliators, one of the biggest complaints is that they are not powerful enough. That if you apply even the least amount of pressure to your foot the roller stops. So it’s become a selling point to list the power elements of the motor. How many amps it has, how many watts it has, how many revolutions per second the little roller goes around. So they know how fast it’s spinning and things of that nature, so it depends on what it is. For a mermaid tale, no you wouldn’t have to do that.

Steve: So I’m just curious, so if I would have come to you and I was selling these exfoliators, and I want you to write a product description and bullet points. Do you actually go in and do the research and look at all the reviews on Amazon? Like how do you found out what are the most important benefits that you should feature?

Karon: There’s a lot of different ways, and yes the reviews and the questions if there are questions available for the product listing are very important. But we don’t spend all of our time on Amazon; we go out online through Google or different types of other websites that sell the original [ph]. They have reviews and comments online on lots of different websites, so we will look at that as well. If it’s something that is a brand name product, then we can also look at that particular website to see if we can find any information that’s not being used on Amazon or other ideas for keywords too.

Steve: Okay, what about, in these bullet points do you — let’s say you’re private labeling something. Would you mention your brand in any way in these key points?

Karon: Sure most of the times we do, there’s plenty of room in the bullets most of the time to be able to put the brand in there. And especially if that’s important to the seller, they are going to expand on that brand later; you would want to include that.

Steve: Okay, because I would imagine like let’s say you mentioned these silicone products. Like you said there are so many of them. I guess it would be to your advantage to try to brand something right, in order to stand out. Is that what you would do, or would you do that in the product name? Or would you do that in the bullet points?

Karon: It depends, I mean Amazon says that the brand can go in the product name — I mean it’s a case by case basis. Sometimes I’ll put it in there, other times when we do the listings we choose not to put it in the product name. A lot of it depends on space, especially in kitchen Amazon is really cracking down, and they have soft launched a new set of parameters where you would get a hard stop at 100 characters for the title, which is what they’ve changed the style guide to.

Well, the title has always been 100, the bullets were not 100. We’ve had several clients that are existing long time sellers and newbies as well, that have gone in and found hard stops in the kitchen category for each of the bullets at 100 characters. So it depends, if we are really tight on space and they are bumping, they are getting errors because the title is more than 100 characters when they try to interact, then we may take out stuff like the brand name and things that would not directly impact the sale.

If it’s not a nationally known well recognized brand, then chances are people aren’t going to be searching for that anyway. So that could always go in a keyword field. Or they recognize the brand field anyway as a matter of fact, as already searchable.

Steve: I was thinking more in terms of establishing a brand rather than having a recognizable brand. Okay, so in terms of these bullet points — so okay, so you mentioned benefits, followed by features, what else do you include in this bullet points?

Karon: We like to try to include some life experiences. And this is where being a real advertising geek and studying infomercials can come in handy, because that’s how infomercials makes tons and tons of money. They don’t just sit there and point to this amazing juicer or whatever the product maybe, and show you all the features and pull out all the parts and the attachments and the accessories, and show them off and explain how powerful they are, and easy to clean and what not.

No what are they doing? They are standing there, talking about your daily routine and how you can use this juicer, first thing in the morning when you in a rush, and you are trying to get out the door, it’s a quick breakfast. You can just zip some fruits and veggies through it, stick in your to go cup, run out the door and have a nutritious, delicious, filling breakfast on your way to the office. And when you are at home at night and you get some cravings, you can use the same juicer to whip up some smoothies that are thick and frothy and satisfying. You can use fruits and juices so you get that sweet fix that you’ve been craving all day long without wrecking your diet.

These types of things compacted of course, because of the space limitations are really awesome for drawing people into your bullet points, because they can relate to that when it includes things that would apply to their own lifestyle.

Steve: So do you think it’s more important to do this in the bullet points as opposed to the product description itself?

Karon: I do it in both.

Steve: Okay.

Karon: And the reason being that the bullets are way more read than the product description section is.

Steve: Okay, so let’s see what do we got so far, we got benefits, we got features, we got storytelling, is that accurate or?

Karon: Not necessarily storytelling, more just relating to life experiences, their daily routine. However these products fit into their daily lives.

Steve: Okay, and do you kind of include calls to actions in these bullet points, like what else do you use?

Karon: Not calls to action, we try to stay as close to Amazon’s terms of service as possible. You can put guarantees in there, they have actually changed that in most of the style guides that they used to not be able to put warranties and guarantee information in bullets. But the rest of it should not contain “Marketing materials.” They even go so far as to say, the bullet point section is not a place for paragraphs. So we try to keep it generally in check with what Amazon is doing.

Steve: Okay, is that relatively new? Because I know like a lot of listings I see have a lot of those things in them. And they always have like a call to action on like the last bullet point.

Karon: It’s not new, but you know as well as I do, that Amazon has not proven itself to be a very good enforcer of its own rules. So most of the things that Amazon tells you to do, people have been doing for years and getting away with it, and that’s why when I do things like enforcing character limits in the kitchen category or starting to [roll barrel] [ph] softly in several different accounts people are just horrified. Because now all over sudden they didn’t even know Amazon had these rules before, because nobody told them, and they didn’t bother to check. So now they are being forced to be accountable to rules and regulations that they didn’t even know existed before.

Steve: Okay, so in terms of, when you are writing these bullet points is there a specific order that you go in, or does it kind of not matter?

Karon: It depends on the product as to whether it matters or not. And I don’t know that there are any specific criteria that I could tell you, usually when we go through and evaluate the information that the client sends, whether it’s from a manufacturer or things of that nature, all the nitty-gritty about the products, if there’s a logical order for bullets, for trying to walk the customer through some progression of something, maybe it’s a system, or this product is something that can help them accomplish something over time. We may go in, in that type of a series, but one thing that you can actually test, when it comes to bullets is rearranging them to see if that helps your conversions.

And that something we do regularly for clients even if– if the bullets were not written in any particular order, switch them up. People don’t read everything on the page, they never do. Typically in a paragraph they are going to read the first few words and it’s the same for bullet points. So if they didn’t get past the third bullet, because they got tired of reading and they are scheming down to a different section of the page, they may not have even seen what you had in the last two. So switching them up and doing some tests to watch your conversion right, is a good way to tweak that sum and maybe get a couple of extra sales out of it.

Steve: So what’s your methodology? You just like in the beginning of the week you change it, wait a week, change it again just measure the conversion rate? Okay.

Karon: Well, I mean not necessarily I’ll take that back. We can’t wait a week or whatever, but usually we tell clients to watch the traffic levels, because you want to give it time to have an equal amount for each change that you make. So rather than saying just wait a week, if the first one had been there and got 1,000 page views, then when you put the next one up, wait until it has at least 1,000 page views before making another change.

Steve: Okay, what I was trying to get out was, you are not really split testing these, right? It’s one change, wait ‘X’ number of page views, switch it up, look at the page views, even though there could be some seasonality and what not that you can’t really account for right?

Karon: Yes, and — I mean if this was something that — if it was a product that was seasonal, I would do your testing during your busy time. Otherwise you are going to have a hard time measuring even if you wait, it may take you a very long time to get the same number of visits to that particular page in your off season. So if you had swim goggles and its February, you just probably need to wait until spring before you start doing some testing.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of the product description, do you find that changing the copy around there really makes a big difference to a listing?

Karon: We have found in certain cases that changing that copy up can make up a big difference. And most of the time, this is if it’s not positioned in a way that worked out how we thought it would work out. We did a food scale one time, and thought of positioning it for folks who were on particular diet, low carb-diets or weight watchers or [inaudible] [00:37:19] or whatever, because those are so popular. And that didn’t work out well, and we ended up having to change it.

So when we took out that positioning of that food scale, we had to change the product description, because it was also written to support the title on the bullets, that are dealt with using a food scale when you are on some sort of diet.

Steve: Okay, but in that case it seems like you changed more than just a description, right?

Karon: Yes, because it was the whole concept of the product that didn’t work out how we wanted it to, so we had to change everything. We have done product description changes — have we done product description changes? Just the product description — no…

Steve: Well, let me ask the question in a different way. How much time do you focus on the product description, and how long are your product descriptions typically?

Karon: Product descriptions it depends on what we are writing for, if it’s a private level description, we will push the 2,000 character limit.

Steve: Okay.

Karon: If it’s something that is more of an everyday type of thing, if we are writing for somebody who has personalized toothbrushes or whatever, I’m pulling that off the top of my head. Those don’t take a lot of explaining. We look at — what I call my face formulae, familiarity, audience, cost, and education. And that goes into play with just about every product that we write for. If their audience is not very familiar with this product, or maybe they’ve seen it, but they don’t know all the details about it yet.

If the audience is one that simply demands a lot of information instead of generally not needing as many details. If the cost is higher, if it requires some education, if it’s something brand new, if it’s something complicated. All of those things go into play when we decide how much copy is needed to write. We’ve done jewellery stores that had excellent results, and their product descriptions were probably — it was about a paragraph, so maybe 100 words. And when you get up to 2000 characters that’s more of like 350 or 375 words.

Steve: Okay so just to summarize what you are saying it seems like you have this formula called “FACE.” F stands for Familiarity, A-stands for—what does A stand for?

Karon: Audience.

Steve: Audience. C stands for Cost and E stands for Education. So it requires—if it’s more expensive it requires more education. If the customer is not familiar then you need to turn to write a longer product prescription. Is that kind of accurate? Okay. And I see listings with graphics in the product description, but I’ve never been able to put those in myself. How do you get graphics in there?

Karon: There are only two classifications of sellers that are allowed to use graphics. Those who are registered vendors with Amazon, which means that Amazon is purchasing your products wholesale from you. Those people can also sell through their own seller account, but they don’t go through seller central, they go through vendors central.

And registered vendors are allowed a lot of flexibility including having images and or videos in the product description section. The other category of seller is called an A plus seller and that is highly exclusive invitation only. And those folks get way more flexibility than vendors get, and they can have images and videos and all sorts of other things that’s typically only for major national brands.

Steve: And what about platinum status? You mentioned that earlier on in the interview.

Karon: Platinum status I have actually not found out a lot about. And what I need to do, we don’t typically we don’t get into all the account types and whatever, we just—so how to write the product description for those particular things. I don’t know that platinum sellers get any flexibility in title link, their bullet link, their bullets included in the product description. But they do get the extra keyword fields.

Steve: So anything special that you do to actually get the Amazon listing to rank in Google search?

Karon: No. Not so much, I mean generally what we do already we are including key phrases in the title where they just happen naturally in the bullets and in the product description. But Google is looking actually at the html code behind the page. So if you look at the Amazon product listing page and you scroll from the top all the way down to the bottom, Google is looking at the entire page, not just the title or the bullets, and the product description.

So everything else that’s text on that page whether you can see it or you can’t, Google takes into account. So in the grand scheme of an enormously long and complicated Amazon product detail page, the copy that you’ve written really doesn’t take up that much space. The keywords unlike a regular web page, the keywords that you put into your search term fields are not visible in the code, so Google doesn’t see them. Those are only for Amazon internal use.

The product name is going to show up in the code as the title tag for Google and also as the meta description tag. So Google typically if you do a search for a product that you know is on Amazon and you see that listing show up on Google, what they typically you are going to do is pull text from some other portion of the page so that the title tag and the description tag don’t match. That could be anything. Maybe it’s something you’ve written. Maybe it’s something out of a review.

Steve: Okay. Here’s kind of a random question I was just thinking about, a lot of people who sell on Amazon also have their own shops. So is good product copy—would you say it’s more important on your own independent site or on Amazon? Meaning if you were to focus on product describing grade copy, is it more important to do that on your own site?

Karon: Well it depends on what you mean by important.

Steve: What I mean by that is that you don’t want to include the same copy on your Amazon description as on your site because that will be like duplicate content, right?

Karon: It could be. Amazon is such an enormous site. If you are searching for a physical product chances are you are going to have more than one Amazon page show up in the product listing, because it’s just Amazon and everybody shops there practically. If I would say that, copy on an individual e-com site would probably have more impact on Google, because there would not be as much on those product pages typically as there is on an Amazon page. There’s a lot of code for Google’s, but to surf through and digest on an Amazon product page.

If you go to an e-com store, and you are clicking through you know from a category to a sub category to a product page, you may have depending on the page, 50 words in the product description you know, 100 words sometimes you got tabs at the bottom with more information and what not. But because there’s not the suggested products and the Q&A and the product reviews and the “people also bought” you know all of that is complicating an Amazon page. So I think for SEO purposes, it would be more impactful on Google for that property to be on an e-com page than on an Amazon page.

Steve: So just curious, are all the principles that we’ve kind of talked about, are they applicable to copy on your own personal e-commerce site as well?

Karon: Most of them yes.

Steve: And so would you actually recommend using bullet points on your personal e-commerce site, kind of like the way— okay.

Karon: Yes. Bullets are awesome in an e-com environment.

Steve: Okay. And this is kind of using the same principles for the bullet points as on Amazon for your e-commerce to improve conversions?

Karon: Yes you can. I always—one of my favorite saying is, “You should taste that.” But yeah, I mean you could certainly start up that way and test it and see what happens. I don’t think that most traditional e-com stores would have bullets that are as long as what we see on Amazon these days.

Steve: Sure. Okay. And this is just kind of like another random question. How does it differ when you are trying to optimize something for Google versus Amazon? Like what are some of the main differences?

Karon: Amazon is its own universe. There are no outside influences that we know about on Amazon internal search engine. They pull from fields that they designate, that are located on their site. You can’t build link popularity to your Amazon page and have it show up higher in Amazon’s internal search engine because outside forces don’t have any bearing on it. Amazon is strictly individual keyword based. And as far as keywords go, I mean there are other elements that cause you to rank higher; your sales ranking, your seller feedback and blah, blah, blah, but as far as keywords go.

And in Google there are many, many outside influences beyond your website that can impact where you rank on Google search engine; social media, blogging has a bearing, back links have a bearing, tons of different elements go into this. The navigation of your site which would be on page element, that doesn’t have to do with key words or copy. So Google has a much broader algorithm than Amazon does.

Steve: It seems like Amazon algorithm still is pretty basic at this point, right?

Karon: It’s getting more simple every time they make changes. It used to be very complicated to write SEO copy way back when– and the more sophisticated Google algorithms gets, the easier it becomes to write great search engine copy.

Steve: Okay. Hey Karon we’ve been chatting for quite a while. Everything we talked about today, I understand you have a book that kind of covers some of the basics of Amazon and how to write great copy, what are some of the books that you’ve written that you would recommend to the audience if they are interested in this for specifically for e-commerce actually.

Karon: Specifically for e-commerce, I have one called e-commerce Copywriting, that goes through from creating a keyword based navigation all the way down to ideas for generating product copy and things of that nature that’s been selling for years now, and it is updated regularly so that it is current.

And there’s also for those that are specifically interested in creating Amazon product listings, there’s Amazon Advantage which is my product strategy guide that walks you through everything that we’ve talked about here, and a whole lot more including the entire system that we use for keyword research for Amazon and formatting those fields, so that you get the most impact that can drive the most amount of traffic through the keywords.

Steve: Okay. And if anyone is looking for your services or they want to contact you where can they find you?

Karon: www.marketingwords.com.

Steve: Okay and do you have a contact form there where people can reach you?

Karon: Yeah sure I do.

Steve: Awesome. Okay. Well Karon thanks a lot for coming on the show. It was really great to see how the mind of a copywriter works with respect to Amazon.

Karon: Thank you Steve. It’s always a lot of fun to get together with you. And I understand you have a landmark birthday coming up, so happy birthday early.

Steve: I do. Thank you. I will not reveal my age however.

Karon: Me either.

Steve: All right Karon take care. Thanks a lot for coming on the show.

Karon: Thanks a lot, see you later.

Steve: All right see you.

I hope you enjoyed that episode. Selling on Amazon is super hot right now and there are many little tweaks that you can make to increase your sales dramatically, and copywriting definitely makes a huge difference.

For more information about this episode, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/episode74, and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes, and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks, so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice.

It’s also the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest gift that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person, or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information, go to; www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

And once again, I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I personally recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store, where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom-line everything from design to sourcing, to payment processing is all built in and you simply have to populate it with your own products, and you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you will instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcomers.com/mywifequitherjob. Thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information, visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!